Project Manual - Pavilion Construction

G.A.H. P. Plaza Feliz 

Division Section Title Pages 

SPECIFICATIONS GROUP 

DIVISION 00 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

000001 PROJECT DIRECTORY 1 

000010 PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 5 

000320 GEOTECHNICAL DATA 36 

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

011000 SUMMARY 3 

011111 BASIS OF DESIGN PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS 5 

012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 4 

012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 3 

012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5 

013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 9 

013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 7 

013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 4 

013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 11 

014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 8 

014200 REFERENCES 18 

015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 6 

016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 8 

017300 EXECUTION 11 

017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 6 

017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 5 

017740 WARRANTIES 5 

017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 8 

017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENSTS 6 

017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 5 

018113 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 8 

1



DIVISION 02 – SITE CONSTRUCTION 

024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 6 

028100 UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 13 

029300 LANDSCAPING 10 

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE 

033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 21 

035413 GYPSUM CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT 5 

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY 

042000 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 11 

DIVISION 05 – METALS 

055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 15 

055100 METAL STAIRS 9 

055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 10 

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 

061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 13 

061753 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 7 

062000 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 5 

064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 9 

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PREVENTION 

071416 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 6 

072100 BUILDING INSULATION 6 

074213 METAL WALL PANELS 9 

075423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 14 

076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING 12 

076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 10 

078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 7 

079200 JOINT SEALANTS 10 

2



DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 

081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 5 

083613 SECTIONAL DOORS 5 

084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 11 

085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 9 

085313 VINYL WINDOWS 7 

086200 UNIT SKYLIGHTS 7 

087100 DOOR HARDWARE 8 

088000 GLAZING 14 

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 

092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 9 

092900 GYPSUM BOARD 9 

093000 TILING 12 

095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 9 

096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 5 

096516 LINOLEUM FLOORING 7 

099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 1 

099133 EXTERIOR PAINTING 10 

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALITIES 

101100 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 9 

101400 SIGNAGE 9 

102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 7 

102800 TOILET,BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 5 

104116 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 4 

104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 6 

3



DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 

113100 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 5 

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 

122113 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 5 

129300 SITE FURNISHINGS 8 

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL 

15010 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 25 

15043 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 17 

15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 10 

15080 PIPING SPECIALTIES 3 

15100 VALVES 4 

15160 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION 6 

15180 PIPING INSULATION 10 

15190 DUCTWORK INSULATION 9 

15402 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS 2 

15403 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 2 

15404 SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEMS 2 

15450 PLUMBING FIXTURES 1 

15501 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 26 

15651 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 6 

15800 AIR DISTRIBUTION 10 

15900 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 4 

15902 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND INTERLOCKS 3 

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL 

16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 6 

16110 RACEWAYS 5 

06120 WIRES AND CABLES 5 

4



06130 OUTLET BOXES 3 

16133 CABINETS 2 

16140 WIRING DEVICES 3 

16150 MOTORS 1 

16155 MOTOR STARTERS 2 

16160 PANELBOARDS 2 

16170 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 1 

16181 FUSES 2 

16190 RELAYS AND CONTACTORS 1 

16450 GROUNDING 4 

16470 DISTRIBUTION CIRCUITS 2 

16485 ELEVATOR WIRING 1 

16501 LAMPS 1 

16502 BALLASTS AND ACCESSORIES 2 

16511 FLUORESCENT LUMINARIES 2 

16612 GENERATOR SYSTEM 3 

166722 SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16 

Site and Infrastructure Subgroup 

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 

321816 PLAY FIELD EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES 9 

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 

5

GAHP Trumbull – Plaza Feliz 

San Pablo Street SE 

Albuquerque, New Mexico 

Project Name: GAHP Trumbull – Plaza Feliz 

Project Role Company & Address Contact 

Person(s) 

Architect IDeA 

Thomas 

906 ½ Park Ave. Tomlinson 

SW 

Alb., NM 87102 

Civil 

Engineering 

Owners/Client 

Management 

Partner 

Surveyor 

Mechanical 

Engineering 

Applied 

Engineering 

1605 Blair Dr. NE 

Alb., NM 87112 

G.H.A.P. 

320 Gold Ave. SW 

Alb., NM 87102 

Monarch Property 

Management 

Surv-Tek Inc. 

5643 Paradise NW 

Alb. , NM 87112 

The Response 

Group 

11930 Menaul NE, 

Ste. 214 

Alb., NM 87112 

SECTION 00001 – PROJECT DIRECTORY 

Telephone Fax E-Mail 

505-243-3499 505-243-3583 thomas@integrateddesignarch.com 

Gilbert Aldaz 505- 237-1456 505-237-8164 galdaz47@yahoo.com 

Louis Kolker 505-244-1614 505-244-0137 abqgahp@msn.com 

Andrew Silva 505-260-4800 505-265-2995 asilva@monarch.com 

Russ Hugg 505-897-3366 

x102 

505-897-3377 hug@swcp.com 

Russ Ablin 505-323-7629 505-323-7679 russablin@trg-inc.net 

Electrical 

Engineering 

The Response 

Group 

11930 Menaul NE, 

Ste. 214 

Alb., NM 87112 

Richard Perea 505-323-7629 505-323-7629 richardperea@ trg-inc.net 

Landscape 

Architect 

LEED 

Provider 

LEED 

Architect 

Structural 

Engineer 

Sites Southwest 

121 Tijeras NE, Ste 

3100 

Alb., NM 87102 

Environmental 

Dynamics, Inc. 

142 Truman Street 

NE, Ste. A-1 

IDeA 

906 ½ Park Ave. 

SW 

Alb., NM 87102 

MacCornack 

Engineering 

2001 Carlisle NE, 

Ste. C 

Alb., NM 87110 

Jesse Scott 505-822-8200 505-798-0103 

505-350-6383 

Cell 

jscott@ sites-sw.com 

Stace McGee 505-242-2851 505-242-2852 stace@edi-arch.com 

Isaac Benton 505-243-3499 505-243-9583 isaac@integrateddesignarch.com 

Don 

MacCornack 

505-881-0570 505-881-4773 maccornackfam@earthlink.net

G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz 

San Pablo Street SE 

Albuquerque, NM 87110 

SECTION 00320 – GEOTECHNICAL DATA 

PART 1 – GENERAL 

1.1 INVESTIGATION 

A. A geotechnical investigation was conducted at the site the results of which are to be found in 

the report entitled, numbered, dated, and issued by the following: 

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION 

G.A.H.P PLAZA FELIZ 

Project No.: 10-1-096 

July 19, 2010 

By 

Vinyard & Associates 

Albuquerque, New Mexico 

B. A copy of the report is appended hereto for information only. 

1.2 INTERPRETATION 

A. These data are for information only and not intended as representations or warranties of 

continuity of conditions at the site. 

B. The Owner and Architect dot not warrant these data and interpretations of the data for 

accuracy, true location, and extent. 

C. Bidders and the Contractor are required to interpret these data, and make additional 

geotechnical investigations as they determine necessary, for the proper execution of the work. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) 

PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) 

END OF SECTION

G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz 

` 

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY 

PART 1 - GENERAL 

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes the following: 

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 

2. Type of the Contract. 

3. Work phases. 

4. Work under other contracts. 

5. Products ordered in advance. 

6. Owner-furnished products. 

7. Use of premises. 

8. Owner's occupancy requirements. 

9. Work restrictions. 

10. Specification formats and conventions. 

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 

A. Project Identification: G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz 

1. Project Location: San Pablo St. SE, Albuquerque, NM 

B. Owner: Greater Albuquerque Housing Partnership, 320 Gold SW Suite 918, Albuquerque, NM 

87102 

1. Owner's Representative: Louis Kolker 

C. Architect: Integrated Design & Architecture, 906 ½ Park Ave SW, Albuquerque, NM 87102 

D. The Work consists of the following: 

1. The Work consists of a LEED for Homes Gold project consisting of a 66-dwelling unit 

redevelopment in Albuquerque’s International Zone/Trumbull community, including an 

on-site day care center and office/maintenance/community building. 

1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT 

A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 

SUMMARY 011000 - 1


SECTION 011111 BASIS OF DESIGN PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS 

Div. 1 General Requirements 

Note: This Section is supplementary to other sections or the Specifications. In the case of any 

discrepancy between this section and the Specifications, the Specifications shall govern. 

Contractor shall provide submittals for each of the following products for Architect review and 

approval in accordance with the General Requirements. Substitutions in accordance with the 

General Requirements shall be approved by the Architect prior to finalizing contract with Owner. 

The following are products and systems are supplemental to the Technical Specifications. All 

products and systems shall be installed strictly per the manufacturers’ recommendations. 

Div. 2 Sitework 

Earthwork: As indicated per Structural drawings. Follow recommendations of the Geotechnical 

report. Comply with LEED-H prerequisite SS-1.1. Implement erosion and sedimentation control 

(ESC) plan. Stockpile and protect topsoil, control runoff, protect storm sever inlets per LEED-H 

SS-1.1. 

Asphalt paving, subgrade and base course: per Geotechnical Report recommendations. Light 

colored aggregate asphalt mix. City standard specs for public rights-of-way. 

Concrete paving, walks, curb and gutter: City of Albuquerque standard specifications. 

Playground accessories: shredded recycled rubber chips for protective surfacing at protected 

“fall areas”. Galvanized steel schedule 40 pipe set in concrete, supporting Cooleroo “Shade 

Sail” or equal fabic shade awnings. 

Basketball court surface: 2” asphalt with light colored aggregate. 

Basketball goal: Tyrant Extreme Basketball System – www.basketball-goals.com 

1. Vertical Pole – Vertical post shall be constructed of 6 5/8” O.D. Schedule 40 galvanized 

tubing. Design shall allow for a 48” bury into the ground and a 72” setback from post to 

backboard. 

2. Backboard – Backboard shall be 36”x60” rectangular steel. Skin shall be 10 guage steel 

pan. 

3. Rim – Standard rim shall be fabricated from 3/16” backplates and sideplates fully 

welded. Rim shall be double 5/8” diameter, high strength steel welded together at a 

minimum of six places. Nets shall be attached by means of a continuous netlocking 

system. 

Basketball chain link fencing: 8’ height chain link mesh heavy-duty color-coated steel, 

otherwise all heavy duty galvanized steel for other components and trim. 

BASIS OF DESIGN PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS SECTION 011111 - 1


Automatic gate operators: hinged (swinging) and sliding type per Drawings. 

Refuse enclosure gates: painted steel with 18 gage steel “B” deck infill panels, per drawings. 6” 

diameter heavy-duty solid steel caster wheels to support leading rail and stile. Coordinate with 

Div.5 steel fabrications. 

Green screen landscape trellis: Green Screen system. 

Div. 3 Concrete 

Insulating Concrete Forms (ICF): Reward Wall 11” thickness per drawings. 

Precast concrete wall cap at residential porches: light gray cement color, configuration per 

drawings. 

Div. 5 Metals 

Steel prefinished combination structural deck and roof: Epic deck as indicated on drawings. 

Steel guardrails and miscellaneous perforated metal fabrications: McNichols Co., 

www.mcnichols.com, 3/32” diameter round hole pattern with 3/16” staggered row centers, 23% 

open area, pre-galvanized G90 steel infill panels. Edged with U-shaped channels made from 

galvanized steel not less than 0.043 inch thickness. Orient pattern of perforated metal parallel to 

top rail. Galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners and other components. Support on a framework 

of 2” square galvanized steel rails and posts secured to solid wood framing per drawings. 

Galvanized Schedule 40 steel pipe rails above perforated assembly, as indicated on drawings. 

Bike rack: radius bent 2” galvanized schedule 40 pipe. 

Bollards: galvanized steel pipe, diameter shown with concrete fill. 

Div. 6 Wood and Plastics 

Residential cabinets: Leedo “Concord Shaker” maple. www.leedo.com/cabinets 

Interior running trim: painted Medex water-resistant MDF as shown. Prime paint all four 

surfaces of trim before installation 

Ceiling tounge-and-groove: 1x6 select spruce or fir 

Floor deck at top landing of residential stairways and at residential porches only: marine grade 

11/16” CDX plywood 

Div. 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection 



Metal roof panels (sheet metal roofing): galvalume finish, 5-V pattern, 26 gage factory formed 

lap-seam exposed-fastener type panels. American Building Components (ABC) ,Lubbock TX, 

800-481-3035. Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more 

stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. Fasteners shall be stainless steel with 

EPDM metal-backed washers. Underlayment below metal roofing: Rainproof 60 Plus and Ice & 

Water Guard as manufactured by ProtectoWrap Company, 1955 South Cherokee Street, Denver, 

Colorado 80223, 303-77-3001. 2-year roofer’s warranty for installation and weathertightness of 

the entire system. 5 year roof panel manufacturer’s finish warranty. 

Threshold sealer, sill plate sealer, window sealer (4 sides): Protecto wrap. Prime all substrate 

surfaces as required by manufacuturer. 

Cement fiberboard soffits and facia: 5/16” thick smooth Hardipanel 

Sealants: 

1. At metal roof and associated accessories, and at concealed locations: clear silicone, low- 

VOC. 

2. Where painting is required and adjoining stucco: Match color of paint with colored 

silicone or polyurethane sealant or use paintable sealant, low-VOC, typical. 

3. Seal all exterior joints and all other junctions as necessary to obtain complete air and 

watertight construction. Comply with requirements of Energy Star and City of 

Albuquerque thermal bypass inspection. Seal around windows and doors, seal all 

plumbing and electrical conduit openings, caulk around windows and under headers and 

sills, seal openings into attics or crawlspaces with taped polyethylene covered with 

insulation, and other measures. 

4. Seal all plumbing fixtures with white bath silicone, low-VOC. 

Div. 8 Openings 

Code and LEED Notes for all openings: 

Opaque Assemblies: All opaque doors shall have a U-Factor of 0.50. 

All opaque building assemblies shall comply with Albuquerque Energy Code Table 502.2(1) & 

Table 502.2(2) 

Fenestration (door and window glass) Assemblies: 

All Day Care and Building Q aluminum storefront shall have a max. U-Factor of 0.42. 

All Day Care and Building Q entrance doors shall have a max. U-Factor of 0.75. 

All other Day Care/Bldg. Q metal openings shall have a max. U-Factor of 0.42. 

All Day Care/Bldg. Q window and door glass types shall have a max SHGC of 0.38. 

Day Care skylights shall have max. U of 0.69, maximum SHGC of 0.39, min. VLT 0.59. 

All vinyl windows shall have max. U of 0.30. 

All residential window and door glass assembly types shall have a SHGC of 0.26 or less. 

All doors, windows and storefront shall comply with Albuquerque Energy Code Table 502.3 



Doors: 

Fiberglass pre-hung residential entry doors: Therma-tru. polyurethane foam core, with metal or 

paint-grade wood frame, integral weatherstripping and low rise accessible threshold. Eye 

viewers on all doors; (2) viewers at fully accessible unit entry doors only. 

Residential interior doors: Colonist or equal, primed hardboard solid (bedroom and bath) and 

hollow core (closet) panel doors in pre-hung paint-grade frame. Bipass and bifold door track 

system for closets: Hafele “Hawa Dorado” in front hardware with vertical adjustment and 

bottom guides. 

Solid wood interior panel doors for Building Q: stain grade pine or fir, panel configuration per 

drawings. Simpson Door Company Interior 66. Coordinate with interior aluminum frame system 

and hardware. 

French-type interior glazed wood doors for Building Q: stain grade fir with true divided lights 

and 3/16” tempered clear glass. Simpson Door Company French 1308. Coordinate with interior 

aluminum frame system and hardware. 

Hollow metal doors and frames: 16 gage HM frame for openings up to 4’ wide, 14 gage for 

wider openings. 16 gage face on insulated exterior doors. Shop prime ready for field painting. 

Hardware: 

Residential locksets and latches: Schlage S-Series 6-pin, “Jupiter 626” design, master key 

system. 

Day Care and Building Q locksets: Schlage AL-Series, “Jupiter 626” design, master key system. 

Submit a complete hardware schedule for architect review and approval, including approved 

products based on Section 087100 of the Technical Specifications and this document. 

Other: 

Power window operators: Century 2000 by Truth Hardware 1-800-866-7884 

Roof access hatch and ladder: Bilco hatch as indicated. Shop-fabricated steel ladders, see 

details, or OSHA-compliant premanufactured aluminum ladder (contractor option). Comply 

with Div. 5 specifications for fabricated steel. 

Div. 9 Finishes 

Rubber stair treads and risers (for 3-bedroom residences): Musson, with recessed diamond 

pattern tread, color selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard color selections, riser 

color to contrast with tread color. At landing only: rubber resilient tile to match tread color. All 

low-VOC adhesives. 



Div. 10 Specialties 

Dryer vent box: recessed aluminum or sheet metal to receive flexible dryer vent hose while 

allowing placement of dryer tight to back wall, place as required for specified appliances. 

Dryerbox.com Model 425, for 2x6 wall. 

Mail Boxes: front-loading configuration as shown on drawings. Recessed in stucco wall; 

coordinate installation with wall construction. US Postal Service approved cluster box units 

including letter drop and package depositories; verify with Postmaster prior to submittal to 

Architect. Conduct preinstallation conference at project site. American Postal Mfrg. Co., 

Bommer Industries or equal. 5 year warranty. 

Bird control strips for open beams at Building Q: Bird X clear plastic base with metal spikes. 

Adhere or attach to substrate per manufacturer’s recommendations. 

Gas burning fireplace: Spark Modern Fires, “Fire Ribbon”model 87, no vertical venting 

required, for natural gas fuel, with wall switch, Simpson Duravent or equal wall vent, 110volt 

electric fan. www.sparkfires.com. 

Solar control device for skylights at residential exterior stairways: “Sunbender” reflector/shade 

by Zomeworks Corp., Albuquerque. Size SB-2x4. www.zomework.com. 

Washing machine protective pan: acrylic fiberglass type with closed pan, except plumbed waste 

at 2 nd floor apartments. Coordinate with plumbing. 

Accessible sink and lavatory pipe protection: Trubro “Lavshield” one-piece shell. 

Div. 11 Equipment 

Kitchen Range hood: Broan or equal, Energy Star, white, 30 inch wide, ducted to exterior 

dampered opening (sidedraft or updraft adaptable). Coordinate with electrical and HVAC. 

END OF SECTION 011111 



SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. 

B. Related Sections: 

1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable 

product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 

2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations for 

substitutions. 

1.3 DEFINITIONS 

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from 

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to 

changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or 

unavailability of required warranty terms. 

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not 

required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to 

Contractor or Owner. 

1.4 SUBMITTALS 

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three hard copies or one electronic copy of each request for 

consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include 

Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 

1. Substitution Request Form: Use Form 012501 & 012502. 

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, 

as applicable: 

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be 

provided, if applicable. 

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1


SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing 

Contract modifications. 

B. Related Sections include the following: 

1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling 

requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not 

involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, 

"Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS 

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed 

changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If 

necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 

1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them 

instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 

2. Within 5 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost 

adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. 

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with 

total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data 

to substantiate quantities. 

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade 

discounts. 

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 

d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of 

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and 

finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting 

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1


an extension of the Contract Time. Indicate the effect the change will have on the 

Contract Time. 

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the 

Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the 

Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the 

proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total 

amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to 

substantiate quantities. 

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade 

discounts. 

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 

5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the 

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, 

and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the 


6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the 

proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system 

specified. 

7. Number proposals sequentially. 

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures 

of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE 

A. Work Change Directive: Architect may issue a Work Change Directive on 

AIA Document G714. Work Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in 

the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 

1. Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also 

designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the 


B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the 

Work Change Directive. 

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to 

substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. 

2. Coordinate with the on site manager the goings and comings of any trade individual who 

is working on a T & M basis. Manager to log individuals in and out during the work day 

for any T & M work. 



PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) 

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) 




SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and 

process Applications for Payment. 


1. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures 

for handling changes to the Contract. 

2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative 

requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule 

and Submittals Schedule. 


A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract 

Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's 

Applications for Payment. 

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of 

Contractor's Construction Schedule. 

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms 

and schedules, including the following: 

a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. 

b. Submittals Schedule. 

c. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 

seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 

3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased 

payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment. 

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1


B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items 

for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: 

a. Project name and location. 

b. Name of Architect. 

c. Architect's project number. 

d. Contractor's name and address. 

e. Date of submittal. 

2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets. 

3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the 

following for each item listed: 

a. Related Specification Section or Division. 

b. Description of the Work. 

c. Name of subcontractor. 

d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. 

e. Name of supplier. 

f. Change Orders. 

g. Dollar value. 

1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted 

to total 100 percent. 

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued 

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports, based on the Project 

Manual table of contents. Provide separate line items for principal subcontract 

amounts. Include separate line items under plumbing, mechanical, electrical, and 

landscaping subcontracts for operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, 

Project Record Documents, and demonstration and training in the amount of 5 percent of 

the Contract Sum. 

5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 

6. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next 

Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result 

in a change in the Contract Sum. 

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as 

certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial 

Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. 

B. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the 25th of 

the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the 

last day of the month. 



C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation 

Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. 

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person 

authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete 

applications without action. 

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction 

Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last 

day of construction period covered by application. 

E. Transmittal: Submit 4 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to 

Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar 

attachments if required. 

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate 

information about application. 

F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's 

lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the 

Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after 

deduction for retainage, on each item. 

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit 

waivers. 

4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to 

Owner. 

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or 

coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 

1. List of subcontractors. 

2. Schedule of Values. 

3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 

4. Products list. 

5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 

6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 

7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 

8. Copies of building permits. 

9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for 

performance of the Work. 

10. Initial progress report. 

11. Report of preconstruction conference. 

12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 

13. Performance and payment bonds. 

14. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. 

15. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. 

16. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 



H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial 

Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of 

the Work claimed as substantially complete. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial 

Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the 

Work. 

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a 

statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued 

previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. 

3. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application 

include the following: 

a. Occupancy permits. 

b. Warranties and maintenance agreements. 

c. Test/adjust/balance records. 

d. Maintenance instructions. 

e. Meter readings. 

f. Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy. 

g. Final cleaning. 

h. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety. 

I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting 

documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the 

following: 

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof 

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 

3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 

4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 

5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 

6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 

7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 

8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of 

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed 

responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 

9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. 

10. Completion of Project closeout requirements. 

11. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 

13. Transmittal of Project construction records to the Owner. 

14. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 

15. Change of door locks to Owner's access. 








SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on 

Project including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Coordination Drawings. 

2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 

3. Project meetings. 

4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs). 


1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and 

field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 

2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 


A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract 

Documents. 

1.4 COORDINATION 

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the 

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate 

construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper 

installation, connection, and operation. 

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations with those of other entities to ensure efficient 

and orderly installation of each part of the Work. 

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where 

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before 

or after its own installation. 

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum accessibility for 

required maintenance, service, and repair. 

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1


4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to 

ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and 

repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. 

C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures 

required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees 

at meetings. 

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their 

Work is required. 

D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative 

procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts 

and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not 

limited to, the following: 

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 

2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 

4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 

5. Progress meetings. 

6. Preinstallation conferences. 

7. Project closeout activities. 

8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 

9. Project closeout activities. 

E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with 

consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 


A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability 

necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if 

coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base 

Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed 

data. Include the following information, as applicable: 

a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, 

structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. 

b. Indicate required installation sequences. 

c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of 

dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum 

clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of 

such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be 

considered changes to the Contract. 

2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. 



3. Number of Copies: Submit four opaque hard copies or one electronic copy of each 

submittal. 

4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those 

Sections. 

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of being contracted, submit a list of key personnel 

assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify 

individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including 

home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of 

individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 

1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each 

temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 

1.6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL 

A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory 

personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS 

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is 

required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled 

meeting dates and times. 

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 

3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the 

meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 5 days 

of the meeting. Distribution may be made electronically. 

B. Post bid Conference: Schedule a Post Bid conference before being contracted, at a time 

convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 2 days after Bid Opening. Conduct the 

meeting to review personnel assignments and proposed materials substitutions. 

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; 

Contractor and its superintendent, and other concerned parties shall attend the 

conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and 

authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the 

following: 

a. Designation of key personnel and their duties 

b. Proposed Substitutions 

c. Contract Discussion 

3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute meeting minutes. 



C. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting 

construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after 

execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. 

Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities schedule, and procedures. 

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; 

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned 

parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar 

with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the 

following: 

a. Tentative construction schedule. 

b. Phasing. 

c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. 

d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. 

e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. 

f. Procedures for RFIs. 

g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. 

h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 

i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. 

j. Submittal procedures. 

k. LEED / Green Communities / New Mexico Energy Savers Program requirements. 

l. Preparation of Record Documents. 

m. Use of the premises and existing building. 

n. Work restrictions. 

o. Owner's occupancy requirements. 

p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. 

q. Construction waste management and recycling. 

r. Parking availability. 

s. Office, work, and storage areas. 

t. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 

u. First aid. 

v. Security. 

w. Progress cleaning. 

x. Working hours. 

3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute meeting minutes. 

D. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each 

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or 

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and 

installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect 

of scheduled meeting dates and include in project schedule. 

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the 

particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: 



a. The Contract Documents. 

b. Options. 

c. Related RFIs. 

d. Related Change Orders. 

e. Purchases. 

f. Deliveries. 

g. Submittals. 

h. Review of mockups and/or aesthetic issues. 

i. Possible conflicts. 

j. Compatibility with other activities and products. 

k. Time schedules. 

l. Weather limitations. 

m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. 

n. Warranty requirements. 

o. Compatibility of materials. 

p. Acceptability of substrates. 

q. Temporary facilities and controls. 

r. Space and access limitations. 

s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 

t. Testing and inspecting requirements. 

u. Installation procedures. 

v. Coordination with other work. 

w. Required performance results. 

x. Protection of adjacent work. 

y. Protection of construction and personnel. 

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including 

required corrective measures and actions. 

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who 

should have been present. 

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. 

Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the 

Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. 

6. Required Conferences 

a. Foundation 

b. Framing 

c. Drywall screw 

d. Drywall texture 

e. Stucco 

f. Roofing 

E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of 

meetings with preparation of payment requests. 

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each subcontractor, 

supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, 

coordination, or performance of future activities. All participants at the conference shall 

be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review 

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as 

appropriate to status of Project. 



a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. 

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, 

in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction 

behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to 

do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and 

subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 

1) Review schedule for next period. 

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 

1) Interface requirements. 

2) Sequence of operations. 

3) Status of submittals. 

4) Deliveries. 

5) Off-site fabrication. 

6) Access. 

7) Site utilization. 

8) Temporary facilities and controls. 

9) Work hours. 

10) Hazards and risks. 

11) Progress cleaning. 

12) Quality and work standards. 

13) Status of correction of deficient items. 

14) Field observations. 

15) RFIs. 

16) Status of proposal requests. 

17) Pending changes. 

18) Status of Change Orders. 

19) Pending claims and disputes. 

20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 

3. Minutes: Contractor will record and distribute to Architect the meeting minutes. 

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who 

should have been present. 

5. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress 

meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. 

1.8 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) 

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, 

and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the 

form specified. 

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor 

will be returned with no response. 

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's 

work or work of subcontractors. 



B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and 

the following: 

1. Project name. 

2. Date. 

3. Name of Contractor. 

4. Name of Architect. 

5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 

6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 

7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 

8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 

9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time 

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 

10. Contractor's signature. 

11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop 

Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. 

C. Hard-Copy RFIs: . 

a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, 

thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, 

assemblies, and attachments. 

1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number. 

D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as 

indicated above. 

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. 

E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. 

Allow seven (7) working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 

p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: 

a. Requests for approval of submittals. 

b. Requests for approval of substitutions. 

c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract 

Documents. 

d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. 

e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. 

f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case 

Architect's time for response will start again. 

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the 

Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to 

Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." 



a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or 

the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI 

response. 

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response 

to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor 

disagrees with response. 

G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. 

Submit log weekly. Include the following: 

1. Project name. 

2. Name and address of Contractor. 

3. Name and address of Architect. 

4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 

5. RFI description. 

6. Date the RFI was submitted. 

7. Date Architect's response was received. 

8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and 

Proposal Request, as appropriate. 

9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as 

appropriate. 

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Inspection of Conditions: Require Installers of major components to inspect substrate and 

conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory 

conditions have been corrected. 

B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with inspections and tests to minimize the need to uncover 

completed construction. 

C. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials, during handling and 

installation. Apply protective covering to assure protection from damage. 

D. Clean and maintain completed construction as necessary through the construction period. 

Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability without damaging effects. 

E. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction to assure that no part is subject to harmful, 

dangerous, or damaging exposure. Such exposures include, but are not limited to, the 

following: 

1. Excessive static or dynamic loading. 

2. Excessive internal or external pressures. 

3. Excessively high or low temperatures. 

4. Water or ice, particularly I excavations. 

5. Solvents and chemicals. 

6. Abrasion. 

7. Soiling, staining, and corrosion. 

8. Combustion. 








SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of 

construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 

1. Startup construction schedule. 

2. Contractor's construction schedule. 

3. Construction schedule updating reports. 

4. Daily construction reports. 

5. Material location reports. 

6. Site condition reports. 

7. Special reports. 

B. Related Requirements: 

1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 

2. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and 

inspections. 


A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, 

and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume 

time and resources. 

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned 

early start and finish times. 

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 

3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. 

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as 

scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless 

otherwise approved by Architect. 

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction 

project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations 

determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. 

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1


D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network 

schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. 

E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. 

F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a 

jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet 

schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the 

early start of the successor activity. 

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without 

adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. 

G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of 

an activity as scheduled. 

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 

1. PDF electronic file. 

2. Two paper copies. 

B. Startup construction schedule. 

1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of 

schedule of values for cost-loaded activities. 

C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction 

period. Show logic ties for activities. 

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule 

for entire construction period. 

1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to 

comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) 

and date on label. 

E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. 

F. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. 

G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. 

H. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. 

I. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. 



1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in 

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures 

related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, 

including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 

2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 

3. Discuss constraints, including phasing work stages and partial Owner occupancy. 

4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 

5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 

6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 

7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 

8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting 

agencies. 

9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures including 

LEED-H activities. 

10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 

11. Review procedures for updating schedule. 


A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of 

construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. 

B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values,[ list of 

subcontracts,] submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required 

schedules and reports. 

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities 

involved. 

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule 

them in proper sequence. 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL 

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of 

Substantial Completion. 

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an 

early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. 

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main 

element of the Work. Comply with the following: 



1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless 

specifically allowed by Architect. 

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long 

lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities 

in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, 

approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 

a. HVAC of equipment. 

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 

Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in 

Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 

5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for 

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures 

necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of 

punch list items and final completion. 

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and 

as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 

1. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include 

delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated 

stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 

2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: 

a. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. 

b. Use of premises restrictions. 

c. Seasonal variations. 

d. Environmental control. 

3. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the 

Work, including, but not limited to, the following: 

a. Subcontract awards. 

b. Submittals. 

c. Purchases. 

d. Mockups. 

e. Fabrication. 

f. Sample testing. 

g. Deliveries. 

h. Installation. 

i. Tests and inspections. 

j. Adjusting. 

k. Curing. 

l. Building flush-out. 

m. Startup and placement into final use and operation. 

4. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of 

the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be 

sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: 



a. Structural completion. 

b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. 

c. Permanent space enclosure. 

d. Completion of mechanical installation. 

e. Completion of electrical installation. 

f. Substantial Completion. 

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but 

not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion. 

E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. 

On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and 

actual dates used for preparation of payment requests. 

1. See Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment 

procedures. 

F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or 

commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 

1. Unresolved issues. 

2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 

3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 

4. Notations on returned submittals. 

5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. 

G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days 

behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by 

which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working 

hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by 

which recovery will be accomplished. 

H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has 

been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 

2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within 

seven days of date established for commencement of the work. 

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of 

each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90 

days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash 

requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 

2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) 

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, 

Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the 



work. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received 

since the start of Project. 

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of 

each week with a continuous vertical line. 

1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an 

estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 

2.4 REPORTS 

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following 

information concerning events at Project site: 

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 

2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 

3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 

4. Equipment at Project site. 

5. Material deliveries. 

6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or 

snow. 

7. Accidents. 

8. Meetings and significant decisions. 

9. Unusual events (see special reports). 

10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 

11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 

12. Emergency procedures. 

13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 

14. Change Orders received and implemented. 

15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 

16. Services connected and disconnected. 

17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 

18. Partial completions and occupancies. 

19. Substantial Completions authorized. 

B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of 

materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials 

previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on 

and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project 

site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials: 

1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 

2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 

3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage. 

C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and 

the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for 

Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with 

recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 



2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS 

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. 

Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. 

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at 

Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. 

List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of 

results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these 

events are known or predictable. 

PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect 

actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly 

scheduled progress meeting. 

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have 

been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each 

such meeting. 

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not 

limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity. 

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Construction Manager, 

Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by 

Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the 

same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned 

portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. 




SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop 

Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 


1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and 

the Schedule of Values. 

2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and 

distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings. 

3. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules 

and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 

4. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reportsand 

for mockup requirements. 

5. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. 

6. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, 

Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 

7. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and 

maintenance manuals. 

8. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of 

demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 

9. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those 

Sections. 


A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. 

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive 

action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by 

Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1


B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of 

construction activities, fabrication, other submittals, and activities that require sequential 

operations. 

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other 

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so 

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for 

coordination. 

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring 

coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 

C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress 

Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of 

related construction activities. 

D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as 

follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of 

the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in 

advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 

1. Initial Review: Allow 7 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time 

if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor 

when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner 

as initial submittal. 

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 4 days for review of each resubmittal. 

4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, 

Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. 

5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals 

may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 

days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being 

returned to Contractor. 

E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 

2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record 

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 

3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: 

a. Project name. 

b. Date. 

c. Name and address of Architect. 

d. Name and address of Contractor. 

e. Name and address of subcontractor. 

f. Name and address of supplier. 

g. Name of manufacturer. 

h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 



1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a 

decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals 

shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 

061000.01.A). 

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 

j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 

k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 

l. Other necessary identification. 

F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract 

Documents on submittals. 

G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless 

Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal 

may serve as final submittal. 

1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of 

copies to Architect. 

2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action 

taken and will be returned. 

H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and 

handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, 

without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 

1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: 


b. Date. 

c. Destination (To:). 

d. Source (From:). 

e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 

f. Category and type of submittal. 

g. Submittal purpose and description. 

h. Specification Section number and title. 

i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 

j. Transmittal number. 

k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 

l. Remarks. 

m. Signature of transmitter. 

2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant 

information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on 

previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, 

including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related 

submittal. 

I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 



2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of 

revision. 

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Resubmittal is not required, corrections if any 

are noted." 

4. The contractor will be given an allowance of three (3) resubmittals in total for the entire 

project. This includes all required submittals. Resubmittals greater than the allowance 

will be billed to the contractor on a Time and Materials basis. Payment for resubmittal 

review to the Architect for A/E additional review time must be received by the Architect 

prior to approval of Pay Request 

J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, 

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of 

construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 

K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating " Resubmittal is not 

required, corrections if any are noted" taken by Architect. 


2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS 

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 

1. Submit electronic submittals directly to extranet specifically established for Project. 

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and 

type of product or equipment. 

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are 

not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 

3. Include the following information, as applicable: 

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. 

b. Manufacturer's product specifications. 

c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 

d. Standard color charts. 

e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. 

f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. 

g. Printed performance curves. 

h. Operational range diagrams. 

i. Mill reports. 

j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. 

k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. 

l. Testing by recognized testing agency. 

m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 

n. Notation of coordination requirements. 

o. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. 



4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 

5. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. 

Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project 

Record Document. 

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, newly prepared drawn accurately to 

scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard 

printed data. 

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the 

following information, as applicable: 

a. Dimensions. 

b. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 

c. Fabrication and installation drawings. 

d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. 

e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and 

control wiring. 

f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. 

g. Templates and patterns. 

h. Schedules. 

i. Design calculations. 

j. Compliance with specified standards. 

k. Notation of coordination requirements. 

l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 

m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. 

n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 

o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed 

wiring. 

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop 

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 (36 by 48) 

inches. 

3. Number of Copies: Submit four opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are 

required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit six copies where copies are 

required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; 

remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record 

Drawing. 

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these 

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between 

submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. (Samples: Submit full-size Samples 

cured and finished as specified and identical with the material proposed. Mount Samples to 

facilitate review of qualities.) 

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together 

in one submittal package. 

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: 

a. Generic description of Sample. 

b. Product name and name of manufacturer. 



c. Sample source. 

d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 

e. Compliance with recognized standards. 

f. Availability and delivery time. 

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol 

comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be 

used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. 

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual 

Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time 

of use. 

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's 

property, are the property of Contractor. 

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or 

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 

a. Number of Samples: Submit three full set(s) of available choices where color, 

pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from 

manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared 

from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and 

physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of 

color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the 

following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or 

containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing 

color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing 

and inspection. 

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two 

Sample sets; remainder will be returned. 

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication 

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to 

be demonstrated. 

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in 

material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of 

paired units that show approximate limits of variations. 

E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written 

summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. 

Include the following information in tabular form: 

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 

2. Number and name of room or space. 

3. Location within room or space. 

4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise 

indicated. Architect will return two copies. 



a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 

F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 

Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action. Prepare a 

horizontal bar-chart-type, contractor's construction schedule. Provide a separate time bar for 

each activity and a vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same 

breakdown of Work indicated in the "Schedule of Values." 

1. Submit within 14 days of the date established for "Commencement of the Work." 

2. Coordinate with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittal Schedule, 

payment requests, and other schedules. 

3. Indicate completion in advance of Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial 

Completion to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of 


G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction 

Progress Documentation." 

H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section 

"Payment Procedures." 

I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment 

Procedures." 

J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each 

portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a 

special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying 

products. 

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 

3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 

4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. 

Architect will return one copy. 

a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 

K. Record Drawings: Maintain a redline of 1 set of reproducible drawings for viewing on site by 

the Architect upon request. 


A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 

1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. 

Architect will not return copies. 

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of 

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be 

signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that 

entity. 



3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section 

"Quality Requirements." 

B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project 

Management and Coordination." 

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 

Section "Construction Progress Documentation." 

D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience 

of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names 

and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 

E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel 

comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure 

Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include 

names of firms and personnel certified. 

F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that 

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is 

authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. 

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying 

that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of 

manufacturing experience where required. 

H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that 

product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 

I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that 

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 

J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's 

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with 

requirements in the Contract Documents. 

K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by 

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on 

evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or 

on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 

L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect 

for Project. Include the following information: 

1. Name of evaluation organization. 

2. Date of evaluation. 

3. Time period when report is in effect. 

4. Product and manufacturers' names. 

5. Description of product. 

6. Test procedures and results. 



7. Limitations of use. 

M. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section 


N. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing 

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation 

of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. 

O. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing 

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed 

before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate 

preparation needed for adhesion. 

P. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's 

standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during 

installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with 


Q. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and 

normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in 

Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." 

R. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, 

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. 

Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. 

Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for 

calculations. Include page numbers. 

S. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents 

manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a 

product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of 

manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 

1. Preparation of substrates. 

2. Required substrate tolerances. 

3. Sequence of installation or erection. 

4. Required installation tolerances. 

5. Required adjustments. 

6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. 

T. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized 

service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative 

making report. 

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 

3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 

4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with 

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 



5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance 

complies with requirements. 

6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 

7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 

U. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of 

insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of 

coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. 

V. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section 

"Photographic Documentation." 

W. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): When requested of required, submit information 

directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. 

1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire 

submittal for resubmittal. 

2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN 

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a 

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide 

products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit 

a written request for additional information to Architect. 

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required 

submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design 

professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or 

certified by a design professional. 

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the 

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing 

these services. 


3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW 

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for 

compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with 

approval stamp before submitting to Architect. 

a. Submittals that have not been reviewed for compliance and have missing 

requirements will be rejected outright and returned to the contractor for 

resubmittal. 

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name 

and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date 



of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, 

and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 

3.2 ARCHITECT'S / ACTION 

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and 

will return them without action. 

B. Action Submittals: Except for submittals for the record or information, Architect will review 

each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. 

Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to 

indicate action taken, as follows: 

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will 

return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to 

appropriate party. 

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned 

without review. 

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. 




SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and 

quality control. 

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or 

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the 

Contract Document requirements. 

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities 

are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections 

may also cover production of standard products. 

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance 

and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document 

requirements. 

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required 

by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of 

this Section. 

C. Related Sections include the following: 

1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of 

required tests and inspections. 

2. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction 

disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 

3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 


A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during 

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed 

construction will comply with requirements. 

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after 

execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and 

completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract 

enforcement activities performed by Architect. 

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1


C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to 

verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where 

indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, 

or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the 

Work will be judged. 

D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to 

verify performance characteristics. 

E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project 

before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or 

compliance with specified criteria. 

F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing 

agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to 

establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. 

G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., 

plant, mill, factory, or shop. 

H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation 

of the Work and for completed Work. 

I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing 

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 

J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an 

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, 

including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must 

be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, 

such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively 

to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. 

K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a 

minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with 

special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS 

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish 

different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the 

most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but 

apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be 

the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the 

minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. 



To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as 

appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision 

before proceeding. 


A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to 

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a 

recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 

B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 

1. Specification Section number and title. 

2. Description of test and inspection. 

3. Identification of applicable standards. 

4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 

5. Number of tests and inspections required. 

6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 

7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 

8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 

9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. 

C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 

1. Date of issue. 

2. Project title and number. 

3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 

4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 

5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 

6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 

7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 

8. Complete test or inspection data. 

9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 

10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and 

inspecting. 

11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with 

the Contract Document requirements. 

12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 

13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. 

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, 

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee 

payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for 

compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels 

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. 



B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling 

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has 

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. 

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar 

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as 

well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. 

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated 

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient 

production capacity to produce required units. 

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to 

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing 

engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed 

for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this 

Project in material, design, and extent. 

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities 

shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall 

satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 

1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing 

the Work. 

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the 

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according 

to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where 

required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary 

Laboratory Accreditation Program. 

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of 

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of 

manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this 

Project. 

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing 

for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the 

following: 

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: 

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. 

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing 

results to prevent delaying the Work. 

c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory 

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with 

performance requirements. 



d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will 

perform same tasks for Project. 

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and 

methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. 

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and 

laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, 

inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. 

Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work 

complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each 

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using 

materials indicated for the completed Work: 

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by 

Architect. 

2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be 

constructed. 

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 

4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for 

judging the completed Work. 

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. 

K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified 

in individual Sections in Divisions 02 through 49. 

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, 

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing 

agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to 

perform. 

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as 

authorized by Change Orders. 

3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work 

that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the 

Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. 

B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless 

otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities 

having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities 

having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 



1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing 

agency to perform these quality-control services. 

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in 

writing by Owner. 

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires 

testing or inspecting will be performed. 

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a 

certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract 

Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, 

when they so direct. 

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service 

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including 

service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal 

Procedures." 

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's 

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for 

construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. The 

Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections and tests prove unsatisfactory 

and indicate noncompliance with requirements. The cost of retesting is the Contractor's 

responsibility where tests performed indicate noncompliance with requirements. 

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of 

duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the 

Work during performance of its services. 

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests 

are conducted. 

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and 

inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar 

quality-control service through Contractor. 

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve 

or accept any portion of the Work. 

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. 

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and 

similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify 

agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the 

following: 

1. Access to the Work. 

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and 

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 



4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing 

agency. 

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project 

site. 

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance 

and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and 

replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 

H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar qualitycontrol 

services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date 

established for commencement of the Work. 

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party 

involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 

1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special 

tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, 

and as follows: 

B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by 

authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures 

and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed 

in the Work during performance of its services. 

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control 

service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, 

which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected 

work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. 



3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG 

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 



1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 

3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 

4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. 

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to 

test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION 

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair 

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Division 1 Section 

“Cutting and Patching.” 

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other 

Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas 

with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. 

2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and 

Patching." 

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. 

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of 

responsibility for quality-control services. 




SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES 






A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. 

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, 

and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the 

Conditions of the Contract. 

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," 

"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." 

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on 

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," 

"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." 

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having 

jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control 


F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, 

installation, and similar operations. 

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, 

assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, 

protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. 

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities, either exclusively or in 

conjunction with others performing work as part of the Project. The extent of Project site is 

shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which 

Project is to be built. 

J. "Installer" is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, 

subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, who performs a particular construction activity 

including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be 

experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. 

REFERENCES 014200 - 1


1. The term "experienced," when used with the term "installer," means having successfully 

completed a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; 

being familiar with the special requirements indicated; and having complied with 

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Using terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must 

be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, 

such as "carpenter." 

K. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific 

inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to 

interpret results of those inspections or tests. 

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS 

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent 

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if 

bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards 

are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. 

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless 

otherwise indicated. 

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with 

industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not 

bound with the Contract Documents. 

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain 

copies directly from publication source. 

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS 

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other 

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson 

Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional 

Associations of the U.S." 

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other 

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. 

Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate 

and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 

www.aluminum.org 

AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 

www.aaadm.com 



AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 

www.aabchq.com 

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 

www.aamanet.org 

AASHTO 

American Association of State Highway and Transportation 

Officials 

www.transportation.org 

(202) 624-5800 

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 

www.aatcc.org 

ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888 

www.airbarrier.org 

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 

www.abma-dc.org 

ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 

(American Concrete Institute) 

www.aci-int.org 

ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 

www.concrete-pipe.org 

AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 

www.aeic.org 

AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 

www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 

AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 

www.aga.org 

AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 

www.agc.org 

AHA 

American Hardboard Association 

(Now part of CPA) 

AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 

www.aham.org 

AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 

www.asphaltinstitute.org 

AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 

www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 



AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 

www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 

www.steel.org 

AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 

www.aitc-glulam.org 

ALCA 

Associated Landscape Contractors of America 

(Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) 

ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 

www.alsc.org 

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 

www.amca.org 

ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 

www.ansi.org 

AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (405) 780-7372 

www.aosaseed.com 

APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 

www.archprecast.org 

APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 

www.apawood.org 

APA EWS 

APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood 

Systems 

(See APA - The Engineered Wood Association) 

API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 

www.api.org 

ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 

www.ari.org 

ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 

www.asphaltroofing.org 

ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 

www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 

ASCE/SEI 

American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering 

Institute 

(See ASCE) 



ASHRAE 

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air- 

(800) 527-4723 

Conditioning Engineers 

www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400 

ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 

(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 

www.asme.org 

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 

www.asse-plumbing.org 

ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 

(American Society for Testing and Materials International) 

www.astm.org 

AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300 

(Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry International) 

www.awci.org 

AWCMA 

American Window Covering Manufacturers Association 

(Now WCSC) 

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323-3636 

www.awinet.org 

AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (205) 733-4077 

www.awpa.com 

AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 

www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 

AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 

www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 

BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 

www.buildershardware.com 

BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 

www.bia.org 

BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405 

www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 

BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 

(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association 

International) 

www.bifma.com 

BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 

www.bissc.org 



CCC Carpet Cushion Council (610) 527-3880 

www.carpetcushion.org 

CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 

www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 

CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263 

www.canelect.ca 

CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 

www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com 

CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 

www.cganet.com 

CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 

www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 

CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 

www.cisca.org 

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 

www.cispi.org 

CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 

www.chainlinkinfo.org 

CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523 

www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175 

CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 

www.pbmdf.com 

CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 

www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 

CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 

www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 

www.crsi.org 

CSA Canadian Standards Association (800) 463-6727 

(416) 747-4000 

CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272 

(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 

www.csa-international.org 

CSI Cast Stone Institute (717) 272-3744 

www.caststone.org 



CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 

www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 

CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 

www.cedarbureau.org 

CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 

(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) 

www.cti.org 

DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 

www.dhi.org 

EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 

www.eia.org 

EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 

www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 

EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 

www.ejdc.org 

EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 

www.ejma.org 

ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 

www.esda.org 

FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball 41 22 545 00 00 

(The International Basketball Federation) 

www.fiba.com 

FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35 

(The International Volleyball Federation) 

www.fivb.ch 

FM Approvals FM Approvals (781) 762-4300 

www.fmglobal.com 

FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000 

(Formerly: FMG - FM Global) 

www.fmglobal.com 

FMRC 

FRSA 

Factory Mutual Research 

(Now FM Global) 

Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors 

Association, Inc. 

www.floridaroof.com 

(407) 671-3772 



FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 

www.fluidsealing.com 

FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 

www.fsc.org 

GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 

www.gypsum.org 

GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 

www.glasswebsite.com 

GRI 

(Now GSI) 

GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 

www.greenseal.org 

GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 

www.geosynthetic-institute.org 

HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 

www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 

HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 

www.gamanet.org 

HMMA 

Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association 

(Part of NAAMM) 

HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 

www.hpva.org 

HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 

www.hpwhite.com 

IAS 

International Approval Services 

(Now CSA International) 

IBF International Badminton Federation (6-03) 9283-7155 

www.internationalbadminton.org 

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 

www.icea.net 

ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 

www.icri.org 

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 

www.iec.ch 



IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 

www.ieee.org 

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 

www.iesna.org 

IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561 

www.iest.org 

IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 

www.igcc.org 

IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 

www.igmaonline.org 

ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 

www.iliai.com 

ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 

www.iso.ch 

Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 

www.ansi.org 

ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 

www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 

ITS Intertek Testing Service NA (972) 238-5591 

www.intertek.com 

ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 

www.itu.int/home 

KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 

www.kcma.org 

LMA 

Laminating Materials Association 

(Now part of CPA) 

LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 

www.lightning.org 

MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 

www.mbma.com 

MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138 

www.maplefloor.org 

MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610 

www.metalframingmfg.org 



MH 

Material Handling 

(Now MHIA) 

MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 

www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 

MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 

www.marble-institute.com 

MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 

www.paintinfo.com 

MSS 

Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings 

Industry Inc. 

www.mss-hq.com 

(703) 281-6613 

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 

www.naamm.org 

NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 

(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 

www.nace.org 

NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 

www.nadca.com 

NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213-7193, 

ext. 453 

www.aahperd.org/nagws/ 

NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 

www.naima.org 

NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 

www.nbgqa.com 

NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 

www.ncaa.org 

NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 

www.ncma.org 

NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 

www.ncpi.org 

NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 

www.ncta.com 

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 

www.nebb.org 



NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 

www.necanet.org 

NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 

www.nelma.org 

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 

www.nema.org 

NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 

www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 

NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 

www.nfhs.org 

NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 

(National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 

www.nfpa.org 

NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 

www.nfrc.org 

NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 

www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 

NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 

www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 

NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 

www.nlga.org 

NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 

(Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) 

www.nofma.com 

NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 

www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 

NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 

www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 

NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 

(National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 

www.nsf.org 

NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 

www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 

NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 

www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 



NTRMA 

NWWDA 

OPL 

National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association 

(Now TRI) 

National Wood Window and Door Association 

(Now WDMA) 

Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. 

(Now ITS) 

PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 

www.pci.org 

PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 

www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 

PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 

www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 

PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 

http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu 

PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 

(Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of (703) 736-9666 

America) 

www.landcarenetwork.org 

PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 

www.post-tensioning.org 

RCSC 

Research Council on Structural Connections 

www.boltcouncil.org 

RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580 

www.rfci.com 

RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 

www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 

SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 

www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 

SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 

www.sdi.org 

SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 

www.steeldoor.org 

SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 

www.sefalabs.com 



SEI/ASCE 

Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil 

Engineers 

(See ASCE) 

SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 

www.sgcc.org 

SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 

www.siaonline.org 

SIGMA 

Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 

(Now IGMA) 

SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 

www.steeljoist.org 

SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 

www.smacentral.org 

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 

National Association 

www.smacna.org 

SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 

www.smpte.org 

SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 

(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, 

Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) 

www.sprayfoam.org 

SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 

www.spib.org 

SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 

www.spri.org 

SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 

www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 

SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772 

www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 

STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 

www.steeltank.com 

SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 

www.steelwindows.com 

SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 

www.swrionline.org 



TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 

www.tileusa.com 

TIA/EIA 

Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries 

Alliance 

www.tiaonline.org 

(703) 907-7700 

TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 

www.masonrysociety.org 

TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 

www.tpinst.org 

TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873 

www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 649-5555 

TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 

www.tileroofing.org 

UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 

www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 

UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 

www.uni-bell.org 

USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539 

www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800 

USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 

www.usgbc.org 

USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488 

www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463 

WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 

www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 

www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 

WCMA 

Window Covering Manufacturers Association 

(Now WCSC) 

WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 

(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers 

Association) 

(212) 297-2109 

www.windowcoverings.org 



WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 

(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door (847) 299-5200 

Association) 

www.wdma.com 

WI 

WIC 

Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of 

California) 

www.wicnet.org 

Woodwork Institute of California 

(Now WI) 

(916) 372-9943 

WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 

www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 

WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 

www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441 

WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 

www.wwpa.org 

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract 

Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, 

telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and upto-date 

as of the date of the Contract Documents. 

BOCA 

BOCA International, Inc. 

(See ICC) 

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 

www.iapmo.org 

ICBO 

International Conference of Building Officials 

(See ICC) 

ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. 

(See ICC-ES) 

ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233 

www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533 

ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 

www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543 

SBCCI 

UBC 

Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. 

(See ICC) 

Uniform Building Code 

(See ICC) 



D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications 

or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the 

following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed 

to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 

CE 

Army Corps of Engineers 

www.usace.army.mil 

CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 

www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 

DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 

www.commerce.gov 

DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257 

http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil 

DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 

www.energy.gov 

EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 

www.epa.gov 

FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 

www.faa.gov 

FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 

www.fcc.gov 

FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 

www.fda.gov 

GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111 

www.gsa.gov 

HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 

www.hud.gov 

LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 

www.lbl.gov 

NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program 

(See TRB) 

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 

www.nist.gov 

OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742 

www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 

PBS 

Public Building Service 



(See GSA) 

PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 

www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs 

RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 

(See USDA) 

SD State Department (202) 647-4000 

www.state.gov 

TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 

http://gulliver.trb.org 

USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 

www.usda.gov 

USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 

www.usps.com 

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or 

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and 

regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to 

change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 

Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities 

Available from Access Board 

www.access-board.gov 

CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 

Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 

www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html 

DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-2664 

Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point 

http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil 

DSCC 

FED-STD 

Defense Supply Center Columbus 

(See FS) 

Federal Standard 

(See FS) 

FS Federal Specification (215) 697-2664 



Available from Defense Standardization Program 

www.dps.dla.mil 



Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 

www.gsa.gov 

Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 

www.wbdg.org/ccb 

FTMS 

MIL 

MIL-STD 

Federal Test Method Standard 

(See FS) 

(See MILSPEC) 

(See MILSPEC) 

MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-2664 



UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 

Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 

www.access-board.gov 

F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or 

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following 

list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be 

accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 

CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home (800) 952-5210 

Furnishings and Thermal Insulation 

www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti (916) 574-2041 

CCR California Code of Regulations (916) 323-6815 

www.calregs.com 

CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (415) 703-2782 

www.cpuc.ca.gov 

TFS Texas Forest Service (979) 458-6650 

Forest Resource Development 

http://txforestservice.tamu.edu 






SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and 

protection facilities. 


1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work 

restrictions. 

2. Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for division of responsibilities for 

temporary facilities and controls. 

3. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of 

implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 

4. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements. 

5. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity 

requirements for products in those Sections. 

6. Division 31 Section "Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt paving 

for temporary roads and paved areas. 

7. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for construction and maintenance of cement 

concrete pavement for temporary roads and paved areas. 


A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is 

complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all 

openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. 

1.4 USE CHARGES 

A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. 

Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not 

limited to, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. 

Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary 

utility. Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and procedures performed on 

temporary utilities. At the earliest time, change over from use of temporary service to use of 

permanent service. 

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1


B. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all 

entities for construction operations. 

C. Water Service: Provide and pay for connections and extensions of services, and use changes as 

required for construction operations. 


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for 

construction personnel. 


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary 

electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. 

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each 

temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 


A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume 

responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its 

use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned 

responsibilities. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Pavement: Comply with Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving." Section "Concrete Paving." 

B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric 

fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line 

posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails. 

C. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 

D. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths; 

regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M. 

E. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; 

with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. 

F. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections. 



2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature 

controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. 

B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate 

materials and equipment for construction operations. 

1. Store combustible materials apart from building. 

2.3 EQUIPMENT 

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by 

locations and classes of fire exposures. 

B. HVAC Equipment: Needed for heat. 

1. Permanent HVAC System: Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for 

temporary use during construction. Provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air 

grille in system and remove and replace with a new filter at end of construction. 


3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference 

with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the 

Work. 

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." 

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities 

are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be 

interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 



B. Water Service: Provide construction water as required for all construction activities. 

Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan 

of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans. 

C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of 

construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, 

operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 

D. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities 

for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from 

adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a 

harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 

E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction 

activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction 

from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on 

completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to 

produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 

F. Electric Power Service: Provide temporary electric power as required for construction 

activities. 

G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination 

for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements 

without operating entire system. 

H. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. 

I. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. 

J. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs. 

Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. 

Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 

K. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section 

"Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 

L. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle 

waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having 

jurisdiction. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements. 

M. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and 

equipment" and not temporary facilities. 



N. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering 

of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance. 

3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION 

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct 

construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that 

minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable 

effects. 

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." 

B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements specified in 

Division 31 Section "Site Clearing." 

C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and 

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, 

according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during 

construction until permanent vegetation has been established. 

D. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and 

around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from 

heavy rains. 

E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line 

of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root 

systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. 

F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and 

harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control 

procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial 

Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using 

environmentally safe materials. 

G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure 

fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by 

entrance gates. 

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined 

sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 

2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized 

personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys. 

H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially 

completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, 

vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. 



I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having 

jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. 

J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types 

needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with 

NFPA 241. 

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar 

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel 

at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be 

followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 

3.4 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL 

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and 

abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. 

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, 

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated 

results and to avoid possibility of damage. 

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and 

protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. 

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has 

ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than 

Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may 

have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, 

clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. 

Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 

2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent 

paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate 

fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials 

contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other 

substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street 

paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during 

construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 

Section "Closeout Procedures." 




SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for 

use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on 

products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. 


1. Division 01 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products 

specified. 

2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract 

closeout. 

3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products 

and installations specified to be warranted. 


A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or 

taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," 

"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or 

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product 

literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or 

facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless 

explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not 

considered new products. 

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal 

process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities 

related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, 

appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. 

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from 

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor proposed after award of 

the Contract. The following are not requests for substitutions: 

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1


1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period and accepted by Addendum prior to 

award of the Contract. 

2. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner. 

3. Specified options included in the Contract Documents. 

4. Contractor's compliance with regulations issued by governing authorities. 

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and 

accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other 

designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service 

performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of 

evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. 


A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names 

of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each 

product. 

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals 

Schedule. 

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: 

a. Specification Section number and title. 

b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. 

c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. 

d. Manufacturer's name and address. 

e. Supplier's name and address. 

f. Installer's name and address. 

g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. 

h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery 

date. 

3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 

copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for 

variations from Contract requirements. 

a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and 

designations that must be established early in Contract period. 

4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 

copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and 

for variations from Contract requirements. 

5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of 

receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable 

product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, 

or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the 

Contract Documents. 



B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product 

or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and 

title and Drawing numbers and titles. 

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 012501 & 012502 provided at end of Section. 

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, 

as applicable: 

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. 

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to 

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate 

contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. 

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of 

the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as 

performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and 

requirements indicated. 

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and 

installation procedures. 

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. 

f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and 

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. 

g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test 

results for compliance with requirements indicated. 

h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for 

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed 

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall 

Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided 

within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's 

letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. 

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. 

k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in 

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. 

l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently 

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated 

results. 

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or 

documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. 

Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 

15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or 

documentation, whichever is later. 

a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. 

b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed 

substitution within time allocated. 

C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify 

product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section 

number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 



1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or 

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product 

request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable 

product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional 

information or documentation, whichever is later. 

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." 

b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable 

product request within time allocated. 

D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 

Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more 

products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously 

selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods 

compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible 

products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, 

deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Delivery and Handling: 

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent 

overcrowding of construction spaces. 

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that 

are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other 

losses. 

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original 

sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for 

handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to 

ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 

C. Storage: 

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight 

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 

4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 



5. Store foam plastic away from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period 

of installation and concealment. 

6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, 

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 

7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 

8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and 

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES 

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other 

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on 

product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract 

Documents. 

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual 

manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to 

Owner. 

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract 

Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide 

more rights for Owner. 

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and 

identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and 

properly executed. 

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a 

written document using appropriate form properly executed. 

3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and 

particular requirements for submitting special warranties. 

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." 


2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES 

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, 

that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items 

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are 

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used 

successfully in similar situations on other projects. 

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with 

requirements of the Contract Documents. 



4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make 

selection. 

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is 

Architect's. 

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications 

establish "salient characteristics" of products. 

7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or 

equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 

"Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 

B. Product Selection Procedures: 

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the 

named product that complies with requirements. 

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, 

provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and 

manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a 

product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 

5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and 

manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies 

with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for 

consideration of an unnamed product. 

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a 

product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies 

with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for 

consideration of an unnamed product. 

7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional 

requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the 

specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" 

Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. 

8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of 

manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other 

named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, 

and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in 

Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the 

other named manufacturers. 

9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established 

Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. 

Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 

a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other 

specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" 

Article for proposal of product. 

10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected 

from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that 

complies with other specified requirements. 



a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of 

colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, 

density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium 

items. 

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, 

patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or 

texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium 

items. 

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 14 days prior to Bid 

Opening. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of 

Architect. 

B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following 

conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return 

requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy 

conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner 

must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect 

for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and 

similar considerations. 

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 

3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce 

indicated results. 

4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 

5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 

6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 

8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 

9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 

10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has 

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is 

compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 

11. The specified product cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The Architect will 

not consider the request if the specified product cannot be provided as a result of failure 

to pursue the Work promptly. 

12. The request is related to an "or-equal" clause. 

13. The substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time, or other 

considerations, after deducting compensation to the Architect for redesign and increased 

cost of other construction. 

14. The specified product cannot receive approval by a governing authority, and the 

substitution can be approved. 



2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS 

A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the 

following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will 

return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract 

Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the 

indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the 

Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, 

durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and 

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 

5. Samples, if requested. 





SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the 

Work including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Construction layout. 

2. Field engineering and surveying. 

3. Installation of the Work. 

4. Cutting and patching. 

5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 

6. Progress cleaning. 

7. Starting and adjusting. 

8. Protection of installed construction. 

9. Correction of the Work. 


1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 

2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 

3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with 

Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines 

and levels, and final cleaning. 

4. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition and removal of 

selected portions of the building. 

5. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated 

construction. 


A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of 

other work. 

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after 

installation of other work. 

EXECUTION 017300 - 1



A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor. 

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of 

improvements comply with requirements. 

C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time 

cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information: 

1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to 

structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance 

and other significant visual elements. 

3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform 

patching work. 

4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 

5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting 

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be 

relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time 

permanent services and systems will be disrupted. 

a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during 

interruption of permanent services and systems. 

D. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept 

hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. 

E. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. 

F. Final Property Survey: Submit 4 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. 


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice 

in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying 

services of the kind indicated. 

B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of 

construction elements. 

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of 

locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. 

Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and 

patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or 

increase deflection. 

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components 

in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in 



increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements 

include the following: 

a. Primary operational systems and equipment. 

b. Fire separation assemblies. 

c. Air or smoke barriers. 

d. Fire-suppression systems. 

e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 

f. Control systems. 

g. Communication systems. 

h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. 

i. Conveying systems. 

j. Electrical wiring systems. 

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or 

components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in 

reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or 

decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not 

limited to the following: 

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 

b. Membranes and flashings. 

c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. 

d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. 

e. Equipment supports. 

f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 

g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. 

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual 

evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner 

that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and 

replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 

C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved 

in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential 

interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before 

proceeding. 

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written 

recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. 



1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and 

procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements in Division 01 

sustainable design requirements Section. 

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed 

surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent 

possible. 

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, 

will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of 

in-place materials. 


3.1 EXAMINATION 

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and 

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate 

and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, electrical distribution systems and 

other construction affecting the Work. 

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of 

sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, 

and other utilities. 

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public 

utilities serving Project site. 

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the 

Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where 

indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions 

affecting performance. Record observations. 

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of 

connections before equipment and fixture installation. 

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are 

to be installed. 

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with 

existing finishes or primers. 

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the 

Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 

1. Description of the Work. 

2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 

3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 

4. Recommended corrections. 

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding 

with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 



3.2 PREPARATION 

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, 

move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility 

appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck 

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to 

other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before 

fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the 

Work. 

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown 

diagrammatically on Drawings. 

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for 

clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control 

of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in 

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT 

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on 

Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are 

discovered, notify Architect promptly. 

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of 

construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 

2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 

3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain 

required dimensions. 

4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 

5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 

6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable 

tolerances. 

7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established 

by authorities having jurisdiction. 

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill 

and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. 

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building 

foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and 

electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. 

Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. 



E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and 

levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and 

duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log 

available for reference by Architect. 

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING 

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. 

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference 

points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control 

points during construction operations. 

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written 

approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points 

promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to 

Architect before proceeding. 

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base 

replacements on the original survey control points. 

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, 

referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having 

jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record 

Documents. 

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide 

temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked 

construction to its original condition. 

D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work 

requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, 

angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. 

E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing 

significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by 

land surveyor that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned 

as shown on the survey. 

1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing 

improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, 

and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 

2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or 

with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 



3.5 INSTALLATION 

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and 

elevation, as indicated. 

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance 

and ease of removal for replacement. 

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 

4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 90 inches in occupied spaces and 80 inches in 

unoccupied spaces. 

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in 

applications indicated. 

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. 

Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. 

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or 

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. 

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction 

items on site and placement in permanent locations. 

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. 

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be 

factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that 

adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated 

requirements. 

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size 

and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with 

other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size 

and type required for load conditions. 

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at 

heights directed by Architect. 

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and 

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and 

items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver 

such items to Project site in time for installation. 

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, 

arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. 

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered 

hazardous. 



3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. 

Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance 

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their 

original condition. 

B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. 

C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. 

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be 

exposed during cutting and patching operations. 

D. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar 

operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or 

adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply 

with original Installer's written recommendations. 

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not 

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with 

minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a 

diamond-core drill. 

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 

Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be 

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent 

entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. 

E. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations 

following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as 

practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other 

Sections, where applicable. 

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to 

demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish 

restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence 

of patching and refinishing. 

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing 

materials. 

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area 

into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even 

surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall 



coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and 

appearance. 

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and 

intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final 

paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional 

coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane 

surface of uniform appearance. 

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a 

weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. 

F. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, 

mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 

3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS 

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. 

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by 

Owner's construction personnel. 

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule 

for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually 

agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences 

in actual construction progress. 

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation 

conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend 

preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of 

the Work depend on Owner's construction. 

3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING 

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce 

requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and 

debris. 

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if 

the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. 

Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. 

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors 

are working concurrently. 



B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. 

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for 

proper execution of the Work. 

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the 

entire work area, as appropriate. 

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written 

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials 

specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning 

materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. 

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. 

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure 

freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials 

down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 

Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining 

materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from 

damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. 

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through 

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure 

operability without damaging effects. 

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the 

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise 

deleterious exposure during the construction period. 

3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING 

A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in 

Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements." 

B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove 

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. 

C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation 

without binding. 

D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 

E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section 




3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION 

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage 

or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 




SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 

1. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 

2. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 


1. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting 

from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements. 

2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing 

and removal of above- and below-grade improvements. 


A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting 

from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes 

packaging. 

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or 

selective demolition operations. 

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, 

recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in 

preparation for reuse. 

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total 

non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the 

use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and 

demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of 

materials, including the following: 

1. Demolition Waste: 

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1


a. Asphalt paving. 

b. Concrete. 

c. Concrete reinforcing steel. 

2. Construction Waste: 

a. Masonry and CMU. 

b. Lumber. 

c. Wood sheet materials. 

d. Wood trim. 

e. Metals. 

f. Roofing. 

g. Insulation. 

h. Carpet and pad. 

i. Gypsum board. 

j. Piping. 

k. Electrical conduit. 

l. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph 

above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging 

materials: 

1) Paper. 

2) Cardboard. 

3) Boxes. 

4) Plastic sheet and film. 

5) Polystyrene packaging. 

6) Wood crates. 

7) Plastic pails. 


A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for commencement of 

the Work. 


A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit 

report. Include the following information: 

1. Material category. 

2. Generation point of waste. 

3. Total quantity of waste in tons (tonnes). 

4. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes). 

5. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons (tonnes). 

6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste. 

B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated 

end-of-Project rates for recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the 

Work. 



C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to 

individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt. 

D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and 

organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt. 

E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste 

by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight 

tickets, receipts, and invoices. 

F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills 

and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, 

and invoices. 

G. LEED Submittals: LEED Waste Management Plan and letter template for Credit MR 3.2, 

signed by Contractor, investigating local options for diversion, tabulating total waste material, 

recording quantities diverted and means by which it is diverted, and statement that requirements 

for the credit have been met for waste reduction for two points from the available options. 


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with 

requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods 

and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste 

management coordinator. 

2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its 

disposition. 

3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of 

containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 

4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and 

disposal facilities. 

5. Review waste management requirements for each trade. 

1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN 

A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in 

this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and 

cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate 

quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management 

plan. 

B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition and construction 

waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. 



C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, 

or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of 

each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation 

procedures. 

1. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and 

organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 

2. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and 

organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 

3. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled 

materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 

4. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include 

name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 

5. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating 

recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location 

where materials separation will be performed. 

D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste 

management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste 

management plan. Include the following: 

1. Total quantity of waste. 

2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of 

collection containers for each type of waste. 

3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management). 

4. Revenue from salvaged materials. 

5. Revenue from recycled materials. 

6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials. 

7. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided. 

8. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of 

waste. 

9. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan. 



3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION 

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, 

signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan 

during the entire duration of the Contract. 

1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Division 01 Section 

"Temporary Facilities and Controls." 

B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management 

procedures, as appropriate for the Work. 



1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal 

return. 

2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review 

plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. 

C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure 

minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and 

used facilities. 

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that 

are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 

2. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling 

dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 

3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL 

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. 

B. Recycling Receivers and Processors: List below is provided for information only; available 

recycling receivers and processors include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Insert names and telephone numbers of local recycling receivers and processors of 

recyclable materials. 

C. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for 

recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor be shared equally by Owner and 

Contractor. 

D. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling 

or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum 

contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. 

E. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate 

recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved 

construction waste management plan. 

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until 

removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each 

container and bin. 

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials 

if found. 

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, 

grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of 

remaining trees. 

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 

5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or 

processor. 



3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE 

A. Packaging: 

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry 

location. 

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 

3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from 

Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood 

pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements 

for recycling wood. 

B. Wood Materials: 

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 

2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. 

a. Comply with requirements in Division 32 Section "Plants." for use of clean 

sawdust as organic mulch. 

C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry 

location. 

1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper 

or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding. 

a. Comply with requirements in Division 32 Section "Plants." for use of clean ground 

gypsum board as inorganic soil amendment. 

3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE 

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove 

waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator 

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of 

accumulate on-site. 

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces 

and areas. 

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. 

C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 




SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, 

including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Inspection procedures. 

2. Warranties. 

3. Final cleaning. 


1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for 

Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 

2. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, 

Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 

3. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance 

manual requirements. 

4. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing 

Owner's personnel. 

5. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements 

for the Work in those Sections. 

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial 

Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on 

the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final 

certifications, and similar documents. 

4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to 

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar 

releases. 

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, 

Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property 

surveys, and similar final record information. 

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1


6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by 

Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's 

personnel of changeover in security provisions. 

8. Complete startup testing of systems. 

9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 

10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, 

construction tools, and similar elements. 

11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 

12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and 

maintenance. 

13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 

14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual 

defects. 

15. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial 

Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the Work claimed as 

substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completion and an 

accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of 

request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled 

requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection 

or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by 

Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as 

incomplete is completed or corrected. 

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final 

Completion. 

3. Reinspection Fee: If the Architect has to reinspect the work that was noted in the Punch 

List as complete but was not complete, the contractor will be charged Time and 

Materials. Payment must be received by the Architect prior to the next Application for 

Payment. 

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION 

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final 

Completion, complete the following: 

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment 

Procedures." 

A. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed 

or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list 

shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. Submit a 

copy of the final inspection list stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved 

for acceptance. 

2. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance 

requirements. 

3. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 



4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, 

equipment, and systems. 

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, 

Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. 

Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor 

of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as 

incomplete is completed or corrected. 

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) 

A. Preparation: Submit one copy of list. Include name and identification of each space and area 

affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction 

including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order,. 

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, 

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 

3. Include the following information at the top of each page: 


b. Date. 

c. Name of Architect. 

d. Name of Contractor. 

e. Page number. 

1.6 WARRANTIES 

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of 

the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is 

indicated. See Section 017740- WARRANTIES. 

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of 

designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during 

construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or 

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially 

hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 




3.1 FINAL CLEANING 

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply 

with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution 

regulations. 

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each 

surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and 

maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification 

of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: 

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, 

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other 

foreign substances. 

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other 

foreign deposits. 

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured 

surface. 

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from 

Project site. 

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. 

f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, 

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural 

weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original 

condition. 

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, 

plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. 

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. 

i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; 

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. 

j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. 

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. 

Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish 

mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. 

k. Remove labels that are not permanent. 

l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. 

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or 

that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and 

electrical nameplates. 

m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. 

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign 

substances. 

n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. 



o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains 

resulting from water exposure. 

p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed 

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. 

q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during 

construction. 

r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. 

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and 

defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply 

with requirements for new fixtures. 

s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid 

Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report. 

D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or 

excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous 

materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of 

lawfully. 




SECTION 017740 – WARRANTIES 

PART 1 – GENERAL 




1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the 

contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special 

warranties. 

1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor’s period for correction of the 

Work. 

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 

1. Division 1 Section “Submittals” specifies procedures for submitting warranties. 

2. Division 1 Section “Contract Closeout” specifies contract closeout procedures. 

3. Divisions 2 through 33 sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and 

installations specified to be warranted. 

4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner 

are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 

C. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations on product warranties 

do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products. 

Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers, 

manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the 

Contractor. 

D. Separate Prime Contracts: Each prime contractor is responsible for warranties related to its own 

contract. 


A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual 

manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the 

Owner. 

WARRANTIES 017740 - 1


B. Special warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract 

Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater 

rights for the Owner. 

1.4 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Warranty the entire job for a minimum of one year from the date of Substantial Completion. 

Component warranties shall be honored for the term established by the manufacturer, if greater 

than one year. Include in the warranty quarterly site visits to check and adjust equipment and 

restore systems to original performance standards. 

B. Activate manufacturer’s equipment warranties in Owner’s name to commence on the date of 

Substantial Completion or other designated date. In the case of Contractor-modified equipment, 

the manufacturer’s warranty is normally voided. In such cases, provide the Owner with a 

warranty equivalent to that of the original manufacturer. 

C. Owner and Contractor shall meet during the 11 th month of the Warranty period to arrange for 

final correction of all Warranty items. 

D. Submit the following written guarantee, typed on the Contractor’s letterhead for the entire work, 

or on the subcontractor’s letterhead depending on each’s responsibility (entire Work, in the case 

of the WRITTEN GUARANTEE for Contractor, or a Specific Specification Section, in the case 

of a subcontractor): 

We hereby guarantee that the materials and workmanship we have provided in 

project has been completed in accordance with the Project Specification Section 

017740. 

We agree to repair or replace any or all of our Work, together with any other 

adjacent Work which may be displaced or damaged by so doing, that may prove 

to be either patently defective in its workmanship or materials within the period 

of the time perscribed by law, or latently defective in its workmanship or 

materials within the period of time perscribed by law from the date of Substantial 

Completion of the work, ordinary wear and tear expected while unusual abuse or 

neglect is excluded. We also agree to repair any and all damages resulting from 

such defects. 

In the event of our failure to comply with above-mentioned requirements within 

a reasonable time, but in no case longer than five (5) calandar days after being 

notified in writing by the Owner for standard warranty items or 8 hours after 

being notified in writing, by fax, by the Owner for emergency warranty items, we 

collectively and separately, do hearby authorize the Owner to have said defective 

Work and damages repaired or replaced and made good at our expense, and will 

honor and pay the costs and charges thereof upon demand within 30 days of 

receiving Owner’s bill. 



Signed______________________________________________________ 

(Contractor’s name, address, license number and date) 

OR 

Signed______________________________________________________ 

(Subcontractor’s name, address, license number and date) 

Countersigned________________________________________________ 

(Contractor’s name, address, license number and date) 

E. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, 

remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be 

removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction. 

F. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected 

by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated 

warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. 

G. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or 

rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract 

Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective 

Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from the use of the Work through a 

portion of its anticipated useful service life. 

H. Owner’s Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied 

warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available 

under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in 

which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 

1. Rejection of Warranties: the Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit 

selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract 

Documents. 

I. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work 

or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the 

contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersigh such commitments are willing 

to do so. 


A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. 

If the Architect’s Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for 

warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion 

of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect. 



1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, 

by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit 

properly executed warranties to the Architect within 15 days of completion of that 

designated portion of the Work. 

B. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, 

supplier or manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a written document that contains 

appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft 

to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution. 

C. Forms for special warranties are included at the end of this Section. Prepare a written document 

utilizing the appropriate form, ready for execution by the contractor, or by the subcontractor, 

supplier, or manufacturer. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval 

prior to final execution. 

1. Refer to Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular 

requirements for submitting special warranties. 

D. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion, compile 2 copies of each required warranty properly 

executed by the contractor, or by the contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. 

Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the 

Project Manual. 

E. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable 3-ring, vinyl-covered 

loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8½-by- 

11-inch paper. 

1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. 

Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the 

product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and 

telephone number of the Installer. 

2. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed titlte 

“WARRANTIES,” Project title or name, and name of the Contractor. 

3. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide 

additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required 

manual. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 

PART 3 – EXECUTION 

3.1 LIST OF WARRANTIES 

A. Schedule: Provide warranties on ALL products and installations as specified. 

1. Overall Project (GC) 

2. Roofing 



3. Stucco 

4. Deck treatment 

5. Mechanical 

a. Combo furnace / air conditioner 

b. Exhaust fans 

6. Plumbing 

a. Toilet 

b. Kitchen sink & fixtures 

c. Bathroom sink & fixtures 

d. Bathtub & shower fixtures 

e. Water heater 

7. Windows 

8. Cabinetry 

9. Door Hardware 

10. Doors 

11. Painting 

12. Carpet 

13. Other flooring finishes 

14. Vinyl base 




SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and 

maintenance manuals, including the following: 

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 

2. Emergency manuals. 

3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 

4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes. 


1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for 

operation and maintenance manuals. 

2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance 

manuals. 

3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for 

operation and maintenance manuals. 

4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual 

requirements for the Work in those Sections. 


A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular 

interaction. 

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 


A. Maintenance Manual Preparation: In preparation of maintenance manuals, use personnel 

thoroughly trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment or system 

involved. 

1. Where maintenance manuals require written instructions, use personnel skilled in 

technical writing where necessary for communication of essential data. 

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1


2. Where maintenance manuals require drawings or diagrams, use draftsmen capable of 

preparing drawings clearly in an understandable format. 


A. Initial Submittal: Submit 3 draft copies of each manual at least 30 days before requesting 

inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance 

directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content 

of manual are acceptable. 

B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final 

inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 21 days after final inspection. 

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of 

each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments. 


A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more 

than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information 

furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. Preparation of operation and maintenance 

manuals includes collecting material, collating and binding material, and submitting data. 


2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY 

A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 

1. List of documents. 

2. List of systems. 

3. List of equipment. 

4. Table of contents. 

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation 

and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. 

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For 

pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. 

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance 

manual. 

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, 

identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the 

Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to 

ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building 

Systems." 



2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL 

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each 

system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. 

Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 

1. Title page. 

2. Table of contents. 

3. Manual contents. 

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 

1. Subject matter included in manual. 

2. Name and address of Project. 

3. Name and address of Owner. 

4. Date of submittal. 

5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 

6. Name and address of Architect. 

7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. 

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed 

to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project 

Manual. 

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to 

accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each 

volume of the set. 

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by 

system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, 

equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to 

accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on 

spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded 

oversize sheets. 

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize 

data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Crossreference 

other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper 

operation or maintenance of equipment or system. 

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND 

MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of 

contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each 

tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of 

equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification 

Section number and title of Project Manual. 

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic 

software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 



4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 

5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. 

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and 

use as foldouts. 

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled 

envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in 

manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, 

and drawing locations. 

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS 

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 

1. Type of emergency. 

2. Emergency instructions. 

3. Emergency procedures. 

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include 

instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 

1. Fire. 

2. Flood. 

3. Gas leak. 

4. Water leak. 

5. Power failure. 

6. Water outage. 

7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 

8. Chemical release or spill. 

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, 

and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for 

notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. 

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 

1. Instructions on stopping. 

2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 

3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 

4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 

5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS 

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in 

individual Specification Sections and the following information: 

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 



3. Operating standards. 

4. Operating procedures. 

5. Operating logs. 

6. Wiring diagrams. 

7. Control diagrams. 

8. Piped system diagrams. 

9. Precautions against improper use. 

10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. 

B. Descriptions: Include the following: 

1. Product name and model number. 

2. Manufacturer's name. 

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 

4. Equipment function. 

5. Operating characteristics. 

6. Limiting conditions. 

7. Performance curves. 

8. Engineering data and tests. 

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. 

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 

1. Startup procedures. 

2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 

3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 

4. Regulation and control procedures. 

5. Instructions on stopping. 

6. Normal shutdown instructions. 

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 

9. Special operating instructions and procedures. 

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as 

installed. 

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for 

identification. 

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. 

Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and 

sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. 

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and 

arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and 

telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference 

Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. 



C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 

1. Product name and model number. 


3. Color, pattern, and texture. 

4. Material and chemical composition. 

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. 

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 

1. Inspection procedures. 

2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 

4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 

5. Repair instructions. 

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and 

related services. 

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and 

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL 

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include 

source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, 

maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service 

contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. 

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, 

identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, 

list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, 

and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. 

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation 

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 

1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly 

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential 

maintenance procedures: 

1. Test and inspection instructions. 

2. Troubleshooting guide. 



3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 

6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. 

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of 

required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine 

maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, 

quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording 

maintenance. 

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with 

parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local 

sources of maintenance materials and related services. 

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and 

telephone number of service agent. 

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and 

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 


3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION 

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides 

an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures 

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies 

indicated. 

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care 

and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. 

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance 

data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment 

not part of a system. 

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information 

for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional 

manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. 



E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include 

only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each 

product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a 

tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. 

Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and 

where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or 

systems. 

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the 

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and 

flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to 

ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance 

manuals. 

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 01 Section 

"Project Record Documents." 

G. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation 

and maintenance documentation. 




SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record 

Documents, including the following: 

1. Record Drawings. 

2. Record Specifications. 

3. Record Product Data. 

4. Marked-up copies of Contract Drawings. 

5. Marked-up copies of Shop Drawings. 

6. Newly prepared drawings. 

7. Marked-up copies of Specifications, addenda, and Change Orders. 

8. Marked-up Product Data submittals. 

9. Record Samples. 

10. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. 

11. Record information on Work that is recorded only schematically. 


1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 

2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance 

manual requirements. 

3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record 

Documents of the Work in those Sections. 

C. Maintenance of Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field 

office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Provide separate files, racks, 

and secure storage for Project Record Documents. Do not use Project Record Documents for 

construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible 

condition. Protect record documents from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant 

location. Make documents and samples available at all times for the Architect. 


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints. 

2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows: 

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1


a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints. Architect will 

initial and date each print and mark whether general scope of changes, additional 

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. Architect will return 

prints for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal. 

b. Final Submittal: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints, and three copies. 

Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were 

recorded. 

3. Submit record drawings to the Architect for the Owner’s records. Organize into sets and 

bind and label sets for the owners use. 

4. Thirty days prior to Substantial Completion, submit record drawings to the Architect for 

review. Organize into sets and bind and label sets for the Owner's continued use. 

5. Record drawings and specifications must be available for review by the Architect at each 

Application for Payment. The record should reflect the work that has been accomplished 

during the time period of the Application for Payment. 

B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and 

contract modifications. 

C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. 

1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, 

submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record 

Product Data. 


2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS 

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings 

and Shop Drawings. Markup Procedure: During construction, maintain a set of OCE prints of 

Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for Project Record Document purposes. 

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies 

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, 

whether individual or entity is installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the 

marked-up Record Prints. 

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be 

difficult to identify or measure and record later. 

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. 

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup 

before enclosing concealed installations. 

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. 

b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. 

c. Depths of foundations below first floor. 



d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. 

e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. 

f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. 

g. Actual equipment locations. 

h. Duct size and routing. 

i. Locations of concealed internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in 

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction. 

j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. 

k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. 

l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. 

m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. 

n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 

3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing 

actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, 

show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish 

between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted 

from original Drawings. 

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order 

numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. 

7. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work 

until required information is recorded. Date entries reflecting change. 

B. Record Prints: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review 

marked-up Record Prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected prints 

of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 

1. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. 

Erase, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 

2. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 

3. Print the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for use as Record Prints. Architect will 

make the Contract Drawings available to Contractor's print shop. 

4. Review of Record Prints: Before copying and distributing, submit corrected 

transparencies and the original marked-up prints to the Architect for review. When 

acceptable, the Architect will initial and date each print. Acceptance by the Architect 

indicates acceptance of general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and of 

the quality of drafting. 

a. The Architect will return record prints and the original marked-up prints to the 

Contractor for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal. 

C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record 

Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop 

Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting 

an alternate, substitution, or other modification. 

2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record 

the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly 



prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for 

formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting. 

D. Format: After completing the preparation of transparency record drawings, print 3 blue- or 

black-line prints of each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were 

recorded. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT 

RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 

1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into 

manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification 

on cover sheets. 

2. Identification: As follows: 


b. Date. 

c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." 

d. Name of Architect. 

e. Name of Contractor. 

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS 

A. Preparation: During the construction period, maintain 1 copy of the Project Specifications, 

including addenda and modifications issued, for Project Record Document purposes. Mark 

Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that 

indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. Note related project record 

drawing information, where applicable. 

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that 

cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and 

equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to 

provide a record of selections made and to document coordination with record Product 

Data submittals and maintenance manuals. 

4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in 

operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. 

5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where 

applicable. 

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA 

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation 

varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. During the construction 

period, maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal for Project Record Document 

purposes. 

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that 

cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 



2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in 

manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 

3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable. 

4. Upon completion of markup, submit a complete set of record Product Data to the 

Architect for the Owner's records. 

5. Where record Product Data is required as part of maintenance manuals, submit markedup 

Product Data as an insert in the manual instead of submittal as record Product Data. 

2.4 RECORD SAMPLE SUBMITTAL 

A. Immediately prior to date of Substantial Completion meet with the Architect and the Owner's 

personnel at the site to determine which of the Samples maintained during the construction 

period shall be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes. Comply with the Architect's 

instructions for packaging, identification marking, and delivery to the Owner's Sample storage 

space. Dispose of other Samples in a manner specified for disposing surplus and waste 

materials. 

2.5 MAINTENANCE MANUAL SUBMITTAL 

A. When each construction activity that requires submittal of (3) maintenance manuals is 

nominally complete, but before Substantial Completion, submit maintenance manuals specified. 

Refer to Section 01730 “Operation and Maintenance Data” for administrative and procedural 

requirements for maintenance manuals. 

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS 

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous 

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately 

prior to Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, 

properly identified. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued 

use and reference. Categories of requirements resulting in miscellaneous records include, but 

are not limited to, the following: 

1. Field records on excavations and foundations. 

2. Field records on underground construction and similar work. 

3. Survey showing locations and elevations of underground lines. 

4. Invert elevations of drainage piping. 

5. Surveys establishing building lines and levels. 

6. Authorized measurements utilizing unit prices or allowances. 

7. Records of plant treatment. 

8. Ambient and substrate condition tests. 

9. Certifications received in lieu of labels on bulk products. 

10. Batch mixing and bulk delivery records. 

11. Testing and qualification of tradesmen. 

12. Documented qualification of installation firms. 

13. Load and performance testing. 

14. Inspections and certifications by governing authorities. 

15. Leakage and water-penetration tests. 



16. Fire-resistance and flame-spread test results. 

17. Final inspection and correction procedures. 


3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE 

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project 

Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as 

they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. 

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the 

field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project 

Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and 

in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to 

Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 




SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's 

personnel, including the following: 

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 

2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 


1. Division 01 Section "Allowances" for administrative and procedural requirements for 

demonstration and training allowances. 

2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for 

preinstruction conferences. 

3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and 

training for products in those Sections. 


A. Instruction Program: Submit two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration 

and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and 

instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each 

training module. 

1. At completion of training, submit one complete training manual(s) for Owner's use. 

B. Qualification Data: For instructor. 

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of 

instruction time. 

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and 

documentation. 

E. For each training session, submit reproducible digital video recording of actual session for 

Owner’s use. 

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1



A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with 

requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and 

maintenance procedures and training. 

B. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in 


related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 

2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, 

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 

3. Review required content of instruction. 

4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions 

and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable. 


A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to 

minimize disrupting Owner's operations. 

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction 

time, and course content. 

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and 

maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data 

has been reviewed and approved by Architect. 


2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM 

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules 

for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification 

Sections, and as follows: 

1. Motorized doors, including automatic entrance doors. 

2. Equipment, including residential appliances. 

3. Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm and fire-extinguishing systems. 

4. Intrusion detection systems. 

5. Heat generation, including boilers, pumps] and water distribution piping. 

6. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems and terminal 

equipment and devices. 

7. HVAC instrumentation and controls. 

8. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers, switchboards, panel boards, 

uninterruptible power supplies and motor controls. 

9. Packaged engine generators, including transfer switches. 



10. Lighting equipment and controls. 

11. Communication systems, including surveillance, clocks and programming, voice and data 

and] television equipment. 

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include 

a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each 

module, include instruction for the following: 

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: 

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 

b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 

c. Operating standards. 

d. Regulatory requirements. 

e. Equipment function. 

f. Operating characteristics. 

g. Limiting conditions. 

h. Performance curves. 

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: 

a. Emergency manuals. 

b. Operations manuals. 

c. Maintenance manuals. 

d. Project Record Documents. 

e. Identification systems. 

f. Warranties and bonds. 

g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: 

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. 

b. Instructions on stopping. 

c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 

d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. 

e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. 

f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: 

a. Startup procedures. 

b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 

c. Routine and normal operating instructions. 

d. Regulation and control procedures. 

e. Control sequences. 

f. Safety procedures. 

g. Instructions on stopping. 

h. Normal shutdown instructions. 

i. Operating procedures for emergencies. 

j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. 

k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 



l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 

m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 

5. Adjustments: Include the following: 

a. Alignments. 

b. Checking adjustments. 

c. Noise and vibration adjustments. 

d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: 

a. Diagnostic instructions. 

b. Test and inspection procedures. 

7. Maintenance: Include the following: 

a. Inspection procedures. 

b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 

c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 

d. Procedures for routine cleaning 

e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. 

f. Procedures for routine maintenance. 

g. Instruction on use of special tools. 

8. Repairs: Include the following: 

a. Diagnosis instructions. 

b. Repair instructions. 

c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly 

instructions. 

d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. 

e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. 



A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training 

module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual. 

B. Set up instructional equipment and digital video recording equipment at instruction location. 

3.2 INSTRUCTION 

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, 

to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of 

participants, instruction times, and location. 



B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain 

systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 

1. Architect will furnish an instructor only to describe basis of system design, operational 

requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements. 

2. Owner will furnish an instructor only to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 

3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. 

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires 

seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 

1. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance 

notice. 

D. Record Session on digital video media. 

E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's 

mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test. 

F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove 

instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial 

training use. 



G.H.A.P. Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 




Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: 

1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 


1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owneroccupancy 

requirements, and phasing requirements. 

2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 

3. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and belowgrade 

improvements. 


A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless 

indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. 

B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall 

where indicated. 

C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and 

that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and 

reinstalled. 

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP 

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones 

and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to 

Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1


1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS 

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 

2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 

3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, 

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid 

delays. 

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed 

by selective demolition operations. 

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 


A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician. 

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures 

proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control 

and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. 

C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending 

dates for each activity. 

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 

D. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start 

of demolition. 

E. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. 

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 

A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 

B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility 

licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS 

A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as 

far as practical. 

B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding 

with selective demolition. 



C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the 

Work. 

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 

2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify 

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate 

contract. 

D. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them 

against damage during selective demolition operations. 

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 


2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before 

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities 

having jurisdiction. 

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. 



A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition 

operations. 

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not 

guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. 

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of 

selective demolition required. 

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended 

function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. 

Promptly submit a written report to Architect. 

E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction 

photographs and preconstruction videotapes. 

1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Photographic 

Documentation." 

2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide 

photographs and video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by 

salvage operations. 



3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be 

reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, 

materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. 

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and 

protect them against damage. 

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in 

Division 01 Section "Summary." 

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, 

disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems 

serving areas to be selectively demolished. 

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 

2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 

3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide 

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain 

continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC 

systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and 

cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same 

or compatible piping material. 

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 

d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and 

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and 

make equipment operational. 

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and 

remove equipment and deliver to Owner. 


A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal 

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other 

adjacent occupied and used facilities. 

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section 

"Temporary Facilities and Controls." 

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent 

injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and 

to and from occupied portions of building. 



2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of 

existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage 

and damage to structure and interior areas. 

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required 

to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes 

to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction 

being demolished. 

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL 

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new 

construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of 

governing regulations and as follows: 

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete 

selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting 

members on the next lower level. 

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use 

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. 

Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and 

chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to 

remain. 

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring 

existing finished surfaces. 

4. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in 

Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." 

B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling 

during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, 

protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their 

original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS 

A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to 

remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw 

cuts. 

B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, 

using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. 

C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and 

remove. 



3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS 

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or 

otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site 

and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces 

and areas. 

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that 

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 

4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste 

Management and Disposal." 

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 

3.7 CLEANING 

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective 

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition 

operations began. 




SECTION 018113 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with certain USGBC 

LEED prerequisites and credits needed for Project to obtain LEED Gold certification based on 

LEED-H, Version 2.2. 

A. Other LEED prerequisites and credits needed to obtain LEED certification depend on 

material selections and may not be specifically identified as LEED requirements. 

Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits may be 

used as one criterion to evaluate substitution requests and comparable product requests. 

B. Additional LEED prerequisites and credits needed to obtain the indicated LEED 

certification depend on Architect's design and other aspects of Project that are not part of 

the Work of the Contract. 

C. A copy of the preliminary LEED Project checklist is attached at the end of this Section 

for information only. 

D. Owner will provide LEED-H provider and rater. Cooperate and coordinate with LEED- 

H provider and rater to document LEED application. 


A. Divisions 01 through 33 Sections for LEED requirements specific to the work of each of 

these Sections. Requirements may or may not include reference to LEED. 


A. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that wood used 

to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to 

comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." 

Certificates shall include evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an 

FSC-FSC-accredited certification body. FSC certification is required only for tropical woods (if 

used). 

B. LEED: Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design. 

C. Rapidly Renewable Materials: Materials made from plants that are typically harvested within a 

10-year or shorter cycle. Rapidly renewable materials include products made from bamboo, 

cotton, flax, jute, straw, sunflower seed hulls, vegetable oils, or wool. 

SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113 - 1


D. Locally Produced Materials: Materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as 

well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. If only a fraction of a product or 

material is extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only that percentage 

(by weight) shall contribute to the regional value. 

E. Regionally Manufactured Materials: Materials that are manufactured within a radius of 500 

miles from Project site. Manufacturing refers to the final assembly of components into the 

building product that is installed at Project site. 

F. Regionally Extracted and Manufactured Materials: Regionally manufactured materials made 

from raw materials that are extracted, harvested, or recovered within a radius of 500 miles from 


G. Recycled Content: The recycled content value of a material assembly shall be determined by 

weight. The recycled fraction of the assembly is then multiplied by the cost of assembly to 

determine the recycled content value. 

A. "Post-consumer" material is defined as waste material generated by households or by 

commercial, industrial, and institutional facilities in their role as end users of the product, 

which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. 

B. "Pre-consumer" material is defined as material diverted from the waste stream during the 

manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as rework, regrind, or 

scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that 

generated it. 

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Respond to questions and requests from Architect and the USGBC regarding LEED credits that 

are the responsibility to the Contractor, that depend on product selection or product qualities, or 

that depend on Contractor’s procedures until the USGBC has made its determination on the 

project’s LEED certification application. Document responses as informational submittals. 


A. General: Submit additional LEED submittals required by other Specification Sections. 

B. LEED submittals are in addition to other submittals. If submitted item is identical to that 

submitted to comply with other requirements, submit duplicate copies as a separate submittal to 

verify compliance with indicated LEED requirements. 

C. Project Materials Cost Data: Provide statement indicating total cost for materials used for 

Project. Costs exclude labor, overhead, and profit. Include breakout of costs for the following 

categories of items: 

A. Furniture. 

B. Plumbing. 

C. Mechanical. 

D. Electrical. 

E. Specialty items such as elevators and equipment. 



D. LEED Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within 14 days of date established for 

commencement of the Work indicating how the following requirements will be met: 

A. Credit MR 2.1: 

a. Provide a copy of wood product suppliers’ notice containing all of the following 

elements: 

i. a statement that the builder’s preference is to purchase products containing 

tropical wood only if it is FSC-certified; 

ii. a request for the country of manufacture of each product supplied; and 

iii. a request for a list of FSC-certified tropical wood products the vendor can 

supply. 

iv. Required notice to all wood products suppliers. Accountability Form 

confirming that no tropical woods were used except those that were FSCcertified 

or reclaimed. 

b. If tropical wood is intentionally used (i.e., specified in purchasing documents), use 

only FSC-certified tropical wood products. Reused or reclaimed materials are 

exempt. (Owner’s Green rates will provide copy of form letter upon request). 

B. Credit MR 2.2: List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate cost, postconsumer 

recycled content for each product having recycled content. 

C. Credit MR 2.2: List of proposed locally-produced materials. Identify each material, 

including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight that is considered regional. 

D. Credit MR 3.1 

a. Relevant product stamps, certification labels, web links, and/or literature to the 

Verification Team as needed to demonstrate that the credit requirements were met. 

b. Signed and dated Accountability Form to indicate that each product being counted 

in this credit represents the required minimum percentage of the applicable 

component. 

E. Credit EQ 8.1: Construction indoor containment control plan. 

F. MR 3.1: Construction Waste Management Plan investigating and documenting all local 

options for diversion of all major constituents of the project waste stream. 

E. LEED Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit reports 

comparing actual construction and purchasing activities with LEED action plans for the 

following: 

A. Credit MR 3.1: Document the diversion rate for Construction Waste including waste 

tickets 

B. Credit MR 2.2: Recycled content. 

C. Credit MR 2..2]: Locally-produced materials. 

D. Credit MR 2.1: Certified wood products. 

F. LEED Documentation Submittals: 

A. Credit MR 3.1 Comply with Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and 

Disposal." 



B. Credit MR 2.: Product data and certification letter indicating percentages by weight of 

post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content. 

Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 

C. Credit MR 2.2: Product data for regional materials indicating location and distance from 

Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each 

raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the 

fraction by weight that is considered locally produced. 

D. Retain first subparagraph below if Contractor determines which items will be made from 

certified wood to achieve the 50 percent requirement. Delete if other Specification 

Sections designate items to be made from certified wood. First option applies to LEED- 

CS; second to LEED-NC and LEED-CI. 

E. Credit MR 2.1 Product data and chain-of-custody certificates for products containing 

certified wood. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product. 

F. Credit MR 8.1: 

a. Construction indoor containment control plan. 

b. Construction Documentation: Six photographs at three different times during the 

construction period, along with a brief description of the SMACNA approach 

employed, documenting implementation of the containment management 

measures, such as protection of ducts. 

c. Signed Accountability Forms indicating that the system is installed according to 

design specifications. 

G. Credit EQ 8.3: 

a. Signed Accountability Forms describing the building air flush-out procedures 

including the dates when flush-out was begun and completed according to 

requirements. 

H. Credit MR 2.2: Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing 

system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L 

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 

I. Credit MR 2.2: Product data for paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing 

system indicating chemical composition and] VOC content of each product used. 

Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 

J. Credit MR 2.2: Product data for cement concrete products containing fly-ash content by 

percentage of weight. 


2.1 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS 

A. Credit MR 2.2: Provide building materials with recycled content that meet LEED-H standard 

referenced percent of materials used for project. 

A. Recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing weight of post-consumer 

recycled content in the item by total weight of the item. 



2.2 LOCALLY-PRODUCED MATERIALS 

A. Credit MR2.2: Provide LEED-H designated building materials that are locally-produced 

materials. 

A. Foundation aggregate 

B. Portland Cement 

C. Gypsum Board (drywall) 

D. Concrete Masonry 

2.3 CERTIFIED WOOD 

A. Credit MR2.1: If any tropical wood is used, provide a minimum of 50 percent (by cost) of 

wood-based materials that are produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSCaccredited 

certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for 

Forest Stewardship." 

B. Credit MR2.1: Provide all wood products suppliers with a Notice of Preference for FSC 

products. 

2.4 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS 

A. Credit MR 2.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use adhesives 

and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according 

to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D: 

A. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 

B. Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L. 

C. Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L. 

D. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

E. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

F. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

G. Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

H. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

I. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

J. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

K. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L. 

L. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L. 

M. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 

N. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. 

O. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L. 

P. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L. 

Q. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L. 

R. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L. 

S. Special Purpose Contact Adhesive (contact adhesive that is used to bond melamine 

covered board, metal, unsupported vinyl, Teflon, ultra-high molecular weight 

polyethylene, rubber or wood veneer 1/16 inch or less in thickness to any surface): 250 

g/L. 

T. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L. 

U. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L. 



V. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L. 

W. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L. 

X. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. 

Y. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L. 

Z. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 350 g/L. 

AA. ABS Welding Compounds: 400 g/L. 

BB. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L. 

CC. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. 

DD. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 650 g/L. 

EE. Sheet Applied Rubber Lining Adhesive: 850 g/L. 

FF. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Mist Spray: 65 percent by weight. 

GG. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Web Spray: 55 percent by weight. 

HH. Special Purpose Aerosol Adhesive (All Types): 70 percent by weight. 

II. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. 

JJ. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 

KK. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. 

LL. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. 

MM. Other Sealants: 420 g/L. 

NN. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 

OO. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 

PP. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L. 

QQ. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L. 

B. Credit MR 2.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use paints and 

coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 

40 CFR 59, Subpart D and the following chemical restrictions: 

A. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 50 g/L. 

B. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 150 g/L. 

C. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 

g/L. 

D. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 

E. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 

F. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 

G. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 

H. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 

I. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 

J. Flat Interior Topcoat Paints: VOC not more than 50 g/L. 

K. Nonflat Interior Topcoat Paints: VOC not more than 150 g/L. 

L. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 

g/L. 

M. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 

N. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 

O. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 

P. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 

Q. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 

R. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 

S. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC not more than 200 g/L. 

T. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC not more than 400 g/L. 

U. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC not more than 340 g/L. 

V. Pretreatment Wash Primers: VOC not more than 420 g/L. 



W. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by 

weight total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more 

benzene rings). 

X. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: 

a. Acrolein. 

b. Acrylonitrile. 

c. Antimony. 

d. Benzene. 

e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. 

f. Cadmium. 

g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. 

h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. 

i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. 

j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. 

k. Diethyl phthalate. 

l. Dimethyl phthalate. 

m. Ethylbenzene. 

n. Formaldehyde. 

o. Hexavalent chromium. 

p. Isophorone. 

q. Lead. 

r. Mercury. 

s. Methyl ethyl ketone. 

t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. 

u. Methylene chloride. 

v. Naphthalene. 

w. Toluene (methylbenzene). 

x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. 

y. Vinyl chloride. 


3.1 QUALITY MANAGEMENT FOR DURABILITY 

A. ID 2.1: Review the Verification Checklist that is part of this Bid Package. At Substantial 

Completion provide signed, completed checklist to Green Rater. 

3.2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 

A. Credit MR 3.1 and Credit MR3.2: Comply with Division 01 Section "Construction Waste 

Management and Disposal." Develop waste management plan and submit waste tickets to 

Green Rater along with a summary of waste diverted at substantial completion. 

3.3 CONSTRUCTION CONTAINMENT CONTROL 

A. Credit EQ 8.1: 



B. Credit EQ 8.3: 

1. After construction ends, prior to occupancy and will all interior finishes installed, 

perform a building flush-out for a minimum of 48 hours. 

3.4 EDUCATION 

A. Credit AE 1.1 and 1.3: Provide all necessary material and information to Green Rater for the 

purpose of educating the Owner and tenants in the operation and maintenance of all relevant 

building finishes and systems and equipment. 

B. Credit AE 1.2: Price all necessary material and information to Green Rater for the purpose of 

educating the Building Management in the operation and maintenance of all Building systems, 

equipment and finishes. Include walk through with Building Manager documented on digital 

media. 

3.5 MATERIAL-EFFICIENT FRAMING 

A. MR1.1 and MR 1.5: Submit shop drawings to Green Rater and to Architect, indicating all offsite 

fabricated panelized wall construction and engineered trusses for floor and roof structure. 

3.6 BASIC COMBUSTION VENTING AND LOCAL EXHAUST 

A. EQ 2.1: provide catalog cut sheets for all appliances, carbon monoxide monitors, space and water 

heating equipment for HERS to verify compliance with the prerequisite requirements for venting of 

appliances, CO monitoring on each floor, and closed combustion space and water heating equipment. 

B. EQ 5.1 and EQ 5.2: provide catalog cut sheets for all appliances and equipment for HERS rater to 

verify required performance of local exhaust system including occupancy sensor. 




SECTION 028100 - UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYTSTEM 

PART 1. GENERAL 

1.01 SUMMARY: 

A. The work consists of installing a complete underground irrigation system as specified 

in this document. Prior to commencing work ,CONTRACTOR shall provide a 30 

scale plan to the owner's representative showing complete system layout, schedule of 

valves, valve sizes, mainline and lateral pipe sizes, sleeve locations and sizes, and 

complete legend with a list of components. The CONTRACTOR performing this 

work shall furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and permits necessary for the 

completion of the system, except those specified to be furnished by others. Unless 

otherwise specified or indicated, the construction of the irrigation shall include the 

furnishing, installing, and testing of all pipe, fittings, valves, heads, controllers, wires, 

air release and vacuum valves, backflow preventers, automatic drain valves, manual 

drain valves, valve boxes, and all other components pertinent to the drawings and 

specifications of this system. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all trenching, 

excavating, boring, backfilling, compacting, concrete pouring, electrical work, 

welding, and any other work necessary for the completion of the project. 

1.02 IRRIGATION DESIGN CRITERIA 

A. Where ever applicable, place mainline and lateral piping within two (2') feet of face 

of curb (f.o.c) all valves shall be located in planting areas and all piping shall be 

installed prior to planting. No tees, ells or other turns in piping shall be located under 

paving. Cap all ends hand tight prior to backfill. All irrigation shall be installed 

within applicable right of ways. 

B. Each shrub shall be irrigated with one (1) .5 GPH bubbler. Each tree to be irrigated 

with three (3) .5 GPH bubblers. 

C. If the contract drawings and/or specifications do not thoroughly describe the method 

or techniques to be used for installation, then the contractor shall follow the 

installation methods recommended by the manufacturer. 

D. All plant materials installed shall have the automatic irrigation system fully operable 

at the time of plant installation. 

E. Contractor shall locate bubblers to provide uniform distribution to all plants. 

F. Contractor shall perform test & balance system to provide even distribution to all 

plants. 

G. Trees and shrubs must be zoned separately. Plant materials in parking islands to be 

zoned separately from plant materials at building foundation. Plant materials with 

northern and eastern exposures shall be zoned separately from those with south and 

western exposures. 

1.03 REFERENCES: 

UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 028100-1


A. ASTM 

D 1784 D 2564 

D 1875 D 2774 

D 2241 D 3139 

D 2466 

D 2467 

1.04 SUBMITTALS AND RECORD DRAWINGS 

A. SUBMITTALS: CONTRACTOR shall prepare and make submittals to the 

OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE on all irrigation equipment including irrigation plan 

controllers, heads, backflow preventers, valves, pipe, emitters, regulators and fittings. 

B. RECORD DRAWINGS: 

PART 2. PRODUCTS 

1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and keep up to date a complete set of "asbuilt" 

drawings which shall be corrected daily to show all changes in the 

location of sprinkler heads, controllers, backflow preventers, valves, drains, 

meters, points of connection, wire splice points, pipe and wire routing and 

other changes that may have been made from the original drawings. All gate 

valves, manual drains, wire splices, automatic and manual valve locations, 

controllers, power supply, and mainline piping shall be shown with actual 

measurements to reference points so they may be easily located in the field. 

2. At the time of final acceptance the CONTRACTOR shall furnish a 

reproducible record drawing prepared by a qualified drafts-person showing the 

entire completed system as actually installed. The CONTRACTOR shall 

provide a legible, reduction of the drawings, laminated in plastic. This is the 

responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and shall not be construed to be the 

responsibility of any other party. 

2.01 2.01 GENERAL: 

A. All materials shall be new and without flaws or defects of any type and shall be the 

best of their class and kind. All materials shall have a minimum guarantee of one 

year against material defects or defective workmanship. 

B. All materials shall be of the brands and types noted on the drawings or as specified 

herein, or approved as equal. 

2.02 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS 

A. PLASTIC PIPE: 

1. All mainline plastic pipe which is 2½" or smaller, shall be Schedule 40 PVC 

and shall conform to ASTM D 1785. All mainline pipe which is larger than 2" 

diameter shall be PVC 1120 or 1220 (SDR-PR) pipe, SDR-21 with a 200 psi 

pressure rating and conforming to ASTM D 2241, with flexible joints 

conforming to ASTM D 3139 unless otherwise approved by LANDSCAPE 



ARCHITECT. All lateral lines plastic pipe shall be Class 200 PVC and shall 

conform to ASTM D 2241. 

2. PVC pipe shall be continuously marked with identification of the manufacture, 

type, class, size and material and shall conform to ASTM D 1784. Solvent 

joints shall meet ASTM D 2774 and D 2855 requirements. Pipe shall be 

produced in 20 foot lengths. All plastic pipe shall be continuously and 

permanently marked with the following information: manufacturer's name, 

nominal pipe size, schedule, kind of material, kind of pipe, and the pressure 

rating in psi in accordance with the standards of the National Sanitation 

Foundation. Pipe shall be free of holes, foreign material, blisters, wrinkles 

dents, or sun scald. 

B. PVC Fittings: Fittings on PVC lines shall be Schedule 40 PVC, Type 1, Cell 

Classification 12454-B, and shall comply with ASTM D 2466, D 2467, and D 1784. 

C. Risers and Threaded Nipples: All threaded PVC nipples and risers shall be Schedule 

80 PVC pipe. All galvanized nipples and risers shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel 

pipe. 

2.03 VALVES AND VALVE BOXES: 

A. Valves: Valves for use in electrically controlled automatic control systems shall be 

diaphragm activated and hydraulically operated solenoid valves. 

B. Valve Boxes: Valve boxes shall be Carson 1419 (or approved equal) or larger as 

required with brown or tan bolt down covers. 

2.04 SPRINKLER HEADS AND BUBBLERS: 

A. Sprinkler heads, and bubblers shall be as follows: 

2.05 CONTROLLERS: 

Grass areas – Hunter 1-20, 6” pop up height 

Bubblers – Rainbird 1400 

Install spray heads on swing joints. 

A. “Controller shall be Hunter ICC series installed in a locking outdoor all weather 

metal enclosure. Location to be approved by Project Manager.” 

2.06 BACKFLOW PREVENTER: 

A. The backflow prevention device shall be a reduced pressure assembly installed to 

meet all local codes and requirements. Install with power and heat tape. Provide 

ball drains on the vertical inlet and outlet pipes. 

2.07 CEMENTS, CLEANERS/PRIMERS AND JOINT COMPOUNDS: 



A. Cement shall be No. 2200 series Uni-Weld or Rectorseal Gold low temperature 

plastic pipe cement for use on all sizes and schedules of PVC pipe and fittings. 

Cement must be NSF approved and meet ASTM D 2564 specifications. 

B. Cleaner/primer shall be No. 8700 United Elchem hi-etch cleaner/primer. 

Cleaner/primer must be any color other than clear. 

C. All threaded connections between PVC and metal pipe shall be made using 

Rectorseal No. 100 virgin heavy duty sealing paste of plasto-joint stick as 

manufactured by Lake Chemical Company and teflon tape. 

D. All metal to metal connections shall be made using Rectorseal No. 5, slow dry, soft 

set pipe thread compound. All PVC to PVC threaded connections shall use teflon 

tape. 

E. "O"-ring gasket and pipe spigot ends shall be lubricated using the lubricant 

recommended or supplied by the pipe manufacturer. If the pipe manufacturer does 

not provide a lubricant for the pipe, use IPS Weld-0n No.787 gasket lube as 

manufactured by Industrial Polychemical Service. 

2.08 WIRE (120 VOLTS): 

A. Wire for the 120 volt wiring shall be solid copper (or stranded copper in larger wire 

sizes) underground feeder for direct burial and PVC insulated. Size of wire shall be 

No.12 AWG. 

2.09 WIRE (24 volts): 

A. Wire for the 24 volt wiring shall be solid copper wire, PVC insulated, UL approved 

underground feeder wire for direct burial in ground. Common wires shall be No.12, 

white. Other wires hall be sized as specified by valve manufacturer based on length 

of run. The wire shall be supplied in either 500 feet or 2,500 feet rolls. 

2.010 WIRE SPLICING MATERIALS: 

A. All wire splices shall be made watertight wire connectors. All wiring installed under 

sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, etc., shall be installed in a separate 1 1/4 inch or 

larger Class 200 PVC sleeve. 

2.011 OTHER MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS AND MATERIALS: 

A. All other miscellaneous fittings and materials shall be as specified on the drawings. 

PART 3. INSTALLATION: 

3.01 GENERAL: 

A. This section includes installation specifications for all items installed as a part of the 

irrigation systems. Certain construction procedures or minor equipment installation 

procedures may have been omitted from these specifications that are necessary for 

the proper installation of the system. In any case, all materials and equipment shall 



be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner according to manufacturer's published 

recommendations and specifications, local, and state codes, as shown on the detail 

drawings and as specified herein. 

3.02 PRODUCT HANDLING: 

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for correct procedures in loading, 

unloading, staking, transporting, and handling all materials to be used in the system. 

The CONTRACTOR shall avoid rough handling which could affect the useful life of 

equipment. Pipe shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer's published 

recommendations on loading, unloading, and storage. 

3.03 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING: 

A. The CONTRACTOR shall stake out the location of each run of pipe and all sprinkler 

heads and valves prior to trenching. Each run of the system shall be approved by the 

OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE before actual installation is started. Prior to 

trenching, the Contractor shall contact NM One-Call to spot all utility lines. 

B. Excavation and trenching for pipe lines shall be true to line with the trench banks as 

nearly vertical as practicable. The width of the trenches shall not be greater than 

necessary to permit proper jointing, tamping, backfilling, bedding or any other 

installation procedures that my be necessary. Trench widths shall also be wide 

enough so that there will be a minimum horizontal separation of 2 (two) inches 

between pipes in the same trench. 

3.04 DEPTH OF BURY: 

A. There shall be 28" of cover for all constant pressure mainline. There shall be 18" of 

cover for all mainline located downstream of the master valve. There shall be 18" of 

cover for all lateral lines. There shall be a minimum of 6" of cover for all 3/4" drip 

poly tubing. 

3.05 PIPE AND FITTINGS: 

A. Installation of plastic pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's 

published recommendations and procedures and is mentioned in the specifications. 

Manufacturer's published recommended procedures for making solvent weld fittings 

shall be strictly adhered to. 

B. Caution shall be exercised by the CONTRACTOR in handling, loading, unloading 

and storing of PVC pipe and fittings. All PVC pipe shall be stored and transported in 

a vehicle with a bed long enough to allow the pipe to lie flat without subjecting it to 

undue bending or concentrated external load at any point. Any section of pipe that 

has been dented or damaged or in any other way found to be defective, either before, 

or after laying shall be replaced with sound pipe without additional expense to the 

OWNER. 

C. Before installation, the inside of the pipe shall be cleaned of all direct and foreign 

matter and shall be kept in a cleaned condition during and after laying of the pipe. 

When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe and fittings shall be securely closed 



so that no trench water, earth or other foreign substances will enter the pipe or 

fittings. Where pipe ends are left for future expansion or connections, they shall be 

valved and capped, as directed on the drawings. 

D. All PVC pipe and fittings shall be assembled to permit the pipe or fittings to be 

joined at the true parallel position of the fitting. Placement of pipe in curving 

trenches which causes bending and stress on pipe and fittings will not be permitted. 

No excess piping or fittings shall be permitted in the installation of the system, which 

may increase pressure loss or potential blockage. 

E. Excavation and trenching shall be true to line and at the width and depth specified in 

other sections of these specifications. Before installing the pipe, all rubbish and rocks 

shall be removed from the trenches. If the soil is extremely rocky, the trenches shall 

be padded with dirt or sand as outlined in other portions of these specifications. 

Material used for pipe padding shall be approved by the OWNER'S 

REPRESENTATIVE. The full length of each section of the pipe shall rest solidly 

upon the pipe bed. 

F. Pipe shall not be laid in water or when trench or weather conditions are unsuitable for 

the work. Any water which may be encountered or may accumulate in the trenches 

or excavation shall be pumped out or otherwise removed as necessary to keep the 

bottom of the trench or excavation free and clear of water during the progress of the 

work. 

G. All pipe shall be installed in a manner so as to provide for expansion and contraction 

as recommended by the manufacturer. 

H. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, all piping passing under sidewalks, 

roadways, parking lots, etc., shall be sleeved in a Class 200 PVC pipe two sizes 

larger than the pipe to be sleeved. 

I. When more than one pipe is installed in the same trench, in no case shall one pipe be 

installed above or below another. Pipe can be installed in the same trench if pipes are 

laid side by side. In no case shall mainline and lateral pipe be installed in the same 

trench. 

J. The minimum horizontal clearance between lines in the same trench shall be 2 (two) 

inches. 

K. After all sprinkler piping, risers, valves, thrust blocks, etc., have been installed and 

partially backfilled as specified in other parts of these specifications, the control 

valve shall be opened and a full head of water used to flush out the system. After the 

system is thoroughly flushed, risers shall be capped off and the system pressure 

tested in accordance with the testing section of these specifications. At the conclusion 

of the pressure test the heads shall be installed and the backfill operation completed. 

3.06 SOLVENT WELDING PROCEDURE: 

A. PVC plastic pipe shall be squarely cut. 

B. Burrs left form cutting shall be wiped off with a clean, dry cloth. 



C. Utilizing a cleaner/primer, thoroughly clean the mating pipe end and the fitting 

socket with a clean dry cloth. 

D. Apply a uniform coat of solvent cement to the outside of the pipe end with a nonsynthetic 

brush or dauber. 

E. In like manner, apply a thin coating of solvent cement to the inside of the fitting 

socket. 

F. Re-apply a light coat of solvent cement to the pipe and quickly insert it into the 

fitting to the full depth of the fitting socket. 

G. Rotate the pipe or fitting approximately 1/4 turn to insure even distribution of the 

solvent cement. 

H. Hold in position for approximately 30 seconds. 

I. Wipe off any excess solvent cement that forms as a bead around the outer shoulder. 

J. Care should be taken so as not to use an excess amount of solvent cement that could 

cause burrs or obstructions to form on the inside of the pipe joint. 

K. Solvent weld joints shall be allowed to cure for at least 24 hours before pressure is 

applied to the system. 

3.07 BACKFILLING: 

A. Upon completion of a particular section of the irrigation system, and after sufficient 

time has elapsed for the curing of solvent weld joints, partial backfilling can begin, 

leaving all joints, risers and connections exposed for visual inspection during the 

hydrostatic test. After completion and acceptance of the hydrostatic test for a 

particular section of the irrigation system the backfill operation can be completed. 

B. All backfill material shall be subject to approval by the OWNER'S 

REPRESENTATIVE. Backfill material shall be free from rubbish, rock, large 

stones, brush, sod, frozen material or other unsuitable substances that may damage 

pipe during the backfilling operations. 

C. In the event that the material from the excavation or trenching is found to be 

unsuitable for use in backfill, it shall be removed from the site and properly disposed 

of by the CONTRACTOR at his own expense. The CONTRACTOR shall then, at no 

additional cost to the OWNER, arrange for, purchase, and furnish suitable backfill 

material consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand, or other approved materials free 

of large clods of earth or sharp stones. 

D. In rocky areas, the trench depth shall be 6 (six) inches below the normal trench depth 

to allow for 6 (six) inches of suitable backfill as padding for the pipe. In like manner, 

there shall be at least 6 (six) inches of padding on either side of the pipe as a padding 

against the rock wall of the trench. 



E. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 12 (twelve) inches in depth 

and shall be thoroughly tamped, rolled or otherwise compacted to near original 

density or so that a minimum of settling will result. Backfill shall be placed to the 

original ground level or to the limits designated on the drawings. If settlement of 

trenches occurs within one year from date of completion, it shall be the 

CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to refill trenches and re-seed or sod the repaired 

areas. 

3.08 SADDLE TAPS: 

A. No saddle taps shall be permitted. 

3.09 SLEEVED CROSSING: 

A. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, all piping installed under roadways, parking 

lots, etc., shall be sleeved in a Class 200 PVC pipe two sizes larger than the pipe to 

be sleeved. Where possible, wiring shall be placed in a separate sleeve from that of 

the pipe crossing and shall be 1 1/4 or larger Class 200. 

B. Every effort shall be made by the CONTRACTOR to install sleeving prior to the 

pouring or construction of the sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, etc., if at all 

possible. If prior sleeving is not possible, all crossings must be bored unless 

authorization for an open cut is obtained from the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. 

C. Sleeving ends, with the inner pipe or wire installed, shall be taped closed using a 

good quality duct tape to prevent the entrance of dirt into the sleeve. 

3.010 THRUST BLOCKS: 

A. Concrete thrust blocks shall be provided where necessary to resist system pressure. 

Thrust blocks shall be constructed at all direction changes, size changes, valves and 

terminations, or at any other points of the system that will result in an unbalanced 

thrust line for equipment 2 (two) inches and larger. Do not obstruct the outlets of 

fittings which are intended for future connections. Thrush blocks shall be poured 

against undisturbed earth. 

3.011 SPRINKLER HEADS 

A. Sprinkler heads shall be the type and make specified and shall be installed to grade 

unless otherwise specified. Sprinkler heads shall be installed 8 (eight) inches from 

walls, walkways, and mowstrips. Sprinkler heads shall be installed 12" from back of 

street curb or sidewalk abutting curb. Heads shall be installed in the vertical 

positions, hand backfilled and compacted to near original density. 

B. Sprinkler head spacing shall not exceed the spacing shown on the approved drawings 

and shall be in the approximate locations and configuration as shown on the 

drawings. CONTRACTOR shall verify area dimensions while staking sprinkler head 

location. Sprinkler heads shall be spaced so that they are equidistant from one 

another for the given lengths and widths of the area to achieve uniform coverage. 



C. After all piping and risers are in place and connected and before installation of the 

sprinkler heads, all control valves for a given section shall be fully opened and a full 

head of water shall be used to flush out the system for a time period sufficient to 

flush entire system. 

D. If water pressure without the heads installed is not sufficient to provide adequate 

water flow from end risers, the CONTRACTOR shall cap off enough heads closest to 

the water source to provide adequate flushing of the end riser assemblies. 

3.012 CONTROLLER: 

A. The Controller location shall be as approved by project manager. 

B. The controller shall be mounted and wired according to the manufacturer's 

recommended procedures and as specified in these specifications and on the 

approved drawings. 

C. Electric control valves shall be connected to controller in the numerical sequences as 

shown on the approved drawings. 

D. Controller shall be installed in a locking controller enclosure. 

E. Controller shall be grounded as per manufacturers’ recommendations. 

3.013 ELECTRIC CONTROL VALVES: 

A. All electric control valves shall be of the type and size as approved on the 

drawings/submittals and shall be installed where shown on the approved/drawings, 

following the published recommendations of the manufacturer and in accordance 

with these specifications. 

B. The valve boxes shall have bolt down lids and of the size and type as specified 

herein. 

C. Valve wire splices shall be waterproofed using 3M Scotchlok Connectors or 

approved equal and the CONTRACTOR shall leave 24 (twenty-four) inches of coiled 

slack to facilitate raising splices to ground level without cutting wires. 

3.014 VOLT CONTROL VALVE WIRING: 

A. All wire installation procedures as described herein shall be checked to conform to 

local electrical codes. 

B. All wire used for the 24 volt wiring from the controller to the electric control valves 

shall be type "UF", 600 volt, solid copper, single conductor, PVC insulated and bear 

UL approval for direct burial underground feeder cable. Unless otherwise approved 

on the drawings, the 24 volt common wires shall be wire No.12 A.W.G. and the 

remaining 24 volt control wires shall be of an A.W.G., recommended by valve 

manufactures for approved plan distance, and of colors other than white. These colors 

shall be noted on the "as-built" record drawings. 



C. Whenever possible, the CONTRACTOR shall install the 24 volt control valve wiring 

in the same trench as the irrigation system mainline piping. All wires shall be laid on 

the bottom of the trench to one side of the pipe only. The wires shall be laid loose in 

the trench to allow for contraction of the wire. Control wires shall be taped together 

in 10'0" increments. When trenches used for piping are not appropriate for routing of 

wire, a trench, 18" deep, shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR for 24 volt wires 

and shall be identified with dimensions on the "as-built" record drawings. 

D. Wire splices, other than at valve box locations, shall be kept to a minimum and if 

needed shall be made only at common splice points and placed in a wire splice box as 

shown on the drawings. The location of these wire splices boxes shall be shown on 

the "as-built" record drawings. There shall be a 24" coil in the wires placed in the 

wire splice boxes so that the splices can be pulled out above ground level to facilitate 

testing and trouble shooting. No buried wire splices shall be permitted. All wire 

splices shall be made waterproof using 3M Scotchlok Connectors. 

E. In no case shall wires of different colors be spliced together. 

F. Control wires shall be identified with E-Z Coder WDR Series Tape at each valve and 

at the Controller and at splices. Valves shall be numbered on the "as-built" record 

drawings and on inside of valve boxes (not covers). 

3.015 120 VOLT CONTROLLER POWER WIRING: 

A. The CONTRACTOR shall familiarize himself with the work required to complete 

this portion of the installation. All 120 volt wiring shall be installed in accordance 

with local electrical codes. The 120 volt service shall consist of one black and one 

white wire. The neutral wire must be bonded. 

B. 120 volt power shall be supplied to the controller and backflow locations by a 

licensed electrician. 

3.016 MANUAL DRAIN VALVE-MAINLINE: 

A. Manual drain valves shall be installed at all low points of each mainline piping 

section, and at any other points as specified herein. 

3.017 TESTING: 

A. Upon completion of the irrigation system's mainline, the entire mainline shall be 

tested for a 4 (four) hour period at 150 psi. Prior to testing the mainline shall be 

partially backfilled leaving all joints and connections exposed for visual inspection. 

All dirt shall be flushed from the system and the line filled with water to remove air. 

The mainline shall be brought to static pressure. A pressure gauge and temporary 

valve shall be installed at the end of the mainline to permit hydrostatic pressure to be 

applied to the main. A pressure of 150 psi must be retained for a 4 (four) hour period. 

Any leaks resulting in the 4 (four) hour pressure test shall be repaired and the system 

retested until the system passes the test. 

B. Upon completion of the irrigation system's lateral sections and after sufficient time 

has been allowed for solvent weld joints to cure, the entire system shall be 



hydrostatically tested by capping off all sprinkler head risers. On systems using flex 

nipples, or swing joints, the lateral line shall be tested prior to installation of the flex 

nipples or swing joints. Prior to capping, all air and dirt shall be flushed from the 

system and the pipe partially backfilled by center loading, leaving all joints, risers, 

swing joints and connections exposed for visual inspection. All lateral irrigation 

piping must be pressure tested for 1 (one) hour at 100 psi. The procedure shall be the 

same as used for the main line. If after one hour no visual leakage has occurred and 

the 100 psi pressure has been retained, the heads shall be installed, and the backfill 

operation completed. Any leaks resulting from the hydrostatic test shall be repaired 

and the system retested until the system passes the test. 

3.018 ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM: 

A. Upon completion of the installation, the CONTRACTOR shall adjust all heads and 

valves and program controller to provide optimum system performance. The 

contractor shall provide and install nozzles other than those specified as instructed by 

the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE at no additional cost to the owner. It will be the 

OWNER'S responsibility to make any minor adjustments to the system during the 

guarantee period. 

B. CLEAN UP: The CONTRACTOR shall continuously keep a neat and orderly area in 

which he is installing the system. Disposal of rubbish and waste material resulting 

from the installation shall be continual. Upon completion of the system, the 

CONTRACTOR shall remove from the OWNER'S property at his own expense, all 

temporary structures, rubbish, waste material, tools, and equipment resulting from or 

used in the installation of the system. 

3.019 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES: 

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for locating all cables, conduits, piping, 

and any other utilities or structures that may be encountered either above or below 

ground. All necessary precautions must be taken by the CONTRACTOR to prevent 

any damage to these existing improvements. In the event that such damage should 

occur from his operations, the CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace or bring to 

original condition the damaged utilities or improvements at his own expense. 

3.020 PROTECTION OF WORK: 

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for protection of on going work from the 

public and vice versa. Any necessary barriers, warning signs, etc. are the 

responsibility of the contractor and considered incidental to the irrigation contract. 

3.021 ROCK: 

A. If the CONTRACTOR encounters rock or other unfavorable trenching conditions, no 

additional compensation will be paid. When material from the excavation or 

trenching is unsuitable for use as backfill, additional backfill material suitable for this 

purpose shall be brought in at the expense of the CONTRACTOR. It shall also be the 

CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to remove and dispose of all unsuitable materials 

removed from the trench that cannot be used in the backfill operation. 



3.022 FINAL ACCEPTANCE: 

A. When the CONTRACTOR is satisfied that the system is operating properly, that it is 

balanced and adjusted, that all work and cleanup is completed, he shall issue notice 

of completion to the OWNER and the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE requesting a 

system review at a given date and time. The OWNER and the OWNER'S 

REPRESENTATIVE will respond to the notice by the CONTRACTOR and shall 

appear at the given time for a tour of the Project. At that time, the CONTRACTOR 

shall demonstrate each system in its entirety. In judging the Work, no allowance for 

deviation from the approved drawings and specifications will be made unless prior 

approval has been obtained. This system review must be completed prior to 

beginning planting operations. 

B. Any inconsistencies to the specifications shall be noted by the OWNER and the 

OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE and a written copy of corrections shall be given to 

the CONTRACTOR. Any work deemed not acceptable shall be reworked to the 

complete satisfaction of the OWNER and the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. 

C. When all work is completed to the satisfaction of the OWNER, a written acceptance 

of the project work will be given to the CONTRACTOR upon furnishing, by the 

CONTRACTOR of a complete record drawing of the system which is acceptable to 

the OWNER. 

3.023 OPERATIONAL INSTRUCTION: 

A. After the system has been tested and accepted, the CONTRACTOR, along with the 

OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE shall instruct the OWNER in the operation and 

maintenance of the system. 

3.024 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND WARRANTY: 

A. For a period of one (1) year from final acceptance of the system, the CONTRACTOR 

will promptly furnish and install, without cost to the OWNER, any and all parts or 

materials which prove defective in material or workmanship. Damage due to 

irrigation system line breaks caused by defective material or workmanship shall be 

repaired and brought to original condition by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to 

the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall complete all repairs within 24 hours of 

receipt of notification from the OWNER of system failure. 

B. Minor maintenance of the system shall be the responsibility of the OWNER. 

C. For a period of one year from final acceptance of the system, the CONTRACTOR 

shall repair any settlement of the trenches by one of the following methods as 

directed by the OWNER and the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. 

D. Bring to grade by top dressing (raking appropriate material into settled area). 

E. Bring to grade with top soil and seed. 

F. Remove existing sod, fill depression with top soil, and replace with new sod to match 

existing sod. 



G. Repair by any of the above methods must result in a smooth, level area. Maintenance 

of repaired areas shall be the responsibility of the OWNER. Repair shall be 

completed by the CONTRACTOR within 48 hours after notification from the 

OWNER of trench settlement problems. 

3.025 INSPECTIONS 

A. The following inspections shall be the minimum required inspections during the 

course of construction. Additional inspections shall be made at any time at the 

discretion of the OWNER or OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. It shall be the 

responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to notify the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 

in writing 48 hours in advance of each required inspection. The sequence of required 

inspection shall not be changed from the sequence listed below. The CONTRACTOR 

shall not proceed with work in the next sequence without written acceptance of the 

previous sequence. Payment will not be approved for items which have not been 

inspected and approved in writing. 

B. Inspect staked locations of mainline, valves, laterals, and sprinkler heads. All trees 

irrigated with bubbler heads must be staked at this time to verify proper location. 

C. Inspect control wire installation. 

D. Inspect and pressure test mainline and electric control valve installation. 

E. Inspect and pressure test lateral irrigation line installation. 

F. Inspect automatic controller installation and operation. 

G. Inspect sprinkler and bubbler head placement, coverage and operating pressure prior 

to planting. 

H. Inspect for punch list at Substantial Completion. 

I. Inspect at final acceptance inspection. 

END OF SECTION 



SECTION 029300 

LANDSCAPING 

PART 1 -GENERAL 

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 

A. Work under this section consists of the planting of trees, shrubs, and ground covers, including 

the furnishing of all labor, equipment, and materials and performing all work in connection 

therewith in accordance with the drawings and specifications. 

B. The scientific and common names used for the plants called for on the drawings are generally 

in conformity with the approved names given in CRC World Dictionary of Plant Names 1999 

Ed. The names of varieties not included therein are generally in conformity with the names 

accepted in the nursery trade. 

1.2 REFERENCES 

A. U.S.A. Standard for Nursery Stock, 2004, published by Committee on Horticultural Standards 

of the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. 

B. Western Garden Book, 2001, published by Sunset Publishing Corp. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Licensed landscape-contracting firm with not less than 5 years 

experience in the type and amount of work required in the Section. 

B. Source Quality Control 

1. General: Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by 

governing authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials. 

2. Do no make substitutions. If specified landscape materials are not obtainable, submit 

to the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE proof of nonavailabliity and proposal for use 

of equivalent material. 

3. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer shall have 

certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory 

made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official 

Agricultural Chemists, wherever applicable. 

LANDSCAPING- 1 029300–1


4. Trees and Shrubs: 


a. Label each tree, shrub and ground cover with securely attached waterproof 

tag bearing legible designation of botanical or common name. 

b. Grade plant material in accordance with the current codes and standards of 

American Association of Nurserymen. Use nomenclature conforming to 

References above. If names are not present in these listings, conform to 

accept botanical nomenclature in the nursery trade. 

5. Import Soil/Organic Matter 

a. Test import soil and/or portion of the planting backfill mixture at an 

approved soil testing laboratory. Test to verify characteristics listed under 

“Products” portion of this specification and include recommendation from 

the testing laboratory. The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE may also test 

the final product as delivered or installed to verify the mixture matches the 

listed characteristics and the submitted soil report. Test data may be utilized 

up to one year. 

6. Inspection: The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE may inspect trees, shrubs and 

ground covers either at place of growth or at site before planting, for compliance with 

requirements for genus, species, variety, size and quality. The OWNER’S 

REPRESENTATIVE retains right to further inspect plant material for size and 

condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects, and to reject 

unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove 

rejected trees or shrubs immediately from project site. 

A. Samples: Submit a one-eighth cubic foot sample of each type of mulch or planting soil 

material for approval. 

B. Plant and Material Certifications: 

1. Manufacturers or vendor’s certified analysis and materials safety data sheets for any 

soil amendments, herbicides, and fertilizer materials. 

2. Planting Backfill Mixture: Submit test results, at the OWNER’S 

REPRESENTATIVE request, prior to delivery. 



C. Maintenance Manuals: Submit two copies of typewritten instructions of any required 

landscape maintenance procedures to be followed by the OWNER for one full year during 

LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR warrantee period. Write instructions specifically for this 

project and note tasks by site area. Submit prior to final inspection for approval. 

1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE will inspect and accept plant materials prior to delivery 

to site and incorporation into the work. 

B. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and 

name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored 

at site. 

C. Plant Backfill Materials: Collect and provide load tickets to the OWNER’S 

REPRESENTATIVE upon delivery. List the following information on the ticket: 

1. Source of material. 

2. Approximate volume of load. 

3. Date of delivery or loading. 

4. Typed name of individual representing the source. 

5. Inked original signature of individual representing the source. 

6. Area of site of the product delivery. 

D. Trees and Shrubs: Provide freshly dug or containerized trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior 

to delivery. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such manner as to damage bark, break 

branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. Do not drop 

balled and burlapped stock during delivery. Handle container-grown materials by container 

only. 

E. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant 

immediately. If planting is delayed more than 8 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in 

shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 

F. Handling Materials 

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS 

1. Lift trees only by methods that will not damage bark or root balls. Lift trees 3 inches 

in caliper and larger with chains triangulated around the rootball. Do not lift tree 3 

inches in caliper or larger by straps around the trunk. 

2. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers until planting time. 

A. Existing Conditions: 



1. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in 

manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate as required. Maintain 

grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties 

concerned. 

2. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such 

as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify the OWNER’S 

REPRESENTATIVE before planting. 

B. Sequencing and Scheduling: 

1.7 WARRANTY 

1. Planting Time: Proceed with and complete planting work as rapidly as portions of 

site become available, working within seasonal limitations for each kind of 

planting work required. 

2. Plant or install material during normal planting seasons for each type of work 

required. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide 

maintenance from date of substantial completion until final acceptance. 

3. Determine the acceptability of subgrade preparation prior to the start of landscaping 

work. Protect all existing items to remain and new work of other trades to ensure 

proper timing of each phase of work. 

A. Warranty trees, shrubs and ground cover through specified maintenance period and until final 

acceptance. 

B. Warranty trees, shrubs and ground cover for a period of one year after date of final 

acceptance, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth as determined by the 

OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE, unless defects are due to OWNER’S negligence in 

following the CONTRACTOR’S recommended maintenance procedure. 



C. Remove and replace trees, shrubs or other plants found to be dead or in unhealthily condition 

during warranty period. Replace plant materials during the dormant season following the end 

of warranty period or as directed by the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. The dormant 

season is defined as September 30 through April 1. Replace trees and shrubs which are in 

doubtful condition at the end of the warranty period; unless in opinion of the OWNER’S 

REPRESENTATIVE, it is advisable to extend warranty period for the remainder a fullgrowing 

season. 

PART 2 –PRODUCTS 

2.1 PLANT MATERIALS 

A. A complete list of plants, including a schedule of quantities, sizes and other requirements is 

shown on the drawings. In the event that discrepancies occur between quantities of plants 

indicated in the schedule of plants and the planting plan, the plant quantities indicated on the 

planting plan shall govern. 

B. Plant material substitutions shall not be made without the written permission of the project 

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, OR OWNERS 

REPRESENTATIVE. The use of materials differing in kind, quality, or size from that 

specified will be allowed only after the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER is convinced that all 

means of obtaining the specified materials have been exhausted. At the time bids are 

submitted, the CONTRACTOR is assumed to have located the materials necessary to 

complete the job as specified. All requests for substitutions must be submitted no later than 

five days prior to the opening of bids. 

C. Plant material quality, size, and condition shall be in accordance with U.S.A. Standard for 

Nursery Stock, 2004, as published by the Committee on Horticultural Standards of the 

American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., the drawings and the following requirements: 

D. All plants shall be typical of their species or variety. All plants shall have normal, well 

developed branches and vigorous root systems. They shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, and 

free from defects, disfiguring knots, abrasions of the bark, sunscald injuries, plant diseases, 

insect eggs, bores, and all other forms of infections. 

E. Unless otherwise stated on the drawings or approved by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE, all 

plants shall be nursery grown and shall be tagged with nursery labels indicating species and 

variety. See planting plan for acceptable collected plants. 

F. Container grown plant material shall have been established in its delivery container for not 

less than six months, but for not more than two years. Any root bound material will not be 

accepted. 

G. Balled and burlapped plant material shall have a solid ball of earth of minimum specified size 

and held in place securely by burlap and a stout twine or rope. Broken or loose balls will be 

rejected. 

H. Unless otherwise indicated on plans, standard plant material shall have a uniform shape 

around its complete circumference. Plant material with irregular branching patterns or with 

branching patterns more highly developed on one side than on other sides shall not be 

acceptable, unless approved by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. 



I. The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE shall inspect all plant material at the 

CONTRACTOR'S yard prior to delivery to the job site. All materials shall then be inspected 

at the job site prior to planting and after planting. 

J. At the option of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE will inspect plant 

material at a wholesale nursery of the CONTRACTOR's choice prior to delivery of materials 

to the CONTRACTOR's yard. However, at no additional expense to the OWNER, the 

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all travel expenses incurred by the OWNER’S 

REPRESENTATIVE for any travel outside of the Las Cruces/El Paso Metropolitan Area, 

with the exception of the project site. 

K. The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE shall be the judge of the quality and acceptability of all 

plant materials. All rejected material shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced 

with acceptable material at no additional cost to OWNER. 

2.2 SOIL AMENDMENTS AND SURFACINGS 

A. Specification for complete planting backfill shall be as follows except where specifically 

noted on drawings. 

1. Structural soils – refer to section 02250 

2. Subject to compliance with state and Federal regulations, or directed and as approved 

by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE fertilizer and/or Root Stimulant may be used by 

CONTRACTOR. 

B. Planting Soil Mixture in Street Planters and Shade Structure Planters 

1. Planting soil mixture shall be a premixed, homogenous soil. It will consist of sand 

and organic matter and meet performance characteristics outlined below. 

a. Sand, 50% by volume of clean masonry sand with a sieve analysis of: 



Sieve size % passing 

3/8” 100% 

#4 93-99% 

#8 82-88% 

#16 73-79% 

#30 55-61% 

#50 24-30% 

#100 6-12% 

#200 7-2% 

b. Organic Matter: 40% by volume of compost material specified as follows: 

Compost, or mulch, shall be a combination organic carbon sources such as 

straw, hay, bark, sawdust or wood shavings and nitrogen sources such as 

manure, blood meal, or chemical fertilizers. Nitrogen sources must be added 

prior to composting. It is recommended this mixture be aerobically 

composted at temperatures between 120 o F and 160 o F for a period of not less 

than 100 days. Weed seeds are to be destroyed during composting and urea 

and ammonia form nitrogen ration shall be as listed below. Finished compost 

is to be screened to provide less than 2% remaining on a ½” screen. Carbon 

to Nitrogen Ration of organic matter shall be less than 50 parts carbon to one 

part nitrogen. 

c. Perlite: 10% by volume of medium grade horticultural perlite. 

2. The complete planting soil mixtures shall have the following characteristics: 

a. Calcium to magnesium rations shall not exceed 20 parts calcium to one part 

magnesium. 

b. Potash (Potassium) (K) shall be present at a rate of at least 200 parts per 

million of exchangeable potassium. 

c. Salinity (EGXK) not to exceed 2 AMHOS/CM Nitrate nitrogen (NO3-N) 

shall be present at a rate of at least 30 parts per million. 

d. Phosphorus as measured by the Olson sodium bicarbonate measurement 

method shall be at greater than 25 parts per million. 

e. Ph of the planting soil mixture shall be between 6.5 and 7.5. Organic matter 

by weight (by simple combustion) shall be more than 5%. Available 

moisture capacity in the one third to 15 bar tension shall be greater than 

15%. 

f. TKN2 or Total Kjedahlnitrogen shall be 250 ppm or greater. 

g. NH4 shall be 25 ppm or less. 



3. The Construction Manager reserves the right to adjust the above characteristics and 

waive all irregularities. 

C. Imported Soil Criteria. Imported soils substituted when adequate quantities of native soils are 

not available, shall be of a similar soil composition to native soils and tested as specified in 

criteria listed below: 

1. Samples of the soil shall be tested for gradation, atterberg limits, chemical 

composition, pH levels, and organic content. 

2. The proposed imported soils shall match native soil to + 5% of all testing 

requirements specified herein. 

D. Submittals for Test. 

1. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all testing and shall submit to the 

OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE all results for approval. 

2. CONTRACTOR shall be financially responsible for all testing and will be considered 

incidental to soil mixture cost. 

3. CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with use of imported soils until written approval 

is obtained. 

E. Mulch: Other mulch/surfacing products shall be as specified on plans and approved by 

OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE prior to use. 

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS 

A. All Evergreen trees and Deciduous trees over 2½“caliper or taller than 10’ height shall be 

anchored as per the construction drawings. 

B. Landscape Filter Fabric: Earthscape 351 ES (or approved equal). 

2.4 WATER 

The water shall be clean and free from pollutants which would be harmful to plant growth or 

contaminate the environment. 



A. Planting operations as specified herein shall begin only when other work including placing of 

topsoil to finished grade has progressed sufficiently to permit planting and shall be performed 

only during favorable weather conditions in accordance with accepted practice. 



B. In any one day, only those plant materials intended to be planted that day shall be delivered to 

the project site, unless otherwise approved by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. All plant 

materials shall be located where it is shown on the drawings except when adjustments due to 

field conditions are required. The location of all trees and shrubs shall be staked by the 

CONTRACTOR before making any excavations, and locations shall be inspected by the 

OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE prior to installation. All plants shall be placed as specified 

except for minor adjustments made necessary by underground obstructions or other 

unforeseen causes. 


A. All planting and backfilling shall be performed in accordance with accepted nursery practice, 

the drawings, and the following requirements: 

1. Prepare all planting pits and planting beds as shown on the drawings. Set all plants 

plumb and straight unless otherwise indicated on drawings and in the center of pit 

such that the top rootball sits flush with finish grade. No filling will be permitted 

around trunks or stems. 

2. Backfill for planting pits shall consist of the planting soil mixture as specified in 

these specifications. The plant shall be positioned in the hole and backfilled no more 

than halfway up the rootball. The backfilling shall be completed, and material 

tamped. When pit is nearly filled, water thoroughly and allow water to soak away. If 

settling of the backfill occurs after watering, add more backfill to bring to finish 

grade. 

B. Mulching: Mulch shall be applied to all planting bed areas as indicated on the plans and 

details. 

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. The following inspections shall be the minimum required inspections during the course of 

construction. Additional inspections shall be made at any time at the discretion of the 

OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. 

B. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to notify the OWNER’S 

REPRESENTATIVE, in writing, 48 hours in advance of each required inspection. 

C. The sequence of required inspections shall not be changed from the sequence listed below. 

The CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with work of the next sequence without written 

approval of the work of the previous sequence. Payment will not be approved for items which 

have not been inspected and approved in writing. 

1. Inspect plant material at CONTRACTOR's yard prior to delivery to job site. 

2. Inspect staked locations of material prior to planting. 

3. Inspect material at the job site prior to and during planting and mulching. 



4. Inspect at end of maintenance period. 

5. Inspect at end of warrantee period. 

3.4 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION 

A. Maintenance and protecting of trees, shrubs, and groundcover shall begin immediately 

following the last operation of installation for each plant and shall continue until final 

acceptance. Maintenance shall include watering, weeding, cultivating, removal of dead 

material and debris, resetting of trees to upright positions, restoration of earth basins, and such 

other operations as may be necessary for the health of the planted stock and the general 

appearance of the landscaped areas. Protection shall include care of the planted stock from 

damages resulting from trespass, erosion (including watering), weather, vandalism, disease 

and the like. 

B. The CONTRACTOR shall not prune any plant material except under the specific direction of 

the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. 




SECTION 029300 

LANDSCAPING 

PART 1 -GENERAL 


A. Work under this section consists of the planting of trees, shrubs, and ground covers, including 

the furnishing of all labor, equipment, and materials and performing all work in connection 

therewith in accordance with the drawings and specifications. 

B. The scientific and common names used for the plants called for on the drawings are generally 

in conformity with the approved names given in CRC World Dictionary of Plant Names 1999 

Ed. The names of varieties not included therein are generally in conformity with the names 

accepted in the nursery trade. 


A. U.S.A. Standard for Nursery Stock, 2004, published by Committee on Horticultural Standards 

of the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. 

B. Western Garden Book, 2001, published by Sunset Publishing Corp. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Licensed landscape-contracting firm with not less than 5 years 

experience in the type and amount of work required in the Section. 

B. Source Quality Control 

1. General: Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by 

governing authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials. 

2. Do no make substitutions. If specified landscape materials are not obtainable, submit 

to the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE proof of nonavailabliity and proposal for use 

of equivalent material. 

3. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer shall have 

certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory 

made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official 

Agricultural Chemists, wherever applicable. 



4. Trees and Shrubs: 


a. Label each tree, shrub and ground cover with securely attached waterproof 

tag bearing legible designation of botanical or common name. 

b. Grade plant material in accordance with the current codes and standards of 

American Association of Nurserymen. Use nomenclature conforming to 

References above. If names are not present in these listings, conform to 

accept botanical nomenclature in the nursery trade. 

5. Import Soil/Organic Matter 

a. Test import soil and/or portion of the planting backfill mixture at an 

approved soil testing laboratory. Test to verify characteristics listed under 

“Products” portion of this specification and include recommendation from 

the testing laboratory. The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE may also test 

the final product as delivered or installed to verify the mixture matches the 

listed characteristics and the submitted soil report. Test data may be utilized 

up to one year. 

6. Inspection: The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE may inspect trees, shrubs and 

ground covers either at place of growth or at site before planting, for compliance with 

requirements for genus, species, variety, size and quality. The OWNER’S 

REPRESENTATIVE retains right to further inspect plant material for size and 

condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects, and to reject 

unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove 

rejected trees or shrubs immediately from project site. 

A. Samples: Submit a one-eighth cubic foot sample of each type of mulch or planting soil 

material for approval. 

B. Plant and Material Certifications: 

1. Manufacturers or vendor’s certified analysis and materials safety data sheets for any 

soil amendments, herbicides, and fertilizer materials. 

2. Planting Backfill Mixture: Submit test results, at the OWNER’S 

REPRESENTATIVE request, prior to delivery. 



C. Maintenance Manuals: Submit two copies of typewritten instructions of any required 

landscape maintenance procedures to be followed by the OWNER for one full year during 

LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR warrantee period. Write instructions specifically for this 

project and note tasks by site area. Submit prior to final inspection for approval. 

1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE will inspect and accept plant materials prior to delivery 

to site and incorporation into the work. 

B. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and 

name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored 

at site. 

C. Plant Backfill Materials: Collect and provide load tickets to the OWNER’S 

REPRESENTATIVE upon delivery. List the following information on the ticket: 

1. Source of material. 

2. Approximate volume of load. 

3. Date of delivery or loading. 

4. Typed name of individual representing the source. 

5. Inked original signature of individual representing the source. 

6. Area of site of the product delivery. 

D. Trees and Shrubs: Provide freshly dug or containerized trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior 

to delivery. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such manner as to damage bark, break 

branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. Do not drop 

balled and burlapped stock during delivery. Handle container-grown materials by container 

only. 

E. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant 

immediately. If planting is delayed more than 8 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in 

shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 

F. Handling Materials 


1. Lift trees only by methods that will not damage bark or root balls. Lift trees 3 inches 

in caliper and larger with chains triangulated around the rootball. Do not lift tree 3 

inches in caliper or larger by straps around the trunk. 

2. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers until planting time. 

A. Existing Conditions: 



1. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in 

manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate as required. Maintain 

grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties 

concerned. 

2. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such 

as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify the OWNER’S 

REPRESENTATIVE before planting. 

B. Sequencing and Scheduling: 

1.7 WARRANTY 

1. Planting Time: Proceed with and complete planting work as rapidly as portions of 

site become available, working within seasonal limitations for each kind of 

planting work required. 

2. Plant or install material during normal planting seasons for each type of work 

required. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide 

maintenance from date of substantial completion until final acceptance. 

3. Determine the acceptability of subgrade preparation prior to the start of landscaping 

work. Protect all existing items to remain and new work of other trades to ensure 

proper timing of each phase of work. 

A. Warranty trees, shrubs and ground cover through specified maintenance period and until final 

acceptance. 

B. Warranty trees, shrubs and ground cover for a period of one year after date of final 

acceptance, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth as determined by the 

OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE, unless defects are due to OWNER’S negligence in 

following the CONTRACTOR’S recommended maintenance procedure. 



C. Remove and replace trees, shrubs or other plants found to be dead or in unhealthily condition 

during warranty period. Replace plant materials during the dormant season following the end 

of warranty period or as directed by the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. The dormant 

season is defined as September 30 through April 1. Replace trees and shrubs which are in 

doubtful condition at the end of the warranty period; unless in opinion of the OWNER’S 

REPRESENTATIVE, it is advisable to extend warranty period for the remainder a fullgrowing 

season. 


2.1 PLANT MATERIALS 

A. A complete list of plants, including a schedule of quantities, sizes and other requirements is 

shown on the drawings. In the event that discrepancies occur between quantities of plants 

indicated in the schedule of plants and the planting plan, the plant quantities indicated on the 

planting plan shall govern. 

B. Plant material substitutions shall not be made without the written permission of the project 

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, OR OWNERS 

REPRESENTATIVE. The use of materials differing in kind, quality, or size from that 

specified will be allowed only after the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER is convinced that all 

means of obtaining the specified materials have been exhausted. At the time bids are 

submitted, the CONTRACTOR is assumed to have located the materials necessary to 

complete the job as specified. All requests for substitutions must be submitted no later than 

five days prior to the opening of bids. 

C. Plant material quality, size, and condition shall be in accordance with U.S.A. Standard for 

Nursery Stock, 2004, as published by the Committee on Horticultural Standards of the 

American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., the drawings and the following requirements: 

D. All plants shall be typical of their species or variety. All plants shall have normal, well 

developed branches and vigorous root systems. They shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, and 

free from defects, disfiguring knots, abrasions of the bark, sunscald injuries, plant diseases, 

insect eggs, bores, and all other forms of infections. 

E. Unless otherwise stated on the drawings or approved by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE, all 

plants shall be nursery grown and shall be tagged with nursery labels indicating species and 

variety. See planting plan for acceptable collected plants. 

F. Container grown plant material shall have been established in its delivery container for not 

less than six months, but for not more than two years. Any root bound material will not be 

accepted. 

G. Balled and burlapped plant material shall have a solid ball of earth of minimum specified size 

and held in place securely by burlap and a stout twine or rope. Broken or loose balls will be 

rejected. 

H. Unless otherwise indicated on plans, standard plant material shall have a uniform shape 

around its complete circumference. Plant material with irregular branching patterns or with 

branching patterns more highly developed on one side than on other sides shall not be 

acceptable, unless approved by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. 



I. The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE shall inspect all plant material at the 

CONTRACTOR'S yard prior to delivery to the job site. All materials shall then be inspected 

at the job site prior to planting and after planting. 

J. At the option of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE will inspect plant 

material at a wholesale nursery of the CONTRACTOR's choice prior to delivery of materials 

to the CONTRACTOR's yard. However, at no additional expense to the OWNER, the 

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all travel expenses incurred by the OWNER’S 

REPRESENTATIVE for any travel outside of the Las Cruces/El Paso Metropolitan Area, 

with the exception of the project site. 

K. The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE shall be the judge of the quality and acceptability of all 

plant materials. All rejected material shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced 

with acceptable material at no additional cost to OWNER. 

2.2 SOIL AMENDMENTS AND SURFACINGS 

A. Specification for complete planting backfill shall be as follows except where specifically 

noted on drawings. 

1. Structural soils – refer to section 02250 

2. Subject to compliance with state and Federal regulations, or directed and as approved 

by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE fertilizer and/or Root Stimulant may be used by 

CONTRACTOR. 

B. Planting Soil Mixture in Street Planters and Shade Structure Planters 

1. Planting soil mixture shall be a premixed, homogenous soil. It will consist of sand 

and organic matter and meet performance characteristics outlined below. 

a. Sand, 50% by volume of clean masonry sand with a sieve analysis of: 



Sieve size % passing 

3/8” 100% 

#4 93-99% 

#8 82-88% 

#16 73-79% 

#30 55-61% 

#50 24-30% 

#100 6-12% 

#200 7-2% 

b. Organic Matter: 40% by volume of compost material specified as follows: 

Compost, or mulch, shall be a combination organic carbon sources such as 

straw, hay, bark, sawdust or wood shavings and nitrogen sources such as 

manure, blood meal, or chemical fertilizers. Nitrogen sources must be added 

prior to composting. It is recommended this mixture be aerobically 

composted at temperatures between 120 o F and 160 o F for a period of not less 

than 100 days. Weed seeds are to be destroyed during composting and urea 

and ammonia form nitrogen ration shall be as listed below. Finished compost 

is to be screened to provide less than 2% remaining on a ½” screen. Carbon 

to Nitrogen Ration of organic matter shall be less than 50 parts carbon to one 

part nitrogen. 

c. Perlite: 10% by volume of medium grade horticultural perlite. 

2. The complete planting soil mixtures shall have the following characteristics: 

a. Calcium to magnesium rations shall not exceed 20 parts calcium to one part 

magnesium. 

b. Potash (Potassium) (K) shall be present at a rate of at least 200 parts per 

million of exchangeable potassium. 

c. Salinity (EGXK) not to exceed 2 AMHOS/CM Nitrate nitrogen (NO3-N) 

shall be present at a rate of at least 30 parts per million. 

d. Phosphorus as measured by the Olson sodium bicarbonate measurement 

method shall be at greater than 25 parts per million. 

e. Ph of the planting soil mixture shall be between 6.5 and 7.5. Organic matter 

by weight (by simple combustion) shall be more than 5%. Available 

moisture capacity in the one third to 15 bar tension shall be greater than 

15%. 

f. TKN2 or Total Kjedahlnitrogen shall be 250 ppm or greater. 

g. NH4 shall be 25 ppm or less. 



3. The Construction Manager reserves the right to adjust the above characteristics and 

waive all irregularities. 

C. Imported Soil Criteria. Imported soils substituted when adequate quantities of native soils are 

not available, shall be of a similar soil composition to native soils and tested as specified in 

criteria listed below: 

1. Samples of the soil shall be tested for gradation, atterberg limits, chemical 

composition, pH levels, and organic content. 

2. The proposed imported soils shall match native soil to + 5% of all testing 

requirements specified herein. 

D. Submittals for Test. 

1. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all testing and shall submit to the 

OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE all results for approval. 

2. CONTRACTOR shall be financially responsible for all testing and will be considered 

incidental to soil mixture cost. 

3. CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with use of imported soils until written approval 

is obtained. 

E. Mulch: Other mulch/surfacing products shall be as specified on plans and approved by 

OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE prior to use. 

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS 

A. All Evergreen trees and Deciduous trees over 2½“caliper or taller than 10’ height shall be 

anchored as per the construction drawings. 

B. Landscape Filter Fabric: Earthscape 351 ES (or approved equal). 

2.4 WATER 

The water shall be clean and free from pollutants which would be harmful to plant growth or 

contaminate the environment. 



A. Planting operations as specified herein shall begin only when other work including placing of 

topsoil to finished grade has progressed sufficiently to permit planting and shall be performed 

only during favorable weather conditions in accordance with accepted practice. 



B. In any one day, only those plant materials intended to be planted that day shall be delivered to 

the project site, unless otherwise approved by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. All plant 

materials shall be located where it is shown on the drawings except when adjustments due to 

field conditions are required. The location of all trees and shrubs shall be staked by the 

CONTRACTOR before making any excavations, and locations shall be inspected by the 

OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE prior to installation. All plants shall be placed as specified 

except for minor adjustments made necessary by underground obstructions or other 

unforeseen causes. 


A. All planting and backfilling shall be performed in accordance with accepted nursery practice, 

the drawings, and the following requirements: 

1. Prepare all planting pits and planting beds as shown on the drawings. Set all plants 

plumb and straight unless otherwise indicated on drawings and in the center of pit 

such that the top rootball sits flush with finish grade. No filling will be permitted 

around trunks or stems. 

2. Backfill for planting pits shall consist of the planting soil mixture as specified in 

these specifications. The plant shall be positioned in the hole and backfilled no more 

than halfway up the rootball. The backfilling shall be completed, and material 

tamped. When pit is nearly filled, water thoroughly and allow water to soak away. If 

settling of the backfill occurs after watering, add more backfill to bring to finish 

grade. 

B. Mulching: Mulch shall be applied to all planting bed areas as indicated on the plans and 

details. 


A. The following inspections shall be the minimum required inspections during the course of 

construction. Additional inspections shall be made at any time at the discretion of the 

OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. 

B. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to notify the OWNER’S 

REPRESENTATIVE, in writing, 48 hours in advance of each required inspection. 

C. The sequence of required inspections shall not be changed from the sequence listed below. 

The CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with work of the next sequence without written 

approval of the work of the previous sequence. Payment will not be approved for items which 

have not been inspected and approved in writing. 

1. Inspect plant material at CONTRACTOR's yard prior to delivery to job site. 

2. Inspect staked locations of material prior to planting. 

3. Inspect material at the job site prior to and during planting and mulching. 



4. Inspect at end of maintenance period. 

5. Inspect at end of warrantee period. 

3.4 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION 

A. Maintenance and protecting of trees, shrubs, and groundcover shall begin immediately 

following the last operation of installation for each plant and shall continue until final 

acceptance. Maintenance shall include watering, weeding, cultivating, removal of dead 

material and debris, resetting of trees to upright positions, restoration of earth basins, and such 

other operations as may be necessary for the health of the planted stock and the general 

appearance of the landscaped areas. Protection shall include care of the planted stock from 

damages resulting from trespass, erosion (including watering), weather, vandalism, disease 

and the like. 

B. The CONTRACTOR shall not prune any plant material except under the specific direction of 

the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. 




SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, 

mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 

1. Footings. 

2. Foundation walls. 

3. Slabs-on-grade. 


A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the 

following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blastfurnace 

slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 

B. LEED Submittals: 

1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.2: For products having recycled content, e.g. flyash, 

documentation indicating percentages by weight of recycled content. 

2. Product Data for Credit MR 2.2: For liquid floor treatments and curing and sealing 

compounds, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.. 

3. Design Mixtures for Credit MR 2.2: For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a 

replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements, and for 

equivalent concrete mixtures that do not contain portland cement replacements. 

C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when 

characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances 

warrant adjustments. 

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. 

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1


D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and 

placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar 

diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, 

and supports for concrete reinforcement. 

E. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the 

structure. 

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. 


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer. 

B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 

1. Cementitious materials. 

2. Admixtures. 

3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 

4. Fiber reinforcement. 

C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating 

compliance with requirements: 

1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of 

concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity. 

D. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified 

tolerances. 

E. Field quality-control reports. 

F. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as 

ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified 

Concrete Flatwork Technician. 

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete 

products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and 

equipment. 

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete 

Production Facilities." 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from 

the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from 

single source from single manufacturer. 



D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract 

Documents: 

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. 

2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 

E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material 

evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. 

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine 

procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each 

entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: 

a. Contractor's superintendent. 

b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. 

c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. 

d. Concrete subcontractor. 

e. Special concrete finish subcontractor. 

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and 

damage. 


2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS 

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and 

smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 

2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, 

and as follows: 

a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. 

b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge 

sealed. 

c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. 

d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. 

B. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum. 

C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, 

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of 

concrete surfaces. 



1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. 

D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic 

form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of 

concrete on removal. 

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane 

of exposed concrete surface. 

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in 

diameter in concrete surface. 

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing 

or waterproofing. 

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. 

B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M. 

C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from asdrawn 

steel wire into flat sheets. 

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES 

A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening 

reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel 

wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater 

compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use 

CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated 

wire bar supports. 

3. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar 

supports. 

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS 

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and 

source, throughout Project: 

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Supplement with the following: 

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F, 30%. 

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide 

aggregates from a single source. 



1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) nominal. 

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. 

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 

2.5 ADMIXTURES 

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with 

other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those 

permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium 

chloride. 

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, 

Type G. 

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 

2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT 

A. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: fibrillated polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and designed for use 

in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches 13 to 38 

mm) long. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Fibrillated Micro-Fibers: 

1) Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; Fibrasol F. 

2) Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Fiberstrand F. 

3) FORTA Corporation; FORTA. 

4) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Grace Fibers. 

5) Nycon, Inc.; ProConF. 

6) Propex Concrete Systems Corp.; Fibermesh 300. 

7) Sika Corporation; Sika Fiber PPF. 

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS 

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) 

thick. 

1. Radon Diffusion Coefficient: 1.3x10 -13 m 2 /Second or less. 



2.8 CURING MATERIALS 

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application 

to fresh concrete. 



a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm. 

b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm. 

c. ChemMasters; SprayFilm. 

d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm. 

e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74). 

f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm. 

g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar. 

h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid. 

i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin. 

j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON. 

k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE. 

l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. 

m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM. 

n. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm. 

o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film. 

p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid. 

q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM. 

r. Unitex; PRO-FILM. 

s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set. 

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing 

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry. 

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene 

sheet. 

D. Water: Potable. 

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 

dissipating, certified, etc. 



a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB. 

b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200. 

c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. 

d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; W.B. Resin Cure. 

e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). 

f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Res X Cure WB. 

g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX; 

TAMMSCURE WB 30C. 

h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. 



i. Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR. 

j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. 

k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR. 

l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E. 

m. Right Pointe; Clear Water Resin. 

n. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Rez Clear. 

o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear. 

p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 DC WB. 

q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100. 

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 

nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of 

floor covering. 



a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Clear Cure WB. 

b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal WB. 

c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure & Seal 20. 

d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Cure and Seal WB. 

e. Cresset Chemical Company; Crete-Trete 309-VOC Cure & Seal. 

f. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-18). 

g. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Spartan Cote WB II. 

h. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Aqua Cure VOX; 

Clearseal WB 150. 

i. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Cure & Seal 309 Emulsion. 

j. Lambert Corporation; Glazecote Sealer-20. 

k. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Dress & Seal WB. 

l. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20. 

m. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure. 

n. Nox-Crete Products Group; Cure & Seal 150E. 

o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 18 Percent E. 

p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 WB. 

q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 309. 

G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 18 

to 25 percent solids, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere 

with bonding of floor covering. 



a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal W. 

b. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. 

c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; High Seal. 

d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-19). 

e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Spartan Cote WB II 20 Percent. 

f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Diamond Clear VOX; 

Clearseal WB STD. 

g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureCure Emulsion. 



h. Lambert Corporation; Glazecote Sealer-20. 

i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Dress & Seal WB. 

j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20. 

k. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 0800. 

l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Cure & Seal 200E. 

m. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 18 Percent E. 

n. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 0800. 

H. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, 

Type 1, Class A. 



a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal 25 LV. 

b. ChemMasters; Spray-Cure & Seal Plus. 

c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315. 

d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Cure and Seal (J-22UV). 

e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315. 

f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear; 

LusterSeal 300. 

g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25. 

h. Lambert Corporation; UV Super Seal. 

i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal Plus. 

j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; CS-309/30. 

k. Metalcrete Industries; Seal N Kure 30. 

l. Right Pointe; Right Sheen 30. 

m. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex AC 1315. 

2. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or 

less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

I. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, 

Type 1, Class A. 



a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 1315. 

b. ChemMasters; Polyseal WB. 

c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315 WB. 

d. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315 WB. 

e. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear VOX; 

LusterSeal WB 300. 

f. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25 Emulsion. 

g. Lambert Corporation; UV Safe Seal. 

h. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal WB Plus. 

i. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-30. 

j. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 30. 

k. Right Pointe; Right Sheen WB30. 

l. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 31 Percent E. 



m. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon Starseal 1315. 

2. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or 

less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS 

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. 

2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL 

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of 

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture 

designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. 

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than 

portland cement in concrete as follows: 

1. Fly Ash: 30 percent. 

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of 

cement. 

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as 

required, for placement and workability. 

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low 

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial 

slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a 

water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated. 

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS 

A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days. 

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches 100 mm. 

4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch 

(38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. 

B. Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 




2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 

3. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm). 

4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch (25-mm) 

nominal maximum aggregate size. 

C. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 


2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 470 lb/cu. yd. (279 kg/cu. m. 

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm). 

4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch (25-mm) 

nominal maximum aggregate size. 

5. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's 

recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd. (0.90 kg/cu. m). 

2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT 

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 

2.13 CONCRETE MIXING 

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to 

ASTM C 94/C 94M [ and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M], and furnish batch ticket information. 

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and 

delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 

deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 


3.1 FORMWORK 

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, 

lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure 

can support such loads. 

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, 

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. 

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 

1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 

2. Class C, 1/2 inch (13 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces. 

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. 



E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. 

Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide 

top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 

2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. 

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required 

elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed 

strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. 

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork 

is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to 

prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous 

locations. 

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. 

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads 

required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. 

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and 

other debris just before placing concrete. 

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and 

maintain proper alignment. 

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written 

instructions, before placing reinforcement. 

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS 

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that 

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, 

diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with 

tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and 

Bridges." 

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face 

of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and 

other conditions. 

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS 

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does 

not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 

deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be 



damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be 

maintained. 

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports 

weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day 

design compressive strength. 

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without 

loosening or disturbing shores. 

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or 

otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply 

new form-release agent. 

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. 

Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete 

surfaces unless approved by Architect. 


A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to 

ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 

B. Granular Course: Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular material, moisten, and 

compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 

inch (19 mm). 

1. Place and compact a 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick layer of fine-graded granular material over 

granular fill. 

3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before 

placing concrete. 

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that 

would reduce bond to concrete. 

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and 

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack 

weld crossing reinforcing bars. 

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 



E. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 

F. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to 

minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset 

laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with 

wire. 

3.6 JOINTS 

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. 

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at 

locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across 

construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through 

sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 

3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset 

joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder 

intersection. 

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and 

girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 

5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, 

near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or 

partially hardened concrete surfaces. 

7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened 

or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning 

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth 

of concrete thickness as follows: 

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing 

each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints 

after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof 

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete 

when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before 

concrete develops random contraction cracks. 

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab 

junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and 

other locations, as indicated. 

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished 

concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. 



2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch 

(25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 

Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 

3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is 

required, lace or clip sections together. 

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded 

items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. 

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless 

approved by Architect. 

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to 

limitations of ACI 301. 

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to 

mixture. 

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new 

concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of 

weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. 

Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures 

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators 

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 

inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of 

concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration 

to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and 

other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. 

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of 

construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked 

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 

4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured 

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb 

slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from 

physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low 

temperatures. 



1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) 

for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the 

temperature range required by ACI 301. 

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete 

on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or 

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. 

G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled 

mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water 

equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to 

cool concrete is Contractor's option. 

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep 

subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 

3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES 

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes 

and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified 

limits on formed-surface irregularities. 

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. 

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in 

an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and 

defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface 

irregularities. 

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, to be 

covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. 

3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS 

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and 

finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. 

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small 

or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. 

Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular 

texture. 

1. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an 

unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and 

placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch (4.8 mm). 



C. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated and where 

ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is 

still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces. 

D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and 

elsewhere as indicated. 

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with 

fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish 

with Architect before application. 

3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS 

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in 

place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with inplace 

construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to 

complete the Work. 

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still 

green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and 

terminations slightly rounded. 

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as 

shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, 

complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. 

Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete 

surfaces. 

3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING 

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot 

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hotweather 

protection during curing. 

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or 

windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and 

during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after 

placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. 

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported 

slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after 

loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the 

remainder of the curing period. 



D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed 

surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. 

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the 

following materials: 

a. Water. 

b. Continuous water-fog spray. 

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete 

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining 

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped 

at least 12 inches (300mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less 

than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover 

material and waterproof tape. 

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive 

floor coverings. 

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive 

penetrating liquid floor treatements. 

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller 

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall 

within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair 

damage during curing period. 

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without 

damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound 

manufacturer[ unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere 

with bonding of floor covering used on Project]. 

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a 

continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial 

application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity 

of coating and repair damage during curing period. 

3.12 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS 

A. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to 

hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

3.13 JOINT FILLING 

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 



1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until 

construction traffic has permanently ceased. 

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact 

faces of joint clean and dry. 

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in 

formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS 

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove 

and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. 

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two 

and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water 

for handling and placing. 

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, 

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and 

stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 

1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 

mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, 

and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching 

mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone 

plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and 

standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding 

color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match 

before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher 

than surrounding surface. 

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and 

structural performance as determined by Architect. 

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and 

verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces 

sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, 

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or 

that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of 

width, and other objectionable conditions. 

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing 

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired 

areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. 

Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's 



written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather 

edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low 

areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent 

floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to 

manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level 

surface. 

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in 

diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with 

clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) 

clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and 

apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original 

concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with 

adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching 

mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, 

and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place 

patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to 

match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. 

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and 

patching mortar. 

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's 

approval. 


A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and 

inspections and to submit reports. 

B. Inspections: 

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 

2. Verification of use of required design mixture. 

3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to 

ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete 

mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for 

each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. 

2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) 

or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. 

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests 

for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly 

selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 



3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, 

but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform 

additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 

4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for 

each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete 

mixture. 

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 

40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test 

for each composite sample. 

6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test 

for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete 

mixture. 

7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. 

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each 

composite sample. 

b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite 

sample. 

8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured 

specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. 

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens 

at 28 days. 

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of 

two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 

9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured 

cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures 

for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 

10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three 

consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength 

and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by 

more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). 

11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and 

Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain 

Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete 

testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive 

strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking 

strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 

12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may 

be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of 

concrete. 

13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete 

when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other 

requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency 

may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with 

ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 

14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine 

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 



15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply 

with the Contract Documents. 

D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M) 

within 48 hours of finishing. 

3.16 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS 

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction 

period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in 

writing by liquid floor treatments installer. 




SECTION 035413 - GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling underlayment for application below 

interior floor coverings. 


1. Division 09 Sections for patching and leveling compounds applied with floor coverings. 

1.3 UNIT PRICES 

A. Work of this Section is affected by underlayment unit price. 




1. Product Data for Credit: For priming and sealing coatings, documentation including 

printed statement of VOC content. 

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit: For priming and sealing coatings, documentation 

indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the 

California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile 

Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of 

underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions. 


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 

B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems 

certifying that products are compatible. 

GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 035413 - 1


C. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of 

underlayment products required for this Project. 

B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify in 

writing that products are compatible. 

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide gypsum-cement underlayment systems 

identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing 

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of 

another qualified testing agency. 

D. Sound Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide gypsum-cement underlayment 

systems identical to those of assemblies tested for STC and IIC ratings per ASTM E 90 and 

ASTM E 492 by a qualified testing agency. 

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 


A. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from 

moisture or other detrimental effects. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate 

temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting 

underlayment performance. 

1. Place gypsum-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and 

temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F (10 and 27 deg C). 


A. Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor-covering products and 

adhesives, specified in Division 09 Sections, to ensure compatibility of products. 




2.1 GYPSUM-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS 

A. Underlayment: Gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum 

uniform thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor 

elevations. 



a. Maxxon Corporation; Gyp-Crete. 

b. USG Corporation; Levelrock 2500. 

2. Cement Binder: Gypsum or blended gypsum cement as defined by ASTM C 219. 

3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) at 28 days when tested 

according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 

4. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer, 

formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated. 

B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm); or coarse sand as 

recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 

1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for 

underlayment thickness required. 

C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F (21 deg C). 

D. Reinforcement: For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide galvanized metal lath or 

other corrosion-resistant reinforcement recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer. 

E. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, 

conditions, and application indicated. 

1. Primer shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 

40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 

2. Primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California 

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic 

Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 

F. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for 

metal substrates. 

1. Coating shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 

40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 

2. Coating shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California 





2.2 ACCESSORIES 

A. Sound Mat: 



a. Maxxon Corporation; Acoustimat II. 

b. USG Corporation; Levelrock Brand Sound Reduction Mat. 



A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance. 

1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to 

prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment. 

2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking. 

B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, 

laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and 

other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. 

1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed 

with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission 

rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/100 sq. m) in 24 hours. 

C. Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate 

movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and 

remove sanding dust. 

1. Install underlayment reinforcement recommended in writing by manufacturer. 

D. Metal Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, rust, 

foreign matter, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. Apply corrosionresistant 

coating compatible with underlayment if recommended in writing by underlayment 

manufacturer. 

E. Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes, 

sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond, and prepare surfaces 

according to manufacturer's written instructions. 



F. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment 


G. Sound Control Mat: Install sound control materials according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

1. Do not install mechanical fasteners that penetrate through the sound control materials. 

3.3 APPLICATION 

A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after 

application recommended in writing by manufacturer. 

2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and 

intercoat adhesion. 

3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to 

continue through underlayment. 

B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. 

C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. 

1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface. 

2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 

D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination 

during application and curing processes. 

E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in 

writing by underlayment manufacturer. 

F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including 

areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped. 

3.4 PROTECTION 

A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period. 




SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Concrete masonry units. 

2. Mortar and grout. 

3. Steel reinforcing bars. 

4. Masonry joint reinforcement. 

5. Ties and anchors. 

6. Embedded flashing. 

7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 


A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). 

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 


A. Provideunit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days. 

1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive 

strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1 

and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 

2. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms 

according to ASTM C 1314. 

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING 

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to 

perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with 

specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 

1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 

for compressive strength. 

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 1


2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to 

ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength. 

3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780 

for compressive strength. 

4. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019. 

5. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C 1314. 




1. Product Certificates for Credit MR 2.2: For products and materials required to comply 

with requirements for regional materials indicating location and distance from Project of 

material manufacturer. 

C. Shop Drawings: For the following: 

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 

2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. 

Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show 

elevations of reinforced walls. 

3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications. 


Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 

1. Masonry units. 

a. Include data on material properties and material test reports substantiating 

compliance with requirements. 

b. For masonry units, include data and calculations establishing average net-area 

compressive strength of units. 

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 

3. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 

4. Reinforcing bars. 

5. Joint reinforcement. 

B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of 

ingredients. 

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test 

according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water 

retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. 

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with 

compressive strength requirement. 



C. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type 

and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, 

mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to 

Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 

D. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and 

equipment to be used to comply with requirements. 


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated. 

B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and 

color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source 

from single manufacturer for each product required. 

C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, 

including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious 

component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. 

D. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by 



A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an 

enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If 

units become wet, do not install until they are dry. 

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not 

use cementitious materials that have become damp. 

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and 

contamination avoided. 

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with 

dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, 

under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. 

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt 

and oil. 


A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with 

waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when 

construction is not in progress. 



1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely 

in place. 

B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 

three days after building masonry walls or columns. 

C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left 

exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such 

masonry. 

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading 

coverings on ground and over wall surface. 

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and 

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from 

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. 

D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice 

or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost 

or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in 

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 

deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days 

after completing cleaning. 

E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in 

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 


2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL 

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to 

contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units 

where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. 

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 

A. Regional Materials: CMUs shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from 

aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as 

manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. 

B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed 

faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, 

bonding, and other special conditions. 



2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 

C. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 

1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide J.C. White as 

manufactured by Crego Block, or 230 Coral as manufactured by Utility Block Company, 

or approved equal. 

2. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive 

strength of 1350 psi. 

3. Density Classification: Lightweight. 

4. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 

5. Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of 

plaster, provide texture-face units made with gap-graded aggregates. 

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS 

A. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or 

crushed stone. 

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the 

No. 16 sieve. 

B. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 

C. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with 

ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar 

of composition indicated. 

D. Water: Potable. 

2.4 REINFORCEMENT 

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60. 

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 

1. Interior Walls: Mill- galvanized, carbon steel. 

2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 

3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 

4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 

5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 

6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units. 

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with 

single pair of side rods. 



2.5 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS 

A. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 

hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with 

ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated. 

B. Postinstalled Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 

1. Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load 

imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed 

in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified 

independent testing agency. 

2. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with 

ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated. 

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES 

A. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, 

Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in 

masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 

B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, 

Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 

C. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry 

unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel 

wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. 

2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES 

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, 

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise 

indicated. 

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 

2. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to 

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. 

B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the 

following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to 

provide required compressive strength of masonry. 

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 

2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 

C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 



1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will 

comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces 

and pour height. 

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day 

compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi. 

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to 

ASTM C 143/C 143M. 



A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation 

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental 

to performance of work. 

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 

3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify 

actual locations of piping connections. 

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite wall and other masonry construction to full thickness 

shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths 

indicated. 

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. 

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing 

equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. 

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous 

pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, 

unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install 

cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. 

3.3 TOLERANCES 

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or 

minus 1/4 inch. 



2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or 

minus 1/2 inch. 

3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or 

minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total. 

B. Lines and Levels: 

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 

inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary 

from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 

3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and 

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 

1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch 

in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 

inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 

C. Joints: 

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, 

with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more 

than 1/8 inch. 

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 

inch or minus 1/4 inch. 

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 

1/8 inch. 

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS 

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint 

thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. 

Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at 

other locations. 

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in 

running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at 

corners or jambs. 

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less 

than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with 

less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners and jambs. 

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in 

course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive 

mortar before laying fresh masonry. 



E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. 

Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 

F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of 

metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING 

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 

2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 

3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on 

footings. 

4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on 

footings where cells are not grouted. 

B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint 

thickness unless otherwise indicated. 

3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT 

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 

inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 

1. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 

2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and 

extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. 

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. 

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. 

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, 

offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 

3.7 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS 

A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. 

Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for inplane 

wall or partition movement. 

B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 

1. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 



3.8 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION 

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support 

reinforced masonry elements during construction. 

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as 

indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, 

tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of 

reinforced masonry. 

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened 

sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during 

construction. 

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough 

strength to resist grout pressure. 

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout 

placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches. 


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections 

and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to 

perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements 

shall be done at Contractor's expense. 

B. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. 

C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. 

D. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for 

compressive strength. 

E. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to 

ASTM C 780. 

F. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test 

mortar for compressive strength. 

G. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019. 

H. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 7 days and 

at 28 days. 

3.10 PARGING 



A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a 

total thickness of 3/4 inch. Dampen wall before applying first coat and scarify first coat to 

ensure full bond to subsequent coat. 

B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface 

variation of 1/8 inch per foot. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. 

C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured. 

3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING 

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise 

damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install 

in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. 

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and 

completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent 

construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, 

where indicated. 

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove 

mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes 

or chisels. 

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for 

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding 

with cleaning of masonry. 

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering 

them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking 

tape. 

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by 

rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 

5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to 

type of stain on exposed surfaces. 

3.12 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL 

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's 

property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. 

B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as 

described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. 




SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors and grilles. 

2. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 

3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 

4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified 

in other Sections. 

5. Steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction. 

6. Prefabricated building columns. 

7. Shelf angles. 

8. Metal ladders. 

9. Ladder safety cages. 

10. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel edgings. 

11. Metal bollards. 

12. Downspout guards. 

13. Abrasive metal nosings. 

14. Metal downspout boots. 

15. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other 

Sections. 

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section: 

1. Loose steel lintels. 

2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated 

to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 

3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not 

specified in other Sections. 

C. Related Sections: 

1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe 

sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete. 

2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other 

items built into unit masonry. 

3. Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs." 

4. Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings." 

5. Division 06 Sections for metal framing anchors and timber connectors. 

METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1


6. Division 12 Section "Site Furnishings" for bicycle racks. 

7. Division 32 Section "Plants" for tree grates. 


A. Delegated Design: Design ladders and alternating tread devices, including comprehensive 

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and 

design criteria indicated. 

B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders, including landings, shall 

withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in 

ANSI A14.3. 

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature 

changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, 

overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material 

surfaces. 


A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. 

2. Prefabricated building columns. 

3. Metal nosings and treads. 

4. Paint products. 

5. Grout. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their 

connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing and tread. 

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance 

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified 

professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 


A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. 

B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products furnished 

comply with requirements. 

C. Welding certificates. 



D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers 

certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, 

"Structural Welding Code - Steel." 

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 

3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." 


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with 

metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 


A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint 

and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats 

are compatible with one another. 

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. 

Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, 

concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in 

concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 


2.1 METALS, GENERAL 

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise 

indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials 

without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 

2.2 FERROUS METALS 

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304 

Type 316L. 

C. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304 Type 316L. 



D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. 

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 

1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm). 

2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.108-inch 

(2.8-mm) nominal thickness. 

3. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B 

minimum thickness; hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 

G. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless 


2.3 NONFERROUS METALS 

A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6. 

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6. 

C. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6. 

D. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F. 

E. Bronze Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz 

metal, 60 percent copper). 

F. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze). 

G. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400 

(leaded semired brass). 

H. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151/B 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500. 

I. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel 

bronze). 

2.4 FASTENERS 

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use 

and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 

(ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class 

required. 

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 

2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 

3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver. 

4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze. 



B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, 

Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat 

washers. 

C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3 (ASTM A 325M, 

Type 3); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3 (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3); and, where 

indicated, flat washers. 

D. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, 

ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where 

indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1 (A1). 

E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; 

and, where indicated, flat washers. 

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being 

fastened is indicated to be galvanized. 

F. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489. 

G. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M). 

H. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). 

I. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1. 

J. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M). 

K. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M). 

L. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the 

load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in 

concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified 

independent testing agency. 

M. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise 

indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or 

ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip 

galvanized per ASTM F 2329. 

N. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 


ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 

(A1) Group 2 (A4)] stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, 

ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M). 

O. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying 

with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or 



studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with 

temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply 

with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts. 

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy 

welded. 

B. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product 

requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the 

Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental 

Chambers." 

C. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections. 

D. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer 

complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. 

E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and 

compatible with paints specified to be used over it. 

F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 

G. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with 

ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications. 

H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout 

complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for 

interior and exterior applications. 

I. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for 

normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 

psi (20 MPa). 

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL 

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units 

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain 

structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated 

installation. 

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of 

approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on 

exposed surfaces. 

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or 

otherwise impairing work. 



D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. 

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion 

resistance of base metals. 

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 

3. Remove welding flux immediately. 

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no 

roughness shows after finishing. 

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or 

welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head 

(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude 

water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, 

and similar items. 

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring 

devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 

1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with 

integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a 

minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches 

(200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise 

indicated. 

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS 

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to 

complete the Work. 

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise 

indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent 

construction. 

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 

2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. 

C. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel 

baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and 

connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as 

pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) baseplates with four 5/8-inch 

(16-mm) anchor bolts and 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) top plates. 



D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. 

E. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer 

2.8 SHELF ANGLES 

A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete 

framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more 

than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners. 

2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint 

approximately 2 inches (50 mm) larger than expansion or control joint. 

B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and 

concrete. 

C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls. 

D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer. 

E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-inplace 

concrete. 

2.9 METAL LADDERS 

A. General: 

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated. 

2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1. 

B. Steel Ladders: 

1. Space siderails 18 inches (457 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch (9.5-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased 

edges. 

3. Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bars. 

4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 

5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminumoxide 

granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled 

with aluminum-oxide grout. 

6. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material 

metallically bonded to rung. 

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be 


1) IKG Industries, a division of Harsco Corporation; Mebac. 

2) SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring, a W. S. Molnar company; SlipNOT. 



7. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from welded or pressure-locked steel bar 

grating, supported by steel angles. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch 

12 mm or 3/4 inch (19 mm) in least dimension. 

8. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with 

welded or bolted steel brackets. 

9. Prime exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer. 

C. Aluminum Ladders: 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers 

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, 


a. ACL Industries, Inc. 

b. Alco-Lite Industrial Products. 

c. Halliday Products. 

d. O'Keeffe's Inc. 

e. Precision Ladders, LLC. 

f. Royalite Manufacturing, Inc. 

g. Thompson Fabricating, LLC. 

2. Space siderails 18 inches (457 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Siderails: Continuous extruded-aluminum channels or tubes, not less than 2-1/2 inches 

(64 mm) deep, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick. 

4. Rungs: Extruded-aluminum tubes, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep and not less than 

1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, with ribbed tread surfaces. 

5. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; fasten by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners or 

brackets and aluminum rivets. 

6. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from pressure-locked aluminum bar grating or 

extruded-aluminum plank grating, supported by extruded-aluminum framing. Limit 

openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) in least dimension. 

7. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with 

welded or bolted aluminum brackets. 

8. Provide minimum 72-inch- (1830-mm-) high, hinged security door with padlock hasp at 

foot of ladder to prevent unauthorized ladder use. 

2.10 LADDER SAFETY CAGES 

A. General: 

1. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or with 

stainless-steel fasteners. 

2. Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 20 feet 

(6 m) o.c. Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 48 inches (1200 

mm) o.c. between primary hoops. 

3. Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent construction by welding or with 

stainless-steel fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Steel Ladder Safety Cages: 



1. Primary Hoops: 1/4-by-4-inch (6.4-by-100-mm) flat bar hoops. 

2. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 1/4-by-2-inch (6.4-by-50-mm) flat bar hoops. 

3. Vertical Bars: 3/16-by-1-1/2-inch (4.8-by-38-mm) flat bars secured to each hoop. 

4. Galvanize ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners. 

5. Prime ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer. 

C. Aluminum Ladder Safety Cages: 

1. Primary Hoops: 1/4-by-4-inch (6.4-by-100-mm) flat bar hoops. 

2. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 1/4-by-2-inch (6.4-by-50-mm) flat bar hoops. 

3. Vertical Bars: 1/4-by-2-inch (6.4-by-50-mm) flat bars secured to each hoop. 

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM 

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown 

with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed 

field splices where possible. 

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with 

other work. 

1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry 

construction. 

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim. 

D. Prime miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer. Primer specified in Division 09 Section 

"High-Performance Coatings." 

2.12 METAL BOLLARDS 

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 

1. Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide necessary 

cutouts for controls and holes for wire. 

2. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide necessary cutouts for 

fixtures and holes for wire. 

B. Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 1/4-inch (6.4- 

mm) wall-thickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) less than ID of 

bollards. Match drill sleeve and bollard for 3/4 inch (19 mm) steel machine bolt. 

C. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer. 

2.13 DOWNSPOUT GUARDS 

A. Fabricate downspout guards from 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick by 12-inch- (300-mm-) wide steel 

plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch 

(50-mm) clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch (19-mm) 

anchor bolts. 



B. Prime downspout guards with zinc-rich primer. primer specified in Division 09 Section "High- 

Performance Coatings." 

2.14 METAL DOWNSPOUT BOOTS 

A. Provide downspout boots made from cast iron in heights indicated with inlets of size and shape 

to suit downspouts. Provide units with flanges and holes for countersunk anchor bolts. 

1. Outlet: Vertical, to discharge into pipe. 

B. Prime cast iron downspout boots with zinc-rich primer. 

2.15 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES 

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete 

construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. 

B. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer. 

2.16 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS 

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and 

recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for 

each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single 

unit where indicated. 

B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span 

but not less than 8 inches (200 mm) unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer. 

D. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from 

concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than 

two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 

2.17 FINISHES, GENERAL 

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for 

recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 

C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into 

surrounding surface. 



2.18 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES 

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for 

steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint 

adhesion. 

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded 

in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated. 

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 

2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial 

Blast Cleaning." 

3. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification 

No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 

2.19 ALUMINUM FINISHES 

A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum 

Association for designating aluminum finishes. 

B. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified). 

C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; 

Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 

0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. 



A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing 

metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with 

edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and 

levels. 

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are 

not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. 

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after 

fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. 



C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 





4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no 

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent 

surface. 

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal 

fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for 

use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and 

other connectors. 

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, 

masonry, or similar construction. 

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with 

grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 

1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 

2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. 

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS 

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, 

including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. 

B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure. 

C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders 

with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of 

pipe columns. 

1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or 

masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. 

D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column 

baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. 

1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and 

leveled. 

3.3 INSTALLING PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS 

A. Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel 

Buildings" and with requirements applicable to listing and labeling for fire-resistance rating 

indicated. 



3.4 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS 

A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before 

installing. 

1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete. 

B. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches (75 

mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. 

Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. 

C. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in concrete by inserting into pipe sleeves preset 

into concrete or core-drilled holes not less than 8 inches (200 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (19 mm) 

larger than OD of sleeve. Fill annular space around internal sleeves solidly with nonshrink, 

nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. 

Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) toward internal sleeve. 

D. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and 

align sleeves in holes 3 inches (75 mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate 

or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace sleeves in position until concrete has cured. 

E. Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 3/4-inch (19-mm) machine bolts 

and nuts. After tightening nuts, drill holes in bolts for inserting padlocks. Owner will furnish 

padlocks. 

F. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 

1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete. 

3.5 INSTALLING NOSINGS 

A. Center nosings on tread widths unless otherwise indicated. 

B. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and level 

with tread surfaces. 

3.6 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES 

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to 

improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. 

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have 

been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if 

protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 

1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not 

exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless 


2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 



3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and 

abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop 

painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness. 

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and 

abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair 

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 



G.A.H.P. PLAZA FELIZ 

SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Preassembled steel stairs with diamond-plate steel (“checker plate”) treads and risers. 

2. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs. 

3. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs. 


1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 


A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a 

qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 

B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and 

the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m). 

2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm). 

3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition 

to loads specified above. 

5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch (6.4 

mm), whichever is less. 

C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the 

following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: 

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. 

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. 

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

2. Infill of Guards: 

METAL STAIRS 055100 - 1


a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. 

(0.093 sq. m). 

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 


A. Product Data: For metal stairs and the following: 

1. Diamond-plate steel (“checker plate”). 

2. Paint products. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance 





B. Welding certificates. 

C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers 


D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified 

testing agency, for stairs and railings. 

1. Test railings according ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 

B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for 

Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, 

unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 

1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class. 

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 


2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 







B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and 

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items 

with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to 

Project site in time for installation. 



A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise 

indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without 

seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 

2.2 FERROUS METALS 

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed). 

C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with 

ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. 

D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless 


E. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, 

or structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170), unless another grade is required by design loads; 

exposed. 

F. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, 

or structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205), unless another grade is required by design loads. 

G. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or 

ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where 

built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 

H. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property 

Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 

I. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 

(ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 

1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for exterior stairs. 



J. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M). 

K. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). 

L. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M). 

M. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M). 

N. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of 

sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit 

masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing 

according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 



indicated. 


(A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 

(ASTM F 836M). 



welded. 




Chambers." 

C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer 



D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout 




A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, 

brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and 

platforms on supporting structure. 

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 



3. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope to 

drain. 

B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units 

only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and 

coordinated installation. 

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of 



D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or 

otherwise impairing work. 

E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. 

F. Weld connections to comply with the following: 





4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 

5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary 

Joint Finish Standards" for Type 2 welds: completely sanded joint, some undercutting 

and pinholes okay. 

G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners 

where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) 

screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 

H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep 

holes where water may accumulate. 

2.5 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering 

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Alfab, Inc. 

2. American Stair, Inc. 

3. Sharon Companies Ltd. (The). 

B. Stair Framing: 

1. Fabricate stringers of steel tubes. 

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of tube stringers. 



2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing 

members as needed to comply with performance requirements. 

3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers. 

If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces. 

C. Metal Floor Plate Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from floor plate of 

thickness. 

1. Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Form risers of same material as 

treads. 

2. Form tread with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Form risers from steel sheet not 

less than 0.097 inch (2.5 mm) thick, welded to tread nosings and stiffeners and to 

platforms. 

3. Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener, and with open risers. 

4. Weld steel supporting brackets to stringers and weld treads to brackets. 

5. Fabricate platforms with integral nosings matching treads and weld to platform framing. 

2.6 STAIR RAILINGS 

A. Comply with applicable requirements in Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings." 

1. Fabricate newels of square steel tubing and provide newel caps of gray-iron castings. 

2. Rails may be bent with a radius at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using 

prefabricated fittings. 

3. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, 

dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings, 

and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads. 

1. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch- (41-mm-) diameter top and 1-1 ½ inch square bottom rails 

and 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square posts. 

2. Picket Infill: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) square pickets spaced less than 4 inches (100 mm) 

clear. 

C. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at 

connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at 

connections, including at fittings. 

1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 2 

welds: completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay. 

D. Form changes in direction of railings as follows: 

1. By radius bends or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius indicated. 

E. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature 

for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire 

bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of 

components. 



F. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 

G. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends 

of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less. 

H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, 

miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other 

work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 

1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated. 

2. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, 

fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and 

concrete construction. 

I. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where 

needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to 

suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and 

overstressing of substrate. 

2.7 FINISHES 



B. Finish metal stairs after assembly. 

C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for 

steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 


adhesion. 

2. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain 

as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 

D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC- 

SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 

E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with 

galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise 

indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and 

Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 





A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary 

for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and 

masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. 

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing 

metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from 

established lines and levels and free of rack. 

C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete 

unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, 

masonry, or similar construction. 

E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are 

not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. 

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after 

fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. 

F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article. 

3.2 INSTALLING METAL STAIRS WITH GROUTED BASEPLATES 

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to 

improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of baseplates. 

B. Set steel stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After stairs have been positioned 

and aligned, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off 

flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 

1. Use nonmetallic, nonshrink grout unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 

3.3 INSTALLING RAILINGS 

A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space 

posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each 

direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows: 

1. Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members. 

2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail 

ends and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts. 

B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for 

exposed bolt anchorage. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of 



handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing 

required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to 

comply with performance requirements. 

1. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between 

studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 



abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop 








SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Steel pipe and tube railings. 


1. Section 011111 “Basis of Design Products and Systems”. 

2. Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs. 

3. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 


A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a 

qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 

B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable 

design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 

1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. 

C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following 

loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: 

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. 

b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. 

c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

2. Infill of Guards: 

a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. 

(0.093 sq. m). 

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1


D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature 

changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, 

overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material 

surfaces. 

E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals 

and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 


A. Product Data: For the following: 

1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 

2. Railing brackets. 

3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design. 

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance 





B. Welding certificates. 

C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers 



testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. 

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, 

"Structural Welding Code - Steel." 

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 





A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with 

metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 

1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING 




B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and 

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items 

with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to 

Project site in time for installation. 

C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support 

railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements. 


2.1 MANUFACTURERS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the 

following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work 

include, but are not limited to, the following]: 

1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: 

a. Pisor Industries, Inc. 

b. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies. 


A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller 

marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. 

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as 

supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 

2.3 STEEL AND IRON 

A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513. 

B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless 

another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 



1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. 

C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless 


E. Perforated Metal: Galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating, 

commercial steel Type B. 

2.4 FASTENERS 

A. General: Provide the following: 

1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or 

ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating. 

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel 

fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating. 

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and 

class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of 

construction indicated[ and capable of withstanding design loads]. 

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching 

them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching 

them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard 

fastening method for railings indicated. 

3. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise 

indicated. 

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of 

sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit 

masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing 

according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with 


indicated. 


(A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 

(ASTM F 836M). 



welded. 






Chambers." 

C. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. 

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and 

compatible with paints specified to be used over it. 

E. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer 



F. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. 

G. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Cementitious galvanized metal primer complying with 

MPI#26. 

H. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Division 09 painting 

Sections. 

I. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 

J. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout 



K. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion 

cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, 

and grouting compound. 

1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations and where indicated provide formulation 

that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or 

waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 

2.6 FABRICATION 

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, 

member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to 

support structural loads. 

B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and 

assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly 

mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain 

structural value of joined pieces. 

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of 





D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. 

E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide 

weep holes where water may accumulate. 

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. 

G. Connections: Fabricate railings with either welded or nonwelded connections unless otherwise 

indicated. 

H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings 

designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 




3. Remove flux immediately. 

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness 

shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. 

I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. 

Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 

1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is 

manufacturer's standard splicing method. 

J. Form changes in direction as follows: 

1. By radius bends of radius indicated or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius 

indicated. 

K. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain 

cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or 

otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. 

L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. 

M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends 

of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less. 

N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, 

and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crushresistant 

fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural 

supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. 

O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry 

work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. 

Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. 



P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long with 

inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) greater than outside dimensions of post, with 

metal plate forming bottom closure. 

Q. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel tube or pipe whose ID is sized 

for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not 

more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist 

being dislodged. 

1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing 

sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings. 

R. Perforated-Metal Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from perforated metal made from 

galvanized steel. 

1. Edge panels with U-shaped channels made from metal sheet, of same metal as perforated 

metal and not less than 0.043 inch (1.1 mm) thick. 

2. Orient perforated metal with pattern parallel to top rail. 

S. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of 

open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated. 




B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, 

temporary protective covering before shipping. 

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are 

acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations 

in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are 

acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to 

minimize contrast. 

D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of 

railings. 

2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES 

A. Galvanized Railings: 

1. Hot-dip galvanize indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 

2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 

3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. 


adhesion. 

5. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to 

remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 



B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and 

other ferrous components. 

C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings 

of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. 

D. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, 

fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or 

masonry. 

E. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC- 

SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 

F. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise 

indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: 

Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied 

to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 

1. Shop prime uncoated railings with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is 

indicated. 

2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces. 

G. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting." 

1. Color: Match Architect's sample. 



A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify 

that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate 

reinforcements and mark locations if not already done. 


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. 

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in 

location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or 

finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or 

other means without further cutting or fitting. 

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 

3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel 

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 

mm in 3 m). 



C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, 

concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. 

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for 

securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 

3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS 

A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing 

components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored 

to match finish of railings. 

B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. 

Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is 

performed in the shop or in the field. 

3.4 ANCHORING POSTS 

A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been 

inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic 

grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's 

written instructions. 

B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than 

OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill 

annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring 

cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

C. Leave anchorage joint exposed with anchoring material flush with adjacent surface. 

3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS 

A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to 

railing ends or connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections. 

B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to 

railing ends or connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections. 

C. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets 

with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. 

Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 

1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. 

2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural 

loads. 



D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 

1. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between 

studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 



abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop 





C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair 

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 


A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective 

coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of 





SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Framing with dimension lumber. 

2. Framing with engineered wood products. 

3. Shear wall panels. 

4. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 

5. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 

6. Wood furring and grounds. 

7. Wood sleepers. 

8. Utility shelving. 

9. Plywood backing panels. 


1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing." 

2. Division 06 Section "Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses" for wood trusses made from 

dimension lumber. 

3. Division 31 Section "Termite Control" for site application of borate treatment to wood 

framing. 


A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. 

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in 

least dimension. 

C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension. 

D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 

1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 

2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 

3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. 

4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 

5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 

6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 

ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1



A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component 

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and 

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate 

type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and 

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include 

physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent 

testing agency. 

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before 

and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent 

testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of 

treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 

5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of 

treatment. 


1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.2: For adhesives, documentation including printed 

statement of VOC content. 

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit MR 2.2: For adhesives, documentation indicating that 

products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department 

of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from 

Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 

C. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing. 


A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit 

stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the 

ALSC Board of Review. 

B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 

2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 

3. Engineered wood products. 

4. Shear panels. 

5. Power-driven fasteners. 

6. Powder-actuated fasteners. 

7. Expansion anchors. 

8. Metal framing anchors. 




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant 

treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that 

periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is 

representative of the material tested. 


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. 

Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide 

for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. 


2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL 

A. Certified Wood: Materials shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an 

FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and 

Criteria for Forest Stewardship"for the following: 

1. Dimension lumber framing. 

2. Laminated-veneer lumber. 

3. Parallel-strand lumber. 

4. Rim boards. 

5. Miscellaneous lumber. 

B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency 

is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency 

certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the 

ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 

2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on 

end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade 

compliance issued by grading agency. 

3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for 

moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed 

sizes for dry lumber. 

4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities 

having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that 

show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 



1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design 

stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. 

Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational 

engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a 

qualified independent testing agency. 

2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING 

A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade. 

1. Application: Interior partitions not indicated as load-bearing. 

2. Species: 

a. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 

b. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA. 

c. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 

B. Load-Bearing Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade. 

1. Application: Interior load-bearing partitions. 

2. Species: 

a. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. 

b. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 

c. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 

C. Ceiling Joists: Construction, Stud, or No. 3 grade. 

1. Species: 

a. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 

2.3 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS 

A. Engineered Wood Products, General: Products shall contain no urea formaldehyde. Comply 

with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' 

"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using 

Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of engineered wood product from single source from a 

single manufacturer. 

C. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain 

primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and 

manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. 




a. Boise Cascade Corporation. 

b. Finnforest USA. 



c. Georgia-Pacific. 

d. Jager Building Systems Inc. 

e. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. 

f. Pacific Woodtech Corporation. 

g. Roseburg Forest Products Co. 

h. Standard Structures Inc. 

i. Stark Truss Company, Inc. 

j. West Fraser Timber Co., Ltd. 

k. Weyerhaeuser Company. 

2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi 17.9 MPa for nominal – (286-mm 

actual-) depth members. 

3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1,800,000 psi. 

D. Parallel-Strand Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood strand elements with 

grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to 

ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with 

ASTM D 2559. 




a. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. 

b. Weyerhaeuser Company. 

2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi for 12-inch nominal- depth 

members. 

3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,200,000 psi. 

2.4 SHEAR WALL PANELS 



B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated 

on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 

2. Weyerhaeuser Company. 

C. Wood-Framed Shear Wall Panels: Prefabricated assembly consisting of wood perimeter 

framing, tie downs, and Exposure I, Structural I plywood or OSB sheathing. 

1. Products shall contain no urea formaldehyde. Comply with the testing and product 


Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale 

Environmental Chambers." 



D. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by 

manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be 

determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by 

comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER 

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other 

construction, including the following: 

1. Blocking. 

2. Nailers. 

3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 

4. Cants. 

5. Furring. 

6. Grounds. 

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and the 

following species: 

1. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 

2. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and [any 

of ]the following species and grades: 

1. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; 

NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 

D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber 

of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will 

interfere with its attachment and purpose. 

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to 

eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. 

F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots 

capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 

2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS 

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, 

not less than 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal thickness. 

1. Plywood shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California 





2.7 FASTENERS 

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified 

in this article for material and manufacture. 

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative 

treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating 

complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. 

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. 

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. 

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. 

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, 

where indicated, flat washers. 

G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with 

capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed 

in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete 

as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and 

inspecting agency. 

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, 

Class Fe/Zn 5. 

2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and 

ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. 

2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS 





1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 

2. KC Metals Products, Inc. 

3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc. 


5. USP Structural Connectors. 

C. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by 

manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be 

determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by 

comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 



D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with 

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation. 

1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), highstrength 

low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B 

(HSLAS Type B); G185 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick. 

1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated. 

F. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and 1-1/4-inch- wide nailing 

flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth. 

1. Thickness: 0.050 inch. 

G. I-Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and 1-1/4-inch- wide nailing 

flanges full depth of joist. Nailing flanges provide lateral support at joist top chord. 


H. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with 

tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member. 

1. Strap Width: 1-1/2 inches. 


I. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.050 inch thick, length to suit joist size and spacing. 

J. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch 

above base and with 2-inch- minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch thick, and standoff and 

adjustment plates 0.108 inch thick. 

K. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports. 

1. Width: 1-1/4 inches. 


3. Length: As indicated. 

L. Rafter Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-1/2 

inches wide by 0.050 inch thick. Tie fastens to side of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side 

of stud below. 

M. Rafter Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof 

trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/4 inches wide by 0.062 inch thick. Tie fits over top of rafter or 

truss and fastens to both sides of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below. 

N. Floor-to-Floor Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying upper floor wall studs to 

band joists and lower floor studs, 1-1/4 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick by 36 inches long. 

O. Wall Bracing: T-shaped bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 1-1/8 inches wide by 

9/16 inch deep by 0.034 inch thick with hemmed edges. 



P. Wall Bracing: Angle bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 15/16 by 15/16 by 0.040 

inch thick with hemmed edges. 


A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill 

sealer; 1-inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's 

standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. 

B. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's 

standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. 

C. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl 

rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum 

foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch. 

D. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying 

with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. 

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California 



E. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2- 

propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active 

ingredient. 



A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and 

fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. 

Locate furring, nailers, blocking, [grounds, ]and similar supports to comply with requirements 

for attaching other construction. 

B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame 

Construction," unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with 

manufacturer's written instructions. 

D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities 

requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with 

classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. 

E. Shear Wall Panels: Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 



F. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written 

instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. 

G. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls. 

H. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. 

I. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, 

specialty items, and trim. 

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where 

framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips 

not more than 16 inches o.c. 

J. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and 

as follows: 

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 

inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to 

close furred spaces. 

2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at 

ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not 

inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width 

as framing members and 2-inch nominal- thickness. 

3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to 

limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below 

partitions. 

4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more 

than 20 feet o.c. 

K. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with 

fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with 

function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or 

optimum joint arrangement. 

L. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated 

lumber. 

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 

2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. 

M. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, 

complying with the following: 

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 

3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), 

"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two- 

Family Dwellings. 



N. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully 

penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. 

Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails 

snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 

O. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with 

fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. 

1. Comply with approved indicated fastener patterns where applicable. 

2. Use finishing nails unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with 

wood filler. 

3. Use common nails unless otherwise indicated. Drive nails snug but do not countersink 

nail heads. 

3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, and NAILER INSTALLATION 

A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to 

shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate 

locations with other work involved. 

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces 


C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install 

continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. 

D. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not 

less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness 

of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. 

3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION 

A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required 

for tolerance of finish work. 

B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-size furring vertically at 16 

inches o.c. 

3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION 

A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal 

thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-loadbearing 

partitions and for load-bearing partitions where framing members bearing on partition 

are located directly over studs. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise 

indicated. 

1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- (38-by-140-mm actual-size wood studs 

spaced indicated. 



2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal – (38-by-89-mm actual 

size wood studs spaced 16 inches 600 mm 400 mm o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 

3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches 

high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. 

B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs, except that two studs may be used 

for interior non-load-bearing partitions. 

C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness 

equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. 

1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4- 

inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for 

openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in 

width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width. 

2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 60 inches and less in 

width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated or, if 

not indicated, according to Table R502.5(1) or Table R502.5(2), as applicable, in ICC's 

International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. 

3.5 CEILING JOIST INSTALLATION 

A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements 

specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. 

1. Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to 

rafters from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to first 

joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1-by-8-inch nominal- size 

or 2-by-4-inch nominal- size stringers spaced 48 inches o.c. crosswise over main ceiling 

joists. 

B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and[ toe nail or] use metal framing anchors. Double 

rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal 

hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge 

member or use metal ridge hangers. 

1. At valleys, provide double-valley rafters of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same 

thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full 

bearing against valley rafters. 

2. At hips, provide hip rafter of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as 

regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip 

rafter. 

C. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions if 

any. 

3.6 TIMBER FRAMING INSTALLATION 

A. Install wood posts using metal anchors indicated. 



3.7 STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION 

A. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not indicated, to 

comply with the following requirements: 

1. Size: 2-by-12-inch nominal- size, minimum. 

2. Material: Solid lumber. 

3. Notching: Notch rough carriages to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at least 3- 

1/2 inches of effective depth. 

4. Spacing: At least three framing members for each 36-inch clear width of stair. 

B. Provide stair framing with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers 

and no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each 

flight. 


A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite 

protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. 

Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. 

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes 

sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate 

treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. 




SECTION 061753 - SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Wood roof trusses. 

2. Wood floor trusses. 

3. Wood girder trusses. 

4. Wood truss bracing. 

5. Metal truss accessories. 


1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for roof sheathing and subflooring. 

2. Division 31 Section "Termite Control" for site application of borate treatment to wood 

trusses. 

C. Allowances: Provide wood truss bracing under the Metal-Plate-Connected Truss Bracing 

Allowance as specified in Division 01 Section "Allowances." 


A. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal-plateconnected 

members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to 



A. Product Data: For metal-plate connectors, metal truss accessories, and fasteners. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for trusses. 

1. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss 

required. 

2. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber. 

3. Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss 

members due to design loads. 

SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 1


4. Indicate locations, sizes, and materials for permanent bracing required to prevent 

buckling of individual truss members due to design loads. 

5. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal 

connector plates. 

6. Show splice details and bearing details. 

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses indicated to comply with 

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the 

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 


A. Qualification Data: For metal connector-plate manufacturer and fabricator. 

B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum specific 

gravity. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and specific gravity. 

C. Product Certificates: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses, signed by officer of truss 

fabricating firm. 

D. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 

1. Metal-plate connectors. 

2. Metal truss accessories. 


A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI 

and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates. 

1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services 

needed to assume engineering responsibility. 

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive 

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. 

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that 

complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third-party inspection by an 

independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant 

treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that 

periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is 

representative of the material tested. 


A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in TPI BCSI, "Building Component 

Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing 

Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 



1. Store trusses flat, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending. 

2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. 

3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. 

B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard 

and replace trusses that are damaged or defective. 



A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Division 01 Section 

"Quality Requirements," to design metal-plate-connected wood trusses. 

B. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding 

design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1 

unless more stringent requirements are specified below. 

1. Design Loads: As indicated. 

2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads: 

a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of span. 

b. Floor Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/480 of span. 

C. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications: 

1. TPI 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction." 

2. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate 

Connected Wood Trusses." 

3. TPI BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for 

Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses." 

D. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's 

"National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement." 

2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER 

A. Certified Wood: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses and permanent bracing, provide 

materials produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited 

certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest 

Stewardship." 

B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency 

is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency 

certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the 

ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 



2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade stamp and 

provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S. 

4. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. 

C. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous 

lumber in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 

2.3 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES 



1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.; an ITW company. 

2. Cherokee Metal Products, Inc.; Masengill Machinery Company. 

3. CompuTrus, Inc. 

4. Eagle Metal Products. 

5. Jager Building Systems, Inc.; a Tembec/SGF Rexfor company. 

6. MiTek Industries, Inc.; a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Inc. 

7. Robbins Engineering, Inc. 

8. Truswal Systems Corporation; an ITW company. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain metal connector plates from single manufacturer. 

C. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1. 

D. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength 

low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS 

Type B); G60 (Z180) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick. 


E. Hot-Dip Heavy-Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), highstrength 


(HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) 

thick. 


2.4 FASTENERS 

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified 

in this article for material and manufacture. 

1. Provide fasteners for use with metal framing anchors that comply with written 

recommendations of metal framing manufacturer. 

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. 



2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES 






2. USP Structural Connectors. 

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with 

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation. 


D. Hot-Dip Heavy-Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), highstrength 


(HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) 

thick. 


E. Truss Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening roof trusses to wall 

studs below, 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) wide by 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. Tie fits over top of truss 

and fastens to both sides of truss, top plates, and one side of stud below. 

F. Roof Truss Clips: Angle clips for bracing bottom chord of roof trusses at non-load-bearing 

walls, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick. Clip is fastened to truss 

through slotted holes to allow for truss deflection. 

G. Floor Truss Hangers: U-shaped hangers, full depth of floor truss, with 1-3/4-inch- (44-mm-) 

long seat; formed from metal strap 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick with tabs bent to extend over and 

be fastened to supporting member. 

H. Roof Truss Bracing/Spacers: U-shaped channels, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1 inch (25 

mm) deep by 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, made to fit between two adjacent trusses and 

accurately space them apart, and with tabs having metal teeth for fastening to trusses. 


A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent 

zinc dust by weight. 


A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints. 

B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details 

required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated. 



C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure 

uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in 

TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated. 

1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1. 

D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded 

simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press. 

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform special 

inspections. 

1. Provide special inspector with access to fabricator's documentation of detailed fabrication 

and quality-control procedures that provide a basis for inspection control of the 

workmanship and the fabricator's ability to conform to approved construction documents 

and referenced standards. 

2. Provide special inspector with access to places where wood trusses are being fabricated 

to perform inspections. 

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that special inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract 

Documents. 



A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured. 

B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing. 

C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, 

exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. 

D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated. 

E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction. 

F. Space trusses as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening. 

G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as 

applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchors according to 

manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions. 

H. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses. 

1. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated. 



I. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are 

applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams. 

1. Install bracing to comply with Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 

2. Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-chord 

floor trusses at centers indicated. 

J. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1. 

K. Do not alter trusses in field. Do not cut, drill, notch, or remove truss members. 

L. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements. 

1. Damaged trusses may be repaired according to truss repair details signed and sealed by 

the qualified professional engineer responsible for truss design, when approved by 

Architect. 

3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION 

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite 

protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. 

Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. 

B. Protect wood trusses from weather. If, despite protection, wood trusses become wet, apply 

EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPAregistered 

label. 

C. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint 

according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. 

D. Protective Coating: Clean and prepare exposed surfaces of metal connector plates. Brush apply 

primer, when part of coating system, and one coat of protective coating. 

1. Apply materials to provide minimum dry film thickness recommended by coating system 

manufacturer. 




SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Interior standing and running trim. 

2. Interior frames and jambs. 

3. Stairrails. 

4. Interior ornamental work. 

5. Closet and utility shelving. 

6. Shop finishing of interior woodwork. 


1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging 

strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before 

woodwork installation. 

2. Sectin 123530 “Residential Casework” for pre-manufactured cabinets and plasticlaminate 

countertops. 


A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for 

installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork 

installation. 

B. Rough carriages for stairs are a part of interior architectural woodwork. Platform framing, 

headers, partition framing, and other rough framing associated with stairwork are specified in 

Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories 

handrail brackets and finishing materials and processes. 


INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1


1. Product Data for Credit: For installation adhesives, documentation including printed 


2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit: For adhesives and finishing materials, 

documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements 

of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of 

Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental 

Chambers." 

C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale 

details, attachment devices, and other components. 

1. Show details full size. 

2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed 

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 

3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for faucets and other items installed in 

architectural woodwork. 

4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification 

numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf. 

5. Apply WI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings. 

D. Samples for Initial Selection: 

1. Shop-applied transparent finishes. 

2. Shop-applied opaque finishes. 

E. Samples for Verification: 

1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 50 sq. in., 5 inches wide by 24 inches 

long, for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge. 

2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparentfinished 

woodwork. 

3. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, 12 by 24 

inches, for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as 

specified. 

4. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 

by 10 inches for panels, for each finish system and color, with 1/2 of exposed surface 

finished. 

5. Corner pieces as follows: 

a. Miter joints for standing trim. 

6. Exposed accessories, one unit for each type and finish. 


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. 

B. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. 

C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program 

certificates . 




A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products 

similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice 

performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. 

B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility 

for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers and 

wood doors with face veneers that are sequence matched with woodwork and transparentfinished 

wood doors that are required to be of same species as woodwork. 

C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork 

Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, 

finishes, installation, and other requirements. 

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that 

woodwork, complies with requirements of grades specified. 

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to 

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of 



A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork 

have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation 

areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified 

in "Project Conditions" Article. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet 

work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative 

humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify 

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate 

measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress 

to avoid delaying the Work. 

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field 

measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 

2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying 

the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field 

measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to 

ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 




A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related 

units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be 

supported and installed as indicated. 


2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS 

A. Available Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, fabricators offering interior 

architectural woodwork that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, 


2.2 MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each 

type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Certified Wood: For any tropical wood or veneers, interior architectural woodwork shall be 

produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to 

comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." 

C. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: White oak, rift sawn or cut White ash, plain 

sawn or sliced. 

D. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine. 

E. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 

1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 

2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 

3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 

4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 

5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1. 


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less 

than 15 percent moisture content. 

B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln 

dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. 

C. Rough Carriages for Stairs: No. 1 grade and any of the following species, kiln dried to 15 

percent maximum moisture content: 

1. Douglas fir-larch. 

2. Douglas fir-south. 



3. Douglas fir-larch (north). 

4. Hem-fir. 

5. Hem-fir (north). 

D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. 

Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior 

walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead 

expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 

E. Handrail Brackets: Cast from aluminum with wall flange drilled for exposed anchor and with 

support arm for screwing to underside of rail. Sized to provide 1-1/2-inch clearance between 

handrail and wall. 

F. Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of 

the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile 

Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 

G. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives: Installation adhesives shall comply with the following 

limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 

1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 

2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 

3. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. 


A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Economy-grade interior 

woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. 

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood 

moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation 

areas. 

C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius 

indicated for the following: 

1. Corners and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) and composite trim materials Members 3/4 

Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch. 

2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. 

D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum 

extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for 

shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for 

scribing, trimming, and fitting. 

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will 

be complete. 

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. 

Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be 

removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check 



measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings 

before disassembling for shipment. 

E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing 

fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or 

roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts 

to remove splinters and burrs. 

2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH 

A. Grade: Economy. 

B. Wood Species: Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine, or Medex composite 

board, water resistant and formaldehyde-free. 

C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim wood members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, 

except for members with ends exposed in finished work. 

D. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for 

field assembly. 

2.6 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH 


A. Wood Species: Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine, or Medex composite 

board, water resistant and formaldehyde-free. 

2.7 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH 


B. Wood Species: Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine. 

2.8 STAIRWORK AND RAILS 


B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Red-oak #1 fir, or hard-maple handrails. 

C. Finishes for Stair Parts: As follows: 

1. Stringers: Opaque. 

2. Handrails: Transparent. 

D. Cut carriages to accurately fit treads and risers. Glue treads to risers, and glue and nail treads 

and risers to carriages. 



2.9 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING 


B. Shelf Material: 3/4-inch medium-density fiberboard with radiused edge. 

C. Cleats: 3/4-inch solid lumber. 

2.10 SHOP FINISHING 

A. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished. 

B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer 

only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. 

C. General: Shop finish transparent-finished interior architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as 

specified in this Section. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections for finishing opaque-finished 

architectural woodwork. 

D. General: Drawings indicate items that are required to be shop finished. Finish such items at 

fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections for 

finishing architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished. 

E. Finishing Materials: Products shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the 

California Department of Health Services "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic 


F. Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for items specified to 

be field finished. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections for material and application 

requirements. 

G. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling 

countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing 

architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 

1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to 

concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain 

surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require 

backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative 

panels. 

H. Transparent Finish: 

1. Grade: Economy. 

2. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed polyurethane. 

3. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. 





A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in 

installation areas. 

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and 

complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 


A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for 

fabrication of type of woodwork involved. 

B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for 

fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. 

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. 

Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. 

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish 

at cuts. 

E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply 

with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used 

to install woodwork. 

F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with 

countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use 

fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with 

woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. 

G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length 

pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use 

pieces less than 60 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf 

running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 

1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and 

finish same as wood base if finished. 

2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing. 

3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch 

in 96 inches. 

H. Stairs: Securely anchor carriages to supporting substrates. Install stairs with treads and risers 

no more than 1/8 inch from indicated position. 

I. Railings: 

1. General: Install rails with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch variation from a straight line. 



J. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes 

with matching filler where exposed. 

K. Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork not 

indicated to be shop finished. 


A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual 

defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform 

appearance. 

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. 

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to 

restore damaged or soiled areas. 




SECTION 071416 – COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 

PART 1-GENERAL 

1.1 SCOPE 

A. Provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary to apply the Pli-Dek waterproof system over 

horizontal plywood decks, walkways, and stairs. 

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS 

A. Sealants: Vulkem 931 caulking or equivalent. 

1.3 DESCRIPTION 

A. Pli-Dek is a proprietary blend of high performance acrylic formulations. Pli-Dek is a 

waterproofing system providing a durable walking surface in a variety of textures, finishes, and 

colors. 


A. Samples: 

1. The Pli-Dek Applicator shall make and submit samples of the proposed finish to the 

architect and/or owner for approval. 

B. Manufacturer’s Information: 

1. Submit manufacturer’s product information and specifications. 


A. Qualification: 

1. Manufacturer shall be Pli-Dek Systems, Inc., www.plidek.com. 

2. The applicator shall be listed with Pli-Dek Systems, Inc. as a trained* installer. 

B. Substrates: 

1. The Pli-Dek system installs over a minimum 16 mm, 5/8’’ (3/4” recommended) sound and 

dry, exterior grade sheeting; installed in accordance with this specification and Pli-Dek 

Application Instructions, PD165. 

2. The applicator/contractor shall verify that the proposed substrate is acceptable prior to 

application of the Pli-Dek System. Contact Pli-Dek Systems, Inc. for applications over 

Oriented Strand Board (OSB). 

C. Certifications: 

COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 1


1. The Pli-Dek System is recognized by the following Model Building Code organizations: 

a. ICC-ES 

b. The City of Los Angeles 

D. Performance Requirements: 

1. Water Vapor Transmission (ASTM E 96) 

2. Bond Strength (ASTM C 297) 

3. Abrasion Test (ASTM D 968) 

4. Weatherability Test (ASTM G 23) 

5. Class A Burn Tests (ASTM E 108) 

6. Freeze-Thaw Cycling (ASTM A75) 

7. Compressive Strength (ASTM C150-72) 

8. Water Absorption (ASTM D570) 

9. Chemical Resistance (ASTM D2299) 

10. Static Coefficient of Friction (ASTM C 1028-96) 

11. One-Hour System (ASTM E119) 

12. Wind-Up Lift (Factory Mutual 1.52) 

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. All materials shall be delivered to the job site in the original, unopened packages with labels 

intact. Upon arrival, materials shall be inspected for physical damage or freezing. Questionable 

materials shall not be used. 

B. Minimum storage temperature shall be 4°C (40°F). Maximum storage temperature shall be 43°C 

(110°F). All materials shall be stored in a dry location, out of direct sunlight and protected from 

weather and other damage. 


A. On-Site Conditions: 

1. The applicator shall have access to electrical power, clean potable water, and clean work 

area at the location where the Pli-Dek materials are to be applied. 

2. Other conflicting trades need to be made aware to keep off areas being covered by Pli-Dek 

materials during the application and curing process. 

3. All required framing and sheeting inspections must be made prior to the installations of the 

Pli-Dek materials. 

B. Environmental Conditions: 

1. The ambient air and surface temperature must be a minimum of 10°C (50°F) and a 

maximum of 43°C (110°F) and shall remain so for at least 24 hours. 

C. Protection: 

1. Adjacent areas and materials shall be protected from damage, drops and spills. 



2. The Pli-Dek material ls must be protected by permanent or temporary means from weather 

and other damage, before, during, and immediately after application. Care must be taken to 

prevent condensation and/or heat build up when using a tarp or plastic as protection. 

3. The materials shall be protected from weather and other trades which may damage the 

integrity of the product. 

D. Sequencing and Scheduling: 

1. Application shall be coordinated with other construction trades. 

2. Sufficient labor and equipment shall be employed to ensure a continuous operation. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

A. Contact Pli-Dek Systems, Inc. for complete details. Provide manufacture’s standard warranty. 

1.9 MAINTENANCE 

A. Sealants and flashing should be inspected on a regular basis and repairs made as necessary. 

B. Contact Pli-Dek Systems, Inc. for maintenance and warranty requirements. 


2.1 GENERAL 

A. All products shall be supplied by Pli-Dek Systems, Inc. and/or its authorized distributors. 

Substitutions or additions of other materials will void the warranty. 

2.2 COMPONENTS 

A. GU80-1 Base Coat (gray): A Portland cement and silicon dioxide composition that is to be mixed 

with GU80-1 Liquid Admixture. 

B. GU80-1 Liquid Admixture: An acrylic polymer emulsion. 

C. Fiberglass Mat: Chopped strand ¾ oz. woven mat (Not always required) 

D. PD Resin Base Coat: A high build elastomeric acrylic resin. (Not always required) 

E. GU80-1 Top Coat/Custom Top Coat (white): A Portland cement and silicon dioxide composition 

to be mixed with GU80-1 Liquid Admixture. 

F. GS88-1 Sealer: Pigmented water-based coating. 

G. GS99-1 Sealer: Water-based, clear sealer (optional). 

2.3 MATERIALS 

A. Water: clean and potable. 



B. Galvanized Metal Lath weighing 1.4 kg/m² (2.5lb. /yd.²): An expanded metal lath, dipped (not 

electro-galvanized). 

C. Caulking: Urethane based. Contact Pli-Dek Systems, Inc. for recommendations. 

D. Flashing: 26 gauge Bonderized, Galvanized Sheet Metal. 

2.4 EQUIPMENT 

A. Mixing shall be done with a clean Wind-lock B-M1 mixing blade or equivalent powered by a 13- 

mm (1/2”) variable speed drill capable of producing 1000 RPM. 

B. Tools 

1. Refer to the Pli-Dek Application Instructions, PD-165, for a complete list of recommended 

tools. 

PART 3- EXECUTION 

3.1 INSPECTION 

A. Examination of Substrate: 

1. Ensure that the substrate is of sound exterior grade exposure 1 sheeting. 

2. Refer to ICC-ES Legacy Report for framing requirements. 

3. All surfaces shall be sloped for positive drainage. A slope of 6.4 mm/.3m (1/4” per linear 

foot) is required. 

4. All plywood seams shall be staggered and a 3.2 mm (1/8”) space between all sheets shall 

exist. 

5. Framing or blocking must support all plywood edges, except as per APA guidelines, 

blocking is not required when tongue and groove plywood is used. Joists to be spaced 16” 

on center. For alternate assemblies contact Pli-Dek Systems, Inc. for written approval. 

6. Maximum deflection of the deck shall not exceed L/360th of the span. 

7. Minimum thickness of plywood shall be 16 mm (5/8”). 3/4” thick exposure 1 sheeting 

recommended. 

8. All adjacent edges of the plywood sheets shall not be more than 0.78 mm (1/32”) out of 

plane (i.e.: above or below each other). 

B. Flashing: 

1. Flashing shall be minimum 26 gauge galvanized, bonderized sheet metal. 

2. When copper flashing/drains are used, ensure that all galvanized metal; such as, nails, 

staples, lath, drains, etc. does not come into contact with copper (do not allow any 

dissimilar metals to come in contact with each other). The contact of the two dissimilar 

metals cause will create rust and corrosion (electrolysis). **Contact Pli-Dek Systems, Inc. 

for additional details and written recommendations. 

3. Proper flashing must be installed at all doors, walls, fascia edges, posts, penetrations, 

columns, etc. See Pli-Dek Details for further instructions (PD-150 Architectural Details). 



Contact Pli-Dek for written approval on flashing details that vary or are not included in PD- 

150 Architectural Details. 

4. Flashing must be installed to accommodate all exterior wall coating applications from 

coming in contact with the deck surface. Exterior siding, stucco, etc. must be held off the 

deck a minimum of 50 mm (6”). 

5. All flashing splices must be overlapped a minimum of 100 mm (4”) and caulked between 

any two pieces of flashing with a Vulkem 931 Urethane sealant or equivalent. All flashing 

overlaps shall be installed as to not 

6. “buck” water. 

7. Flashing at walls must be installed behind the building paper (or equivalent) on all areas 

that intersect the deck surface. 

3.2 SUBSTRATE PREPARATIONS 

A. Plywood Deck: 

1. All seams in plywood shall be gapped 3.2 mm (1/8”), and covered with a maximum of 50 

mm 

2. (2”) wide Pli-Dek approved flashing paper and tacked in place. 

3. Plywood shall be free of dust, moisture, and/or other debris or residue that would affect 

adhesion. 

4. Delaminated plywood shall be replaced with sound plywood. 

5. Fascia boards shall be installed to be level with the plywood substrate. 

6. Perimeter walls should be framed so to be consistent with interior floor boundaries. 


A. General: 

1. Refer to the Pli-Dek Application Instructions, PD-165, for complete information. 

B. Base Coat: 

1. Mix the GU80-1 Liquid Admixture with GU80-1 Base Coat. Refer to Pli-Dek Application 

Instructions, PD-165 for complete instructions. 

2. Trowel Base Coat emulsion into the galvanized expanded metal lath completely covering 

the metal lath. Allow it to dry completely, for approximately 2 (two) to 6 (six) hours, 

depending on weather conditions. 

C. Screed Coat: 

1. Mix the GU80-1 Liquid Admixture with GU80-1 Top Coat until a uniform consistency is 

achieved. Refer to Pli-Dek Application Instructions, PD-165 for complete instructions. 

2. Apply a Screed coat over the previously applied GU80-1 Base Coat. Allow it to dry 

completely, for approximately 2 (two) to 6 (six) hours, depending on weather conditions. 

D. Pli-Dek Finish Options / Specification Reference: (See Pli-Dek Application Instructions, PD165) 




A. The applicator shall be responsible for the proper application of the Pli-Dek materials. 

B. Pli-Dek Systems, Inc. assumes no responsibility for on-site inspections, application or 

workmanship. 

3.5 CLEAN-UP 

A. All excess Pli-Dek materials shall be removed from the job site by the contractor in accordance 

with contract provisions. 

B. All surrounding areas, where the Pli-Dek materials have been applied, shall be left free of debris 

and foreign substances resulting from the contractor’s work. 




SECTION 072100 - BUILDING INSULATION 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Foam-plastic board insulation. 

2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 

3. Spray-applied cellulosic insulation. 

4. Spray polyurethane foam insulation. 

5. Vapor retarders. 


1. Division 7 Section(s) " Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing" for insulation specified 

as part of roofing construction. 



B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified 

testing agency, for each product. 

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES. 


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to 

ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of 

applicable testing agency. 


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, 

soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's 

written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. 

BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 1


B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 

1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and 

concealment. 

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to 

Project site before installation time. 

3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each 

area of construction. 


2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION 

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive 

strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 

450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

a. DiversiFoam Products. 

b. Dow Chemical Company (The). 

c. Owens Corning. 

d. Pactiv Building Products. 

2. Type IV, 25 psi. 

B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation 

securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. 

2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 

2. Guardian Building Products, Inc. 

3. Johns Manville. 

4. Knauf Insulation. 

5. Owens Corning. 

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread 

and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing 

ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 

C. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows: 

1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no 

formaldehyde. 



2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 

0.05-ppm formaldehyde. 

2.3 SPRAY-APPLIED CELLULOSIC INSULATION 

A. Self-Supported, Spray-Applied Cellulosic Insulation: ASTM C 1149, Type II (materials 

containing a dry adhesive activated by water during installation; intended only for enclosed or 

covered applications), chemically treated for flame-resistance, processing, and handling 

characteristics. 


following: 

a. International Cellulos Corp 

b. ThermoCon 

c. Archiexpo 

d. All Tech Insulation 

2.4 POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION 

A. Open-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: Spray-applied polyurethane foam using water as a 

blowing agent, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, 

respectively, per ASTM E 84. 


following: 

a. BaySystems NorthAmerica, LLC. 

b. Demilec (USA) LLC. 

c. Gaco Western Inc. 

d. Icynene Inc. 

e. SWD Urethane Company. 

2. Minimum density of 0.4 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 3.4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 

75 deg F. 


A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 10 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating 

of 0.13 perm. 

B. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Two outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to 

an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not 

less than 25 lb/1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 

a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW. 



b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65. 

C. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder 

manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 

D. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers. 

E. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, 

Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates. 

F. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has 

demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated. 



A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including 

removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation 

attachment. 


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and 


B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, 

rain, or snow at any time. 

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions 

and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. 

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard 

thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness 

indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION 

A. On vertical footing and foundation wall surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's 

recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of full foundation and stem wall 

depth below exterior grade line. 

B. On horizontal surfaces under slabs, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's 

written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. 



1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches in from exterior 

walls. 

3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION 

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written 

instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use 

mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 

B. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing 

members according to the following requirements: 

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If 

more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a 

snug fit between ends. 

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between 

edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or 

protected from contact with insulation. 

C. Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and 

electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not 

indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of 

studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer. 

D. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where 

required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 

1. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION 

A. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket 

insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation 48 inches up 

either side of partitions. 

3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS 

A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to 

extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with 

adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover 

miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. 

B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs. 

1. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing 

including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. 

Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor- 



retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. 

Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. 

2. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder 

fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. 

C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor 

retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and 

vapor retarders. 

D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. 

Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders. 


A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, 

physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation 

is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction 

immediately after installation. 




SECTION 074213 - METAL WALL PANELS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Exposed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels. 


1. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing and other sheet metal 

work that is not part of metal wall panel assemblies. 

1.3 DEFINITION 

A. Metal Wall Panel Assembly: Metal wall panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous 

metal framing and trim, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete 

weathertight wall system. 


A. General Performance: Metal wall panel assemblies shall comply with performance 

requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other 

defects in construction. 

B. Structural Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects 

the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 

1. Deflection Limits: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with 

horizontal deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span. 


changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint 

sealants, failure of connections and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface 

temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces 

METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 1



A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material 

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of 

wall panel and accessory. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge 

conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, 

closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory-, shop- and fieldassembled 

work. 

1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 

inches per 12 inches: 

a. Flashing and trim. 

b. Anchorage systems. 

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size 

indicated below. 

1. Metal Wall: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other 

metal wall panel accessories. 

2. Trim and Closures: 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 

3. Accessories: 12-inch-long Samples for each type of accessory. 

D. Qualification Data: For Installer. 

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified 


F. Maintenance Data: For metal wall panels to include in maintenance manuals. 

G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 

1. Installer must have been in a commercial business installing similar metal wall panels for 

a minimum of 7 years. 

2. Installers must have a minimum of 2 years installation experience within the last 3 years 

installing similar metal wall panels. 

3. Installer must have a full service commercial metal shop with equipment required for 

fabrication and modifications of metal wall panels, including but not limited to shear 

table. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal wall panel from single source from single 

manufacturer. 

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 



1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's representative if applicable, metal wall panel 

Installer, metal wall panel manufacturer's representative (if requested), and installers 

whose work interfaces with or affects metal wall panels, including installers of doors, 

windows, and louvers. 

2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's 

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to progress and avoid delays, particularly of 

other trades. 

3. Review methods and procedures related to metal wall panel installation, including 


4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment 

between and attachment to structural members. 

5. Review layouts, flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and 

condition of other construction that will affect metal wall panels. 

6. Review temporary protection requirements for metal wall panel assembly during and 

after installation. 

7. Review wall panel observation and repair procedures after metal wall panel installation. 


A. Deliver components, sheets, metal wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be 

damaged or deformed. Package metal wall panels for protection during transportation and 

handling. 

B. Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, 

and surface damage. 

C. Stack metal wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight 

and ventilated covering. Store metal wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for 

drainage of water. Do not store metal wall panels in contact with other materials that might 

cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 

D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal wall panel for period of metal wall panel 

installation. 


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather 

conditions permit assembly of metal wall panels to be performed according to manufacturers' 

written instructions and warranty requirements. 

B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by 

field measurements before metal wall panel fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop 

Drawings. 




A. Coordinate metal wall panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and 

construction of girts (if any), studs or other substrates, soffits, and other adjoining work to 

provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 

1.10 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or 

replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within 

specified warranty period. 

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. 

b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. 

2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer 

agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of 

factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: 

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. 

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. 

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 PANEL MATERIALS 

A. All panel materials are to be furnished by the same manufacturer. 

1. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacture’s standard white or light-colored 

acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum 

total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. 

B. Panel Sealants: 

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound 

sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, 

nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; 

of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal wall panels 



and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal wall panel 

manufacturer. 

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. 


A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded 

studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed 

fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels. Provide EPDM sealing washers. 

2.3 EXPOSED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS 

A. General: Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping 

side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed 

fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 

a. AEP-Span “Box Rib”. 

b. Firestone Una-Clad VR Classic Omega. 

c. Alternate products meeting project requirements will be considered by prior 

approval. 

2. Material: Zincalume or Acrylume coated steel sheet materials meeting ASTM A792; 22 

ga. nominal thickness as shown on Drawings. 

a. Exterior Finish: 1 mil “Kynar”. 

b. Color: As selected by Architect form manufacturer’s full range of standard and 

premium colors. 

3. Rib Spacing: 7.2” nominal spacing. 

4. Panel Coverage: 36” net coverage 

5. Panel Height: 1-1/2” 


A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel 

assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, 

gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, 


1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal and of same 

guage as wall panles. 

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from 

material recommended by manufacturer. 

3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or 

closed cell laminated plyethylene; minimum 1-inch-thick, flexible closure strips; cut or 



premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or 

necessary to ensure weathertight construction. 

B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material and of same guage as adjacent wall panels. 

Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished 

appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, 

endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish 

flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels.Protect mechanical and 

painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporarySee 

Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming manufacturers. Retain 

one of first two subparagraphs and list of manufacturers below. See Division 01 Section 

"Product Requirements." 


A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent 

possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated 

performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles 

and with dimensional and structural requirements. 

B. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel 

and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals. 

C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full 

length of panel. 

1. East and West elevations may have panel joints (in long dimension) if required by 

Manufacturer’s Manufacturing production process. 

D. Fabricate metal wall panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that 

provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that will minimize noise from 

movements within panel assembly. 

E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in 

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, 

and other characteristics of item indicated. 

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, 

and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded 

back to form hems. 

2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flatlock 

seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 

3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate 

elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. 

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. 

5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored 

or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. 

a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or 

metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal 

being secured. 



2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS 



B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are 







A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for installation tolerances, metal wall panel supports, and other conditions 

affecting performance of work. 

1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural 

panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances 

required by metal wall panel manufacturer. 

2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or 

blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall panel 

manufacturer. 

3. Verify that weather-resistant sheathing paper has been installed over sheathing or backing 

substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. 

4. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental 

to performance of work. 

B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal wall panels to verify actual 

locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal wall panels before metal wall panel 

installation. 


3.2 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install metal wall panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in 

orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts and 

subgirts unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the 

Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 

1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels. 

2. Flash and seal metal wall panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping 

screws. Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be 

concealed by metal wall panels are installed. 

3. At horizontal wall applications, lay up panels from bottom to top to prevent water 

intrusion into joints. 



4. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 

5. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 

6. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds. 

7. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices 

and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 

8. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and 

concrete and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing. 

9. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping 

screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with selftapping 

screws. 

10. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls. 

B. Fasteners: 

1. Use stainless-steel fasteners with EPDM metal-backed washers and heads colored to 

match panel finish. 

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, 

protect against galvanic action as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. 

D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for 

weathertight performance of metal wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and 

sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. 

1. Seal metal wall panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. 

Seal side joints where recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. 

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section 

"Joint Sealants." 

E. Lap-Seam Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each 

lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer. 

1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items 

for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. 

a. At horizontal wall applications, lay up panels from bottom to top to prevent water 

intrusion into joints. 

2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side 

of metal wall panels. 

3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use 

proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of 

washer. 

4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress 

washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in 

predrilled holes. 

5. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal wall panels and between panels and 

protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. 

6. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end 

laps; on side laps of nesting-type panels; on side laps of corrugated nesting-type, ribbed, 

or fluted panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels weathertight. 

7. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with butyl-rubber 

sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates. 



3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and 

provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 

1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, 

copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and 

similar items. 

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation 

instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners 

where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, 

and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool 

marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to 

form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in 

waterproof and weather-resistant performance. 

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 

Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches 

of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would 

not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of 

intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant 

(concealed within joints). 


A. Remove and replace metal wall panels where field review or other inspection indicates that they 

do not comply with specified requirements. 

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are 

installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On 

completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal 

wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. 

B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, 

and sealant. 

C. Replace metal wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful 

repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 




SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Adhered TPO membrane roofing system. 

2. Vapor retarder. 

3. Roof insulation. 

B. Section includes the installation of acoustical roof deck rib insulation strips furnished under 

Division 05 Section "Steel Decking." 

C. Related Sections: 

1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood 

nailers, curbs, and blocking. 

2. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels. 

3. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck. 

4. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration 

flashings, flashings, and counterflashings. 

5. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation. 


A. TPO: Thermoplastic polyolefin. 

B. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and 

Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 


A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified 

uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to 

defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane 

roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight. 

THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 1


B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under 

conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing 

manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 

C. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that 

have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift 

pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 

D. FM Approvals Listing: Provide membrane roofing, base flashings, and component materials 

that comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as part of a 

membrane roofing system, and that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for Class 1 or 

noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals markings. 

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90. 

2. Hail Resistance: SH. 

E. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 29 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based 

on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency. 

F. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system that is listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR 

"Roof Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products. 

G. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial solar reflectance not less than 0.70 

and emissivity not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1. 



B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and 

attachments to other work. 

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 

2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 

3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of membrane roofing 

and fastening spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened membrane roofing. 

4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations. 

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 

1. Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam. 

2. Roof insulation. 

3. Walkway pads or rolls. 

4. Six insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish. 

5. Six roof cover fasteners of each type, length, and finish. 


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. 



B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system 

complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 

1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements. 

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer 

and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system. 

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, from the ICC-ES. 


F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for membrane roofing 

system identical to that used for this Project. 

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane 

roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive 

manufacturer's special warranty. 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain components including fasteners and preformed flashings for 

membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by 

membrane roofing manufacturer. 

D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated, 

as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency. 

Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies 

identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing 


F. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct conference at 


1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency 

representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck 

Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers 

of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's 



personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 



4. Review deck substrate requirements for conditions and finishes, including flatness and 

fastening. 

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, 

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if 

applicable. 

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after 

installation. 

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 

G. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency 

representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck 

Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers 

of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's 




4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, 

including flatness and fastening. 

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, 

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if 

applicable. 

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after 

installation. 

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled 

with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or 

listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. 

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location 

and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored 

liquid material from direct sunlight. 

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated 

shelf life. 

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, 

moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation 

manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. 



D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent 

deflection of deck. 



conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions 

and warranty requirements. 

1.11 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in 

which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that 

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, fasteners, roofing 

accessories, and other components of membrane roofing system. 


B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this 

Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of 

membrane roofing system such as membrane roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, 

cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the 

following warranty period: 

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING 

A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim 

reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet. 




a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. 

b. Custom Seal Roofing. 

c. Firestone Building Products Company. 

d. GAF Materials Corporation. 

e. GenFlex Roofing Systems. 

f. Johns Manville. 

g. Mule-Hide Products Co., Inc. 

h. Stevens Roofing Systems; Division of JPS Elastomerics. 

i. Versico Incorporated. 



2. Thickness: 45 mils, nominal, except where noted as 80 mils. 

3. Exposed Face Color: White. 

2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS 

A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer 

for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing. 

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply 

with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, 

Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 

a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 

d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. 

e. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesives: 250 g/L. 

f. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. 

g. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. 

h. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. 

i. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 

j. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 

3. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply 

with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health 

Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various 

Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing, 

55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane. 

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based. 

D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application. 

E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, 

approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors. 

F. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, 

approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched. 

G. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance 

provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and 

acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. 

H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, 

preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination 

reglets, and other accessories. 



2.3 SUBSTRATE BOARDS 

A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 

Type X, 5/8 inch thick. 



a. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck. 

B. Substrate Board: ASTM C 728, perlite board, 3/4 inch thick, seal coated. 

C. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance 

provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to roof 

deck. 

2.4 VAPOR RETARDER 

A. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, minimum, with maximum permeance rating of 

0.13 perm. 

1. Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for 

sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 

2. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard lap adhesive, FM Approvals approved for vaporretarder 

application. 

2.5 ROOF INSULATION 

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO membrane 

roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of 

thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Approvals-approved roof insulation. 

1. 

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber 

mat facer on both major surfaces. 

C. Perlite Board Insulation: ASTM C 728, rigid, mineral-aggregate thermal insulation board 

composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders, and waterproofing agents with top 

surface seal coated. 

D. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch 

per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. 

E. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where 

indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 



2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES 

A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for 

intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing. 

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance 

provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, 

and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 

C. Bead-Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended bead-applied, lowrise, 

one- or multicomponent urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate 

or to another insulation layer. 

D. Full-Spread Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended sprayapplied, 

low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to 

substrate or to another insulation layer. 

E. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric, water 

permeable and resistant to UV degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing system 

manufacturer for application. 

2.7 WALKWAYS 

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured 

walkway pads, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system 

manufacturer. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the 

following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and 

that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place. 

2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at 

penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation 

according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. 



B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or 

migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking 

place or when rain is forecast. 

C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from 

entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is 

forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 

3.3 SUBSTRATE BOARD 

A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes 

with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 

1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in FM 

Approvals' "RoofNav" and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified 

Windstorm Resistance Classification. 

2. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at corners, 

perimeter, and field of roof according to membrane roofing system manufacturers' 


3.4 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION 

A. Polyethylene Film: Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder in a single layer over area to 

receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches and 6 inches, 

respectively. 

1. Continuously seal side and end laps with [tape] [adhesive]. 

B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air 

movement into membrane roofing system. 

3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION 

A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to 

precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. 

B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for 

installing roof insulation. 

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. 

D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation 

thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer 

staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. 

1. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers, install 

noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable, 

and install composite board insulation for top layer. 



E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does 

not restrict flow of water. 

F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints 

staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch 

with insulation. 

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. 

G. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 

1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4 gal./100 sq. ft. and allow 

primer to dry. 

2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus 

or minus 25 deg F of equiviscous temperature. 

3. Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly 

pressing and maintaining insulation in place. 

4. Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, 

firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. 

H. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using 

mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof 

insulation to deck type. 

1. Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for specified 

Windstorm Resistance Classification. 

2. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. 

I. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure first 

layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for 

fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 

1. Fasten first layer of insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" 

for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 

2. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of 

roof. 

3. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied 

within plus or minus 25 deg F of equiviscous temperature. 

4. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, 

firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. 

5. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation 

adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. 

3.6 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION 

A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane 

roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's 

technical personnel. 



C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum 

dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. 

D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by 

manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to 

splice area of membrane roofing. 

E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, 

penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. 

F. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. 

G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of 

membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure 

a watertight seam installation. 

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut 

edges of sheet membrane. 

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. 

3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements. 

H. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in 

place with clamping ring. 

3.7 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to 

membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow 

to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. 

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet 

flashing. 

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side 

and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. 

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through 

termination bars. 

3.8 WALKWAY INSTALLATION 

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or 

adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system 





A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 

B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to 

inspect roofing installation on completion. 

C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections 

indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. 

D. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of 

replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 

3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING 

A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction 

period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for 

deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to 

Architect and Owner. 

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with 

requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition 

free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty 

requirements. 

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures 

recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. 

3.11 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY 

A. WHEREAS of , herein called the "Roofing Installer," has 

performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project: 

1. Owner: . 

2. Address: . 

3. Building Name/Type: . 

4. Address: . 

5. Area of Work: . 

6. Acceptance Date: . 

7. Warranty Period: . 

8. Expiration Date: . 

B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a 

subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and 

workmanship for designated Warranty Period, 

C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein 

set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be 



made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and 

defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition. 

D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions: 

1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the 

building, and to building contents, caused by: 

a. Lightning; 

b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding 90 `; 

c. Fire; 

d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive 

deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; 

e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, 

equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; 

f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and 

g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance 

personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by 

Owner. 

2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and 

void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense 

thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 

3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not 

liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or 

faults or defects of work. 

4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than 

Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with 

penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this 

Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent 

said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing 

Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless 

Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, 

showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or 

deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this 

Warranty. 

5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but 

was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded 

basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall 

become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects 

work covered by this Warranty. 

6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, 

defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to 

inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 

7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work 

and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources 

lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall 

not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work 

according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract 

was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor. 



E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this day of 

, . 

1. Authorized Signature: . 

2. Name: . 

3. Title: . 




SECTION 076100 - SHEET METAL ROOFING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Standing-seam metal roofing, on-site, roll formed. 


1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for roof insulation and sheet vapor retarders 

separate from self-adhering underlayments. 

2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for gutters, downspouts, fasciae, 

copings, and flashings that are not part of sheet metal roofing. 

3. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for manufactured fasciae and 

copings that are not part of sheet metal roofing. 

4. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for manufactured roof accessories. 

5. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants adjoining sheet metal 

roofing. 


A. General Performance: Sheet metal roofing system including, but not limited to, metal roof 

panels, cleats, clips, anchors and fasteners, sheet metal flashing integral with sheet metal 

roofing, fascia panels, trim, underlayment, and accessories shall comply with requirements 

indicated without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects 

in construction. Sheet metal roofing shall remain watertight. 

B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal roofing that allows for thermal movements from 

ambient and surface temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of 

materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 

C. Energy Performance: Provide metal roofing with solar reflectance index not less than 78 when 

calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based on testing identical products by a qualified testing 

agency. 


SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 1



descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each 

manufactured product and accessory. 

B. LEED Submittal: 

1. Product Test Reports for Credit SS 7.2: For roof panels, indicating that panels comply 

with Solar Reflectance Index requirement. 

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal roofing, including 

plans, elevations, expansion joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and 

field-assembled work. Include the following: 

1. Details for forming sheet metal roofing, including seams and dimensions. 

2. Details for joining and securing sheet metal roofing, including layout of fasteners, cleats, 

clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 

3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 

4. Details of expansion joints, including showing direction of expansion and contraction. 

5. Details of roof penetrations. 

6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and 

counterflashings. 

7. Details of special conditions. 

8. Details of connections to adjoining work. 

9. Details of any minor crickets needed to adjust flow around hatches, skylights or similar 

penetrations. 

10. Detail and submit coordination drawings as necessary for the installation of and 

coordination with the following accessory items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches 

per 12 inches: 

a. Flashing and trim. 

b. Gutters and downspouts as they relate to adjacent sheet metal roofing. 

c. Roof curbs. 

d. Snow guards. 

e. Roof-mounted items including (but not limited to): roof hatches, equipment 

supports, pipe supports and penetrations, lighting fixtures, snow guards, and items 

mounted on roof curbs. 

f. Other items as required in the Contract Documents for the Project. 

D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated 

below: 

1. Sheet Metal Roofing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and 

in required profile. Include fasteners, clips, and other attachments. 

2. Snow Guards: Full-size Sample. 

E. Qualification Data: For Installer: 

1. Install shall have received training and licensing / certification from the metal roofing 

manufacturer for the installation of the specified roof system. 

2. A letter certifying the installer (as qualified per the above at the date of submittal) shall 

accompany the submittal package. 



F. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer: 

1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in manufacturing metal 

roofing systems. Panels specified in this section shall be produced either in a factory 

with fixed-base roll forming equipment or by a factory using manufacturer-authorized 

equipment. A letter certifying the manufacturer’s qualifications shall accompany the 

submittal package. 

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified 


H. Maintenance Data: For roofing sheet metals and accessories to include in maintenance 

manuals. 

I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Roll-Formed Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricator authorized by portable 

roll-forming equipment manufacturer to fabricate and install sheet metal roofing units required 

for this Project, and who maintains current UL certification of its portable roll-forming 

equipment. 

B. Sheet Metal Roofing Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" 

unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. 

C. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck sheathing construction, conduct 

conference at Project site. Comply with requirements for preinstallation conferences in 

Division 1 

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's representative, sheet metal roofing 

Installer, portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer's representative for sheet metal 

roofing, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal roofing 

including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 



3. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal roofing installation, including 

portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer's written instructions. 

4. Examine metal deck sheathing conditions for compliance with requirements, including 

flatness and attachment to structural members. 

5. Review structural loading limitations of metal deck sheathing during and after roofing 

installation. 

6. Review flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment 

curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal roofing. 

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and testing 

and inspecting if applicable. 

8. Review temporary protection requirements for sheet metal roofing during and after 

roofing installation. 

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after sheet metal roofing installation. 



10. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish 

copy of record to each participant. 

E. Installation Quality Control: 

1. All roof systems are subject to interim and final inspections at the discretion of the 

Manufacturer by a technical field representative / inspector to inspect the installation of 

the metal roofing system and its interface with adjacent construction in accordance with 

the manufacturer’s warranty requirements. 


A. Do not store sheet metal roofing materials in contact with other materials that might cause 

staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal roofing materials away from 

uncured concrete and masonry. 

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal roofing from exposure to sunlight and high 

humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal roofing installation. 


A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations, which are 

specified in other Sections. 

B. Coordinate sheet metal roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of 

metal decks, sheathing, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, 

and noncorrosive installation. 

1.8 WARRANTIES 

A. Installer’s (Roofer's) Guarantee: Provide written guarantee from the Contractor stating that the 

Contractor will respond within 24 hours and repair within 5 business days, any leaks or defects 

in the roofing assembly for 2 years at no cost to the Owner. 

B. Manufacturer’s Special Warranty: Manufacturer's No Dollar Limit as described below: 


2. Manufacturer’s liability requirement: No dollar limit. 

3. Warranty coverage to include: All system panels, insulations and system components and 

accessories manufactured by the Manufacturer of the roofing system. The warranty shall 

cover weathertightness, finish, materials, labor, and workmanship. 

4. Roof system is subject to inspection, at Manufacturer’s option, at completion of 

installation and must be installed in compliance with the manufacturer’s application 

requirements and standards, including such necessary adjustments to standard details as 

are required to adapt the system to the specific requirements of the project and only as per 

submitted and approved submittals described herein. The Manufacturer’s technical field 

representative, at Manufacturer’s option, may conduct interim and final inspections. 



C. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to 

repair finish or replace sheet metal roofing that shows evidence of deterioration of factoryapplied 

finishes within specified warranty period. 

1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: 

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. 

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. 

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 

2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 ROOFING SHEET METALS 

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a 

strippable, temporary protective film, or by other means, before shipping. 

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, roll-formed and coated to comply 

with ASTM A 792/792M; AZ 50 (lock-forming quality), extra smooth, tension leveled steel; 

minimum 50 KSI. 

1. Thickness: 24 ga. 0.028 inch unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Surface: Smooth, flat. 

3. Finish: “Galvalume Plus” or “Acrylume”. 

4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or 

polyester-backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry 

film thickness of 0.5 mil. 

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide: 

a. Firestone “R-Panel” system. 

b. Alternate products meeting project requirements will be considered by prior 

approval. 

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS 

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 60 mils thick, consisting of slip-resisting 

polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, 

with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment 

manufacturer. 

1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F. 

2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F. 




B. Basis-of-Design Product: Rainproof 60 Plus and Ice & Water Guard as manufactured by 

ProtectoWrap Company, 1955 South Cherokee Street, Denver, Colorado 80223, 303-77-3001, 

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide: 

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT. 

b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra. 

c. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High-Temperature Underlayment. 

d. Or other product acceptable to Manufacturer of metal panels. 


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, 

separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing system 

and as recommended by primary sheet metal or portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer 


B. Fasteners: Series 300 stainless steel; furnish suitable fasteners designed to withstand design 

loads. 

1. General: 

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal roofing using plastic caps 

or factory-applied coating. 

b. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, 

with hex-washer head. 

2. Fasteners for Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: . 

C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant 

tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining 

tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 

D. Elastomeric Sealant: (if required by Manufacturer): ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer 

sealant as recommended by portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer for installation 

indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in 

sheet metal roofing and remain watertight. 

E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; 

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited 

movement. 


A. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide components required for a complete sheet metal roofing 

assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, 

metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of sheet metal 

roofing unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Provide accessories as recommended by portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer to 

produce sheet metal roofing assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift 

resistance classification specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. 



2. Clips: Minimum 0.062-inch- thick, stainless-steel panel clips designed to withstand 

negative-load requirements. 

3. Backing Plates: Plates at roofing splices, fabricated from material recommended by 

SMACNA. 

4. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin foam or 

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible-closure strips; cut or 

premolded to match sheet metal roofing profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or 

necessary to ensure weathertight construction. 

5. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material and with same finish as sheet metal 

roofing, minimum thickness matching the sheet metal roofing. 

B. Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base. 

C. Roof Curbs (where not specified elsewhere): Fabricated from same material and finish as sheet 

metal roofing, minimum thickness matching the sheet metal roofing; with bottom of skirt 

profiled to match roof panel profiles; with weatherproof top box and integral full-length cricket. 

Fabricate curb subframing of nominal 0.062-inch- thick, angle-, C-, or Z-shaped galvanized 

steel or stainless-steel sheet. Fabricate curb and subframing to withstand indicated loads of size 

and height indicated. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of 

equipment to be supported. 

1. Insulate curbs with 1-inch- thick, rigid insulation. 

2.5 SNOW GUARDS 

A. Snow Guards, General: Prefabricated, noncorrosive units designed to be installed without 

penetrating sheet metal roofing; complete with predrilled holes, clamps, or hooks for anchoring. 

B. Seam-Mounted, Bar-Type Snow Guards: Rail- or fence-type assembly consisting of aluminum 

or stainless steel rods and bars, held in place by clamps attached to vertical ribs of standingseam 

sheet metal roofing. 

1. Finish: satin 

2. Products: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide: 

a. S-5 “Sno-Rail” 

b. Alternate products meeting project requirements will be considered by prior 

approval. 


A. General: Fabricate roll-formed sheet metal roofing panels with UL-certified, portable rollforming 

equipment capable of producing roofing panels for sheet metal roofing assemblies that 

comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift resistance classification specified in "Quality Assurance" 

Article. Fabricate roll-formed sheet metal according to equipment manufacturer's written 

instructions and to comply with details shown. 



B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal roofing that is capable of installation to a 

tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch 

offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 

C. Form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and 

tool marks; true to line and levels indicated; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 

1. Lay out sheet metal roofing so transverse seams, if required, are made in direction of 

flow with higher panels overlapping lower panels. 

2. Offset transverse seams from each other 12 inches minimum. 

3. Fold and cleat eaves and transverse seams in the shop. 

4. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral 

flashings, and other components of metal roofing to profiles, patterns, and drainage 

arrangements shown on Drawings and as required for leakproof construction. 

D. Expansion Provisions: Fabricate sheet metal roofing to allow for expansion in running work 

sufficient to prevent leakage, damage, and deterioration of the Work. Where lapped expansion 

provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 

1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 

E. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are indicated or required to produce 

weathertight seams, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant in 

compliance with SMACNA standards. 

F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic 

action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying self-adhering sheet 

underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by 

fabricator of sheet metal roofing or manufacturers of the metals in contact. 

G. Sheet Metal Accessories: Custom fabricate flashings and trim to comply with recommendations 

in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and 

other characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop 

fabrication. 

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool 

marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form 

hems. 

2. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with 

elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended 

use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. 

3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate 

elastomeric sealant. 

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not 

allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 

5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's 

"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal 

being secured. 

H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 






requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of 

the Work. 

1. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or 

blocking, that tops of fasteners are flush with surface, and that installation is within 

flatness tolerances required for finished roofing installation. 

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely 

anchored, and that provision has been made for drainage, flashings, and penetrations 

through sheet metal roofing. 

B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to 


C. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating sheet metal roofing to verify 

actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of sheet metal roofing before 

installation. 

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION 

A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on 

roof sheathing under sheet metal roofing. Apply primer if required by underlayment 

manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for 

installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply 

over entire roof, in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches 

staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps 

with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 

B. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section 

"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 


A. General: Anchor sheet metal roofing and other components of the Work securely in place, with 

provisions for thermal and structural movement. Install fasteners, solder, welding rods, 

protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a 

complete roofing system and as recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing. 

1. Field cutting of sheet metal roofing by torch is not permitted. 

2. Provide metal closures at peaks rake edges rake walls eaves and each side of ridge and 

hip caps. 



3. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with closure strips at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all 

openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 

4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Predrill panels 

for fasteners. 

5. Install ridge caps as sheet metal roofing work proceeds. 

6. Locate roofing splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger roofing 

splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. Install backing plates at 

roofing splices. 

7. Install sealant tape where indicated. 

8. Lap metal flashing over sheet metal roofing to allow moisture to run over and off the 

material. 

9. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 

B. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at only one location for each 

panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction. 

1. Point of Fixity: Fasten each panel along a single line of fixing located at eave ridge 

center of panel length. 

2. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal 

movement. 

C. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will substrate to satisfaction of Manufacturer; installer 

shall coordinate specifically with Manufacturer for type and size recommendations. 

D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, 

protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by 

applying self-adhering sheet underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent 

separation as recommended by SMACNA. 

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to 

minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight 

installation. 

F. Fasciae: Align bottom of sheet metal roofing and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping 

screws. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with closure strips where fasciae meet soffits, along 

lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings. 

3.4 ON-SITE, ROLL-FORMED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install on-site, roll-formed sheet metal roofing fabricated from UL-certified 

equipment to comply with equipment manufacturer's written instructions for UL wind-uplift 

resistance class indicated. Provide sheet metal roofing of full length from eave to ridge unless 

otherwise restricted by on-site or shipping limitations. 

B. Standing-Seam Sheet Metal Roofing: Fasten sheet metal roofing to supports with concealed 

clips at each standing-seam joint at location, at spacing, and with fasteners recommended by 

manufacturer of portable roll-forming equipment. 

1. Install clips to substrate with self-tapping fasteners. 



2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in equipment manufacturer's written 

installation instructions. 

3. Before panels are joined, apply continuous bead of sealant to top of flange of lower 

panel. 

4. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool 

so cleat, sheet metal roofing, and field-applied sealant are completely engaged. 

C. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. For roofing with 3:12 slopes 

or less, use cleats at transverse seams. 

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 

1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient 

temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint 

members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for 

installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at 

temperatures below 40 deg F. 



3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and 

provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 

1. Install components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim, 

copings, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, metal closures, closure strips, 

and similar items. 

2. Install accessories integral to sheet metal roofing that are specified in Division 7 Section 

"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" to comply with that Section's requirements. 

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation 

instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners 

where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, 

and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 

1. Install flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished 

appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, 

framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. 

2. Install continuous strip of self-adhering underlayment at edge of continuous flashing 

overlapping self-adhering underlayment, where "continuous seal strip" is indicated in 

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual," and where indicated on Drawings. 

3. Install exposed flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks 

and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 

Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and 

weather-resistant performance. 

4. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 

Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches 

of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would 

not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of 



intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, and filled with butyl sealant 

concealed within joints. 

C. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and sheet metal roofing. Fasten and seal 

to sheet metal roofing as recommended by SMACNA. 

D. Roof Curbs: Install curbs at locations indicated on Drawings. Install flashing around bases 

where they meet sheet metal roofing. 

E. Bar-Type Snow Guards: Attach bar supports to vertical ribs of standing-seam sheet metal 

roofing with clamps or set screws. Do not use fasteners that will penetrate sheet metal roofing. 

1. Provide 1 row of snow guards continuous (unless fewer locations are indicated on 

Drawings), spaced with clip at every rib, at 16” up from roof edge; verify location with 

Architect prior to proceeding. 

3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES 

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal roofing within installed tolerance of 1/4 

inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining 

faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 

B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal roofing within installed tolerances specified 

in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." 


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and 

weathering. 

B. Clean off excess sealants. 

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal roofing is installed 

unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of 

sheet metal roofing installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal roofing 

manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal roofing in a clean condition during construction. 

D. Replace sheet metal roofing components that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond 

successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 




SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Manufactured Products: 

a. Manufactured reglets and counterflashing. 

2. Formed Products: 

a. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. 


1. Division 05 Section “Architectural Joint Systems” for manufactured sheet metal 

expansion –joint covers. 

2. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 

3. Division 07 Section “Built-up Roofing” for installing sheet metal flashing and trim 

integral with membrane roofing. 

4. Division 07 Section "Metal Wall Panels" for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with 

metal wall panels. 

5. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Roofing" for custom-formed sheet metal flashing and 

trim integral with sheet metal roofing. 

6. Division 07 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for manufactured roof specialties 

not part of sheet metal flashing and trim. 

7. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof 

hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. 


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, 

structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due 

to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed 

sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. 

B. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing capable of resisting the following forces according to 

recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49: 

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1


C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements 

from ambient and surface temperature changes. 




descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each 

manufactured product and accessory. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, 

including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between 

shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following: 

1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in 

Project. 

2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and 

dimensions. 

3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including 

layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 

4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 

5. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and 

counterflashings as applicable. 

6. Details of special conditions. 

7. Details of connections to adjoining work. 

8. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory 

indicated with factory-applied color finishes involving color selection. 

1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual width of unit, including 

finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other 

attachments. 

2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous 

Fabrications: 12 inches (300 mm) long and in required profile. Include fasteners and 

other exposed accessories. 

3. Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample. 

D. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator. 

E. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance 

manuals. 


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal 

flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of 

successful in-service performance. 



B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal 

Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. 

C. Copper Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." 

Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to 

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 

1. Build mockup of typical roof eave, including fascia, fascia trim, approximately 10 feet 

long, including supporting construction cleats, seams, attachments, underlayment, and 

accessories. 

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract 

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations 

in writing. 




1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose 

work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of 

roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof-mounted equipment. 

2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim. 

3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and 

attachment to structural members. 

4. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and 

condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing. 

5. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish 

copy of record to each participant. 


A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might 

cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials 

away from uncured concrete and masonry. 

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to 

sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing 

and trim installation. 


2.1 SHEET METALS 

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a 

strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. 

B. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead-soft, 

fully annealed stainless-steel sheet of minimum uncoated thickness indicated; coated on both 



sides with a zinc-tin alloy (50 percent zinc, 50 percent tin), with factory-applied gray 

preweathering. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 

a. Follansbee Steel; TCS II. 

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip 

process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; 

structural quality. 

2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating 

designation, Grade 40; structural quality. 

3. Surface: Smooth, flat with manufacturer's standard clear acrylic coating on both sides. 

4. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: 

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less 

than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply 

coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' 


5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

6. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or 

polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry 

film thickness of 0.5 mil. 

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS 

A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slipresisting 

polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt 

adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by 

underlayment manufacturer. 

1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F. 

2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970: passes after testing at minus 20 deg F. 

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Rainproof 60 Plus and Ice & Water Guard as manufactured by 

ProtectoWrap Company, 1955 South Cherokee Street, Denver, Colorado 80233, 303-77-3001, 

Subject to compliance with requirements provide: 

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT. 

b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra. 

c. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment. 

d. Or other product acceptable to Manufacturer of metal panels. 




A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, 

separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing 

and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured 

item unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and 

bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by 

manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. 

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or 

factory-applied coating. 

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for 

metal being fastened. 

c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching 

internal gutter width. 

2. Fasteners for Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 

3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Hotdip 

galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 

stainless steel. 

C. Solder: 

1. For Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, 100 percent tin. 

2. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 

percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead. 

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant 

tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining 

tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 

E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; 

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited 

movement. 

2.4 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 

A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of 

separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factorymitered 

and -welded corners and junctions with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of 

same metal as reglet. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide two part 

reglets as manufactured by Fry Reglet Corporation or comparable product by one of the 

following: 

a. Cheney Flashing Company. 

b. Heckmann Building Products Inc. 



c. Hickman, W. P. Company. 

d. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; STF Sawtooth Flashing. 

e. Keystone Flashing Company, Inc. 

f. National Sheet Metal Systems, Inc. 

g. Sandell Manufacturing Company, Inc. 

2. Material: Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch thick. 

3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with 

neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top 

edge. 

4. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint. 

5. Accessories: 

a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure 

flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal 

counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing. 

b. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before 

counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge. 

6. Finish: With manufacturer's standard color coating. 


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in 

SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, 

metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to 

greatest extent possible. 

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with 

performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 

3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool 

marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form 

hems. 

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not 

allowed on faces exposed to view. 

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to 

a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and 

within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 

C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric 

sealant. 

D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion 

joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl 

sealant concealed within joints. 



E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural 

Sheet Metal Manual" and by FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less 

than thickness of metal being secured. 

F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, 

and solder. 

G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 

2.6 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS 

A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch-long, but not 

exceeding 12-foot-long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate 

discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall 

openings. Form with 2-inch-high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous. Fabricate from 

the following materials: 

1. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: 0.015 inch thick. 

B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to 

extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch-high, end dams. 

Fabricate from the following materials: 

1. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: 0.022 inch thick. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, 

dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely 

anchored. 

B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to 



3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings. 

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. 

Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions 

of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing 

underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not 



less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 

inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 


A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in 

place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding 

rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to 

complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, 

neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight 

performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating 

sheet metal. 

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend 

tabs over fasteners. 

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and 

tool marks. 

5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 

6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 

7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, 

protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other 

permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 

1. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood 

substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a 

course of polyethylene sheet. 

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space 

movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or 

intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently 

watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, 

filled with sealant concealed within joints. 

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate metal decking not less than 

recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. 

E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. 

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 

1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient 

temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint 

members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for 

installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at 

temperatures below 40 deg F. 





F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges 

of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned 

surface would show in completed Work. 

1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel sheet. 

2. Pre-tinning is not required for zinc-tin alloy-coated stainless steel. 

3. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into 

joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 

4. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper. 

3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet 

metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet 

Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as 

indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and 

weather resistant. 

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations 

in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of 

roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers. 

C. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations 

in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. Interlock 

bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch 

centers. 

D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. 

Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend 

counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches 

and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and 

sealant or lead wedges and sealant. 

E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation 

of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes 

that penetrate roof. 

3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture 

according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall 

flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. 

B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Division 04 

Section "Unit Masonry." 

C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry." 



D. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar 

flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. 


A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance 

of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of 

adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 

B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances 

specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." 


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and 

weathering. 

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. 

C. Clean off excess sealants. 

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim 

are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On 

completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a 

clean condition during construction. 

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond 

successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 




SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 

2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 

3. Penetrations in smoke barriers. 




1. Product Data for Credit MR2.2: For penetration firestopping sealants and sealant 

primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 

C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design 

designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting 

agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit 

illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping 

manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fireresistance-rated 

assembly. 



B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in 

compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. 

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified 

testing agency, for penetration firestopping. 

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1



A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in 

material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in 

construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the 

necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified 

requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to 

Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following 

requirements: 

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in 

"Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following 

requirements: 

a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing 

and inspecting agency. 

b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations 

listed by the following: 

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 

2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 

3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide." 



A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate 

temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when 

substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural 

means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 


A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration 

firestopping is installed according to specified requirements. 

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate 

penetration firestopping. 

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping 

installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations. 







1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 

2. Grace Construction Products. 

3. Hilti, Inc. 

4. Johns Manville. 

5. Nelson Firestop Products. 

6. NUCO Inc. 

7. Passive Fire Protection Partners. 

8. RectorSeal Corporation. 

9. Specified Technologies Inc. 

10. 3M Fire Protection Products. 

11. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 

12. USG Corporation. 

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according 

to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance 

rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be 

compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items 

if any. 

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings 

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 

0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa). 

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls, smoke-barrier walls and fire partitions. 

2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings 

determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 

0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa). 

1. Horizontal assemblies include floors, floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of 

roof/ceiling assemblies. 

2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions 

penetrated. 

3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions 

penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. 

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per 

UL 1479. 



1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening 

at 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures. 

E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested 

according to UL 1479. 

F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed 

indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 

G. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the 

following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA 

Method 24): 

1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 

3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 

H. Low-Emitting Materials: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply 

with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' 

"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using 

Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 

I. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to 

install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by 

penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency 

for firestopping indicated. 

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: 

a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. 

b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to 

prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. 

c. Fire-rated form board. 

d. Fillers for sealants. 

2. Temporary forming materials. 

3. Substrate primers. 

4. Collars. 

5. Steel sleeves. 

2.3 FILL MATERIALS 

A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete 

floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial 

extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a 

neoprene gasket. 

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during 

exposure to moisture. 



C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with 

intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. 

D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric 

sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet. 

E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, 

inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. 

F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum 

foil on one side. 

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, 

fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a 

nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. 

H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled 

with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant 

additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect 

pillows/bags from being easily removed. 

I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand 

and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. 

J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of 

grade indicated below: 

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal 

surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless 

indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions. 

2.4 MIXING 

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping 

manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), 

type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other 

items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance 

characteristics for application indicated. 



A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting 






A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to 

comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials 

that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. 

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable 

of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles 

remaining from cleaning operation. 

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that 

manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not 

allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining 

surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be 

permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. 

Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 


A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation 

instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. 

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during 

their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths 

required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible 

forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of 

firestopping. 

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and 

penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and 

penetrating items. 

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce 

smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 

3.4 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels 

permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of firestopping edge so labels 

will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical 



fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to 

surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building 

Management of Any Damage." 

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 

3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 

4. Date of installation. 


6. Installer's name. 


A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of 

testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements. 

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection 

reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 


A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with 

cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and 

that do not damage materials in which openings occur. 

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that 

penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 

If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove 

damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems 

complying with specified requirements. 

3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE 

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire 

Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ. 

B. Where Intertek ETL SEMKO-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers in 

Intertek ETL SEMKO's "Directory of Listed Building Products" under "Firestop Systems." 

C. Where FM Global-approved systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers listed in FM 

Global's "Building Materials Approval Guide" under "Wall and Floor Penetration Fire Stops." 




SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Silicone joint sealants. 

2. Urethane joint sealants. 

3. Polysulfide joint sealants. 

4. Latex joint sealants. 

5. Solvent-release-curing joint sealants. 

6. Preformed joint sealants. 

7. Acoustical joint sealants. 


1. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 

2. Division 09 Section "Tiling" for sealing tile joints. 

3. Division 09 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters 

with acoustical sealant. 

C. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to 

Project joint substrates as follows: 

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 

2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below: 

a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated. 

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be 

erected. 

4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative 

present. 

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant 

Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail 

Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. 

1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate 

separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. 

Repeat procedure for opposite side. 

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1


5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include 

data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants 

that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 

6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing 

adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with 

requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to 

joint substrates during testing. 


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. 


1. Product Data for Credit MR-2.0: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the 

weatherproofing system, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants 

showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. 

D. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples 

with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) 

long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. 

E. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 

3. Joint-sealant formulation. 

4. Joint-sealant color. 


A. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer. 

B. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each 

sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. 

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified 

testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. 

D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, 

indicating the following: 

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for 

compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate 

preparation needed for adhesion. 



E. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation 

methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in 

"Preconstruction Testing" Article. 

F. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. 

G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single 

manufacturer. 

B. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated 

to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods 

specified in this Section. 



A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant 

manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C). 

2. When joint substrates are wet. 

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for 


4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed 

from joint substrates. 


2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL 

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible 

with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as 

demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the 

weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when 

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 

3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 



C. Low-Emitting Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing 

system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of 

Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various 

Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 

D. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for 

each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 

classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 

1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints 

that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone 

testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, 


E. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous 

substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have 

not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. 

F. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in 

repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. 

G. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, 

Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 



a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790 NS Parking Structure Sealant. 

b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. 

c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290. 

d. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS. 

e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. 

f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1. 

B. Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: 

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 100/50, for Use T. 



a. Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL. 

b. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 728 SG. 

c. Pecora Corporation;300 SL. 

d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 900 SL. 



C. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: 

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 



a. Pecora Corporation; 898. 

D. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, 

Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated 

into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. BASF Building Systems; Omniplus. 

b. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. 

c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. 

d. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 100 WF. 

e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary. 

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, 

Class 100/50, for Use NT. 

B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. Type S, 

Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T. 


a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1. 

b. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 40 FC. 

c. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 230 Type II. 

d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a. 

e. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116. 

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, 

Grade NF. 


a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. 

b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. 

c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex 600. 

d. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 

e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. 

f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. 



2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant 

complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through 

perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative 

assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 


a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR, AIS-919. 

b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 

2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING 

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint 

substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated 

by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface 

skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing 

optimum sealant performance. 

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant 

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or 

joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of 

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate 

tests and field tests. 

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants 

and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or 

harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to 

promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. 

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces 

adjacent to joints. 



A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant 

performance. 





A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to 

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of 

joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and 

approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint 

sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a 

combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing 

optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning 

operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 

Porous joint substrates include the following: 

a. Concrete. 

b. Masonry. 

c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 

d. Exterior insulation and finish systems. 

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 

4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do 

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint 

sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: 

a. Metal. 

b. Glass. 

c. Porcelain enamel. 

d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as 

indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to 

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant 

bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with 

adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or 

by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling 

without disturbing joint seal. 

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS 

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products 

and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. 

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint 

sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 



C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position 

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint 

widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and 

replace them with dry materials. 

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants 

and backs of joints. 

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time 

backings are installed: 

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow 

optimum sealant movement capability. 

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or 

curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form 

smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure 

contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not 

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 

3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 

5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per 

Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. 

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 

G. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements: 

1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system. 

2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with 

preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a 

bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm). Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch (6 

mm) inside masking tape. 

3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet 

extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform 

contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate. 

4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical 

joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion 

with a razor knife. 



H. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal 

construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a 

continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at 

perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's 

written recommendations. 


A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: 

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each kind of 

sealant and joint substrate. 

b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per 

each floor per elevation. 

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint 

Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in 

ASTM C 1521. 

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; 

extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure 

for opposite side. 

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: 

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. 

b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified 

requirements. 

c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint 

substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind 

of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion 

passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. 

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were 

installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints 

were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, 

and sealant dimensions. 

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures 

used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new 

sealant contacts original sealant. 

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from 

testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. 

Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other 

requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated 

requirements. 



3.5 CLEANING 

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods 

and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of 

products in which joints occur. 


A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances 

and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without 

deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage 

or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately 

so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 




SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Solid-core doors. 

2. Shop priming Factory finishing flush wood doors. 

3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 


1. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 


A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction 

and trim for openings. 

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; 

construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and 

other pertinent data. 

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 

2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 

3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by 

an FSC-accredited certification body. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors and wood paneling from single manufacturer. 

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1


C. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural 

Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated." 

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project 

indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 



A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. 

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and 

weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and 

maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the 

remainder of the construction period. 

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and 

weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and 

maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 17 and 50 

percent during the remainder of the construction period. 

1.7 WARRANTY 


replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 


a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. 

b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch 

span. 

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair 

or replacement of defective doors. 

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. 






following: 

1. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 

2. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company. 

3. Vancouver Door Company. 

4. VT Industries Inc. 

5. Simpson. 

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL 

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that 

do not contain urea formaldehyde. 

2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH 

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: 

1. Grade: Custom Grade A faces. 

2. Species: Select white birch. 

3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). 

4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 

5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. 

6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by 

mullions. 

7. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. 

8. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate 

room or area of building. 

9. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible species. 

10. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber. 

11. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction. 

12. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty. 


A. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply 

with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, 

DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 

B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. 

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 

2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with 

applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing." 



2.5 SHOP PRIMING 

A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop prime doors with stain (if required), other required 

pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Division 09 Section "Exterior.” “ Painting 

Interior Painting." Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with first coat of finish. 



A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing 

characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 

2. Reject doors with defects. 



A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and 

the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated 

below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for firerated 

doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises 

after fitting and machining. 

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 

inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise 

indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door 

to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Bevel non-fire rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. 

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. 

Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence 

of repair or refinishing. 




SECTION 083613 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 


1.0 PAYMENT PROCEDURES: Notice of Extended Payment Provision. This contract 

requires the Owner to make payment within 45 days after submission of an undisputed 

request for payment. 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes aluminum-framed sectional overhead doors. 

B. See Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying. 


A. Structural Performance: Provide doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity 

loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation 

of components: 

1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward 

and outward. 

2. Operational Life: Design components to operate for not less than 100,000 

cycles. 

a. Operation Cycle: One complete cycle begins with door in closed position. 

Door is then moved to open position and back to closed position. 


A. Product Data: For each product indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation, and 

attachments to other Work. 

1. Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate 

measurements on Shop Drawings. 

C. Samples: For each exposed finish. 

SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 1


D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with 

specified requirements. 

E. Manufacturers' Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with 

requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. On request, submit evidence of 

manufacturing experience. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized 

representative of the sectional overhead door manufacturer for both installation and 

maintenance of units required for this Project. 

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing sectional 

overhead doors similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful 

in-service performance. 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional overhead doors through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 

D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of 

sectional overhead doors and accessories and are based on the specific system indicated. 

Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance and dimensional characteristics 

may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions." 



A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for sectional overhead door is based on Series 

521 Aluminum Sectional Door as Manufactured by Overhead Door. Subject to 

compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by 

one of the following: 

1. Haas Door Co. 

2. Overhead Door Corporation. 

3. Raynor Garage Doors. 

4. Wayne-Dalton Corp. 

5. Windsor Door; a United Dominion Company. 

2.2 ALUMINUM DOOR SECTIONS 

A. Fabricate door sections from extruded-aluminum shapes, ASTM B 221; alloy and 

temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish 



indicated; with wall thickness not less than 0.065 inch for door section 1-3/4 inches 

deep. 

1. Join stiles and rails by welding or with concealed, 1/4-inch- minimum-diameter, 

aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless-steel through bolts, full height of door 

section. 

2. Form meeting rails to provide a weathertight-seal joint. 

3. Reinforce for hardware attachment. 

B. Aluminum Panels: Fabricate from aluminum sheet, ASTM B 209; alloy and temper 

recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated; 

not less than 0.050 inch thick, alloy 6063-T6; set in continuous rubber or neoprene 

glazing gasket with aluminum stop. 

C. Aluminum Finish: Manufacturer's standard powder coat. 

1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect’s sample . 

2.3 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Tracks: Galvanized steel track system complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 

zinc coating, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated. 

1. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement 

for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. 

2. Slot vertical sections of track at 2 inches o.c. for door-drop safety device. 

3. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or otherwise design to ensure tight 

closure at jambs when door unit is closed. 

4. Weld or bolt to track supports. 

B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized steel and support members, complying 

with ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 123. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as 

required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and 

vibration during opening and closing of doors. 

C. Support and attach tracks to opening jambs with continuous angle welded to tracks and 

attached to wall. Support horizontal (ceiling) tracks with continuous angle welded to 

track and supported by laterally braced attachments to overhead structural members at 

curve and end of tracks. 

D. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping 

gaskets of rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom, jamb and at top of overhead door. 

1. Jamb Seals: Continuous flexible seals at door jambs for weathertight installation. 



E. Windows: With removable stops of same material as door section frames. 

1. Metal-Framed Doors: Set glazing in rubber, or neoprene glazing channel. 

2. Size: Manufacturer's standard panel for type of glazing indicated. 

3. Clear ½” tempered thermal pane. 

2.4 HARDWARE 

A. General: Heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainlesssteel, 

or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type. 

B. Hinges: Heavy-duty galvanized steel hinges, of not less than 0.0747-inch- thick 

uncoated steel, at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, per manufacturer's 

written recommendations for door size. 

1. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or 

lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is 

not possible. 

2. Use double-end hinges, where required, for doors exceeding 16 feet in width, 

unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer. 

C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers, with steel ball bearings in case-hardened steel races, 

mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. 

1. Double Hinges: Extend roller shaft through both hinges. 

a. Tire Material: Case-hardened steel. 

D. Locking Device: Fabricate assembly with lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating 

handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bar to engage through slots in tracks. 

1. Locking Bars: Full-disc Cremone type, both jamb sides. 

a. Operation: From inside only . 

2. Lock Cylinder: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 

E. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock. 

2.5 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM 

A. Torsion Spring: Operation by counterbalance mechanism with adjustable-tension 

torsion springs, fabricated from oil-tempered-steel wire complying with 

ASTM A 229/A 229M, Class II, mounted on cross-header tube or steel shaft. Connect 

to door with galvanized aircraft-type lift cables with cable safety factor of at least 5 to 1. 

Calibrate springs for 100,000 cycles minimum. 



B. Cable Drums: Cast-aluminum castings grooved to receive cable. Mount 

counterbalance mechanism with ball-bearing brackets at each end of shaft. 

1. Include one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet long. 

2. Include two additional brackets at 1/3 points to support shafts more than 16 feet 

long, unless closer spacing is recommended by door manufacturer. 

C. Cable Safety Device: Spring-loaded, bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller 

assembly on each side, designed to automatically stop door if either cable breaks. 

D. Bracket: Anchor support bracket, as required to connect stationary end of spring to the 

wall, to level shaft and prevent sag. 

E. Spring Bumper: Include at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening 

operation. 

2.6 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS 

A. Reduction-Drive Chain-Hoist Operator: Side-mounted unit with endless steel hand 

chain, chain pocket wheel with at least 3:1 reduction unit, and roller chain and sprocket 

drive or suitable gearing, end mounted on counterbalance shaft; operating with not more 

than 35-lbf pull. 



A. General: Install door, track, and operating equipment complete with necessary 

hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment 

supports. 

B. Fasten vertical track assembly to framing at not less than 24 inches o.c. Double hang 

horizontal track from structural overhead framing with angle or channel hangers welded 

and bolt fastened in place. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement 

as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment. 

C. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, 

twist, or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter. 

3.2 DEMONSTRATION 

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance 

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain doors. Refer to Division 1 Section 01700 

"Contract Closeout." 






SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Exterior storefront framing. 

2. Exterior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units. 

3. Interior storefront framing. 


1. Division 8 Section “Aluminum Windows” for operable windows as part of this 

completed system. 

2. Division 8 Section “Glazing” for glass as part of this completed system. 


A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance 

Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) 

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 


A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following 

performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective 

manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 

1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, 

story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 

2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 

3. Failure includes the following: 

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. 

b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. 

c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and 

structural movements to glazing. 

d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. 

ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1


B. Structural Loads: 

e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. 

f. Sealant failure. 

g. Failure of operating units. 

1. Wind Loads: 

a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. 

b. Importance Factor: 1.15. 

c. Exposure Category: C. 

2. Seismic Loads: 

a. Size Class D. 

b. Importance Factor: 1.25. 

C. Deflection of Framing Members: 

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to 

glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite 

or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, 

whichever is less. 

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, 

whichever is smaller. 

D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to 

ASTM E 330 as follows: 

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not 

evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, 

including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent 

deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds. 

E. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed 

glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to 

ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.. 

F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not 

evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to 

ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load 

design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.. 

G. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not 

evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to 

AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design 

pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. 



1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating aluminum-framed systems 

or water appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other 

than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and 

gutters that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or 

finishes. 

H. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements 

resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. 

Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain 

and nighttime-sky heat loss. 


2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, 

anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to 

AAMA 501.5. 

a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metalsurface 

temperature of 180 deg F. 

b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F. 

3. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 68 deg F. 

I. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing 

areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to 

AAMA 1503. 

J. Sound Transmission: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas 

having the following sound-transmission characteristics: 

1. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum 35 STC when tested for laboratory sound 

transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413. 

2. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC): Minimum 34 OITC when tested for 

laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 

1332. 



descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminumframed 

systems. 

B. LEED Submittal: 

1. Product Data for Credit EQ: For adhesives and sealants used inside of the 

weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content. 

C. Shop Drawings: For all aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, 

and attachments to other work. 



1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of 

moisture in the system to the exterior. 

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard 

sizes. 

E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed systems, 

made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 

1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 

2. Anchorage. 

3. Expansion provisions. 

4. Glazing. 

5. Flashing and drainage. 

F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with 

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the 

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems. 

2. Include design calculations. 

G. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency. 

H. Welding certificates. 

I. Preconstruction Test Reports: For sealant. 

J. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified 

testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance 

requirements. 

K. Source quality-control reports. 

L. Field quality-control reports. 

M. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals. 

N. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved 

for installation of units required for this Project. 

1. Installer must have a minimum of 5 years of installations of similar systems and sizes within the 

last 7 years. 

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated. 



C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop 

Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems 

similar to those indicated for this Project. 

D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for 

systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by 

dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate 

to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are 

indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction 

testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 

1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with 

Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data 

to Architect for review. 

E. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single 

manufacturer. 

F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural 

Welding Code - Aluminum." 

G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to 

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract 

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations 

in writing. 



H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed 

systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop 

Drawings. 

1.8 WARRANTY 


replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that 

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. 

b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. 



c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal 

weathering. 

d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. 

e. Failure of operating components. 


B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair 

or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in 

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal 

weathering. 


1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

A. Entrance Door Hardware: 

1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance 

instructions as needed for Owner’s continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and 

replacement of entrance door hardware. 

2. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months’ full 

maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include quarterly 

preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, 

cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door hardware operation at rate speed and 

capacity. Provide parts and supplies the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of 

original equipment. 



A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Trifab Versa 

Glaze”, 451/452.T Series and comparable non-thermally broken products for interior use, as 

manufactured by Tubelite or comparable product by one of the following: 

1. EFCO Corporation. 

2. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 

3. Tubelite. 

4. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish 

indicated. 

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 

2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 

3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 



4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 

5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. 

B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying 

with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and 

pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC- 

SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 

3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS 

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness 

required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 

1. Construction: Thermally broken. 

2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 

3. Glazing Plane: Center. 

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with 

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. 

C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, 

nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from 

thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 

D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, 

complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. 

E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding 

flashing compatible with adjacent materials. 

F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by 

manufacturer for joint type. 

1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 

250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS 

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 

2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS 



A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extrudedaluminum 

tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets 

that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 

a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members 

exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. 

2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width. 

a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches above floor 

or ground plane. 

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. 

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. 

B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 

2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in 

Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 

1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 

250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

B. Self-adhering double-sided SBS modified rubberized asphalt waterproof membrane. 

1. Basis-of-design product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Jiffy Seal 

500 as manufactured by Protecto Wrap Company, 1955 S. Cherokee St., Denver, CO 

80223, 1-800-759-9727 or equal. 


A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. 

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration 

of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or 

grinding. 

C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following 

characteristics: 

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 

2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 

3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture 

migrating within the system to exterior. 

4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 



5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to 

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 

6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior. 

7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest 

extent possible. 

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. 

E. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using screw-spline system. 

F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to 

Shop Drawings. 

G. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for 

installing entrance door hardware. 

H. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 

I. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent 

possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. 


A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. 



A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 



A. General: 

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

2. Do not install damaged components. 

3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 

4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 

5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic 

deterioration. 

6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Metal Protection: 



1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by 

painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing 

nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting 

contact surfaces with bituminous paint. 

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing 

members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 

D. Peal and stick double-sided bitumen at window sill condition per manufacturer’s written 

instructions. 

E. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section 

"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. 

F. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without 

warp or rack. 

G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 

1. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware 

according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners 

to greatest extent possible. 

H. Install aluminum operable windows in frame per Division 8 Section “Aluminum Windows.” 

I. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." 


A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances: 

1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 

1/4 inch over total length. 

2. Alignment: 

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. 

b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch. 

B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. 


A. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with 

specified requirements. 

B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine 

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 



C. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and 

inspections. 

D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 

3.5 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by 

manufacturer. 

1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3- 

second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches 

from the latch, measured to the leading door edge. 




SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes aluminum-framed operable windows for exterior locations. 


1. Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for coordinating 

finish among aluminum fenestration units. 


A. Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: 

1. C: Commercial. 

B. Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: 

1. Design pressure number in pounds force per square foot used to determine the structural 

test pressure and water test pressure. 

C. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the 

design pressure. 

D. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size). 

Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to 

comply with requirements for performance class. 


A. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements 

indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, 

and that are of minimum test size indicated below: 

1. Size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for gateway performance for both 

gateway performance and optional performance grade. 

2. Size indicated on Drawings. 

ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 1


B. Structural Performance: Provide aluminum windows capable of withstanding the effects of the 

following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass 

AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test: 

1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind 

speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7, 

Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade 

indicated on Drawings. 

a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. 

b. Importance Factor: 1.15 

c. Exposure Category: C. 

2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less 

than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at design pressure based on 

testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load 

Deflection Test or structural computations. 

C. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal 

movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface 

temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of 

joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering 

calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky 

heat loss. 

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces. 


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, 

dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating 

instructions for each type of aluminum window indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other 

work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following: 

1. Joinery details. 


3. Flashing and drainage details. 

4. Weather-stripping details. 

5. Thermal-break details. 

6. Glazing details. 

7. Window cleaning provisions. 

8. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis 

data prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing 

fabrication and assembly of aluminum windows and used to determine the following: 

a. Structural test pressures and design pressures from wind loads indicated. 

b. Deflection limitations of glass framing systems. 



C. Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required, prepared on 

Samples of size indicated below. 

1. Operable Window: Full-size unit with factory-applied finish. 

2. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finishes. 

3. Weather Stripping: 12-inch- long sections. 

D. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 

E. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency. 

F. Field quality-control test reports. 

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performedby a qualified 

testing agency for each type, class, grade, and size of aluminum window. Test results based on 

use of downsized test units will not be accepted. 

H. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash, operating hardware, weather stripping and 

finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 

I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for 

installation of units required for this Project. 

1. Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to 

assume engineering responsibility. 

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum windows, including Shop 

Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in 

assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. 

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that 

meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by 

inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations. 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single manufacturer. 

D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for 

aluminum windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are 

indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies 

as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance 

characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including 

preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 

E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum 

windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product 

Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements. 



1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with 

Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory 

data to Architect for review. 

F. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American 

Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass 

Doors," for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, 

accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated. 

1. Provide AAMA, WDMA-certified aluminum windows with an attached label. 

G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and 

with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 

H. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to 


1. Build mockup for type(s) of window(s) indicated, in location(s) shown on Drawings. 

I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in 

Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 


A. Field Measurements: Verify aluminum window openings by field measurements before 

fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 

1.8 WARRANTY 


replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty 

period. 


a. Failure to meet performance requirements. 

b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or 

condensation. 

c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. 

d. Deterioration of metals, other materials, and metal finishes beyond normal 

weathering. 

e. Failure of insulating glass. 

2. Warranty Period: 

a. Window: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. 

b. Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 

c. Metal Finish: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. 





A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Trifab Versa Glaze 

451/451T as manufactured by Kawneer, an Alcoa Company. 

1. Tubelite, Inc. 

2.2 WINDOW 

A. Window Type: As indicated on Drawings. 

B. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide aluminum windows of performance 

indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS unless more stringent performance 

requirements are indicated. 

1. Performance Class and Grade: AW 65 (2700) and AW 40 (3500). 

C. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal 

performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 54 (2700) and 55 (3500). 

D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window, U-factor maximum 

indicated at 15-mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested 

according to ASTM E 1423 NFRC 100. 

E. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Provide glazed windows rated for not less than 35 STC 

when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by 

ASTM E 413. 

2.3 GLAZING 

A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing 

requirements applicable to glazed aluminum window units. 

2.4 HARDWARE 

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, 

carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with 

aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock aluminum windows, 

and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in 

frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide die-cast zinc with special coating 

finish or nonmagnetic stainless steel. 

B. Sill Cap/Track: Extruded-aluminum track with natural anodized finish, of thickness, 

dimensions, and profile indicated; designed to comply with performance requirements indicated 

and to drain to the exterior. 



C. Locks and Latches: Designed to allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash 

in direction indicated and operated from the inside only. 

D. Roller Assemblies: Low-friction design. 

E. Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Comply with AAMA 901 when tested according to 

ASTM E 405, Method A. 

1. Operation Function: All ventilators move simultaneously and securely close at both 

jambs without using additional manually controlled locking devices. 

F. Four- or Six-Bar Friction Hinges: Comply with AAMA 904. 

1. Locking mechanism and handles for manual operation. 

2. Friction Shoes: Provide friction shoes of nylon or other nonabrasive, nonstaining, 

noncorrosive, durable material. 

G. Limit Devices: Provide limit devices designed to restrict sash or ventilator opening. 

1. Safety Devices: Limit clear opening to 6 inches for ventilation; with custodial key 

release. 

H. Horizontal-Sliding Windows: Provide the following operating hardware: 

1. Sash Rollers: Stainless-steel, lubricated ball-bearing rollers with nylon tires. 

2. Sash Lock: Cam-action sweep sash lock and keeper at meeting rails. 

3. Limit Device: Sash stop limit device; mounted in bottom of pull stile. 

4. Removable Lift-Out Sash: Design windows and provide with tamperproof, key-operated 

hardware to permit removal of sash from inside for cleaning. 

I. Projected Awning Windows: Provide the following operating hardware: 

1. Operator: Gear-type rotary operator located on jamb at sill. 

a. Handle: Standard crank. 

2. Hinge: Concealed four- or six-bar friction hinge located on each jamb near top rail; two 

per ventilator. 

3. Lock: Pole-operated, face-mounted transom latch and keeper. 

4. Limit Device: Concealed friction adjustor, adjustable stay bar limit device; located on 

jamb of each ventilator. 

5. Extended pole crank device for operating tall windows. 

2.5 INSECT SCREENS 

A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable 

arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to 

fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on outside of window and provide for each 

operable exterior sash or ventilator. 



1. Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for 

Windows," for minimum standards of appearance, fabrication, attachment of screen 

fabric, hardware, and accessories unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 

B. Aluminum Wire Fabric: 18-by-16 mesh of 0.011-inch- diameter, coated aluminum wire. 

1. Wire-Fabric Finish: Mill Finish. 

C. Wickets: Provide sliding or hinged wickets, framed and trimmed for a tight fit and for 

durability during handling. 


A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling 

components and anchoring windows. 

B. Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. 

C. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate aluminum windows with an integral, concealed, 

low-conductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials and window members 

exposed on interior side; in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact. 

1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than three years and 

has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation and to 

show adequate strength and security of glass retention. 

2. Provide thermal barriers tested according to AAMA 505; determine the allowable design 

shear flow per the appendix in AAMA 505. 

3. Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware bridging 

thermal breaks at frame or vent sash. 

D. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and 

ventilator. 

1. Horizontal-Sliding Windows: Provide operable sash with a double row of sliding 

weather stripping in horizontal rails and single- or double-row weather stripping in 

meeting or jamb stiles, as required to meet specified performance requirements. Provide 

compression-type weather stripping at perimeter of each movable panel where slidingtype 

weather stripping is not appropriate. 

2. Vertically Pivoted Windows: Provide double-row weather stripping. 

E. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. 

F. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural water 

penetration. 

G. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory where practical and 

possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" 

and with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. 



H. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing" 

and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. 












A. General: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to 

application and designations of finishes. 

B. Finish designations prefixed by “AA” conform to the system established by the Aluminum 

Association for designating aluminum finishes. 

C. Clear anodi Finish: 

1. Color and Gloss: Match aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. 



A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer 

present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions 

affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and 

operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, 

and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation. 

1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction 

debris. 

2. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; 

without sharp edges or offsets at joints. 

3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 




A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing 

windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. 

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal 

movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall 

flashing and other adjacent construction. 

C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. 

D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture 

migrating within windows to the exterior. 

E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic 

action at points of contact with other materials. 

3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION 

A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, operators, and accessories for a tight 

fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. 

Lubricate hardware and moving parts. 

B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective 

coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 

C. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from 

construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior 

concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, 

stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove 

contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 


A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to 

adjust, operate, and maintain window operating system. Refer to Division 1 Section 

"Demonstration and Training." 




SECTION 085313 - VINYL WINDOWS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes fixed and operable vinyl-framed windows and sliding patio doors. 


A. Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: 

1. R: Residential. 

B. Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: 

1. Design pressure number in pounds force per square foot used to determine the structural 

test pressure and water test pressure. 

C. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the 

design pressure. 

D. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size). 

Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to 

comply with requirements for performance class. 


A. General: Provide vinyl windows capable of complying with performance requirements 

indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, 

and that are of test size indicated below: 

1. Size indicated on Drawings. 

B. Structural Performance: Provide vinyl windows capable of withstanding the effects of the 

following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass 

AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test: 

1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind 

speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7, 

VINYL WINDOWS 085313 - 1


Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade 

indicated on Drawings. 


A. Product Data: Include assembly solar heat gain coefficients (SHGC), assembly U-values, 

construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual 

components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of vinyl 

window indicated. 

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other 

work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following: 

1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners. 

2. Joinery details. 


4. Flashing and drainage details. 

5. Weather-stripping details. 

6. Glazing details. 

7. Window cleaning provisions. 

C. Samples for Verification: For vinyl windows, doors and components required, prepared on 

Samples of size indicated below. 

1. Window Corner Fabrication: 12-by-12-inch- long, full-size window corner including 

full-size sections of window frame with factory-applied color finish, weather stripping, 

and glazing. 

2. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finish. 

3. Weather Stripping: 12-inch- long sections. 

D. Product Schedule: For vinyl windows and doors. Use same designations indicated on 

Drawings. 

E. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. 

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last 

four years by a qualified testing agency for each type, class, grade, and size of vinyl window 

and door. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted. 

G. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash, doors, operating hardware, weather stripping 

and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 

H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to vinyl window manufacturer for installation 

of units required for this Project. 

1. Minimum three years documented experience installing products specified in this section. 



B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating vinyl windows and doors 

that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance 

by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations. 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain vinyl windows and doors through one source from a single 

manufacturer. 

D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of vinyl 

windows and doors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 

Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements. 




E. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American 


Doors," for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, 

accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 

1. Provide AAMA-certified vinyl windows with an attached label. 

F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and 

with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in 


related to vinyl windows and doors including, but not limited to, the following: 



2. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of vinyl windows and doors with 

other exterior wall components. Include provisions for structural anchorage, glazing, 

flashing, weeping, sealants, and protection of finishes. 

3. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and 

weathertight exterior building envelope. 

4. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by 

other trades. 


A. Field Measurements: Verify vinyl window openings by field measurements before fabrication 

and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 

1.8 WARRANTY 


replace vinyl doors and windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified 

warranty period. 




a. Failure to meet performance requirements. 

b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or 

condensation. 

c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. 

d. Deterioration of vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond normal weathering. 

e. Failure of insulating glass. 

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Furnish manufacturer’s Lifetime Limited Warranty on window and 

door products, including five-year SureStart Protection, transferable to subsequent owners. 



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Cascade Windows, or equal. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product is WinPro Series 9011, 9200, and 9700/9730, with SB70+argon 

glass. 

2. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Division 1. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Vinyl Extrusions: Rigid (unplasticized) hollow PVC extrusions, formulated and extruded for 

exterior applications, complying with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS and the following: 

1. PVC Resins: 100 percent virgin resin. 

2. PVC Formulation: High impact, low heat buildup, lead free, nonchalking, and color and 

UV stabilized. 

3. Extrusion Wall Thickness: Not less than 0.090 inch. 

4. Multichamber Extrusions: Profile designed with multichambers between interior and 

exterior faces of the extrusions. 

B. Vinyl Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match frame members. 

C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials 

warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with vinyl window members, 

cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 

1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed 

fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or 

hardware being fastened, as appropriate. 

D. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel 

or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient 

strength to withstand design pressure indicated. 



E. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for 

permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and for complete concealment 

when vinyl window is closed. 

1. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying 

with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. 

F. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene, 

or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric. 

2.3 WINDOWS 

A. Window and Door Type: As indicated on Drawings. 

2.4 GLAZING 

A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing 

requirements applicable to glazed vinyl window units. 

B. Factory Glazing: Insulating high-performance Glass Unit, Type Double Glazed SB-70+argon. 

2.5 INSECT SCREENS 

A. General: Design windows, doors and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, 

removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect 

screens to fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on inside of window and provide 

for each operable exterior sash or ventilator. 

1. Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens: Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for 

Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for Windows," Residential R-20 class. 

B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with 

SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed 

fasteners, adjustable rollers, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. 

1. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum 

sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated. 

2. Finish: Match frame and sash color. 

C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; 

woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact 

damage, and weather deterioration, in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656. 

1. Mesh Color: Charcoal gray. 

D. Type installable from interior side, providing only reasonable insect control when operable sash 

is in open position; re-wirable glass fiber mesh, 14 x 18 mesh, secured in channel of aluminum 

box frame with continuous vinyl spline. 




A. Fabricate vinyl windows and doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for 

assembling components and anchoring windows and doors. 

1. Welded Frame and Sash/Ventilator Corners: Miter-cut and fusion welded. 

B. Fabricate vinyl windows and doors that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator 

framing. 

C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable door, sash and 

ventilator, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Single-Hung Windows: Provide weather stripping only at horizontal rails of operable 

sash. 

D. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches, glaze vinyl 

windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with 

requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. 

E. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 08 Section 

"Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator 

frames. 

F. Hardware: Mount hardware through double walls of vinyl extrusions or provide corrosionresistant 

steel reinforcement complying with requirements for reinforcing members, or do both. 

1. Angled mullion posts with interior and exterior trim. 

2. Angled interior and exterior extension and trim. 

3. Clear pine head and seat boards. 

4. Top and bottom plywood platforms. 

5. Exterior head and sill casings and trim. 

6. Support brackets. 

G. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory 

to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and 

installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. 

2.7 VINYL FINISHES 

A. Integral Finish and Color: Uniform, solid, homogeneous white interior and exterior. 



A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage and conditions, with Installer 


affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and 



operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, 

and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation. 

1. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at 

joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3 

inches of opening. 



A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing 

windows, doors, hardware, accessories, and other components. 

B. Install windows and doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding 

thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to 

wall flashing and other adjacent construction. 

C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. 

D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic 

action at points of contact with other materials. 

3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION 

A. Adjust operating doors, sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit 

at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. 

Lubricate hardware and moving parts. 

B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installation. Avoid damaging protective coatings and 

finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 

C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's 

written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, 

and clean surfaces. 

D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during 

construction period. 

E. Protect window and door surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from 

construction operations. In addition, monitor surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete 

and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or 

other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove 

contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 




SECTION 086200 - UNIT SKYLIGHTS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Self-flashing unit skylights with integral curb. 

2. Unit skylights mounted on site-built curbs. 


1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood 

framing and blocking at unit skylights. 

2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing at unit skylights. 


A. AAMA/WDMA Performance Designation: Provide unit skylights capable of complying with 

performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's unit skylights that are 

representative of those specified and that are of minimum test size indicated below: 

1. Size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for gateway performance. 

2. Size: Indicated on Drawings. 

B. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide unit skylights of performance class and 

grade indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS unless more stringent 

performance requirements are indicated. 

1. Performance Class and Grade: SKG-R15/15-1200x1200. 

C. Test Performance Criteria: Provide unit skylights capable of complying with performance 

requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's unit skylights that are representative of 

those specified. 

1. Air Infiltration: Provide unit skylights with maximum air leakage through assembly of 

0.3 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure 

difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.. 

2. Water Penetration: Provide unit skylights that do not evidence water penetration through 

assembly when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a zero static-air-pressure difference 

across unit. 

UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086200 - 1



A. Product Data: For each type of unit skylight indicated. Include construction details, material 

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for unit skylights. 

B. Shop Drawings: For unit skylight work. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and 

connections to supporting structure and other adjoining work. 

C. Product Schedule: For unit skylights. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 


A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last 

four years by a qualified testing agency for each type, performance class, performance grade, 

and size of unit skylight. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted. 


testing agency for each type and size of unit skylight. 

C. Field quality-control reports. 

D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 


A. Maintenance Data: For unit skylights to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating unit skylights that meet or 

exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion 

in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations. 

B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to unit skylight manufacturer for installation of 

units required for this Project. 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain unit skylights from single source from single manufacturer. 

D. Surface-Burning Characteristics of Plastic Glazing: Provide plastic glazing sheets identical to 

those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated below by a testing and 

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with 

appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 

1. Self-Ignition Temperature: 650 deg F or more for plastic sheets in thickness indicated 

when tested per ASTM D 1929. 

2. Smoke-Production Characteristics: Comply with either requirement below: 

a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less when tested per ASTM E 84 on plastic 

sheets in manner indicated for use. 



b. Smoke Density: 75 or less when tested per ASTM D 2843 on plastic sheets in 

thickness indicated for use. 

3. Burning Characteristics: Tested per ASTM D 635. 

a. Acrylic Glazing: Class CC2, burning rate of 2-1/2 inches per minute or less for 

nominal thickness of 0.060 inch or thickness indicated for use. 

E. Unit Skylight Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American 


Doors," for minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and 

fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated. 

1. Provide AAMA-certified unit skylights with an attached label. 


A. Coordinate unit skylight flashing requirements with roofing system. 

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of site-built curbs with actual unit skylights provided. 

C. Provide anchors and inserts to be placed in adjacent construction in proper sequence so as not to 

delay the Work. 

1.9 WARRANTY 


replace components of unit skylights that fail in materials or workmanship within specified 



a. Uncontrolled water leakage. 

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal 

weathering. 

c. Yellowing of acrylic glazing. 

d. Breakage of polycarbonate glazing. 

e. Deterioration of insulating-glass hermetic seal. 

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 







B. Basis-of-Design Product for single-dome skylight: Subject to compliance with requirements, 

provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 

1. American Skylites. 

2. APC Dayliter; C/S Group. 

3. Auburn Skylights; Major Industries, Inc. 

4. Bristolite Skylights. 

5. CPI International. 

6. Dur-Red Products. 

7. Exarc Skylights, Inc. 

8. Fiore Skylights, Inc. 

9. Fox Lite, Inc.; Skymaster Skylights. 

10. GE Polymer Shapes; General Electric Company. 

11. Glazed Structures Inc. 

12. Hi Pro International, Inc. 

13. Kalwall Corporation. 

14. Lane-Aire Manufacturing Corp. 

15. Naturalite Skylight Systems; Vistawall Group (The). 

16. Plasteco, Inc. 

17. Plastic Engineering Company of Tulsa, Inc. 

18. Skyline Sky-Lites, LLC. 

19. Solar Industries, Inc. 

20. Sunglo Skylight Products. 

21. VELUX America. 

22. Wasco Products, Inc. 

C. Basis of design for triple-dome skylight: Sunoptics (www.sunoptics.com) 2040 “Signature 

Series #800 MD, with u-value=0.82. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum Components: 

1. Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper to suit forming operations and finish 

requirements but with not less than the strength and durability of alclad Alloy 3005-H25. 

2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper to suit structural and finish 

requirements but with not less than the strength and durability of Alloy 6063-T52. 

B. Fasteners: Same metal as metal being fastened, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other 

noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners to match 

material being fastened. 

1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners might allow access to building, provide 

nonremovable fastener heads. 



2.3 GLAZING 

A. Acrylic Glazing: ASTM D 4802, thermoformable, monolithic sheet, category as standard with 

manufacturer, Finish 1 (smooth or polished), Type UVF (formulated with UV absorber). 

1. Double-Glazing Profile: Dome, 25 percent rise. 

a. Thicknesses: Not less than thicknesses required to exceed performance 

requirements. 

b. Outer Glazing Color: Colorless, transparent. 

c. Inner Glazing Color: White, translucent. 

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard EPDM, neoprene, partially vulcanized butyl tape, or 

liquid-applied elastomeric sealant. 

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS 

A. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur 

and containing no asbestos fibers, formulated for 15-mil dry film thickness per coating. 

B. Joint Sealants: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 

C. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. 

D. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, designed for trowel application or other 

adhesive compatible with roofing system. 

2.5 UNIT SKYLIGHTS 

A. General: Provide factory-assembled unit skylights that include glazing, extruded-aluminum 

glazing retainers, gaskets, and inner frames and that are capable of withstanding performance 

requirements indicated. 

B. Site-Built Curb: As indicated. 

C. Unit Shape and Size: As indicated. 

D. Condensation Control: Fabricate unit skylights with integral internal gutters and nonclogging 

weeps to collect and drain condensation to the exterior. 

E. Thermal Break: Fabricate unit skylights with thermal barrier separating exterior and interior 

metal framing. 






B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. 

Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of 

approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 


A. Mill Finish: Manufacturer's standard. 



A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer 


affecting performance of the Work. 

B. Proceed with unit skylight installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Coordinate installation of unit skylight with installation of substrates, vapor retarders, roof 

insulation, roofing membrane, and flashing as required to ensure that each element of the Work 

performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. 

B. Comply with recommendations in AAMA 1607 and with manufacturer's written instructions for 

installing unit skylights. 

C. Install unit skylights level, plumb, and true to line, without distortion. 

D. Anchor unit skylights securely to supporting substrates. 

E. Where metal surfaces of unit skylights will contact incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, 

including preservative-treated wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or 

provide other permanent separation recommended in writing by unit skylight manufacturer. 

F. Set unit skylight flanges in thick bed of roofing cement to form a seal unless otherwise 

indicated. 

G. Where cap flashing is indicated, install to produce waterproof overlap with roofing or roof 

flashing. Seal with thick bead of mastic sealant except where overlap is indicated to be left 

open for ventilation. 

3.3 CLEANING 

A. Clean exposed unit skylight surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up 

damaged metal coatings and finishes. 



B. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 

C. Remove and replace glazing that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged 

during construction period. 

D. Protect unit skylight surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from 

construction operations. 




SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Commercial door hardware for the following: 

a. Swinging doors. 

b. Non-fire-rated sliding doors. 


1. Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for provided as part of fire-rated labeled 

assemblies. 


A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of 

individual components and profiles, and finishes. 

B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following: 

C. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type, in specified finish, full size. 

Tag with full description for coordination with the door hardware sets. Submit Samples before, 

or concurrent with, submission of the final door hardware sets. 

1. Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged 

through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of 

operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements. 

D. Qualification Data: For Installer. 

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer 

and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for locks latches. 

F. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include 

final hardware and keying schedule. 

G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 

DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1


H. Other Action Submittals: 

1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing 

fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. 

Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure 

proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 

a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as 

in the Contract Documents. 

b. Content: Include the following information: 

1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door 

and frame. 

2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware 

item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device. 

3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening 

including name and manufacturer. 

4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 

5) Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on 

floor plans and in door and frame schedule. 

6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 

7) Mounting locations for door hardware. 

8) Door and frame sizes and materials. 

c. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible date, 

particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of 

other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, 

Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other 

information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets. 

2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's 

final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key 

set to unique door designations. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer. 

1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a 

qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to 

consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 

2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity. 

3. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, 


C. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in 

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." In addition to 

Owner, Construction Manager, Contractor, and Architect, conference participants shall also 

include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions 



into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not 


1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, 

and plans for future expansion. 

2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. 

3. Requirements for key control system. 

4. Address for delivery of keys. 


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to 


B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets, 

and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or 

package. 

C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. 


A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to 

be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to 

confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply 

with indicated requirements. 

B. Existing Openings: Where new hardware components are scheduled for application to existing 

construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing 

conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to 

provide for proper operation. 

1.7 WARRANTY 


replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified 



a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 

b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. 

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal 

weathering and use. 

2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. 



1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and 

maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and 

removal and replacement of door hardware. 

B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full 

maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive 

maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and 

adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies same as 

those used in the manufacture and installation of original products. 

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS 

A. Furnish full-size units of door hardware described below, before installation begins, that match 

products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with 

labels describing contents. 

1. Door Hardware: 4 of each type 


2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE 

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and 

door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named 

manufacturers' products. 

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive 

qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 

Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for 

each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. 

Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 

2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and 

requirements for description, quality, and function. 

C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to 

product selection: 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by 

manufacturers for various products listed below. An asterisk (*) following 

manufacturer's name designates manufacturer whose products are indicated in Hardware 

Schedule. Such products are listed in the schedule by specific reference to manufacturer's 

catalog numbers. Except as otherwise indicated, products of equivalent quality, design, 

and function by other listed manufacturers may be used, subject to approval of Architect. 



2. Butts and Hinges: Bommer, Hager*, McKinney, H. Soss, Stanley. 

3. Cylinders and Locks: Schlage*, Easy Set. 

4. Sliding, Sliding Pocket, and Bifold Door Hardware: Grant, Henderson, L. E. Johnson, 

Stanley. 

5. Door Stripping and Seals: Hager, National Guard, Pemko, Reese*, Sealeze, Ultra, Zero. 

6. Thresholds: Hager, National Guard, Pemko*, Reese, Sealeze, Zero. 


A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade 

name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as 

otherwise approved by Architect. 

1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. 

B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method 

indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. 

Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and 

BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if 

different from specified standard. 

C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally 

prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to 

commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum 

fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match 

surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, 

except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for 

installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means 

of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door 

and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 

2. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended 

Fasteners for Wood Doors." 

2.3 FINISHES 

A. Standard: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets. 












A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and 

other conditions affecting performance. 

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring 

connections before electrified door hardware installation. 



1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to 

ANSI A250.6. 

B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series. 


A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise 

indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 

1. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for 

Wood Flush Doors." 

2. As recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute, unless indicated otherwise. 

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where 

cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be 

painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface 

protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install 

surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment 

substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space 

fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. 

C. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in peal and stick butyl-rubber 

attached to closed cell foam. Remove excess sealant and clean adjacent surfaces. 


A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent 

Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 



1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in 

each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, 

including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted. 

3.5 ADJUSTING 

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to 

ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to 

operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating 

and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 

1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely 

from an open position of 30 degrees. 

2. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep 

period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds 

to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. 

B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately one month after Owner’s occupancy date of 

Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and 

readjust, including adjusting operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to 

ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. Instruct Owner's 

personnel in proper maintenance and adjustment. 


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. 

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. 

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without 

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 


A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to 

adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01 

Section "Demonstration and Training." 

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS 

A. Hardware Schedule: Provide hardware for each door as in the following list of hardware sets: 

MATERIAL MANUFACTURER APPROVED SUBSTITUTE 

BUTTS HAGER HAG STANLEY 

LOCKSETS SCHLAGE SCH No Substitute 



HDW SET 1 

DEADBOLTS SCHLAGE SCH No Substitute 

DOOR TRIM IVES IVE DON-JO, HAGER 

WEATHERSTRIP PEMKO PEM NATIONAL GUARD, REESE 

THRESHOLDS PEMKO PEM NATIONAL GUARD, REESE 




SECTION 088000 - GLAZING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified 

in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 

1. Storefront framing. 

2. Glazed entrances. 


1. Division 8 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts.” 

2. Division 8 Section “Vinyl Windows.” 


A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in 

referenced glazing publications. 

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to 

ASTM C 1036. 

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit. 

D. Interlayer: As defined by laminated glass. 


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and 

impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to 

the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets 

to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in 

construction and thermal stress (heat breaks). 

B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to 

ASTM E 1300 ICC's 2003 International Building Code by a qualified professional engineer, 

using the following design criteria: 

GLAZING 088000 - 1


1. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project 

according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings. 

a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph (40 m/s) 

b. Importance Factor: 1.15 

c. Exposure Category: C 

2. Design Snow Loads: 20 p.s.f. 

3. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass 

to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load. 

4. Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15 degrees from vertical, design 

glass to resist each of the following combinations of loads: 

a. Outward design wind pressure minus the weight of the glass. Base design on glass 

type factors for short-duration load. 

b. Inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus half of the design 

snow load. Base design on glass type factors for short-duration load. 

c. Half of the inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus the 

design snow load. Base design on glass type factors for long-duration load. 

5. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15 

degrees from vertical, design glass for a probability of breakage not greater than 0.001. 

6. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass 

deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 

inch, whichever is less. 

7. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential 

shading within individual glass lites. 

8. Differential shading due to window treatments: Design glass to resist thermal stress by 

differential shading and window treatments. 


changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING 

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape 

sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility 

with elastomeric glazing sealants. 

1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current 

sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 

2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation 

techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, 

tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates. 

3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, 

shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 

4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 

GLAZING 088000 - 2


5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for 

corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers. 


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. 


1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For glazing sealants used inside of the weatherproofing 

system, including printed statement of VOC content. 

C. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass the 

following products; 12 inches square. 

1. Tinted glass. 

2. Coated glass. 

3. Laminated glass with colored interlayer. 

4. Insulating glass. 

5. Laminated glass with translucent interlayer. 

D. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets and sealants, in 12-inch lengths. Install sealant 

Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. 

E. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use 

same designations indicated on Drawings. 

F. Qualification Data: For installers, manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated, 

low-e coatings, glass testing agency and sealant testing agency. 

G. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer. 

H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified 

testing agency, for tinted glass, coated glass, insulating glass, glazing sealants and glazing 

gaskets. 

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations 

within previous 36-month period. 

I. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. 

J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: 

A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass 

manufacturer. 

GLAZING 088000 - 3


B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, with a minimum of five years experience, who 

employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's 

Certified Glass Installer Program. 

C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited 

according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. 

D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to 

ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 

E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain ultraclear float glass, tinted float glass, coated float glass, 

laminated glass and insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass 

type. 

F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single 

manufacturer for each product and installation method. 

G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers 

and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these 

publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and `ANA's 

"Glazing Manual." 

2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and 

AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 

3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped 

Glazing." 

4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing 

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." 

H. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing 

with certification label of the SGCC the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, 

type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. Provide a letter 

certifying that laminated glass has been installed as indicated on the drawings. 

I. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least 

one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. 

J. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to 


1. Install glazing in mockups specified in Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances 

and Storefronts, Aluminum Windows, Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" to match 

glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods. 



GLAZING 088000 - 4



A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to 

glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or 

other causes. 

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing 

units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate 

temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when 

glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are 

outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F 

1.10 WARRANTY 

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in 

which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within 

specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from 

normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass 

contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other 

indications of deterioration in coating. 


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which 

laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within 

specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed 

from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning 

laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge 

separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding 

those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 


C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which 

insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within 

specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal 

under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning 

insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the 

obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 

1. Warranty Period: 10 years weather seal from date of Substantial Completion. 

GLAZING 088000 - 5



2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL 

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in 

thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Refer to glazing schedule. 

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind heat-strengthen 

(HS) heat-treated float glass, or Kind fully-tempered (FT) heat-treated float glass as needed to 

comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, 

provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to 

comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, 

provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. 

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties 

specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated 

below: 

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 

2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 

3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall 

unit and for each lite. 

4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's 

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 

5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, 

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 

6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS 

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following provide one of 

the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are 

not limited to, the following: 

a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear. 

b. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite. 

c. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite. 

d. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire. 

e. Oldcastle glass 

f. Visteon float glass 

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise 

indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 

GLAZING 088000 - 6


1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion 

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 

2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 

3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass). 

C. Coated Heat-Treated Tinted Float Glass: Class 2, complying with other requirements specified. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide PPG 

Solarbronze as manufactured by PPG Industries, Inc. or approved equal. 

2. Tint Color: Bronze. 

3. Visible Light Transmittance: See schedule for percent minimum. 

2.3 LAMINATED GLASS 


following 

1. AFG Industries, Inc. 

2. Oldcastle glass. 

B. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for 

Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven 

record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after 

fabrication and installation. 

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer 

manufacturer's written recommendations. 

2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to 

comply with requirements. 

3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. 

C. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by 

designations in "Laminated-Glass Types" Article. 

2.4 INSULATING GLASS 


following: 

1. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear. 

2. Northwestern Industries. 

3. Oldcastle glass. 

4. Visteon float glass. 

B. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by 

a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other 

requirements specified. 

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with polyisobutylene and silicone primary and secondary. 

GLAZING 088000 - 7


2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction Aluminum with mill or 

clear anodic finish. 

3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. 

C. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article and in "Laminated 

Glass" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article and in 

"Insulating-Laminated-Glass Types" Article. 

2.5 GLAZING GASKETS 

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to 

maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 

1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 

2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 

3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 

4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115. 

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene EPDM 

silicone or [thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, 

black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense 

compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of 

pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing. 

C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames 

with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black. 

2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS 

A. General: 

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with 

other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, 

and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as 

demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for 

selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at 

time of installation. 

3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 

250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 

4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full 

range. 

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, 

Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 


GLAZING 088000 - 8


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. 

b. Pecora Corporation; 890. 

c. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. 

d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1. 

2. Applications: Perimeter of all window units. 

C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, 

Grade NS, Class 50, Use non-traffic (NT) 



b. Pecora Corporation; 895. 

c. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C995. 

d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2 Spectrem 3. 

2. Applications: In structural glazing applications or perimeter. 

D. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, 

Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 



b. Schnee-Morehead, Inc., an ITW company; SM5731 Poly-Glaze Plus. 

c. Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze SSG, Tremsil 600. 

2. Applications: During fabrication of units. 

2.7 GLAZING TAPES 

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric 

tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer 

rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and 

complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous 

pressure. 

2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous 

pressure. 

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive 

on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 

2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with 

a full bead of liquid sealant. 

GLAZING 088000 - 9


2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing 

standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application 

indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. 

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. 

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or 

minus 5. 

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass 

manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. 

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side 

walking). 

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and 

density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant 

performance. 

2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS 

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face 

clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product 

manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance 

requirements. 

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges 

with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. 

2.10 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES 

A. Glass Type: Tempered Clear Glass 

1. Overall thickness: ¼”. 

2. Clear Tempered. 

3. Provide safety glazing labeling. 

2.11 LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES 

A. Glass Type: Laminated Clear Glass 

1. Overall thickness: 5/16”. 

2. Heat-Strengthened Laminated Clear Glass 

a. Outboard lite: 1/8” clear annealed. 

b. Interlayer: .060 PVB. 

c. Inboard lite: 1/8” clear annealed. 

GLAZING 088000 - 10



2.12 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES 

A. Glass Type: Low-e Coated, Clear Insulating Glass 

1. Overall thickness: 1”. 

2. Outdoor lite: 5/16” Heat Strengthened Laminated Clear Glass. 

a. Outboard lite: 1/8” clear heat strengthened. 

b. Interlayer: .060 PVB. 

c. Inboard lite: 1/8” clear heat strengthened. 

3. Air space: 7/16” (air). 

4. Indoor lite: ¼” clear tempered PPG Solarban 70XL 5 th surface. 

5. Visible Light Transmittance: 64%. 

6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: .28 maximum. 

7. Summer Daytime U-Factor: .26 maximum. 

8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .37 maximum. 

9. Shading Coefficient: .42. 




A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the 

following: 

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and 

offsets at corners. 

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 

3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 

4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. 



A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. 

Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so 

that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave 

visible marks in the completed work. 

GLAZING 088000 - 11


3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL 

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and 

other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in 

referenced glazing publications. 

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to 

provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant 

thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from 

Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or 

other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and 

appearance. 

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by 

preconstruction testing. 

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing 

publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of 

compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. 

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. 

Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and 

glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances 

and to comply with system performance requirements. 

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant 

width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of 

tape. 

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways 

in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to 

requirements in referenced glazing publications. 

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. 

K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket 

on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is 

subjected to movement. 

L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by 

gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with 

sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 

GLAZING 088000 - 12


3.4 TAPE GLAZING 

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush 

with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. 

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to 

make them fit opening. 

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover 

horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. 

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. 

Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. 

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. 

F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense 

compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. 

Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) 

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings 

exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. 

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place 

with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. 

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and 

press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and 

installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners 

and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without 

developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket 

manufacturer. 

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and 

press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing 

stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to 

produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints 

with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) 

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass 

lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding 

into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and 

backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance 

for optimum sealant performance. 

GLAZING 088000 - 13


B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond 

of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. 

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 

3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING 

A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide 

supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated. 


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers 

to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove 

nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. 

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction 

operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with 

glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at 

frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, 

alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from 

natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. 

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date 

scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as 

recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 


GLAZING 088000 - 14


SECTION 092400 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath. 


1. Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for structural, load-bearing 

(transverse and axial) steel studs and joists that support lath and portland cement plaster. 

2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring included in 

portland cement plaster assemblies. 

3. Division 07 Section "Building Insulation" for thermal insulations and vapor retarders 

included in portland cement plaster assemblies. 




1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For products having recycled 

content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and 

preconsumer recycled content. 

a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 

2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, including printed statement of VOC 

content. 

C. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including 

plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. 

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated. 

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of factory-prepared , colored, textured finish, coat 

indicated; 12 by 12 inches, and prepared on rigid backing. 

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 1



A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster assemblies identical 

to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. 

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of 

another qualified testing agency. 

B. Sound-Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster 

assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for STC ratings per ASTM E 90 and classified 

according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified testing agency. 

C. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to 


1. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated. 



D. Cold Joints or staggered marks are not acceptable. Work from corner to corner in one pass top 

to bottom without stopping 

E. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers, bonding agents, additives, base and finish coats 

from a single manufacturer source. 

F. Applicator Qualifications: Applicators specializing in the installation of exterior stucco 

assembly with a minimum of 7 years experience in commercial work similar to that required by 

this section. 

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 


A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from 

weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. 


A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. 

B. Exterior Plasterwork: 

1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use 

procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, 

and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind. 

2. Tent and heat exterior walls to maintain temperature. 

3. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F. 

4. Do not use frozen materials in cement stucco mixtures. 



5. Do not apply cement stucco to frozen surfaces containing front or ice. 

6. Inclement Weather: Do not apply basecoat during inclement weather, unless appropriate 

protection is employed. 

7. Do not apply basecoats or finish coats over substraits that are over 120 deg. F (49 deg. 

C). 

8. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has 

occurred. 

9. Wet cure all cement based materials a minimum of 2 times per day for a minimum of 3 

days prior to application of any successive coats. Air cure an additional 7 days prior to 

application of finish coat. 

10. Air cure all acrylic based finish coats. 

C. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for 

environmental conditions for applying finishes. 


2.1 METAL LATH 

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc 

coating. 


following: 

a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company. 

b. CEMCO. 

c. Clark Western Building Systems. 

d. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. 

e. MarinoWARE. 

f. Phillips Manufacturing Co. 

2. Recycled Content: Provide steel products with average recycled content such that 

postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less 

than 25 percent. 

3. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring, 2.5 lb/sq. yd. 

4. 3/8-Inch Rib Lath: 4 lb/sq. yd.. 

B. Wire-Fabric Lath: Wire Mesh Reinforcement: 1-3/8 inch galvanized steel 17-gauge wire, 

woven mesh, self-furring type. 


following: 

a. Davis Wire Corporation; a Heico Wire Group company. 

b. Jaenson Wire Company. 

c. Keystone Steel & Wire Co. 

d. K-Lath; a division of Georgetown Wire. 



2. Woven-Wire Lath: ASTM C 1032; self-furring, with stiffener wire backing, minimum 

17 guage. 


A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with 

thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. 

B. Secondary Fiberglass Mesh Reinforcing: Mesh consisting of 4.5 oz woven fiberglass mesh treated for 

alkaline resistance. 


a. El Rey Stucco Company, Inc., a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.: Premium Stucco Finish. 

b. LaHabra , a brand of ParexLaHabra, Incl.; Exterior Stucco Color Coat. 

c. SonoWall, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.; Thoro Stucco. 

d. Parex, Inc., a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; e-lastic. 

2. Basis of Design: Krak-Master Mesh manufactured by El Rey Stucco Company, Inc., a brand of 

ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Premium Stucco Finish. 

C. Metal Accessories: 


following: 

a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company. 

b. CEMCO. 

c. Clark Western Building Systems. 

d. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. 

e. MarinoWARE. 

f. Phillips Manufacturing Co. 

2. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, 

ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 zinc coating. 

3. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip 

galvanized zinc coating. 

4. External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, 

G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 

5. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel. 

a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. 

b. Small nose cornerbed with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening 

rib; use on columns and for finishing masonry corners. 

6. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with 

expanded flanges. 

7. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type, folded 

pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and 

removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 

8. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; folded pair of 

unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges. 



9. Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; formed to 

produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal that is adjustable form ¼ to 5/8 inch wide; 

with perforated flanges. 


A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of 

damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. 

B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of 

contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. 

C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932. 

D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required 

by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths 

required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no fewer than three exposed threads. 

E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063. 

F. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch 

diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 

G. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants”. 

1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 

59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 

2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS 

A. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. 

B. Water: Potable. 

C. Ready-Mixed Fiber Reinforced Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, chopped fibers, 

aggregates, coloring agents, and proprietary ingredients. 


a. El Rey Stucco Company, Inc., a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Premium Stucco 

Finish. 

b. LaHabra, a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.: Exterior Stucco Color Coat. 

c. SonoWall, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.; Thoro Stucco. 

d. Parex, Inc., a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; e-lastic. 

2. Color: Manufacturers standard. 

3. Basis of Design: Fiber-47 as manufactured by El Rey Stucco Company, Inc., a brand of 

ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Premium Stucco Finish. 



2.5 PLASTER MIXES 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 

B. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For acrylic-based finish coatings, comply with 

manufacturer’s written instructions. 

C. Mix only as much plaster as can be used in one hour. 

D. Withhold 10% of mixing water until mixing is almost complete, then add as needed to produce 

necessary consistency. 

E. Mechanically mix plaster materials at the project site; do not hand mix except where small 

amounts are needed, using less than one bag of plaster. 

F. Protect mixtures from frost, contamination, and evaporation. 

G. Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred. 



A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, 

cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions 




A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects 

caused by plastering. 

1. Install tape and plastic covering on all building openings, penetrations and exposed metal 

including but not limited to doors, windows, frames, exposed metal, and flashing. 

2. Maintain protection in place undamaged for the duration of the stucco installation. 

3. Cover horizontal surfaces as required to protect finish materials for the duration of stucco 

installation. 

B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability 

required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926. 


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design 

designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings. 



B. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting 

construction with acoustical sealant. 

3.4 INSTALLING METAL LATH 

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. 

1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install woven-wire lath. 

2. Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install 3/8-inch rib lath. 

3. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring, diamond-mesh lath. 

4. Reinforce all areas of high stress including but not limited to all corners, parapet caps, 

windows, doors and through wall penetrations. 

3.5 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES 

A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. 

B. Reinforcement for External Corners: 

1. Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations. 

C. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings. 

1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes: 

a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. 

b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft. 

2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet o.c. 

3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not greater 

than 2-1/2:1. 

4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 

5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas (panels) and to 

relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change. 

3.6 PLASTER APPLICATION 

A. Inspection 

1. Substrate Examination: Examine prior to installation as follows: 

a. Substrate shall be of a type listed in IBC 2006 or as required by local codes and agencies 

having jurisdiction. Plywood and OSB substrates must be gapped 1/8” between panels. 

b. Substrate shall be examined for soundness, and/or other harmful conditions. 

c. Substrate shall be free of dust, dirt, efflorescence, and other harmful contaminates. 

d. High pressure water-blast all areas of stucco that are to be repaired taking care to remove 

all loose and flaking paint and other materials. 

e. Saw cut and remove entire sections of stucco that appears to be delaminated or are 

buckling from the substrate. Replace with new weather barriers, lathing and basecoats. 

f. Notify contractor of discrepancies preventing installation of the stucco assembly 

2. Verify that weather resistive barrier and flashing is installed in compliance with requirements of 

applicable codes, regulations, and agencies having jurisdiction. 

3. Verify that lath is tight, properly secured, and that all accessories are properly set and secured. 

4. Isolation: Where lath and metal support assembly abuts building structure horizontally, and where 

partition wall work abuts the overhead structure, isolate work from structure movements. Install 



expansion or control joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support. Frame both sides of 

expansion and control joints separately and do not bridge joints with furring or lath. 

5. Examine substrates, grounds and accessories to insure that finished stucco work will be true to 

line, plane, level and plumb. 

B. Preparation Over Masonry Substrates: Direct Bond Applications. 

1. Verify that masonry surfaces to receive direct bond applications of stucco basecoats are 

rough, free from form release agents or otherwise properly prepared to provide for 

adequate bond. 

2. Spray absorptive surfaces with a fine mist of water to produce a uniformly moist 

condition. 

3. If substrate will not form a mechanical key, apply a uniform coating of the acrylic 

bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions. 

C. Installation 

1. General: Apply stucco basecoat assembly in accordance with ASTM C926 and in strict 

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations and in compliance 

with requirements of applicable codes, regulations and agencies having jurisdiction. 

2. Interrupt or delay stucco application only at junctions of stucco planes, at openings, at 

control joints or at expansion joints. 

3. Basecoat: 

a. Apply scratch coat to a thickness of 3/8” using sufficient trowel pressure or spray 

velocity to key stucco into lath or onto direct bond substrate. 

b. Scratch horizontally and in order to provide for a key with the brown coat. 

c. Apply brown coat directly over scratch coat to a thickness of 3/8” using sufficient 

trowel pressure or spray velocity to key brown coat into scratch coat. 

d. Darby, then rod surface to true plane. 

e. While basecoat is still wet, embed secondary fiberglass reinforcement utilizing a 

wood float, and smooth to flush. Take care to completely embed mesh into wet 

base coat. Overlap all seams 2” and remove all wrinkles, rough edges etc. 

f. Float or lightly broom surface to provide bond with cement based stucco finish 

coat, or trowel smooth in preparation for acrylic based finish coat. 

g. Tool brown coat to provide a V-joint at intersection of stucco with frames or other 

items of metal, wood, or plastic which act as stucco grounds. 

4. Crack and Patch Treatment 

a. Apply manufacturer’s recommended crack patching material over all cracks. 

b. While material is still wet, embed a strip of fiberglass mesh and smooth to flush. 

c. At severely cracked panels, apply a leveling coat over all wall surfaces and embed 

fiberglass mesh throughout. 

5. Finish Coat: Tinted Acrylic Based Stucco Finish 

a. Apply Primer OR Conditioner as recommended by product manufacturer written 

instructions and recommendations. 

b. Apply exterior wall finish coat to thickness recommended by manufacturer to 

achieve texture indicated, using sufficient trowel pressure or spray velocity to bond 

finish to base coat. 



D. Curing 

c. Apply exterior wall finish in a number of coats and consistency required to achieve 

texture to match approved sample. 

1. Moist cure cement based base and finish coats with a fog spray of clear water with 

sufficiently frequent applications to maintain stucco uniformly moist for a minimum of 

48 hours following applications. Cure brown coat a minimum of 7 days. Provide 

sufficient moisture during curing to permit continuous hydration of the cementitious 

materials. 

2. Air cure acrylic based finish coats only, do not wet cure. 

3.7 PLASTER REPAIRS 

A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, 

dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. 

1. Cut out and replace defective or damaged exterior stucco wall finish coat. 

2. Match patches to surrounding finish coat in form and texture. 

3.8 CLEANING 

A. Remove exterior wall finish and protective materials from perimeter trim and adjacent surfaces. 

B. Remove all excess materials from the project site. 




SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD 


PART 2 - RELATED DOCUMENTS 



2.2 SUMMARY 


1. Interior gypsum board. 


1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring that supports 

gypsum board. 

2. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in 

assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 

3. Division 09 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces. 

2.3 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide 

materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined 

according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent 

testing agency. 

B. Fire Resistance: Provide gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings indicated. 



B. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and 

Division 1 Specification Sections. 

C. Samples: For the following products: 

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory 

indicated. 

2. Textured Finishes: 1’ by 1’ for each textured finish indicated and on same backing 

indicated for Work. 

D. LEED Submittals: 

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1


1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.2: For products having local production, documentation 

indicating location of manufacturer. 

E. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of gypsum board assembly components certifying 

that their products comply with specified requirements. 


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and 

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an 

independent testing agency. Where fire-resistance-rated gypsum board assemblies are 

indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that comply with the following requirements: 

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600 "Fire Resistance 

Design Manual" or design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listing 

of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Gypsum board assemblies indicated are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance 

according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical 

to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to 

ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 

C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in 

surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and 

execution. 

1. Install mockups for the following: 

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. 

b. Each texture finish indicated. 

2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on 

exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 



D. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other 

panel products from a single manufacturer. 

E. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the 

same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer 

acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. 



2.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and 

identification of manufacturer or supplier. 

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from 

weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat 

to prevent sagging. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board 

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. 

B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. 

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold 

damaged. 

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, 

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or 

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 

D. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not 

less than 40 deg F For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less 

than 50 deg F for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 

95 deg F when using temporary heat sources. 

E. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts 

during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. 


3.1 PANELS, GENERAL 

A. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content such that 

postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a 

minimum of 20 percent by weight. 

B. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area 

and that correspond with support system indicated. 

1. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches. 



3.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD 

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to 

type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 


following: 

a. Domtar Gypsum 

b. G-P Gypsum. 

c. National Gypsum Company. 

d. USG Corporation. 

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products 

where proprietary gypsum wallboard is indicated: 

1. Gyprock Fireguard C Gypsum Board; Domtar Gypsum. 

2. Firestop Type C; Georgia-Pacific Corp. 

3. Fire-Shield G; National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division. 

4. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, FIRECODE C Core; United States Gypsum Co. 

5. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, ULTRACODE Core; United States Gypsum Co. 

C. Type X: 

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 

2. Long Edges: Tapered. 

D. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 



E. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces. 

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 


F. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows: 

1. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies. 

2. Edges: Tapered. 

3. Thickness: 5/8 inch where indicated. 

3.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES 

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc or Plastic. 

2. Shapes: 

a. Cornerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 



b. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. 

3.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS 

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. 

B. Joint Tape: 

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 

2. Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. 

a. Use pressure-sensitive or staple-attached, open-weave, glass-fiber reinforcing tape 

with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum 

board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. 

C. Drying-Type Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation 

that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. Factorypackaged 

vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and 

intended use. 

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and 

trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 

5. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds. 

3.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS 

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and 

manufacturer's written recommendations. 

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering 

gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 

1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 


C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated for the following applications. 

1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.033 inch thick. 

2. Fastening gypsum board to wood members. 

3. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 

0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 

D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." 



E. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." 

F. Gypsum Board Nails: ASTM C 514. 



A. Examine areas and substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, with Installer 

present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, and cast-in-anchors for 

compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold 

damaged. 


4.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL 

A. Comply with ASTM C 840. 

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid 

abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels 

not less than one framing member. 

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with 

not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. 

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate 

supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered 

edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not 

make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. 

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. 

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, 

etc.), except in chases braced internally. 

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke 

ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof 

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 

1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. 

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural 

abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim 

edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and 

abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 



H. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner 

construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, 

including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control 

joints to counteract wood shrinkage. 

I. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c. 

4.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD 

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 

1. Type X: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 

B. Single-Layer Application: 

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest 

extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless 

otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end 

joints. 

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses 

of panels. 

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise 

indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end 

joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 

C. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate 

(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum 

board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels 

until fastening adhesive has set. 

4.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES 

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same 

fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

B. Interior Trim: Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. 

Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other 

types are indicated. Install in the following locations: 

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. L-Bead: Use where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed. 

C. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations: 



1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 

2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 

4.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD 

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of cornerbead, edge trim, control 

joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare 

gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent 

surfaces. 

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas using setting-type 

joint compound. 

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories having flanges 

not intended for tape. 

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM 

C 840: 

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 

2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. 

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. 

E. Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels specified: 

1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or taping compound. 

Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound. Finish 

(Third) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound. 

F. For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second), 

and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. 

Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of 

visual defects and ready for decoration. 

4.6 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES 

A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces 

receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. 

B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a 

uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin 

application or of application patterns. 

C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture 

finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite 

these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and 

overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written 

recommendations. 




A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, 

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. 

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, 

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or 

splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 


A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. 

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure 

gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial 

Completion. 


A. Above-Ceiling Observation: General contractor will conduct an above-ceiling observation prior 

to installation of gypsum board ceilings and report any deficiencies in the Work observed. Do 

not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have 

been corrected. 

1. Notify general contractor one week in advance of the date and the time when the Project, 

or part of the Project, will be ready for an above-ceiling observation. 

2. Prior to notifying general contractor, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum 

board ceilings: 

a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation. 

b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems. 

c. Installation of air duct systems. 

d. Installation of air devices. 

e. Installation of mechanical system control air tubing. 

f. Installation of ceiling support framing. 




SECTION 093000 - TILING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Ceramic tile. 


1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and 

isolation joints in tile surfaces. 

2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units glass-mat, waterresistant 

backer board. 


A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 

apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. 

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, 

ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, 

ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, 

ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American 

National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." 

C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. 

D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs. 




1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.2: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including 

printed statement of VOC content. 

TILING 093000 - 1


C. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and 

locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished 

tile surfaces. 

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of 

accessories involving color selection. 

E. Samples for Verification: 

1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish 

required. For ceramic mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide full sheets of each 

color blend. 

2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and 

composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12 

inches square, but not fewer than 4 tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors 

approved for completed Work. 

3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 



B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile 

manufacturer and Installer. 

C. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. 

D. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product. 

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS 

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and 

that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing 

contents. 

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount 

installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 

2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type, 

composition, and color indicated. 


A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile from one source or producer. 

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent 

quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. 

TILING 093000 - 2


B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality 

for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate 

from one source or producer. 

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this 

Section from a single manufacturer for each product: 

1. Stone thresholds. 

2. Waterproof membrane. 

3. Crack isolation membrane. 

4. Joint sealants. 

5. Cementitious backer units. 

6. Metal edge strips. 

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to 


1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation. 

2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. 



E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades. 


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact 

until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. 

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. 

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and 

contamination can be avoided. 

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 

E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces 

from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, 

remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and 

ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in 

referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 

TILING 093000 - 3



2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL 

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, 

compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. 

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with 

ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced 

by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements 

specified. 

C. Low-Emitting Materials: Tile flooring systems shall comply with the testing and product 



Chambers." 

D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and 

package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from 

other packages and match approved Samples. 

E. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard 

with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile 

assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is 

suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. 

F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect 

exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous 

film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces. 

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS 

A. Tile Type Unglazed paver tile. 




2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Daltile 

“Cliff Pointe” colorbody porcelain or comparable product by one of the following: 

a. American Marazzi Tile, Inc. 

b. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. 

c. Crossville, Inc. 

d. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. 

e. Deutsche Steinzeug America, Inc. 

TILING 093000 - 4


f. Florida Tile Industries, Inc. 

g. Florim USA. 

h. GranitiFiandre; c/o Trans Ceramica, Ltd. 

i. Interceramic. 

j. Laufen. 

k. Lone Star Ceramics Company. 

l. Grupo Porcelanite. 

m. Portobello America, Inc. 

n. Seneca Tiles, Inc. 

o. United States Ceramic Tile Company. 

3. Composition: Porcelain. 

4. Face Size: 11-13/16 by 11-13/16 inches. 


6. Face: Plain with square or cushion edges Plain with cushion edges. 

7. Finish: Mat, opaque glaze. 

8. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

9. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where 

applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, 

selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: 

a. Base Cove and base cove corner (for Day Care only): Cove, module size same as 

adjoining flat tile. 

b. Base Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size same as 

adjoining flat tile. 

c. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 

same as adjoining flat tile. 

2.3 THRESHOLDS 

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between 

adjacent floor finishes. 

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above 

adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of 

threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface. 

2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS 

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, in maximum lengths available to 

minimize end-to-end butt joints. 


a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. 

b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. 

c. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. 

d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 

TILING 093000 - 5



B. Fiber-Cement Underlayment: ASTM C 1288, in maximum lengths available to minimize endto-end 

butt joints. 



a. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement Underlayment. 

b. James Hardie; Hardiebacker. 


2.5 SETTING MATERIALS 

A. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1. 




a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. 

b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. 

c. Bostik, Inc. 

d. C-Cure. 

e. Custom Building Products. 

f. Jamo Inc. 

g. Laticrete International, Inc. 

h. MAPEI Corporation. 

i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 

j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 

k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 

2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging 

mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1. 

2.6 GROUT MATERIALS 

A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or 

colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated. 




a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. 

b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. 

c. Bostik, Inc. 

d. C-Cure. 

TILING 093000 - 6


e. Custom Building Products. 

f. Jamo Inc. 

g. Laticrete International, Inc. 

h. MAPEI Corporation. 

i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 

j. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 

k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 

2.7 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS 

A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with 

the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint 

Sealants." 

1. Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 


2. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California 



3. Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant manufacturer. 

B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed 

joints unless otherwise indicated. 

C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; 

Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with 

fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that 

are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 



a. DAP Inc.; 100 percent Silicone Kitchen and Bath Sealant. 

b. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. 

c. GE Silicones; a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700. 

d. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant. 

e. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. 

f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White. 


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based 

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations 

indicated. 

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or 

combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring 

applications; half-hard brass exposed-edge material. 

TILING 093000 - 7


C. Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect 

exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and 

grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 

1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with 

a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87. 

2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is 

specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile. 

D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and 

grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout 

manufacturers. 

E. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and that does not 

change color or appearance of grout. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following 

available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, 


a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer. 

b. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal Grout & Tile Sealer. 

c. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978. 

d. Custom Building Products; Surfaceguard Sealer. 

e. Jamo Inc.; Matte Finish Sealer. 

f. MAPEI Corporation; KER 003, Silicone Spray Sealer for Cementitious Tile Grout. 

g. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer. 

h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer. 

i. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; TA-256 Penetrating Silicone Grout 

Sealer. 

F. Crack Control Membrane: Dietra or equal. 

2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT 

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout 

manufacturers' written instructions. 

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. 

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and 

other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance 

characteristics for installations indicated. 

TILING 093000 - 8




A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for 

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting 

performance of installed tile. 

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are 

incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances 

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by 

ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar 

comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 

a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically 

scarified. 

b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or 

grinding. 

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical 

units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if 

not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. 



A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set 

mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tilesetting 

material manufacturer. 

B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar 

bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains. 

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and 

packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from 

other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to 

manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 

D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent 

grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of 

temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. 

E. Install crack isolation membrane strictly per manufacturer’s recommendations. 

TILING 093000 - 9


3.3 TILE INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods 

specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series 

"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation 

methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting 

materials used. 

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile 

installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage. 

a. Tile floors in laundries. 

b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. 

c. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles. 

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete 

covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at 

obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring 

visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for 

straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other 

penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. 

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. 

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and 

center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to 

minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless 


1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within 

tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 

2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same 

size, align joints. 

3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on 

floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. 

F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 

1. Paver Tile: 3/16 inch. 

G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. 

H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, 

contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting 

materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above 

them. 

TILING 093000 - 10




I. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless 


1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent 

floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set). 

J. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other 

flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated. 

K. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to groutsealer 

manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, 

remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 

3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION 

A. Install cementitious backer units and fiber-cement underlayment and treat joints according to 

ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use 

latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's 


3.5 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION 

A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to 

produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. 

B. Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and 

been tested to determine that it is watertight. 

3.6 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION 

A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written 

instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. 

B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured. 

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING 

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are 

free of foreign matter. 

1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 

2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written 

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners 

recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners 

are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect 

TILING 093000 - 11


metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean 

water before and after cleaning. 

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer 

and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent 

drain clogging. 

B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to 

prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral 

protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. 

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is 

completed. 

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from 

tile surfaces. 

3.8 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE 

A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 

1. Tile Installation F113: Thin-set mortar; TCA F113. 

a. Tile Type: Paver tile. 

b. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set or Latex- portland cement mortar. 

c. Grout: Standard sanded cement grout. 


TILING 093000 - 12


SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 

B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling 

attachment devices to be cast in concrete. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 

B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, 

prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 

1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch-square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 

2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch-long Samples 

of each type, finish, and color. 


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items 

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 

1. Suspended ceiling components. 

2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 

3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels. 

4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: 

a. Lighting fixtures. 

b. Air outlets and inlets. 

c. Speakers. 

d. Sprinklers. 

5. Perimeter moldings. 

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. 

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1


C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer 

and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. 

D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and 

fastener type, from ICC-ES. 



A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective 

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 

2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 

percent of quantity installed. 


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP for testing indicated. 

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to 


1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings. 

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the 

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in 

original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they 

will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct 

sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. 

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized 

moisture content. 

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 



1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS 

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed 

and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and 

ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project 

when occupied for its intended use. 

1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before 

beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. 



A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions 

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing 


1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL 

C. Low-Emitting Materials: Acoustical panel ceilings shall comply with the testing and product 



Chambers." 

D. Source Limitations: 

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 

2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension 

system from single source from single manufacturer. 

F. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated 

that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical 

ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of 

test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795. 

G. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each 

product type. 

1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern 

designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, 



provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply 

with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical 

performance, edge detail, and size. 

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS 





1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

2. CertainTeed Corp. 

3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 

4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. 

C. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as 

follows: 

1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 1, nodular. 

2. Pattern: CD (perforated, small holes and fissured). 

D. Color: White. 

E. LR: Not less than 0.65. 

F. NRC: Not less than 0.10. 

G. CAC: Not less than 20. 

H. AC: Not less than 170. 

I. Edge/Joint Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members. 

J. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 

K. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. 

L. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels 

treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, 

mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or 

bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to 

ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. 

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL 

A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal 

suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with 

applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. 



1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for "Coating 

Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are 

indicated. 

B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, 

Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 

C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft 

temper. 

2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 

3. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400. 

4. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load 

(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but 

provide not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire. 

D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. 

E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch-thick, 

galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with 

bolted connections and 5/16-inch-diameter bolts. 

F. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to 

accommodate seismic forces. 

G. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic 

forces. 

H. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical 

panels in place. 

2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM 









C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll 

formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip 

galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation; with 

prefinished 15/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges. 



1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 

2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type. 

3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 

4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 

5. Cap Finish: Natural finish for aluminum. 

2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM 








4. Fry Reglet Corporation. 

5. Gordon, Inc. 


C. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not 

indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with 

seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that 

used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. 

1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and 

suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners 


2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms 

reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at 

exposed suspension member. 

3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter 

required to fit penetration exactly. 

2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT 

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be 


1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: 

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. 

b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 

2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: 

a. Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant. 



b. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919. 

c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. 

B. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective 

in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building 

construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 

1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant. 

2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, 

synthetic-rubber sealant. 

3. Acoustical sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated 

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical 

panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified 

in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements 

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel 

ceilings. 

B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture 

damaged, or mold damaged. 



A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at 

opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply 

with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 


A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic 

design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's 

"Ceiling Systems Handbook." 

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling 

plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces 

by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger 

spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard 



suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in 

form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a 

minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, 

eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not 

deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 

5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing 

members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and 

appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger 

involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to 

age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 

6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, 

install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 

7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 

8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 

9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from 

hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of 

each member. 

10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within 

performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four 

tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, 

without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires 

into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. 

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and 

where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of 

moldings before they are installed. 

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more 

than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 

inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. 

E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. 

Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. 

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system 

runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, 

precise fit. 

1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: 

a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 

2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of 

reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 

3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed 

panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel 

manufacturer. 



4. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having 

jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel 

manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. 

5. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fireresistance-rated 

assembly. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and 

suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and 

touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be 

successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. 




SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Resilient base. 


1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Sheet Flooring" for resilient sheet floor coverings. 




1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC 

content. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. 

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size 

Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern 

required. 

E. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 

F. Maintenance data for products specified in this Section, to include in Operating and 

Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. 


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to 

ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1


B. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections. 


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with 

ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 

50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 

70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time 

periods: 

1. 48 hours before installation. 

2. During installation. 

3. 48 hours after installation. 

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by 

manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. 

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been 

completed. 




1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll 

form of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 


2.1 RESILIENT BASE 

A. Resilient Base: 


following: 

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

b. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. 

c. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. 

d. Johnsonite. 

e. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. 

f. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co. 

g. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. 



h. Roppe Corporation, USA. 

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 

1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber, 

thermoplastic). 

2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous) or Group II (layered). 

3. Style: Cove (base with toe). 

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. 

D. Height: 6 inches (restrooms) or 4 inches (restrooms) or 4 inches. 

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. 

F. Outside Corners: Job formed. 

G. Inside Corners: Job formed. 

H. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or 

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for 


B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and 

substrate conditions indicated. 

1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated 

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 

a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. 

b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L. 

C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to 

protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. 



A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum 

moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 



B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in 

other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign 

deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 


D. Examine areas where installation of products specified in this Section will occur, with Installer 

present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with 

manufacturer's requirements. 

1. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 before beginning 

installation. 

2. For wood subfloors verify that underlayment surface is free of surface irregularities and 

substances with potential to interfere with adhesive bond, show through surface, or stain 

products specified in this Section. 


A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of 

resilient products. 

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to 

ASTM F 710. 

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and 

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by 

manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed 

with installation only after substrates pass testing. 

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation 

only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of 

water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. 

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with 

installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level 

measurement. 

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching 

compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. 

D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to 

be installed. 

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed 

at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 



E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before 

installation. 

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. 

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other 

permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of 

adjacent pieces aligned. 

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in 

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient 

base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 

G. Job-Formed Corners: 

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without 

producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient 

products. 

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. 

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction 

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. 

D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. 

E. Clean products specified in this Section after installation and 4 days prior to date scheduled for 

inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion. 

F. Apply protective polish according to resilient accessory manufacturer's directions. 




SECTION 096516 - LINOLEUM FLOORING 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Linoleum floor tile and sheet. 


1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer 

strips, and other accessories installed with linoleum floor covering. 




1. Product Data for Credit: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content. 

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For adhesives, documentation indicating that 

products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department 

of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from 

Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 

C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations of 

seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 

1. Show details of special patterns. 

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering indicated. 

1. Include similar Samples of installation accessories involving color selection. 

E. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer’s standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch 

sections of each color and pattern of floor covering required. 

1. Heat-Welding Bead: Include manufacturer’s standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 

inches long, of each color required. 

F. Heat Welded Seam Samples: For each floor covering product and welding bead color and 

pattern combination required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9 inch 

sample applied to rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project. 

LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516 - 1


G. Product Schedule: For floor covering. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 




A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals. 




1. Floor Covering: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, 

and pattern of floor tile installed. 

2. Sheet Flooring: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction 

thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each color, pattern, and type of sheet 

flooring installed. 


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are 

competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation. 

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by 

manufacturer for installation techniques required. 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to 

ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to 


1. Build mockups for floor coverings including resilient base and accessories. 

a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by 

Architect. 




A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with 

ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 

65 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 

1. Floor Tile: Store on flat surfaces. 

2. Sheet Flooring: Store rolls upright. 


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 

70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time 

periods: 

1. 72 hours before installation. 

2. During installation. 

3. 72 hours after installation. 

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by 

manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. 

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. 

D. Close spaced to traffic 72 hours after floor covering installation. 

E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 





1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; 

2. Forbo Flooring, Inc.; 

3. Tarkett Inc. 


A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient sheet flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore 

Standard. 

B. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product 




C. 


Chambers." 

2.3 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERING 

A. Floor Tile: ASTM F 2195,Type I, linoleum floor tile with fibrous backing. 

1. Nominal Floor Tile Size: Manufacturer’s Standard. 

B. Sheet Flooring: ASTM F 2034. Type I, linoleum sheet with backing. 

1. Roll Size: In manufacturer’s standard length by not less than 78 inches wide. 

C. Seaming Method: Heat welded. 

D. Colors and Patterns: As selected by the Architect from full range of industry colors. 


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or 

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for 


B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit products and substrate 

conditions indicated. 

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of not more than 50 when calculated according to 


2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California 



C. Heat-Welding Bead: Color blend matching strand product of linoleum floor covering 

manufacturer. 

1. Match linoleum floor covering. 

D. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. 



A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum 

moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 



B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in 

other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign 

deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings. 



A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor 

coverings. 

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering 

adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods 

recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed 


4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed 


a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation 

only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of 

water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. 

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with 

installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level 

measurement. 

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching 

compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. 

D. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be 

installed. 

1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at 

least 72 hours in advance of installation. 

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before 

installation. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings. 

B. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, 

and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. 

C. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. 



D. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by 

repeating on floor coverings as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking 

device. 

E. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished 

floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of floor covering 

installed on covers and adjoining floor covering. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to 

substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. 

F. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to 

produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, 

telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 

G. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to 

permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to 

produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. 

3.4 LINOLEUM FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION 

A. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor 

offsets, so floor tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to 

avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 

1. Lay floor tiles square with room axis. 

B. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as 

manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed 

floor tiles. 

1. Lay floor tiles square with grain direction alternating in adjacent floor tiles (basket-weave 

pattern). 

3.4 LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION 

A. Unroll sheet floorings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. 

B. Lay out sheet floorings as follows: 

1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 

2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 

inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 

3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 

4. Avoid cross seams. 

5. Eliminate deformations that result from hanging method used during drying process 

(stove bar marks). 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings. 



B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation: 

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. 

C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction 

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. 

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor coverings before 

applying liquid floor polish. 

1. Apply three coat(s). 

E. After allowing drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) to disappear, 

cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion. 

END OF SECTION 096516.13 



SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following 

interior substrates: 

1. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 

2. Steel. 

3. Galvanized metal. 

4. Wood. 

5. Gypsum board. 

6. Spray-textured ceilings. 


1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this 

Section. 

2. Division 06 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section. 

3. Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of 

paint systems on exterior substrates. 

C. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop 

priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. 

D. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is 

not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an 

item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces 

whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the 

Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 

E. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and 

labels. 

1. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or 

other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or 

nomenclature plates. 



INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. Manufacturer's color 

charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. 

After color selection, the General Contractor will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. 

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat 

indicated. Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, 

on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 

3. Label each coat of each Sample. 

4. Label each Sample for location and application area. 

5. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. 

Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required 

sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 

6. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each 

sample for location and application. 

7. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and 

texture only: 

a. Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch- (300-mm-) square samples of each color and 

material on hardboard. 

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same 

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in 

Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 

E. LEED Submittal: 

1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.2: For paints, including printed statement of VOC 

content and chemical components. 


A. MPI Standards: 

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved 

Products List." 

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural 

Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. 

B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish 

selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate 

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Comply with procedures 

specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples. Painting contractor to 

hold off on the pruchase of materials required to complete entire project until Mockup has been 



accepted for color, application and finish. Only those minimum required materials to complete 

the Mockup should be obtained. 

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of 

each paint system specified in Part 3. The General Contractor will select one room or 

surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be 

painted. 

a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. 

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 

c. After finishes are accepted, the General Contractor will use the room or surface to 

evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. 

2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services 

have been activated. 

3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. 

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark 

samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the 

same manufacturer as the finish coats. 


A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and 

containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. Provide vendors sales receipt for paint 

material purchase as part of pay application process along with vendors calculation of paint 

quantity and coverage on vendors letterhead. 

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient 

temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 

2. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are 

between 50 and 95 deg F. 

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at 

temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 


A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as 

materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing 

contents. 



1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and 

color applied. 

2. All materials to be packaged in unopened containers with original manufactures labels. 




following: 

1. Dunn-Edwards Corporation. 

2. ICI Paints. 

3. Kwal-Howells Paint. 

4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL 

A. Material Compatibility: 

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another 

and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by 

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by 

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 

B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating 

types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification 

will not be acceptable. 

1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors 

or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the 

exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. 

C. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with 

the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when 

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not 

apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 

1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 

2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 

3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 

g/L. 

4. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 

5. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 



6. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 

7. Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 

8. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 

9. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 

g/L. 

10. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 

11. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 

12. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 

13. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L. 

14. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC content of not more than 400 g/L. 

15. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340 g/L. 

16. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: VOC content of not more than 420 g/L. 

D. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints 

and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following 

chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in 

a fabrication or finishing shop: 

1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by 

weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more 

benzene rings). 

2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: 

a. Acrolein. 

b. Acrylonitrile. 

c. Antimony. 

d. Benzene. 

e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. 

f. Cadmium. 

g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. 

h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. 

i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. 

j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. 

k. Diethyl phthalate. 

l. Dimethyl phthalate. 

m. Ethylbenzene. 

n. Formaldehyde. 

o. Hexavalent chromium. 

p. Isophorone. 

q. Lead. 

r. Mercury. 

s. Methyl ethyl ketone. 

t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. 

u. Methylene chloride. 

v. Naphthalene. 

w. Toluene (methylbenzene). 

x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. 

y. Vinyl chloride. 

E. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 



2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS 

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50. 

1. VOC Content: E Range of E3. 

B. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint 

systems indicated. 

2.4 METAL PRIMERS 

A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79. 


B. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134. 


2.5 WOOD PRIMERS 

A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39. 


2.6 LATEX PAINTS 

A. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5). 


B. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5). 


2.7 ALKYD PAINTS 

A. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5). 


B. Interior Alkyd (Gloss): MPI #48 (Gloss Level 6). 






A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements 

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. 

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter 

as follows: 

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 

2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 

3. Wood: 15 percent. 

4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 

5. Plaster: 12 percent. 

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing 

finishes and primers. 

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces 

are dry. 

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and 

conditions. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural 

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. 

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. 

If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surfaceapplied 

protection before surface preparation and painting. 

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to 

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, 

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 

C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and 

similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible 

because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface 

preparation and painting. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall 

items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. 

D. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and 

incompatible paints and encapsulants. 

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required 

to produce paint systems indicated. 



E. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release 

agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to 

improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. Use abrasive blast-cleaning 

methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. 

1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If 

surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this 

condition. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in 


F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in 

writing by paint manufacturer. 

G. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; 

remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or 

mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) 


1. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, 

clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same 

primer as the shop coat. 

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal 

fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that 

promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. Clean galvanized surfaces with 

nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove 

pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. 

I. Wood Substrates: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, 

mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. 

1. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply coat of white shellac or other 

recommended knot sealer before applying primer. 

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 

3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. Prime, stain, or seal wood 

to be painted immediately on delivery. 

4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic 

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 

5. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or 

sealer immediately on delivery. 

J. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and 

sanded smooth. 

K. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Do not begin paint application until surfaces are dry. 

L. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. 



1. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required 

during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface 

film and strain material before using. 

2. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 


A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 

2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. 

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture 

with prime coat only. 

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar 

hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 

4. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, nails, tacks, tape, hangers 

or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 

5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in items are in place. 

Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired 

protection. 

6. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 

7. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 

B. Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for 

painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 

1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of 

application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as 

recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even 

surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 

2. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat 

surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under 

moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause 

the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. 

C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's 

recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as 

recommended by the manufacturer. 

D. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete 

coverage with pores filled. 

E. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by 

the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been 

prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or 

unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects 

due to insufficient sealing. 

F. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, 

or repaint work not complying with requirements. 



G. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of 

same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide 

sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 

H. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film 

has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, 

corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of 

flat surfaces. 

I. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, 

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color 

breaks. 

J. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and 

occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 

1. Mechanical Work: 

a. Uninsulated metal piping. 

b. Uninsulated plastic piping. 

c. Pipe hangers and supports. 

d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 

e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets 

and outlets. 

f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering 

or other paintable jacket material. 

g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field 

painting. 

2. Electrical Work: 

a. Switchgear. 

b. Panelboards. 

c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field 

painting. 

K. Back roll all finish coat paint application regardless of how prime coats have been applied. 


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any 

time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials 

being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, 

and certified in presence of Contractor. 

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 



3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being 

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplyingpaint 

materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with 

rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from 

previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are 

incompatible. 


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from 


B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by 

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of 

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and 

leave in an undamaged condition. 

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or 

defaced painted surfaces. 

E. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective 

wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE 

A. CMU Substrates: 

1. Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A. 

a. Prime Coat: Kwal Block Filler 5940 or equal. 

b. Topcoat: Kwal 3000 Accu-Pro Acrylic (semi-gloss) or equal. 

B. Gypsum Board Substrates (standard): 

1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. 

a. Prime Coat: Kwal 0890 Accu-Pro or equal. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Kwal 3000 Accu-Pro Acrylic PC (semi-gloss) or equal. 

c. Topcoat: Kwal 3000 Accu-Pro Acrylic (semi-gloss) or equal. 

C. Gypsum Board Substrates (heavy smoker units): 

1. Clean walls and ceiling with mild detergent and warm water, non-ammonia. 

2. If a more stringent cleaner is needed, add phosphate. 

3. Seal walls with a stain blocking primer: MPI INT 9.2K. 

a. X-Terminator by Aro-Tec Coatings or equal. 



4. Topcoat: Kwal 3000 Accu-Pro Acrylic (semi-gloss) or equal. 




SECTION 099133 - EXTERIOR PAINTING 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following 

exterior substrates: 

1. Steel. 

2. Galvanized metal. 

3. Wood. 

4. Exterior fiber-cement panels (Hardipanel). 

5. Exterior gypsum board. 


1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this 

Section. 

2. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of 

paint systems on interior substrates. 

C. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior items and 

surfaces. 

1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to 

shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. 

D. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is 

not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an 

item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces 

whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the 

Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 

E. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, 

and labels. 

1. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or 

other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or 

nomenclature plates. 

EXTERIOR PAINTING 099133 - 1




B. Submittals: For each paint system specified, provide the following: 

1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material 

and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each 

material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 

2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label 

analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material 

proposed for use. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. Manufacturer's color 

charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. 

After color selection, the General Contractor will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. 

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat 

indicated. Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, 

on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 

3. Label each coat of each Sample. 

4. Label each Sample for location and application area. 

5. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. 

Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required 

sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 

6. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each 

sample for location and application. 

7. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and 

texture only: 

a. Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch- (300-mm-) square samples of each color and 

material on hardboard. 

E. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same 

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in 

Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 

F. LEED Submittal: 

1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.2: For paints, including printed statement of VOC 

content and chemical components. 




A. MPI Standards: 

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved 

Products List." 

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural 

Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. 

B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish 

selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate 

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Comply with procedures 

specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples. Painting contractor to 

hold off on the purchase of materials required to complete entire project until Mockup has been 

accepted for color, application and finish. Only those minimum required materials to complete 

the Mockup should be obtained. 

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of 

each paint system specified in Part 3. 

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. 

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. 

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark 

samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 

C. Source Limitations: Obtain primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the 

same manufacturer as the finish coats. 


A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer’s original, unopened packages and 

containers bearing manufacturer’s name and label. Provide vendors sales receipt for paint 

material purchase as part of pay application process along with vendors calculation of paint 

quantity and coverage on vendors letterhead. 

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient 

temperatures of continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 

2. Protect from freezing 

3. Keep storage area neat and orderly 

4. Remove oily rags and waste from storage areas daily. 


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are 

between 50 and 95 deg F. 



B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at 

temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 

C. Do not apply paints when wind is present or forecasted above 5 miles per hour. 


A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as 

materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing 

contents. 

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and 

color applied. 

2. All materials to be packaged in unopened containers with original manufactures labels. 




following: 

1. Dunn-Edwards Corporation. 

2. ICI Paints. 

3. Kwal-Howells Paint. 

4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL 

A. Material Compatibility: 

1. Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish coat materials use within each paint 

system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of 

service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field 

experience. 

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by 

manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 

B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

C. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating 

types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification 

will not be acceptable. 



1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors 

or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the 

exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. 

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS 

A. Alkali-Resistant Primer: MPI #3. 


2.4 METAL PRIMERS 

A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79. 


2.5 WOOD PRIMERS 

A. Exterior Latex Wood Primer: MPI #6. 


2.6 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS 

A. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI (Gloss Level 5). 




A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements 

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. 

B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure 

compatibility of the total system for various substrates. 

C. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter 

as follows: 

1. Cement-fiber panels: 12 percent. 

2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 

3. Wood: 15 percent. 

4. Plaster: 12 percent. 

5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 



D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing 

finishes and primers. 

E. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces 

are dry. 

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and 

conditions. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural 

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. 

B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures and 

similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible 

because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation 

and painting. 

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to 

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, 

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 

C. Before applying paint or other surface treatments, Clean substrates of substances that could 

impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 

Schedule cleaning and painting sawdust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will 

not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. 

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required 

to produce paint systems indicated. 

D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's 

written instructions for each particular substrate condition. 

E. Cement Fiber Panel Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and 

chalk dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or 

alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If 

surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this 

condition. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in 


F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in 

writing by paint manufacturer. 

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal 

fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that 

promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. 



H. Wood Substrates: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, 

mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. 

1. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or 

other recommended coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 

2. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. 

3. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 

4. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 

5. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic 

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 

6. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or 

sealer immediately on delivery. 

I. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might 

impair bond of paints to substrates. 

J. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry. 

K. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is 

dry and sanded smooth. 

L. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; 

remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or 

mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) 


1. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, 

clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same 

primer as the shop coat. 

2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so 

surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized 

sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. 

M. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

1. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required 

during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface 

film and strain material before using. 

2. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 


A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Use applicators and techniques best suited for paint and substrate indicated and type of 

material being applied. 



2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, nails, tacks, tape, 

hangers or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 

3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 

4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in items are 

in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and 

provide desired protection. 

5. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final 

installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture 

with prime coat only. 

6. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 

7. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 

8. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 

B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or 

otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent 

surface deterioration. 

1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application 

method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended 

by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface 

according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 

C. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of 

same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide 

sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 

D. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final topcoat, apply additional coats 

until cured paint film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. 

1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat 

surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under 

moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause 

the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. 

E. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, 

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color 

breaks. 

F. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators 


G. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's 

recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as 


H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by 

the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been 

prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or 

unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other 

defects due to insufficient sealing. 



I. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, 

refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 

J. Back roll all finish coat paint application regardless of how prime coats have been applied. 


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any 

time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 

1. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being 

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplyingpaint 

materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with 

rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from 

previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are 

incompatible. 


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from 


B. After completing painting paint application, clean glass and paint- spattered surfaces. Remove 

spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent 

finished surfaces. 

C. Protect work of other trades, against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work 

of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and 

leave in an undamaged condition. 

D. Provide “wet paint” signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective 

wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 

E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or 

defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 

F. Paint schedules: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated: 

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE 

A. Cement Fiber Board Substrates: 

1. Latex System: 

B. Steel Substrates: 

a. Prime Coat: Kwal 5940 Acu-Guard or equal. 

b. Topcoats: Kwal Liquid Vinyl Coro-Tile (semi gloss) or equal. 



1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D. 

a. Prime Coat: Kwal 9210 or equal. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Kwal 9800 Accu-Pro Alkyd or equal. 

c. Topcoat: Kwal 9800 Accu-Pro Alkyd (gloss level 6) or equal. 

C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 

1. Latex Over Water-Based Primer System: MPI EXT 5.3H. 

a. Prime Coat: Kwal 5810 Ambassador G-Prime (non-flat) or equal. 

b. Topcoat: Kwal 3900 Accu-Shield (semi-gloss) or equal. 

D. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including doors. 

1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.3L. 

a. Prime Coat: Kwal 5862 Embassy Cancel or equal. 

b. Topcoat: Kwal 3900 Accu-Shield (semi-gloss) or equal. 

c. Sherwin-Williams A100 (semi-gloss). 

E. Wood Panel Substrates: Including plywood siding fascias soffits. 

1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.4K. 

a. Prime Coat: Kwal 5862 Embassy Cancel or equal. 

b. Intermediate Coat: Kwal 3000 Accu-Pro Acrylic PC (semi-gloss) or equal. 

c. Topcoat: Kwal 3000 Accu-Pro Acrylic PC (semi-gloss) or equal. 




SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Markerboards. 


1. Division 09 Section "Fabric-Wrapped Panels" for tackable, fabric-covered wall surfaces. 

2. Division 10 Section "Display Cases" for individually framed and enclosed, wall-mounted 

bulletin boards and for bulletin boards in built-in trophy and display cases. 

3. Division 10 Section "Directories" for bulletin boards within built-in directories. 

4. Division 26 Sections for wiring and other electrical work associated with power-operated, 

visual display surfaces. 


A. Tackboard: Framed or unframed, tackable, visual display board assembly. 

B. Visual Display Board Assembly: Visual display surface that is factory fabricated into 

composite panel form, either with or without a perimeter frame; includes chalkboards, 

markerboards, and tackboards. 

C. Visual Display Surface: Surfaces that are used to convey information visually, including 

surfaces of chalkboards, markerboards, tackboards, and surfacing materials that are not 

fabricated into composite panel form but are applied directly to walls. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.[ Include construction details, material 

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for visual 

display surfaces.] 


1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.2: For adhesives, documentation including printed 


VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100 - 1


C. Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and 


1. Show locations of panel joints. 

2. Show locations of special-purpose graphics for visual display surfaces. 

3. Include sections of typical trim members. 

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display surface indicated, for units with 

factory-applied color finishes, and as follows: 

1. Actual sections of porcelain-enamel face sheet. 

2. Fabric swatches of fabric-faced tack assemblies. 

3. Include accessory Samples to verify color selected. 

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display surface indicated. 

1. Visual Display Surface: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches, mounted on substrate indicated 

for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required. 

2. Trim: 6-inch- long sections of each trim profile. 

3. Display Rail: 6-inch- long sections. 

4. Modular Support System: 6-inch- long sections. 

5. Accessories: Full-size Sample of each type of accessory. 

F. Product Schedule: For visual display surfaces. 




testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics of fabrics. 

C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For visual display surfaces to include in maintenance 

manuals. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved 

for installation of motor-operated, sliding visual display units required for this Project. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain visual display surfaces from single source from single 

manufacturer. 



C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to 

ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of 

applicable testing agency. 

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 

2. Smoke-Developed Index: [50] [450] or less. 


A. Deliver factory-built visual display surfaces, including factory-applied trim where indicated, 

completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed 

maximum manufactured panel size, provide two or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to 

Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the 

factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site. 

B. Store visual display surfaces vertically with packing materials between each unit. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display surfaces until spaces are 

enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is 

complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and 

humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with visual display 

surfaces by field measurements before fabrication. 

1. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might 

delay the Work. 

1.10 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard form in which 

manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or 

workmanship within specified warranty period. 


a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities. 

b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking. 






A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: ASTM A 424, enameling-grade steel, uncoated thickness 

indicated; with exposed face and edges coated with primer, 1.7-to-2.5-mil- thick ground coat, 

and color cover coat; and with concealed face coated with primer and 1.7-to-2.5-mil- thick 

ground coat. 

1. Gloss-Finish Cover Coat: Gloss as indicated; dry-erase markers wipe clean with dry 

cloth or standard eraser. Minimum 3.0-to-4.0-mil- thick cover coat. Cover and ground 

coats shall be fused to steel at manufacturer's standard firing temperatures but not less 

than 1475 deg F. 

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following. 

1) PolyVision Corporation, a Steelcase company; P 3 ceramicsteel 

Markerboard. 

B. Natural Cork Sheet: Seamless, single-layer, compressed fine-grain cork sheet; bulletin board 

quality; face sanded for natural finish[ with surface-burning characteristics indicated]. 

C. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, tempered. 

D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1. 

E. Fiberboard: ASTM C 208. 

F. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063. 

G. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with the testing and product 



Chambers." 

2.2 MARKERBOARD ASSEMBLIES 

A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboards: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard 

assembly of three-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core material, and 0.021-inchthick, 

porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gloss finish. 




a. AARCO Products, Inc. 

b. ADP Lemco, Inc. 

c. Aywon. 



d. Bangor Cork Company, Inc. 

e. Best-Rite Manufacturing. 

f. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. 

g. Egan Visual Inc. 

h. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc. 

i. Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group. 

j. Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc. 

k. PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company. 

l. Tri-Best Visual Display Products. 

2. Hardboard Core: 1/4 inch thick; with backing. 

3. Particleboard Core: [3/8 inch] [1/2 inch] thick; with [0.005-inch- thick, aluminum foil] 

[0.015-inch- thick, aluminum sheet] [0.013-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet] 

backing. 

4. Fiberboard Core: [3/8 inch] [1/2 inch] thick; with [0.001-inch- thick, aluminum foil] 

[0.015-inch- thick, aluminum sheet] [0.013-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet] 

backing. 

5. Manufacturer's Standard Core: Minimum 1/4 inch thick, with manufacturer's standard 

moisture-barrier backing. 

6. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, moisture-resistant thermoplastic type. 

2.3 MARKERBOARD ACCESSORIES 

A. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- thick, extruded 

aluminum; standard size and shape. 

1. Field-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard, snap-on trim with no visible screws or 

exposed joints. 

2. Factory-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard. 

B. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous. 

1. Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast-aluminum end 

closures. 

2. 


A. Porcelain-Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheet and 

backing sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible, 

waterproof adhesive. 

B. Visual Display Boards: Field assemble visual display boards unless otherwise indicated. 

1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual 

display boards at manufacturer's factory before shipment. 

C. Factory-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate factory-assembled units with trim and 

accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit. 



1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate 

with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to 

Architect. 

2. Provide manufacturer's standard vertical-joint [spline] [H-trim] system between abutting 

sections of markerboards. 

3. Provide manufacturer's standard mullion trim at joints between markerboards of 

combination units. 

4. Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to 

normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by 

Architect from manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit conditions 

indicated. 

D. Modular Visual Display Boards: Fabricated with integral panel clips attached to core material. 

E. Aluminum Frames[ and Trim]: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints to 

a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure. 

1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual 

display units at manufacturer's factory before shipment. 






C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. 




A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. 

B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. 

C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness 

of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion 

coating, and applying and baking finish. 

2.7 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACE SCHEDULE 

A. Visual Display Board Factory assembled. 

1. Markerboard: Porcelain-enamel markerboard assembly. 

a. Color: White. 



2. Corners: Square. 

3. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 

4. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 

5. Mounting: Wall. 

6. Mounting Height: As indicated on Drawings. 

7. Factory-Applied Aluminum Trim: Manufacturer's standard. 

a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color 

densities. 




installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of 

the Work. 

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of connections 

before installation of motor-operated, sliding visual display units. 

C. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display surfaces. 

D. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth where sliding visual display units will 

be installed. 

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. 

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, 

finished surfaces of visual display boards, including dirt, mold, and mildew. 

C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, 

cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual 

display surfaces and wall surfaces. 

1. Prime wall surfaces indicated to receive visual display wall coverings and as 

recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall covering manufacturer. 

2. Prepare surfaces to receive visual display wall coverings and test for moisture according 

to requirements specified in Division 09 Section "Wall Coverings." 

3. Prepare substrates indicated to receive visual display wall covering as required by 

manufacturer's written instructions to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound 

surface that is uniform in color. 

a. Moisture Content: Maximum of [4] percent when tested with 

an electronic moisture meter. 



b. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. Prime with 

primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall 

covering manufacturer. 

c. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply metal as recommended in writing 

by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall covering manufacturer. 

d. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer 

manufacturer and wall covering manufacturer. 

e. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. 

D. Prepare recesses for sliding visual display units as required by type and size of unit. 


A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on 

Drawings. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing 

materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete 

installation. 

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FIELD-FABRICATED VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS AND 

ASSEMBLIES 

A. Field-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate field-assembled units with grounds, trim, 

and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit. 

1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate 

with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to 

Architect. 

2. Provide manufacturer's standard vertical-joint [spline] [H-trim] system between abutting 

sections of markerboards. 

3. Provide manufacturer's standard mullion trim at joints between markerboards of 

combination units. 

4. Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to 

normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by 

Architect from manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit conditions 

indicated. 

B. Natural-Slate Chalkboards: Align and level joints between adjoining panels and apply 

manufacturer's recommended joint-filler compound. Hone and finish joints to continuous even 

plane. 


A. Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one 

cleaning label to visual display surface in each room. 

B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 

C. Cover and protect visual display surfaces after installation and cleaning. 






SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Dimensional characters. 

2. Panel signs. 


1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary Project 

identification signs and for temporary information and directional signs. 

2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment for labels, tags, 

and nameplates for plumbing systems and equipment. 

3. Division 23 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and 

nameplates for HVAC systems and equipment. 

4. Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labels, tags, and 

nameplates for electrical equipment. 

5. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for illuminated Exit signs. 


A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance 

Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and 

Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines." 



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 

1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by 

others, and accessories. 

2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and 

Braille, and layout for each sign. 

SIGNAGE 101400 - 1


C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections 

of units showing the full range of colors available for the following: 

1. Aluminum. 

2. Acrylic sheet. 

3. Polycarbonate sheet. 

4. Fiberglass sheet. 

5. Die-cut vinyl characters and graphic symbols. Include representative samples of 

available typestyles and graphic symbols. 

D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, 

texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated: 

1. Aluminum: For each form, finish, and color, on 6-inch- long sections of extrusions and 

squares of sheet at least 4 by 4 inches. 

2. Acrylic Sheet: 8 by 10 inches for each color required. 

3. Polycarbonate Sheet: 8 by 10 inches for each color required. 

4. Fiberglass Sheet: 8 by 10 inches for each color required. 

5. Panel Signs: Not less than 12 inches square including border. 

E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 


A. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 


A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products 

similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice 

performance. 

B. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single 

manufacturer. 

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility 

Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 



conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to 

manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 

SIGNAGE 101400 - 2


B. Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and 

indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 


A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs. 

1.10 WARRANTY 


replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty 

period. 


a. Deterioration of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal weathering. 

b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination. 



2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, of alloy and temper recommended by sign 

manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. 

B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum 

producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and 

durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32. 

C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer 

and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability 

properties of Alloy 6063-T5. 

D. Fiberglass Sheet: Molded, seamless, thermosetting, glass-fiber-reinforced polyester panels with 

a minimum tensile strength of 15,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 638 and with a 

minimum flexural strength of 30,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 790. 

E. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing). 

F. Polycarbonate Sheet: Of thickness indicated, manufactured by extrusion process, coated on 

both surfaces with abrasion-resistant coating: 

1. Impact Resistance: 16 ft-lbf/in. per ASTM D 256, Method A. 

2. Tensile Strength: 9000 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D 638. 

3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 340,000 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D 790. 

4. Heat Deflection: 265 deg F at 264 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D 648. 

SIGNAGE 101400 - 3


5. Abrasion Resistance: 1.5 percent maximum haze increase for 100 revolutions of a Taber 

abraser with a load of 500 g per ASTM D 1044. 

2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS 

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

1. ACE Sign Systems, Inc. 

2. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division. 

3. A. R. K. Ramos. 

4. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 

5. Bunting Graphics, Inc. 

6. Charleston Industries, Inc. 

7. Gemini Incorporated. 

8. Grimco, Inc. 

9. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 

10. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. Co. 

11. Mills Manufacturing Company. 

12. Mohawk Sign Systems. 

13. Nelson-Harkins Industries. 

14. Signature Signs, Incorporated. 

15. Southwell Company (The). 

C. Cast Characters: Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed 

lines and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of 

characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Alloy and temper recommended by sign 

manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. Comply with the 

following requirements. 

1. Character Material: Aluminum. 

2. Thickness: As indicated. 

3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

4. Mounting: Concealed studs, noncorroding for substrates encountered. 

D. Aluminum Extrusions: Comply with the following requirements: 

1. Finish: Anodized. 

2. Thickness: As indicated. 

3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

4. Mounting: Concealed studs, noncorroding for substrates encountered. 

E. Dimensional Character Sign Schedule: 

1. Sign Type: 

a. Sign Size: As indicated. 

SIGNAGE 101400 - 4


b. Character Size: 6”. 

c. Text/Message: Plaza Feliz. 

d. Location: As indicated. 

2.3 PANEL SIGNS 



1. ACE Sign Systems, Inc. 

2. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division. 

3. Allen Industries Architectural Signage 

4. Allenite Signs; Allen Marking Products, Inc. 

5. APCO Graphics, Inc. 

6. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 

7. Best Sign Systems Inc. 

8. Bunting Graphics, Inc. 

9. Fossil Industries, Inc. 

10. Gemini Incorporated. 

11. Grimco, Inc. 

12. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 

13. InPro Corporation 

14. Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division. 

15. Mills Manufacturing Company. 

16. Mohawk Sign Systems. 

17. Nelson-Harkins Industries. 

18. Seton Identification Products. 

19. Signature Signs, Incorporated. 

20. Supersine Company (The) 

B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under 

installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from 

corner to corner, complying with the following requirements: 

1. Laminated, Polycarbonate-Faced Sheet: 0.060-inch-thick, polycarbonate face sheet 

laminated to each side of 0.197-inch-thick phenolic backing. 

2. Acrylic Sheet: 0.060 inch-thick. 

3. PVC Sheet: 0.060-inch-thick, extruded, high-impact PVC plastic in color to match face 

color. 

4. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: 0.048 inch thick. 

5. Phenolic-Backed Photopolymer Sheet: Provide light-sensitive, water-wash photopolymer 

face layer bonded to a phenolic base layer to produce a composite sheet with overall, face 

layer, and base-layer thicknesses, respectively, of 0.120, 0.040, and 0.080 inch. 

6. Laminated Sheet: High-pressure engraved stock with contrasting color face laminated to 

acrylic core as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

7. Edge Condition: Square cut. 

8. Corner Condition: Square. 

9. Mounting: Unframed. 

a. Wall mounted with two-face tape. 

b. Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered. 

SIGNAGE 101400 - 5



11. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch above surface with 

contrasting colors. 

C. Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols 

complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be 

accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges 

free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape. 

1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet. 

2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch. 

D. Engraved Copy: Machine engrave letters, numbers, symbols, and other graphic devices into 

panel sign on face indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth. 

1. Engraved Plastic Laminate: Engrave through exposed face ply of plastic-laminate sheet 

to expose contrasting core ply. 

2. Engraved Metal: Fill engraved copy with enamel. 

3. Engraved Opaque Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with enamel. 

4. Face-Engraved Clear Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with enamel. Apply opaque 

background color coating to back face of acrylic sheet. 

E. Subsurface Copy: Apply minimum 4-mil-thick vinyl copy to back face of clear acrylic sheet 

forming panel face to produce precisely formed opaque image. Image shall be free of rough 

edges. 

F. Subsurface Engraved Acrylic Sheet: Reverse-engrave back face of clear acrylic sheet. Fill 

resulting copy with enamel. Apply opaque background color coating over enamel-filled copy. 

G. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings, 

including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum 

adherence to acrylic surface and are UV and water resistant for three years for application 

intended. 



A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for 

exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or 

lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set 

into concrete or masonry work. 


A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. 

1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop 

welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of 

SIGNAGE 101400 - 6


exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and 

contact surfaces. 

2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water 

penetration. 

3. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as 

necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and 

installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly. 

4. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be 

inconspicuous. 












A. Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard Class 1 clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or 

thicker, over a satin directionally textured mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611. 

B. Color Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard Class 1 integrally colored or electrolytically 

deposited color anodic coating, 0.018 mm or thicker, in dark bronze applied over a satin 

directionally textured mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611. 

C. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter 

and leave surfaces chemically clean. 

2.8 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES 

A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background and frame colors, provide 

colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic 

manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for 

three-five years for application intended. 

SIGNAGE 101400 - 7





requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 

B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, and electrical power are sized and located to 

accommodate signs. 



A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and 

complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion 

and other defects in appearance. 

2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. 

Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent 

walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding 

objects or standing within swing of door. 

B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more 

stringent requirements apply. 

1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for 

vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. 

2. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered 

surfaces. 

3. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to 

conceal mounting materials. 

C. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to comply with 

manufacturer's written instructions for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and 

condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing 

and to locate holes for fasteners. 

1. Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface. 

2. Projected Mounting: Mount characters at projection distance from wall surface indicated. 

D. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. 


SIGNAGE 101400 - 8


SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Corner guards. 

2. Impact-resistant wall coverings. 


1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal angle corner guards . 

2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for metal armor, kick, mop, and push plates. 


A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions 

of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall protection 

unit. 


1. Certificates for Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates certifying that wood rails 

comply with forest certification requirements. Include evidence that manufacturer is 

certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. 

a. Include statement indicating costs for each certified wood product. 

2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC 

content. 

3. Product Data for Credit EQ 4: For particleboard, documentation indicating that products 

contain no urea formaldehyde. 

C. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit showing locations and extent. 

Include sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis 

data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their 

preparation. 

WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1


D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall protection unit indicated. 

1. Include similar Samples of accent strips and accessories involving color selection. 

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size 


1. Corner Guards: 12 inches long. Include examples of joinery, corners, end caps, top caps, 

and field splices. 

2. Impact-Resistant Wall Covering: 6 by 6 inches square. 

F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 

G. Material Certificates: For each impact-resistant plastic material, from manufacturer. 

H. Material Test Reports: For each impact-resistant plastic material. 

I. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit to include in maintenance 

manuals. 

1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum 

condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include 

precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to 

plastic finishes and performance. 

J. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 

B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source from 

single manufacturer. 

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impactresistant 

wall protection units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to 

Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." 




D. Forest Certification: Fabricate wood rails from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSCaccredited 

certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for 

Forest Stewardship." 

E. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall protection units with 

surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, 

NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency. 



F. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & 

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and 

ICC/ANSI A117.1. 

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 


A. Store impact-resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and containers 

inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and 

humidity. 

1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the period 

plastic materials are stored. 

2. Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight. 

3. Store plastic wall protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic 

material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F. 

a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units until 

building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is 

operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours before beginning 

installation and for the remainder of the construction period. 

1.7 WARRANTY 


replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or 



a. Structural failures. 

b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use. 





B. Include mounting and accessory components. Replacement materials shall be from same 

production run as installed units. 




2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M. 

B. Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer and with a 

VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA 

Method 24). 

2.2 CORNER GUARDS 

A. Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated from one-piece, formed or extruded metal 

with formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide model 180 

CMT as manufactured by IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, InPro Corporation or 

equal product by one of the following: 

a. American Floor Products Co., Inc. 

b. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc. 

c. Balco, Inc. 

d. Boston Retail Products. 

e. Construction Specialties, Inc. 

f. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation. 

g. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International Corporation. 

h. Pawling Corporation. 

i. Tepromark International, Inc. 

j. WallGuard.com. 

2. Material: Stainless steel, Type 430. 

a. Thickness: 16 gauge. 

b. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4. 

3. Wing Size: Nominal 3-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches. 

4. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch . 

5. Mounting: Adhesive. 

2.3 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL COVERINGS 

A. Impact-Resistant Sheet Wall Covering: Fabricated from fiberglass reinforced plastic wallcovering 

material. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide FRP as 

manufactured by Marlite, 202 Harger St. Dover, Ohio 44622, 1-800-377-1221 or equal 

by one of the following: 

2. Size: 48 by 96 inches for sheet . 



3. Sheet Thickness: 3/32” inches. 

4. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, embossed. 

5. Height: Full wall As indicated. 

6. Trim and Joint Moldings: Extruded rigid plastic that matches sheet wall covering color. 

7. Mounting: Adhesive, manufacturers recommended low VOC adhesive. 


A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall protection units to comply with requirements indicated for 

design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components. 

B. Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. 

Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling. 

C. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces 

free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members 

and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints. 

D. Miter corners and ends of wood handrails for returns. 

2.5 METAL FINISHES 



1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. 

2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. 

3. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 

4. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign 

matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 

B. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary 

protective covering before shipping. 



A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 

B. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, 

and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment 

of support fasteners. 

1. For impact-resistant wall protection units attached with adhesive or foam tape, verify 

compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing 

finishes or primers. 





A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall 

protection system components. 

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 


A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without 

distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be 

visible in the finished Work. 

1. Install impact-resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting heights 

indicated on Drawings including but not limited to; 

a. Corner protection to be installed 4’ high on all drywall outside corners at the 

following locations: 

1) Classroom entry door walls 

2) Library ramp and stair low walls 

2. Install impact-resistant wall protection panels in locations indicated on Drawings 

including but not limited to: 

a. Custodial closets on walls adjacent to floor sink 

3. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a 

complete installation. 

a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. 

b. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet, splice aluminum 

retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 

12 inches. 

c. Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams. 

B. Impact-Resistant Wall Covering: Install top and edge moldings, corners, and divider bars as 

required for a complete installation. 

3.4 CLEANING 

A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a 

standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent. 

B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by 

manufacturer. 






SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Private-use bathroom accessories. 



A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 

1. Construction details and dimensions. 

2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work 

and substrate preparation. 

3. Material and finish descriptions. 

4. Features that will be included for Project. 

5. Manufacturer's warranty. 

B. Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements. 

1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. 

C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each 

accessory required. 

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 

2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings. 

D. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products 

of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect. 

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1



A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required 

for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, 

cleaning, and servicing of accessories. 

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent 

delaying the Work. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to 

replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or 




2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless 


B. Brass: ASTM B 19 flat products; ASTM B 16, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with 

finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings. 

C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359- 

inch minimum nominal thickness. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for 

applied finish. 

D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating. 

E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after 

fabrication. 

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-andtheft 

resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. 

G. Chrome Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, ASTM B 456, Service 

Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). 

H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick, 

Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, and with silvering, electro-plated copper coating, and protective 

organic coating. 

I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. 



2.2 PRIVATE-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES 



B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

C. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to 

compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of 


1. Basco or equal. 

D. Grab Bar: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Basco Model#17 and #19 at HC toilet rooms. 

2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 

3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. 

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area. 

Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard nonslip texture. 

4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches. 

5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings. 

6. Clearance: 1-1/2-inch clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar. 

E. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Basco Model #511. 

2. Description: Single-roll dispenser. 

3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 

4. Capacity: Designed for 5-inch- diameter tissue rolls. 

5. Material and Finish: Polished chrome-plated zinc alloy (zamac). 

F. Shower Curtain Rod: 


2. Outside Diameter: 1 inch. 


4. Rod Material and Finish: aluminum, satin finish. 

5. Flange Material and Finish: Adjustable chrome plated, Model #1201. 

6. Accessories: Integral chrome-plated brass glide hooks. 

G. Medicine Cabinet: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Basco Model #FM325PE-W. 

2. Mounting: Recessed, for nominal 4-inch wall depth. 

3. Size: 16” x 24”. 

4. Door: 3/16” plate glass mirror door. 

5. Shelves: Three glass shelves. 



H. Robe Hook: 


2. Description: Double-prong unit. 

3. Material and Finish: Aluminum. 

I. Towel Bar: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Basco Model 5530A. 

2. Description: 5/8” square. 


4. Length: 30 inches. 

5. Material and Finish: Polished aluminum. 


A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and 

access panels with full-length, continuous stainless steel piano hinges. Equip units for 

concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. 

B. Only a maximum 1-1/2-inch diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved by 

Architect, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units. On either interior 

surface not exposed to view or back surface, provide additional identification by means of either 

a waterproof, printed label or a stamped nameplate, indicating manufacturer's name and product 

model number. 



A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate 

to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and 

firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to 

method in ASTM F 446. 

C. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or 

screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, in accordance with 

manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved. 


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. 

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. 



C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations after 

removing temporary labels and protective coatings. 




SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes portable, fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. 


1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets." 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material 

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire 

extinguisher and mounting brackets. 

B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire 

protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated 

on Drawings. 


A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable 

Fire Extinguishers." 

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent 

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG. 

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104116 - 1



A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and 

function. 

1.8 WARRANTY 


replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty 

period. 


a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. 

b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting 

bracket indicated. 




2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kidde 

Model “Fireaway #FA110G 110” (inside residential units) and “Badger” Model # 5MB- 

6H (all other locations) indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the 

following: 

a. Amerex Corporation. 

b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. 

c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. 

d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. 

e. Fire End & Croker Corporation. 

f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. 

g. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. 

h. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 

i. Moon-American. 

j. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc. 

k. Potter Roemer LLC. 

l. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products. 

3. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 

4. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 



5. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, 

Appendix B. 

B. Pressurized, AFFF-Foam Type: UL-rated 2-A:10-B, 1.6-gal. nominal capacity, with AFFF 

foam in stainless-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage. 

C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 5-lb nominal 

capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. 

2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS 

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall 

or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated 

or red baked-enamel finish. 




2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by 

one of the following: 

a. Amerex Corporation. 

b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. 

c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. 

d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. 

e. Fire End & Croker Corporation. 

f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. 

g. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 

h. Potter Roemer LLC. 

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, 

spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in 

red letter decals applied to mounting surface. 

a. Orientation: Vertical. 


A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. 





A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in 

compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. 

B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations 

indicated. 




SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Fire protection cabinets for the following: 

a. Portable fire extinguishers. 



descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection 

cabinets. 

1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting 

methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, 

cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. 

B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and 


C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated. 

D. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule 

with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. 


A. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in 

ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. 

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 1


1. Review methods and procedures related to fire protection cabinets including, but not 


a. Schedules and coordination requirements. 


A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers 

indicated are accommodated. 

B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire hoses, hose 

valves, and hose racks indicated are accommodated. 

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. 

1.7 SEQUENCING 

A. Apply decals or vinyl lettering on field-painted, fire protection cabinets after painting is 

complete. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. 

B. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm 

thick. 

2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET 

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 



a. Fire End & Croker Corporation. 

b. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group. 

c. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc. 

d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 

e. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc.. 

f. Moon-American. 

g. Potter Roemer LLC. 

h. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc. 

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated and 1-hour fire rated, as indicated on Drawings. 



1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 

0.0428-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick, fire-barrier 

material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 

C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet. 

1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet. 

2. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping 

surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge 

(backbend). 

D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of 

trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping 

surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 

Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to 

accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation. 

1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth. 

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. 

F. Door Material: Steel sheet. 

G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame. 

H. Door Glazing: Tempered break glass. 

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet 

type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 

1. Provide manufacturer's standard. 

2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 

180 degrees. 

J. Accessories: 

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire 

protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers 

indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 

2. Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and levertype 

with built-in hammer, secured to cabinet. 

3. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed 

into face. 

4. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling 

sharply on door handle or Cylinder lock, keyed alike to other cabinets, as indicated. 

5. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, 

size, spacing, and location. 

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE 

EXTINGUISHER." 

1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 



2) Application Process: Decals or Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters. 

3) Lettering Color: Red. 

4) Orientation: Vertical. 

K. Finishes: 

1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: 

a. Exterior of cabinet door, and trim except for those surfaces indicated to receive 

another finish. 

b. Interior of cabinet and door. 

2. Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat. 


A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and 

hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 

1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 

2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 

3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 

4. Install door locks at factory. 

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated 

and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 

inch thick. 

2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. 

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground 

smooth. 




B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by 

applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 

C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. 

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. 





2.5 STEEL FINISHES 

A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying 

with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling". 

B. Factory Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, 

universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. 

C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply 

manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting 

topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to 

achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 



A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed 

cabinets will be installed. 



A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet 

and trim style. 


A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not 

indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet. 

B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 

1. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 

2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb. 

C. Identification: Apply decals or vinyl lettering at locations indicated. 


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets 

are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturers written installation instructions. 



B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral 

locking devices operate properly. 

C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as 

recommended by manufacturer. 

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished 

appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire 

protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. 

E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful 

repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 




SECTION 113100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Cooking appliances. 

2. Refrigeration appliances. 

3. Clothes washing and drying appliances. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating 

characteristics, dimensions, furnished accessories, and finishes for each appliance. 


1. Product Data for LEED for Homes Credit EA 1: For appliances indicated, and where 

appliance and fuel type is rated by Energy Star, documentation that products are 

ENERGY STAR rated. 

C. Product Schedule: For appliances. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 

D. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer. 

E. Product Certificates: For each type of appliance, from manufacturer. 

F. Field quality-control reports. 

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each residential appliance to include in operation and 

maintenance manuals. 

H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintains, within 100 miles of Project site, a service center 

capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs. 

RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 113100 - 1


B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 

1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a 

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 

2. ANSI: Provide gas-burning appliances that comply with ANSI Z21 Series standards. 

C. Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility 

requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance 

Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 

1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or 

replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within 



B. Refrigerator/Freezer, Sealed System: Full warranty including parts and labor for on-site service 

on the product. 

1. Warranty Period for Sealed Refrigeration System: Five years from date of Substantial 

Completion. 

2. Warranty Period for Other Components: five years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 RANGES 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated 

or comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: General Electric JGBP25DEM. 

2. General Electric Company (GE). 

3. General Electric Company (Hotpoint). 

4. Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation. 

5. Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore). 

6. Width: 30 inches. 

7. Gas Burners: Four. 

a. Power Ratings: Manufacturer's standard. 

b. Controls: Manual-dial controls, located on front. 

c. Grates: Individual. 

d. Other Feature(s): Sealed burners. 

8. Oven Features: 

a. Operation: Baking and self-cleaning. 

b. Broiler: Located in top of oven. 



c. Oven Door(s): Counterbalanced, removable, with observation window and fullwidth 

handle. 

d. Gas Power Ratings: 

1) Oven(s): Manufacturer's standard. 

2) Broiler: Manufacturer's standard. 

e. Controls: Manual-dial controls and timer display, located on front. 

9. Anti-Tip Device: Manufacturer's standard. 

10. Electric Power Supply: 120 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 15 A. 

11. Material: Porcelain-enameled steel with manufacturer's standard cooktop. 

a. Color/Finish: White. 

2.2 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZERS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated 


1. Electrolux Home Products (Frigidaire). 

2. General Electric Company (GE). 

3. General Electric Company (Hotpoint). 

4. KitchenAid; a division of Whirlpool Corporation. 

5. Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation. 

6. Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore). 

7. Whirlpool Corporation. 

B. Refrigerator/Freezer: Two-door refrigerator/freezer with freezer on top and complying with 

AHAM HRF-1. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Hotpoint Energy Star HTH17CBTWW. 

2. Type: Freestanding. 

3. Dimensions: 

a. Width: 28 inches. 

b. Depth: 29-1/8 inches, less door handle. 

c. Height: 64-1/4 inches. 

d. Height to mid-freezer: 54-3/8 inches. 

4. Storage Capacity: 16.6 cu. ft. 

5. Energy Performance, ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the 

EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program. 

6. Appliance Color/Finish: White. 

C. Washer: White High-Efficiency, Front 4.0 cubic foot capacity, Energy Star rated, stackable. 

Basis of design products (contractor option): Kenmore 26-40272 or Samsung 

WF210ANW/XAA. 



D. Dryer: GE or equal, White High-Efficiency, Front Load 7.3 cu.ft. gas dryer, stackable. Basis 

of design products (contractor option): Kenmore 26-902T2 or Samsung DV210AGW/XAA. 


A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, 


B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. 






installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and 

performance of residential appliances. 

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before 

appliance installation. 

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of 

the Work. 

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in 

each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment. 

C. Range Anti-Tip Device: Install at each range according to manufacturer's written instructions. 


A. Perform tests and inspections. 

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to 

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and 

to assist in testing. 

B. Tests and Inspections: 



1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance 

according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each 

manufacturer's appliance-performance parameters. 

2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 

3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation. 

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and 

components. 

C. An appliance will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 





SECTION 122113 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Horizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats. 


1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting 

horizontal louver blinds and accessories. 



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind indicated. 

1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection. 

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind indicated. 

1. Slat: Not less than 12 inches long. 

2. Tapes: Full width, not less than 6 inches long. 

3. Horizontal Louver Blind: Full-size unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 24 inches long. 

4. Valance: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches wide. 

5. Cornice: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches wide. 

E. Window Treatment Schedule: For horizontal louver blinds. Use same designations indicated on 

Drawings. 

F. Product Certificates: For each type of horizontal louver blind, signed by product manufacturer. 

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and 

witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of horizontal louver blind. 

H. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals. 


HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113 - 1


A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds through one source from a single manufacturer. 

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds with the fire-test-response 

characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by 

UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify 

materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 

1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701. 

C. Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100.1. 

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic 

effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial 

Completion. 


A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, firetest-response 

characteristics, lead-free designation, and location of installation using same designations 

indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule. 


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and dirty 

finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity 

conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 

B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify 

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on 

Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire 

operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction 

progress to avoid delaying the Work. 


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with 

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 

1. Horizontal Louver Blinds: Before installation begins, for each size, color, texture, pattern, and 

gloss indicated, full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 5 units. 


2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Model H200, 2” Aluminum 

Blinds as manufactured by HunterDouglas Contract, 12400 Stowe Drive, Poway, Ca. 92064 or a 

comparable product by one of the following: 



1. Levolor 

B. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with 

crowned profile and radiused corners. 

1. Width: 2 inches. 

a. Spacing: Manufacturer's standard. 

2. Thickness: .008 Gauge. 

3. Finish: #190 Bright aluminum. 

a. Reflective Coating: Manufacturer's special coating enhancing the reflection of solar energy 

on the outside-facing slat surface. 

C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating 

mechanisms on three sides and end plugs and the following: 

1. Capacity: One blind per headrail. 

2. Integrated Headrail/Valance: Curved face. 

3. Tilt limiter with preselected degree settings. 

D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube, with plastic or metal capped ends top contoured 

to match crowned shape of slat; with enclosed ladders and tapes to prevent contact with sill. 

E. Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term slat sag. 

1. For Blinds with Nominal Slat Width 2 Inches or More: Manufacturer's standard-width reinforced 

vinyl tapes. 

a. Tape Color, Texture, and Pattern: Color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from 

manufacturer's full range. 

F. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard. 

G. Tilt Control: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism, slip clutch or detachable wand preventing overrotation, 

and linkage rod, and the following: 

1. Tilt Operation: Manual with rod operated tilter. 

2. Length of Tilt Control: Manufacturer's standard. 

3. Tilt: Two-direction, positive stop or lock-out limited at an angle of 75 degrees from zero-degree 

horizontal, both directions. 

H. Lift Operation: Manual, top-locking cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind in either fully opened or fully 

closed position only and is equipped with a ring pull not more than 4 inches long. 

I. Tilt-Control and Cord-Lock Position: Right and left side of headrail, respectively, unless otherwise 

indicated. 

J. Mounting: Wall mounting Wall extension brackets, permitting easy removal and replacement without 

damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for blind placement 

and alignment indicated. 

1. Provide intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds spacing recommended by 

manufacturer for weight and size of blind. 



K. Side Channels and Perimeter Light Gap Seals: Manufacturer's standard. 

L. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION 

A. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 

1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. 

B. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 

deg F: 

1. Blind Units Installed between (inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total, 

plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which each blind is 

installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than head-to-sill dimension of 

opening in which each blind is installed. 

2. Blind Units Installed outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between 

blinds of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations 

between openings. 

C. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting 

headrail, valance, and operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind mounting method 

indicated. 

D. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to 

blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and 

supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use. 

E. Color-Coated Finish: 

1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying 

with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, 

application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. 

F. Component Color: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and exposed-to-view metal matching or coordinating 

with slat color, unless otherwise indicated. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

installation tolerances, operational clearances,and other conditions affecting performance. 



A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to 

manufacturer's written instructions, and located so exterior slat edges in any position are not closer than 1 



inch to interior face of glazing unit. Install intermediate support as required to prevent deflection in 

headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's operation 

hardware if any. 

B. Flush Mounted: Install horizontal louver blinds with slat edges flush with finish face of opening if slats 

are tilted open. 

3.3 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free of binding or malfunction 

throughout entire operational range. 


A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, 

that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial 

Completion. 

C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect, 

before time of Substantial Completion. 




SECTION 129300 - SITE FURNISHINGS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Seating. 

2. Tables. 

3. Bicycle racks. 

4. Bicycle lockers. 

5. Trash receptacles. 

6. Bollards. 

7. Dog waste bag dispenser. 


1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing pipe sleeves cast and 

installing anchor bolts cast in concrete footings. 

2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation for installing concrete footings. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product. 

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes. 

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, not less than 6-inch- long linear 

components and 4-inch- square sheet components. 

E. Product Schedule: For site furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 


A. Maintenance Data: For site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals. 

SITE FURNISHINGS 129300 - 1





1. Bench Replacement Planks: No fewer than two full-size units for each size indicated. 

2. Trash Receptacle Inner Containers: Five full-size units for each size indicated, but no 

fewer than two units. 


2.1 SEATING AND TABLES 



1. Dumor 88.50-PL Bench with heavy-duty recycled plastic seat planks and Dumor 100-60 

PL picnic table. One table to be ADA-compliant. 



1. A & T Iron Works, Inc. 

2. BCI Burke Company, LLC. 

3. BRP Enterprises, Inc. 

4. Canterbury International. 

5. Columbia Cascade Company. 

6. Country Casual. 

7. Creative Pipe, Inc. 

8. DuMor Inc. 

9. FairWeather Site Furnishings; Division of Leader Manufacturing, Inc. 

10. Fibrex Group Inc. (The). 

11. Forms+Surfaces. 

12. GameTime; a PlayCore, Inc. company. 

13. Gardenside, Ltd. 

14. Henderson Recreation Equipment Ltd. 

15. Huntco Supply, LLC. 

16. Kay Park Recreation. 

17. Keystone Ridge Designs, Inc. 

18. Kingsley~Bate, Ltd. 

19. Landscape Forms. 

20. Landscape Structures Inc. 

21. L. A. Steelcraft. 

22. Madrax; Division of Trilary, Inc. 

23. Maglin Site Furniture Inc. 

24. Miracle Recreation Equipment Co.; a division of PlayPower, Inc. 

25. Playworld Systems, Inc. 

26. Recreation Creations, Inc. 

27. RPI. 



28. Sitecraft. 

29. Smith & Hawken, Ltd. 

30. SportsPlay Equipment, Inc. 

31. Thomas Steele; Division of Trilary, Inc. 

32. Urban Accessories, Inc. 

33. Victor Stanley, Inc. 

34. Wausau Tile, Inc. 

35. Weatherend Estate Furniture. 

C. Frame: Steel. 

D. Seat and Back: 

1. Material: 

a. Recycled Plastic Planks: Evenly spaced, parallel. 

2. Arms: None. 

E. Table Top: 

1. Material: 

a. Recycled Plastic Planks: Evenly spaced, parallel. 

F. Steel Finish: Polyester powder coated. 


2.2 BICYCLE RACKS 

A. Bicycle Rack Construction: 

1. Frame: Galvanized steel. 

a. Pipe OD: Not less than 1-5/8 inches. 

2. Style: As indicated. 

a. Overall Height: As indicated. 

b. Overall Width: As indicated. 

c. Overall Depth: As indicated. 

d. Capacity: Designed to accommodate no fewer than five bicycles. 

B. Steel Finish: Galvanized. 

2.3 TRASH RECEPTACLES 



1. Dumor receptacle 41-32 PL/ 




C. or comparable product by one of the following: 

1. A & T Iron Works, Inc. 

2. BCI Burke Company, LLC. 

3. BRP Enterprises, Inc. 

4. Canterbury International. 

5. Columbia Cascade Company. 

6. Country Casual. 

7. Creative Pipe, Inc. 

8. DuMor Inc. 

9. FairWeather Site Furnishings; Division of Leader Manufacturing, Inc. 

10. Fiberglass Engineering Company. 

11. Fibrex Group Inc. (The). 

12. Forms+Surfaces. 

13. GameTime; a PlayCore, Inc. company. 

14. Gardenside, Ltd. 

15. Henderson Recreation Equipment Ltd. 

16. Huntco Supply, LLC. 

17. Kay Park Recreation. 

18. Keystone Ridge Designs, Inc. 

19. Landscape Forms. 

20. Landscape Structures Inc. 

21. L. A. Steelcraft. 

22. Maglin Site Furniture Inc. 

23. Miracle Recreation Equipment Co.; a division of PlayPower, Inc. 

24. Playworld Systems, Inc. 

25. Recreation Creations, Inc. 

26. RPI. 

27. Sitecraft. 

28. Smith & Hawken, Ltd. 

29. Thomas Steele; Division of Trilary, Inc. 

30. Urban Accessories, Inc. 

31. Victor Stanley, Inc. 

32. Wausau Tile, Inc. 

33. Weatherend Estate Furniture. 

D. Plastic Facing Surrounds: Match benches. 

E. Support Frames: Steel; welded. 

F. Trash Receptacles: 

1. Receptacle Shape and Form: Round cylinder with tapered funnel top; with opening for 

depositing trash in lid or top. 

2. Lids and Tops: Steel HDPE secured by cable or chain, hinged, swiveled, or permanently 

secured. 

a. Description: Flat rim ring lid with center opening. 



3. Inner Container: Galvanized –steel sheet container with lift-out handles; designed to be 

removeable and reusable. 

4. Disposable Liners: Provide receptacle designed to accommodate disposable liners. 

5. Capacity: Not less than 32 gal. 

6. Service Access: Removable lid or top; inner container and disposable liner lift or slide 

out for emptying; lockable with padlock hasps. 

7. Post Mount: Color-coated steel pipe; color to match receptacle; for mounting one 

receptacle. 

G. Steel Finish: Color coated. 


H. HDPE Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

2.4 DOG WASTE BAG DISPENSER 

A. Product, basis of design: Barco (1-800-338-2697) # KPW 3005. 

2.5 MATERIALS 

A. Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following: 

1. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

2. Steel Pipe: Standard-weight steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, or electricresistance-welded 

pipe complying with ASTM A 135/A 135M. 

3. Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500/A 500M. 

4. Mechanical Tubing: Cold-rolled, electric-resistance-welded carbon or alloy steel tubing 

complying with ASTM A 513, or steel tubing fabricated from steel complying with 

ASTM A 1011/A 1011M and complying with dimensional tolerances in 

ASTM A 500/A 500M; zinc coated internally and externally. 

5. Sheet: Commercial steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 

B. Fiberglass: Multiple laminations of glass-fiber-reinforced polyester resin with UV-light stable, 

colorfast, nonfading, weather- and stain-resistant, colored polyester gel coat, and with 

manufacturer's standard finish. 

C. Plastic: Color impregnated, color and UV-light stabilized, and mold resistant. 

1. Polyethylene: Fabricated from virgin plastic HDPE resin. 

2. Recycled Content of Polyethylene: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of 

preconsumer recycled content not less than 90 percent. 

D. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: [Stainless steel] [Brass] [Galvanized steel] [Zincplated 

steel] [Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant-coated or noncorrodible materials]; 

commercial quality[, tamperproof, vandal and theft resistant] [, concealed, recessed, and capped 

or plugged]. 



1. Angle Anchors: For inconspicuously bolting legs of site furnishings to below-grade 

substrate; [one per leg] [extent as indicated]. 

2. Antitheft Hold-Down Brackets: For securing site furnishings to substrate; [two per unit] 

[extent as indicated on Drawings]. 

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, 

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; recommended in writing by 

manufacturer, for exterior applications. 

F. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydrauliccontrolled 

expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create 

pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound; resistant to erosion from water exposure 

without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating; recommended in writing by 

manufacturer, for exterior applications. 

G. Galvanizing: Where indicated for steel and iron components, provide the following protective 

zinc coating applied to components after fabrication: 

1. Zinc-Coated Tubing: External, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of 

0.9 oz./sq. ft. of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a clear, polymer 

film. Internal, same as external or consisting of 81 percent zinc pigmented coating, not 

less than 0.3 mil thick. 

2. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: According to ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M, or 

ASTM A 924/A 924M. 


A. Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves, lines, and 

angles. Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action. 

B. Welded Connections: Weld connections continuously. Weld solid members with full-length, 

full-penetration welds and hollow members with full-circumference welds. At exposed 

connections, finish surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness or unevenness shows after 

finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. 

C. Pipes and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce 

uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section 

of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming 

exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components. 

D. Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; all surfaces smooth, free of burrs, 

barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped. 

E. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to greatest extent possible to minimize 

field assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field. 




A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. 



2.8 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES 

A. Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat 

finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, 

including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. 

2.9 IRON FINISHES 

A. Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat 

finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, 

including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. 



A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for 

correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions 




A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements 

are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required. 

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been 

completed. 

C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on 

Drawings. 

D. Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed 

water. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set 

plumb or at correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts in 

position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured. 

E. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core-drill holes for installing posts in concrete to 

depth recommended in writing by manufacturer of site furnishings and 3/4 inch larger than OD 

of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and 



concrete with [nonshrink, nonmetallic grout] [or] [anchoring cement], mixed and placed to 

comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and 

shaped to shed water. 

F. Pipe Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. 

After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with 

[nonshrink, nonmetallic grout] [or] [anchoring cement], mixed and placed to comply with 

anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed 

water. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 15010 

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 

PART 1 GENERAL 

1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: General Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to 

Division 15 sections in addition to Division 1- General Requirements. 

B. SCOPE: 

1. The work covered by this division consists of performing all operations in 

connection with the installation of heating, cooling, ventilating, and plumbing 

including site utility work as indicated under this section. This entire section 

applies to all mechanical work and all mechanical sections of these 

specifications. This Contractor shall read and comply with all sections of these 

specifications including all General and Special Conditions. 

1.2 MECHANICAL DIVISION INDEX 

15010 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 

15043 BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 

15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 

15080 PIPING SPECIALTIES 

15100 VALVES 

15160 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION 

15180 PIPING INSULATION 

15190 DUCT INSULATION 

15402 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS 

15403 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 

15404 SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEMS 

15450 PLUMBING FIXTURES 

15501 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 

15651 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 

15800 AIR DISTRIBUTION 

15900 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 

15902 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND INTERLOCKS 


A. Standard Requirements: 

1. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal 

Standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid 

requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. 

GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

B. All work shall be executed in accordance with the local and state codes, ordinances, 

and regulations governing the particular class of work involved. This Contractor 

shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit 

these requirements. In the event of a conflict between the various codes and 

standards, the more stringent shall govern. Where these specifications and 

accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report 

the matter to the Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer shall prepare any 

supplementary drawings required, illustrating how the work may be installed so as to 

comply. On approval of the change by the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall 

install the work in a satisfactory manner without additional cost to the Owner. On 

completion of the various parts of the work, the installation shall be tested by the 

constituted authorities and approved, and on completion of the work, this Contractor 

shall obtain and deliver to the Owner final certificates of acceptance. This Contractor 

shall furnish copies of each certificate to the Architect/Engineer. 

C. The Contractor shall secure all permits and licenses for his work and shall pay all fees 

in connection with such permits and licenses. 

D. The contractor shall hold and save the Owner free and harmless from liability of any 

nature or kind arising from his failure to comply with codes and ordinances. 

E. Any and all meter deposits and all utility extension costs shall be paid by the 

Contractor whose work is done in connection with the service that the meter is 

connected to. 

F. Schedule of Referenced Organizations: The following is a list of the acronyms of 

organizations referenced in these Specifications: 

1. AABC Associated Air Balance Council 

2. ADC Air Diffusion Council 

435 North Michigan Ave. 

Chicago, IL 60611 

3. AGA American Gas Association 

1515 Wilson Boulevard 

Arlington, VA 22209 

4. AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 

30 West University Drive 

Arlington Heights, IL 60004 

5. ANSI American National Standards Institute 

1430 Broadway 

New York, NY 10018 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

6. ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air 

Conditioning Engineers 

345 East 47th Street 


7. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 

345 East 45th Street 


8. ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers 

960 Illuminating Building 

Cleveland, OH 44113 

9. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 

1916 Race Street 

Philadelphia, PA 19103 

10. AWWA American Water Works Association 

6666 West Quincy Avenue 

Denver, CO 80235 

11. AWS American Welding Society 

2501 NW 7th Street 

Miami, FL 33125 

12. CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 

1499 Chain Bridge Road 

McLean, VA 22101 

13. FM Factory Mutual System 

1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike 

Norwood, MA 02062 

14. FS Federal Specification 

General Services Administration 

Specifications and Consumer Information Distribution 

Section (WFSIS) 

Washington Navy Yard, Building 197 

Washington, DC 20407 

15. NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters 

5530 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 750 

Chevy Chase, Maryland 20815 

16. NEC National Electric Code (of NFPA) 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

17. NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau 

8224 Old Courthouse Road 

Vienna, VA 22180 

18. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 

2101 L Street, NW 

Washington, DC 20037 

19. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 

Battery March Park 

Quincy, MA 02269 

20. NSF National Sanitation Foundation 

Box 1468 

Ann Arbor, MI 48106 

21. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration 

U.S. Department of Labor 

22. PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute 

5342 Boulevard Place 

Indianapolis, Indiana 46208 

23. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's 

National Association 

8224 Old Courthouse Road 

Vienna, VA 22180 

24. TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association 

Technical Services 

1420 King Street 

Alexandria, VA 22314 

25. UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 

333 Pfingston Road 

Northbrook, IL 60062 

G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): All materials, appliances, equipment, devices 

or appurtenances shall conform to the applicable standards of Underwriters 

Laboratories Inc., where such standards have been established. 

1.4 DRAWINGS 

A. Drawings and specifications shall be considered as cooperative, and work or 

materials called for by one and not mentioned in the other, or vice versa, shall be 

done and furnished as though treated by both. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

B. In the cases of discrepancies in figures, drawings, or specifications, the 

Architect/Engineer shall be notified immediately and his decision shall determine the 

necessary adjustment. Without such decision, said discrepancies shall not be adjusted 

by the Contractor save only at his expense, and, in case of any settlement or any 

complication arising from such adjustment to the Contractor, he shall bear all extra 

expense involved. 

C. Should it appear that the work intended to be done, or any of the matters relative 

thereto, are not sufficiently detailed or explained on the drawings or specifications, 

the Contractor shall apply to the Architect/Engineer for such further drawings or 

explanations as may be necessary, allowing a reasonable time for the 

Architect/Engineer to supply same, and the Contractor shall conform to same as part 

of the Contract. 

D. Should any doubt or question arise in respect to the true meaning of the drawings or 

specifications, reference shall be made to the Architect\Engineer whose decision shall 

be final and conclusive. No alleged oral admission, condonation, or inadvertent 

neglect on the part of the Architect/Engineer will be accepted as an excuse for 

inferior work. 

E. The mechanical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of ductwork and 

piping, exact locations, etc., and do not show all offsets, control lines, pilot lines, and 

other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to 

conform to the structural conditions, provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all 

obstructions, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturer of the 

equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactory 

operational installation. 

F. Should the particular equipment which any Bidder proposes to install, require other 

space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, the Bidder shall arrange for 

such space with the Architect/Engineer before submitting his bid. Should changes 

become necessary on account of failure to comply with these details, the Contractor 

shall make such necessary changes at the Contractor's own expense. 

G. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and 

equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans which shall 

be checked by the Architect/Engineer and approved before the work is started, 

Contractor before work proceeds. Interference with structural conditions shall be 

corrected by the Contractor. 

H. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's 

recommendations. Provide all accessories and components for optimum operation as 


I. Utilities: The location, size, and pressure of utility lines are shown in accordance 

with the data given this office by others. As Architect/Engineers, we cannot and do 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

not guarantee the accuracy of this data. Each Bidder shall check and verify this data. 

The points of connection to utility lines are approximate only and shall be verified by 

each Bidder prior to submitting his Bid. 

J. Site visit: It is recommended that the Contractor visit the site prior to bidding and 

satisfy himself as the conditions under which the mechanical systems are to be 

installed. No subsequent allowance shall be made in his behalf for failure to make 

such a visit. Contractor shall examine all work noted under the demolition drawings 

and all new work and shall satisfy himself as to the extent of work required to be 

completed. 

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS 

A. Not Used. 

1.6 PRIOR APPROVALS 

A. Each equipment item for which the Contractor desires to install equipment other than 

the specific item identified in the equipment schedule or equivalent equipment by 

manufacturers specifically named in the schedule, the Contractor shall bear full 

responsibility to prove to the Engineer that the furnished equipment is equivalent to 

or better than the specified item. Failure to provide such proof will result in rejection 

of the shop drawing submittal by the Engineer. Prior written or verbal approval by 

the Engineer of equipment by other manufacturers will not relieve the Contractor of 

responsibility to provide equivalence. Prior approval is required, however, any prior 

approval given is intended only to provide preliminary agreement that the alternate 

manufacturer may make equipment that complies with the specification requirements 

and not that all equipment manufactured by him is acceptable. 

1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS 

A. Shop drawings or fully descriptive catalog data shall be submitted by the Contractor 

for all items of material and equipment furnished and installed under this Contract. 

This shall include piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, plumbing equipment, 

control items, etc. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer a sufficient 

number of copies of all such shop drawings or catalog data to provide him with as 

many review copies as he may need, plus three (3) copies for retention by the 

Architect/Engineer. No materials or equipment shall be installed until officially 

approved by the Architect/Engineer. 

B. Before submitting Shop Drawings to the Architect/Engineer for review, the 

Contractor shall examine them and satisfy himself that they are correctly 

representative of the material or equipment to which they pertain. The Contractor 

shall so note these Drawings before submitting them. The Contractor's review of 

Shop Drawings is not intended to take the place in any way of the official review of 

the Architect/Engineer, and the Shop Drawings which have not been reviewed by the 

Architect/Engineer shall not be used in fabrication or installing any work. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

C. The review of Shop Drawings or catalog data by the Architect/Engineer shall not 

relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the plans and 

Specifications unless he has, in writing, specifically called attention to such 

deviations as the time of submission and has obtained the permission of the 

Architect/Engineer thereon, nor shall it relieve him from the responsibility for error 

of any kind in Shop Drawings. When the Contractor does call such deviations to the 

attention of the Architect/Engineer, he shall state in his letter whether or not such 

deviations involve any extra cost. If this is not mentioned, it will be assumed that no 

extra costs is involved for making the change. 

D. After receiving approval on the make and type of materials, the Contractor shall order 

such materials in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is 

done to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor shall 

render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays occasioned by failure on 

this part to provide necessary details. All shop drawings shall be delivered to the 

Architect/Engineer's office within thirty (30) days from the date of the contract. 

E. Shop drawings will be returned unchecked unless the following information is 

included: reference to all pertinent data in the Specifications or on the drawings, size 

and characteristics of the equipment, name of the project and a space large enough to 

accept an approval stamp. The data submitted shall reflect the actual equipment 

performance under the specified conditions and shall not be a copy of the scheduled 

data on the drawings. 


A. Submittal data shall be organized in commercial quality, three ring binders with 

durable and cleanable covers. Product information for each piece of equipment shall 

be separated by an indexing leaf with clear tabs. The product name and symbol (i.e. 

AHU/Air Handling Unit) shall be typed on white paper inserts and placed in 

appropriate tab. Complete data must be furnished showing performance, quality and 

dimensions. A signed review by the Architect/Engineer must be obtained before 

purchasing any equipment. 

B. The following items shall be submitted for review by the Architect/Engineer but are 

not limited to: 

1. Air Conditioning Units 

2. Fans 

3. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles 

4. Fire Dampers and Smoke/Fire Dampers 

5. Pipe Insulation 

6. Duct Insulation 

7. Coils 

8. Air Washer Assembly 

9. Fire Protection Drawings & Hydraulic Calculations 

10. Temperature Controls 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

11. Plumbing Fixtures and Trim 

12. Cross Connection Control Devices 

13. Plenum Materials and Supports 

14. Evaporative Coolers 

15. Pumps 

16. Hydraulic Air Control Devices 

17. Hood and Fans 

18. Filter Assemblies and Filters 

19. Fan Coil Units 

20. Plumbing Equipment 

21. Heat Exchangers 

22. Flexible Pipe Connections 

23. Heating Terminal Equipment 

24. Roof Top Equipment 

25. Fire Protection Equipment 

26. Ductwork Shop Drawings 

27. Radiant Heating Equipment 

28. Vibration Equipment and Calculations 


A. General: Comply with Section 01400. 

B. Welder Qualifications: Welders shall be certified by the American Society of 

Mechanical Engineers (ASME) National Certified Pipe for the type of work being 

performed. Current operators' certificates in accordance with ASME standards shall 

be on file at the site and shall be available to the Architect/Engineer for examination. 

Coupons shall be available for review by the Architect and Engineer. 

C. Locations of all pipes, ducts, outlets, appliance, etc., as shown on the drawings, are 

approximate only and are understood to be subject to such revisions as may prove 

necessary or desirable at the time the work is installed. Each Contractor will be 

required to install his work with relation to existing building conditions and shall be 

entirely responsible for the correctness of his work with reference to finished 

elevations, etc. Piping shown on the drawings is diagrammatic only and their exact 

locations, depths, and invert elevations shall be as required for proper flow and 

coordination with other trades. 

D. The contract drawing depicts graphically the arrangement of piping and ductwork. 

Should local conditions necessitate a rearrangement, or if any of the piping or 

ductwork can be installed to better advantage in a different manner, the Contractor 

shall, before proceeding with the work, prepare and submit three (3) copies of 

Drawings of the proposed arrangement for the Architect/Engineer's review. 

E. If the Contractor proposes to install equipment, including piping and ductwork, 

requiring space conditions other than those shown, or to rearrange the equipment, he 

shall assume full responsibility for the rearrangement of the space and shall have the 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

Architect/Engineer review the change before proceeding with the work. The request 

for such change shall be accompanied by Shop Drawings of the space in question. 

F. Each Contractor is responsible for the proper location and size of all slots, holes, or 

openings in the building structure pertaining to his work, and for the correct location 

of pipe sleeves. 

G. Each Contractor shall coordinate his work with that of all other trades that it may be 

installed in the most direct and workmanlike manner without hindering or 

handicapping the other trades. Piping interference’s shall be handled by giving 

precedence to pipe lines which require a stated grade for proper operation. Drainage 

lines shall take precedence over water lines in determination of elevations. In all 

cases, lines requiring a stated grade for their proper operation shall have precedence 

over electrical conduit and ductwork. 

H. All oiling devices and all parts of equipment requiring adjustment shall be easily 

accessible. Lubricate all equipment properly in accordance with manufacturer's 

instructions. Furnish zerk grease fittings on all greaseable bearings. 

I. Equipment and Materials: The materials and equipment shall be new and shall be the 

standard products of the manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of 

Plumbing, Heating, Cooling, Ventilation, and Fire Protection Equipment, and shall be 

the manufacturer's latest standard design. Where two or more units of the same class 

of equipment are required, these units shall be the products of the same manufacturer. 

However, the component parts of the systems need not be the products of the same 

manufacturer. Specific equipment specified hereinafter is to be considered a standard 

of quality and operation. In general, all capacities of equipment, and motor and 

starter characteristics are shown in schedules on the drawings. Reference shall be 

made to the schedules for specific information. The capacities shown are minimum 

capacities. Variations in the characteristics will be permitted only on written 

approval of the Architect/Engineer. All equipment shall be shipped to the job with 

not less than a prime coat of paint or as specified hereinafter. Insofar as is possible 

all items of the same type (i.e., pumps, fans, etc.) shall be by the same manufacturer. 

Where installation instructions are not included in these specifications or on the 

plans, the manufacturer's instructions shall be followed. All equipment affected by 

altitude shall be rated to operate at the altitude where it is to be installed. 

J. Excavation and Backfilling: This Contractor shall do all necessary excavation and 

backfill for the installation of the Mechanical systems as may be required. Curb cuts, 

asphalt and concrete patching, cutting and patching existing floor, etc., shall be part 

of this Contractor's responsibility. No extra payment will be made for rock 

excavation. Trenches for all underground piping shall be excavated to the required 

depths. The bottoms of trenches shall be tamped hard and graded to secure maximum 

fall. Bell holes shall be excavated to assure the pipe resting for its entire length on 

solid ground. Should rock be encountered, it shall be excavated to a depth of 6 inches 

below the bottom of the pipe, and before laying the pipe, the space between the 

bottom of the pipe and the rock surface shall be filled with gravel, thoroughly 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

tamped. Pipe laid in trenches dug in fill shall be supported down in the trenches and 

shall be filled. No roots, rocks or foreign materials of any description shall be used in 

backfilling the trenches. The backfill material shall be identical to the surrounding 

fill material and shall be placed in 6-inch layer, wetted, and compacted to the density 

of the adjacent soil. See Division 2 for additional information for site utilities. All 

surplus materials shall be hauled from the project by the Contractor at his expense. 

K. Cutting and Repairing: 

1. Responsibility of the Contractor whose work is involved. Coordinate with others 

to prevent unnecessary cutting and repairing. 

2. Lay out and locate equipment, openings, and chases. Install sleeves, inserts, and 

supports. Arrange with those whose work is involved to do cutting and replacing 

caused by negligence or error with costs reimbursed by the Contractor at fault. 

Cutting and replacing of existing work shall be the responsibility of the 

Contractor whose work is being installed. 

3. Removal or terminating connections of existing work which is abandoned or 

replaced shall also be done hereunder to provide correct and finished work. 

L. Foundations: All equipment shall be provided with suitable foundations and 

supports. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide for the proper 

locations of these foundations and supports. This applies to all rooftop equipment 

also. 

1. All concrete foundations required by equipment furnished by the Mechanical 

Contractor shall be constructed by them (except where otherwise noted) the 

conformity with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the respective 

equipment, and with the approval of the Architect/Engineer. All corners of the 

foundations shall be neatly chamfered. Foundation bolts shall be placed in the 

forms when the concrete is poured. Allow 1 inch below the equipment base for 

alignment, leveling and grouting with nonshrinking grout. Grouting shall be 

done after the equipment is leveled in place. After the grout has hardened, the 

foundation bolts shall be pulled up tight and the equipment shimmed, if 

necessary. After removal of the forms, the surface of the foundation shall be 

rubbed. 

2. Unless otherwise noted, foundations shall be a minimum of 6-inch high. All 

concrete work performed by these Contractors shall conform entirely to the 

requirements of the Concrete Specifications which describe this class of work. 

M. Code Requirements: Comply with state and local code requirements and ordinances. 

Call for inspections required by responsible building inspection authority. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

N. Applicable Building Codes and Ordinances: Including the latest edition of each code, 

but not limited to the following: 

1. International Building Code. 

2. Uniform Mechanical Code. 

3. Uniform Plumbing Code. 

4. International Energy Compliance Code. 

5. Governing Fire Department Requirements 

6. Utility Company Requirements 

7. National Fire Protection Association Standards 

8. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code 

9. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 

10. NEPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems 

11. NFPA 13 - Sprinkler Systems 

12. NFPA 101 - Life Safety 

13. NFPA 96 - Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease 

Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment 

O. ACCESS PANELS 

1. Similar to Milcor, or as noted on the drawings, size as required for concealed 

expansion joints, valving, gauges, balancing dampers, valves, traps, pitot 

stations, equipment and similar items requiring accessibility. Notify the General 

Contractor of each access panel location and the required size. Panels shall be 

proper type for ceiling or wall in which they are installed. The panels shall be 

furnished under this section of the Specifications, unless otherwise directed, but 

shall be coordinated to be compatible with walls and ceilings furnished under 

other sections. 



B. Large Items: Make arrangements with other trades on the job for introduction into 

the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

C. Acceptance: Check and sign for materials to be furnished by others for installation 

under Division 15 upon delivery. Contractor shall be responsible for the storage and 

safekeeping of such materials from time of delivery until final acceptance. 

D. Protection: Close ends of pipe and ductwork at the close of each working day during 

construction to prevent entry of foreign material. Protect insulation against dirt, 

water, chemical or mechanical damage before, during and after installation. Protect 

fixtures and equipment against damage during mechanical work with heavy paper or 

plastic until final clean-up. 

E. Storage: Store equipment in covered enclosure or wrap with weather tight 6 mil 

Visqeen. 

F. Shipping Protection: Protective casings, crating, and coverings to remain in place 

until start-up of equipment. 


A. Performance: All systems are to be rated at [5,500 ft.] elevation. 

1.12 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 

A. General: Comply with Division 1 General Requirements. 

B. Schedule: Coordinate and order the progress of mechanical work to conform to the 

progress of the work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as 

the condition of the building will permit. 

C. Utility Interruptions: Schedule mechanical utility interruptions with the 

Architect/Engineer/Owner minimum of seven (7) days prior to the requested outage. 

Plan work so that duration of the interruptions a maximum of one day. 

1.13 CONTROLS WIRING AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 

A. All mechanical equipment controls wiring, conduit, relays, interlocks, and all 

accessories required for a completely operational controls system shall be the 

complete responsibility of the mechanical contractor. The mechanical contractor has 

the option to hire the project electrical contractor or any qualified controls contractor 

to install mechanical controls wiring and conduit. Refer to specification 15902 for 

installation requirements. Refer to specification 16900 for coordination requirements 

between mechanical, electrical, and controls subcontractors. 

B. Electrical items such as disconnect switches and motor starters associated with 

equipment provided by Division 15, when specifically mentioned to be furnished by 

the Mechanical Contractor, whether in these specifications or on the Electrical or 

Mechanical Drawings, shall be furnished by the this Contractor. These items shall be 

mounted and connected as required for a completely operational system. See Control 

Systems Specification for further information. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

C. All electrical equipment characteristics (voltage, etc.) must be verified by the 

Contractor prior to ordering. If the Contractor proposes to furnish motors varying in 

horsepower and/or characteristics from those specified, he shall first inform the 

Architect/Engineer of the change and shall then coordinate the change with the 

Electrical Contractor and shall pay all additional charges in connection with the 

change. 

D. All motors shall meet all the requirements of specification 16150. 

1. All motors shall be built in accordance with the current applicable IEEE, ASA, 

and NEMA standards. All general purpose motors shall be open drip-proof 

machines for installation indoors and/or in protected locations. Totally enclosed 

fan cooled (TEFC) motors shall be used in all areas of exposure to weather or 

other environmental contamination. All motors shall have copper windings. All 

motors to have minimum power factor of 85% or have switched correction to 

90%. Unless indicated otherwise, motors shall be NEMA design B with a service 

factor of 1.15 with 40°C rise and total temperature rise of 65°C ambient and 

when powered from the system voltage feeding the motor. TEFC motors shall a 

service factor of 1.00 with total temperature is of 65°C in the above conditions. 

Motors located in areas exceeding 40°C ambient shall be factory-rated for the 

ambient temperature of the motor environment. Single phase motors shall 

generally be NEMA Type N split phase induction motors with built-in thermal 

protectors. Single phase motors connected on loads requiring high starting 

torque shall be capacitor-start induction motors. Single phase motors of 1/10 HP 

or less may be shaded pole induction motors. 

1.14 PROTECTION AGAINST HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS 

A. The Contractor shall take precautions against hazardous construction conditions at all 

times during construction. The final condition of the facilities shall be safe, and 

where safety to operating personnel is jeopardized, suitable signage shall be posted. 

B. Protruding metal (bolts, steel angles, etc.) potentially hazardous to maintenance and 

operating personnel, shall be cut back and/or protected to reduce the risk of injury. 

All openings between floors shall be protected with barriers around the openings, 

gratings across the openings, or steel bars through the openings to avoid and protect 

against injury. 

1.15 HAZARDOUS SIGNS 

A. Equipment room contains moving or rotating parts, floor openings, or other 

potentially hazardous environments and shall include a sign on the door entering it 

that shall read similar to the following: Hazardous Area - Authorized Personnel Only. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a bound manual in triplicate, 

containing complete repair parts lists, and operating, service, and maintenance 

instructions on all mechanical equipment, fixtures, and systems. 

B. The Mechanical Contractor shall also provide training as required by Section 15046 

to the Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel. 

1.17 OPERATION PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE 

A. The Owner shall have the right to operate any and all apparatus as soon as and as 

long as it is in operating condition, after Owner personnel have received operational 

training, whether or not such apparatus has been accepted as complete and 

satisfactory, except that this shall not be construed to mean operations before any 

required alterations or repairs have been made. This operation does not indicate 

acceptance of the equipment by the Owner. When the Contractor enters into a 

contract with the Owner, he agrees to the above. 

1.18 WARRANTY AND SERVICE PROGRAM 

A. Due to the critical performance requirements and to clearly establish warranty 

responsibility for this project, the Contractor shall provide a full service maintenance 

and warranty program to the Owner for one full year after beneficial occupancy 

(substantial completion). 

B. This service program shall be included as part of the base bid and shall include 

service, maintenance, repair, replacement, lubrication, temperature control calibration 

and repairs, and documenting proof for all service and maintenance work on all 

equipment and system furnished by the Contractor. 

C. A single representative in the employment of the Contractor shall be responsible for 

coordination and follow through of this program. This representative's name and 

phone number shall be submitted to the Owner as part of the maintenance manuals 

and supportive data. The Contractor shall respond to a request for service with 24 

hours if so requested. 

D. During this first year of operation, the following sequence of maintenance service 

shall be performed as a minimum. 

1. Clean strainers in piping. 

2. Fans and/or pumps be lubricated and oiled once every four (4) months. 

3. Controls shall be calibrated throughout the facility at the end of six (6) months 

(following substantial completion). Any leaks in the piping systems shall be 

repaired. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

4. All equipment manufacturer's service recommend-ations shall be followed 

during this period. 

1.19 FLUSHING AND DRAINING 

A. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to properly drain and flush all ducts 

and pipes before use or acceptance to ensure that all debris is completely removed. 

Damage caused by such debris remaining in the ducts or pipes shall be repaired by 

this Contractor at his expense. This Contractor shall demonstrate to the 

Architect/Engineer's representative that all piping is clean. 

1.20 CLEANING 

A. This Contractor shall remove from the building construction site all rubbish and dirt 

as it accumulates under the contract. At completion, all areas shall be broom cleaned 

and all obstructions, surplus materials, etc., removed. 

1.21 GUARANTEE 

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials, equipment, and workmanship furnished 

and installed by him under this Contract, to be free from all defects of workmanship 

and materials, and shall agree to replace at his expense, without expense to the 

Owner, at any time within one year after installation is accepted by the 

Architect/Engineer, any and all defective equipment, parts, etc., that may be found. 

(This excludes normal maintenance and daily servicing of equipment which is the 

Owner's responsibility.) 

1.22 FLOOR, WALL, AND CEILING PLATES 

A. Where exposed pipes pass through floors, finished walls, or finished ceiling, they 

shall be fitted with chromium-plated escutcheons of an approved pattern. 

Escutcheons and plates in Mechanical Rooms do not require chrome finish. 

B. This Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing all counter flashing. 

All openings in the roof shall be flashed and counterflashed. Use four pound lead 

flashing materials for all vent lines and welded flashing in steel lines passing through 

roof. The Mechanical Contractor shall notify the General Contractor where each roof 

penetrations is and the size of the opening. 

1.23 PIPE SLEEVES 

A. Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeves or pipe sleeves made of No. 20 gauge galvanized steel, 

properly secured in place with approximately 1/4" space between each sleeve and the 

surface of the pipe and/or insulation passing through it, shall be provided for all pipes 

passing through concrete floors, roofs, and masonry walls. All pipe sleeves shall be 

fixed in place as the walls and floors are built up. The Contractor shall furnish and 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

locate all sleeves and pipes passing through concrete floors, exterior masonry walls, 

and roofs shall be made watertight with approved non-hardening plastic material. 

Sleeves through pipe chase or equipment room floors shall project a minimum of 2- 

inch above the floor and shall be of black steel pipe with waterproof flange at center 

of floor thickness. Each sleeve through a fireproof wall shall be packed with 

approved fireproof rope in the annular space. 

1.24 PIPE HANGERS 

A. Pipe hangers shall be Fee and Mason of a type suitable for each use. Perforated 

straps shall not be used in any work. For ferrous pipes up to and including 4 inch in 

size, use Fee and Mason Fig. 199 malleable iron, adjustable, split ring, swivel hanger. 

For plumbing piping larger than 4 inch, use Fee and Mason Fig 239 steel clevis 

hanger. Where several pipes are parallel at the same elevation, trapeze hangers may 

be used. Where trapeze hangers are used, the pipes shall be supported on rollers 

where indicated on the Drawings. For copper pipes up to and including 3 inch in 

size, use Fee and Mason Fig. 360 malleable iron, copper plated hangers. For copper 

pipes larger than 3 inch, use Fee and Mason Fig. 364 copper plated clevis hanger. 

B. Hanger rod sizes shall conform to the following schedule: 

1. Pipe up to and including 2" 3/8" rods 

2. Pipe 2-1/2", 3" and 3-1/2" 1/2" rods 

3. Pipe 4" and 5" 5/8" rods 

4. Pipe 6" 3/4" rods 

5. Pipe 8”, 10”, and 12” 7/8” rods 

C. Unless shown otherwise on the Plans, all horizontal runs of ferrous piping shall be 

suspended from the floor or roof construction, as the case may be, by means of 

hangers with the following spacing: 

1. Pipe up to and including 1-1/4" 8' 

2. Pipe 1-1/2" and 2" 10' 

3. Pipe 2-1/2" and 3" 12' 

4. Pipe 3 1/2” and 4” 14’ 

5. Pipe 5” and 6” 16’ 

6. Pipe 8” and 10” 20’ 

D. Unless shown otherwise on the Plans, all horizontal runs of copper piping shall be 

suspended from the floor or roof construction as the case may be, by means of 

hangers with the following maximum spacing: 

1. Pipe up to 3/4" in size 5' 

2. Pipe 1" and 1-1/4" 6' 

3. Pipe 1-1/2" and larger 10' 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

E. There shall be a hanger within 2 inch of each elbow or tee. Additional supports shall 

be provided for valves, strainers, etc. Cast iron pipe shall have not less than one 

hanger per length of pipe. Vertical risers shall be supported by approved riser clamps 

at each floor. Vertical pipes within a space shall have not less than two supports. 

F. Supports and hangers shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction in 

the piping systems. Hangers shall permit vertical adjustment to maintain proper 

pitch. Where necessary to control expansion and contraction, the piping shall be 

guided and firmly anchored. No piping shall be self-supporting, nor shall it be 

supported from equipment connection. 

G. Expansion bolts shall be Ackerman-Johnson or Hilti. 

H. Beam clamps suitable for use with this type of steel construction involved shall be 

Grinnell. 

1.25 PRESSURE VESSEL CERTIFICATION 

A. Not used. 

1.26 ISOLATION 

A. Excessive vibration or objectionable noise created in any part of the building by the 

operation of any equipment furnished and/or installed under the Mechanical Contract 

will be extremely objectionable and the Contractor shall take all precautions against 

the same by isolating the various items of equipment from the building structure and 

by such other means as may be necessary to eliminate all excessive vibration and 

objectionable noise produced by any equipment installed by them, and consequently, 

they shall design all foundations, supports, etc., for their equipment, and all piping 

with this end in view. In addition, these Contractors shall supervise the construction 

of all foundations and supports, whether they build them or not, in order that they 

may be constructed in such a manner as to prevent the transmission of objectionable 

noise and/or excessive vibration. Submit calculations on all vibration isolation 

equipment. 

B. All equipment having moving parts shall be isolated from the building structure by 

means of Korfund isolation materials, unless specifically noted otherwise. All 

isolators shall be the same brand and shall be supplied from the same source. 

Equipment manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed in the isolation of 

equipment. 

C. Vibration isolators shall have sufficient resilience to meet the following minimum 

efficiencies: 

Motor HP 

Equipment Room 

Up to 5 90% 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

7-1/2 to 15 93% 

20 to 40 95% 

50 to 100 97.5% 

D. Spring isolators shall be of the housed type with ribbed pads bonded to the underside 

of the baseplate, or may be unhoused stable springs. Isolators shall be furnished with 

snubbers and limit stops where so recommended by the equipment manufacturer. 

E. The Supplier of the isolating equipment shall, upon completion of the job, check all 

isolating materials and verify that they are installed properly, and submit a report in 

writing to the Architect/Engineer. 

1.27 TESTING 

A. Before completion of this project, the Mechanical Contractor shall test all materials 

and equipment which normally require testing. All piping, etc., shall be tested to 

meet code requirements or the Specification requirements, whichever is more 

stringent. 

B. All equipment shall be operated sufficiently long enough to prove to the 

Architect/Engineer that the equipment performs satisfactorily and meets the 

requirements set forth on the Plans or in these Specifications. 

1.28 CERTIFICATIONS 

A. Before receiving final payment, the contractor shall verify that all equipment 

furnished and all work done is in compliance with all applicable codes mentioned in 

these Specifications. Submit certifications and acceptable certificates to the 

Architect/Engineer. 

1.29 GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 

A. Provisions for Drainage: All piping systems shall be installed so that they may be 

easily drained. Drain caps, plugs, or hose bibbs shall be installed at low points. 

Grade piping toward drain locations. 

B. Alignment: All installed pipe lines shall be straight and shall remain straight against 

strains. Proper allowance shall be made for expansion and contraction. 

C. Clean as Installed: All piping shall be kept free from scale or loose dirt when 

installed, and must be kept clean during the completion of the installation. All 

openings in the piping system shall be capped or plugged while awaiting further 

connections. All detergents, solvents and other cleaning agents shall be compatible 

with the materials of fabrication of the system in which they are used. They shall not 

adversely affect the materials of mechanisms in the systems and they shall be 

acceptable to equipment manufacturers. All detergents, solvents, and other cleaning 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

agents shall also be compatible with the process streams to be handled by the systems 

in which they are used. 

D. Insulated Fittings: Install between any dissimilar metals such as steel and copper. 

E. Expansion and Contraction: The Contractor shall make all necessary provisions for 

expansion and contraction with proper fittings, anchors, dresser couplings, loops, etc. 

Install flexible connectors on each pipe at each building expansion joint. 

F. Welding: Refer to Paragraph 1.30 of this section of these specifications. 

G. Bending: No bending of pipe will be permitted. 

H. General: The installation shall be coordinated with respect to space available with 

heating, cooling, ventilating, and electrical installation. In every instance where there 

is a conflict in the routing of the piping and the ducting, the routing of the ducting 

shall govern. Installed piping shall not interfere with the operation or accessibility of 

doors or windows, shall not encroach on aisles, passageways, and equipment, and 

shall not interfere with the servicing or maintenance of equipment. Pipe shall be cut 

accurately to measurements established at the construction site and shall be worked 

into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing all openings and equipment. 

Cutting or weakening of structural members to facilitate piping, installation is not 

permitted. Pipes shall have burrs removed by reaming and shall be so installed as to 

permit free expansion and contraction without damage to joints or hangers. Piping 

above ground shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise 

noted on the drawings. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, horizontal piping 

shall pitch down in the direction of flow with grade of not less than 1 inch in 40 feet. 

Piping connections to equipment shall be in accordance with details shown on the 

drawings or as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Service pipe valves 

and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work to permit finished 

covering not less than 1/2 inch from such other work, and not less than 1/2 inch 

between finished coverings on the different services. 

I. Installation of Valves: Valves shall be installed at the locations shown on the 

drawings and where specified and where directed at site. Gate valves shall be used 

unless otherwise shown, specified, or directed. All valves shall be installed with their 

stems horizontal or above. Where tight shutoff is required, a composition seat globe 

valve or resilient seat ball valve shall be used. 

J. All valves which must be used during operation, all control valve assemblies, 

instrument control cases, liquid level controls, gage glasses, orifices, relief valves, 

and other equipment which must be observed, adjusted, or serviced during operation 

shall be located conveniently accessible from an operating platform or grade. 

K. In general, relief valves within processing unit limits shall be located conveniently 

accessible from an operating platform or grade. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1. Those in non-hazardous service, such as water, shall discharge directly to 

outside. 

2. Relief valves should have no piping between the vessel or line and the valve 

inlet, except as shown on the drawings. 

3. Relief valves shall be installed in a vertical position. Vent piping shall be braced 

and supported in a manner that will not produce excessive stresses in the relief 

valve and will permit removal of the relief valve without necessary temporary 

supports for the vent lines. 

L. Equipment Connections: All piping connections to pumps and other equipment shall 

be installed without strain at the pipe connection of the equipment. The contractor 

shall be required as directed to remove the bolts in flanged connections or disconnect 

piping to demonstrate that the piping has been so connected. Pipe connections to 

equipment shall be made with unions or flanged fittings. Provide removable headers 

for large equipment for service access. 

M. Joints 

1. Flanged Joints: All flanged joints shall be face matched. Raised face flanges 

shall not be mated to flat-faced cast-iron flanges on valves or equipment. The 

raised face must be turned off. All flanged bolt holes shall straddle the 

horizontal and vertical center line unless otherwise noted. 

2. Screwed Joints: Screwed pipe joints shall have American Standard Taper Pipe 

Threads ANSI-B2.1 Latest Edition. Burrs formed when cutting pipe shall be 

removed by reaming. Care shall be taken that the inside of pipe is thoroughly 

clean and free of cutting oil and foreign matter before installation. Joints shall be 

made perfectly tight by the use of Teflon tape or approved Teflon thread sealing 

and lubricating compound. 

3. Solder-Joints: Tubing shall be cut square and burrs removed. Both inside of 

fittings and outside of tubing shall be well cleaned with steel wool or wire brush 

before seating. Care shall be taken to prevent annealing of fittings and hard 

drawn tubing when making connections. Joints for serrated fittings on water, 

compressed air below 60 psig, and vacuum lines shall be made with a 95 percent 

tin and 5 percent antimony. Cored solder or solder containing lead will not be 

permitted. 

N. Reducers: Reduction in pipe size shall be made with one piece reducing fittings. 

Bushings reducing at least two pipe sizes will be acceptable only when there is no 

room for reducing couplings or swaged nipples. 

O. Unions: All piping unions shall be of the ground joint type constructed from 

materials equivalent in alloy composition and strength to other fittings specified with 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1.30 WELDING 

which they are sued. Union Pressure classes and end connections shall be the same 

as the fittings used in the lines with the unions. Steel unions shall have hardened 

stainless steel seating surfaces on both faces. 

A. All welding of piping covered by this specification, regardless of condition of service 

shall be accompanied as follows: 

1. The welding shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the American 

Welding Society. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching to form these, or 

any similar construction will not be permitted. Welding fittings shall be installed 

on all welded lines. Joints to be welded shall be properly aligned and spaced, 

using special welding clamps where necessary. All welders to be employed shall 

have passed qualification tests prescribed by the National Certified Pipe Welding 

bureau (or by another reputable testing laboratory or agency) using procedures 

approved by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers or the American 

Welding Society. The welders will be required to pass qualification tests when 

the work of the welder creates a reasonable doubt as to his proficiency. Tests 

shall be conducted at no additional expense to the Owner. 

2. Each welder shall, in addition to having passed the prescribed qualification tests 

(as noted in Paragraph 12 A), prepare sample coupons at the job site on a portion 

of pipe that is cut such that the cross section of the weld is open to view. The 

sample weld should be prepared using a 6 inch diameter pipe. The sample shall 

reflect a continuous weld with perpendicular cut out to show the weld in cross 

sectional view. This sample, when accepted and approved by a certified welding 

inspector, shall be used as a standard of quality to compare to other welds that 

this welder will be performing on the job. This same sample weld will also be a 

basis for accepting or rejecting the welder for working on this project. The 

sample weld shall be identified with a date and the welder's name and shall be 

kept at the site throughout the project. 

3. All welding on pressure piping shall conform to all of the requirements of the 

American Society of Mechanical Engineers Code for Pressure Piping - B31.1 

(An American National Standards Institute publication), as defined in the latest 

edition of the ANSI Power Piping B31.1 Manual. All welding shall also 

conform to all of the requirements of the American Society of Mechanical 

Engineers Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. All chapters, current addenda and 

supplements of these manuals shall apply. This code shall be used to establish 

standards of performance and quality of welds. 

However, the Owner reserves the right to perform radiographic testing of all 

welds, to compare any of the welds to the approved "standard" sample welds of 

each welder, and to compare the welds to the welding diagrams and sketches of 

those recommended in the ANSI B31.1 Power Piping Manual. The intent is to 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

obtain the highest quality welding job possible. The cost of any initial 

radiographic testing, for random inspection, shall be paid for by the Owner. If 

radiographic random testing reveals that a weld is defective, the Contractor shall 

bear the cost of all repairs and re-testing necessary to be made to subject weld 

until conformance with radiographic tests is reached. The potential for random 

radiographic testing and welding quality control applies to all pressure piping 

systems in this project, including systems below 100 psig. If a question should 

arise regarding the possibility of faulty welding or if there are obvious visual 

defects in the welding, the Contractor shall be required to correct such 

deficiencies to a quality level consistent with the recommendations, welding 

diagrams and sketches in the ANSI B31.1 Manual. The quality level shall also 

reflect that of the approved sample welds accomplished by each welder for this 

particular project. 

1.31 TESTING FOR PIPING SYSTEMS 

A. General: Before insulation is applied, all piping, equipment, and accessories installed 

under this contract shall be inspected and tested by the Contractor. All labor, 

material, and equipment required for testing shall be furnished by the Contractor. 

The Contractor shall be responsible for all repairs and retesting as required. All 

instruments and other equipment whose safe pressure range is below that of the test 

pressure shall be removed from the line or blanked off before applying tests. Prior to 

performing tests, all lines shall be "blown" free of all loose dirt and foreign particles. 

The lines shall then be thoroughly flushed with water (liquid lines only) at a sufficient 

flow rate and period of time, to ensure complete cleaning of the lines of all dirt, scale, 

and foreign matter. Satisfactory flushing of the lines shall be subject to approval. 

After testing and flushing lines, all filters and strainers shall be cleaned. 

B. Safety: Since the Risk of failure, with the attendant possibility of injury, is 

appreciable greater with further testing, all safety measures required by codes or 

ordinance or reasonable applicable to the situation shall be taken. 

C. Concealment: Equipment or piping to be pressure tested shall not be insulated, 

covered, or concealed prior to that test. Compression joint underground piping may 

be backfilled prior to pressure test except that joints shall remain exposed until after 

the test, but tie rods, clamps, etc., shall be in place and fastened. 

D. Pressure Ratings: These tests shall not be used to establish pressure ratings. 

E. System Protection: Protect all piping and equipment against overpressure, collapse 

from vacuum, and hydraulic shock during the filling, testing and draining procedures. 

Seats of iron valves shall not be subjected to a pressure in excess of the maximum 

cold working pressure of the valve. Pressure tests against other closed valves shall 

not exceed twice the normal rating. Note that where significant differences in 

elevation exists, there is a risk of overpressure in the lower portions of the system in 

order to attain test pressure in the upper portion of the system 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

F. Test Temperature: Apply test pressure only after the system and test medium are at 

approximately the same temperature, preferably not less than 60°F. Note that some 

applicable codes require testing above a specified minimum temperature. 

G. Sectionalizing: Systems may be separated into sub-systems for testing if such action 

will expedite or simplify the testing. 

H. Temporary Supports: During hydrostatic testing of lines provide temporary supports 

to prevent overstressing supports or hangers. When tests are completed, remove all 

temporary supports, locks, stops, etc., and adjust supports for their cold load and 

alignment. 

I. Testing: Domestic hot and cold water piping and heating water piping shall be tested 

hydrostatically at the test pressures specified and shall show no drop in pressure in a 

2 hour period. Leaks shall be located by soap testing 

1. Test Pressures: 

a) Natural gas piping: as required by governing code 

b) Domestic Hot and Cold Water: 100 psig or 50% more than operating 

pressure, which ever is greater. 

J. Sanitary Waste and Soil System: 

1. After all soil and waste pipes and vent stacks have been installed, the outlets 

shall be plugged and the piping system filled with water in vertical sections to 

the highest point of the system and allowed to remain filled for twenty-four (24) 

hours and shall prove to be leaktight under such conditions. A one inch drop 

will be allowed in water level in standpipe. This test may be conducted in 

segments as required by the sequence of construction. Contractor shall certify in 

writing that all tests were satisfactorily completed before piping was concealed, 

and shall submit the certification to the Architect/Engineer for his records and 

for transmittal to the Owner. 

K. Test Report 

1. A detailed report of pressure tests on piping and equipment shall be forwarded in 

duplicate to the Architect/Engineer. This report shall show date of test, lines 

tested, test medium, length of time test pressure was held, pressure drop or rise, 

and extent of venting or repressurizing. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1.32 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES 

A. The Contractor shall refer to other sections of these specifications covering the work 

of other trades which must be carried out in conjunction with the mechanical work so 

that the construction operations can proceed without harm to the Owner from 

interference, delay or absence of coordination. 

1.33 FIELD MEASUREMENTS 

A. The Contractor shall verify the dimensions covering the mechanical work at the 

building. No extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed on account of 

difference between actual dimensions and those indicated on the drawings. He shall 

examine the adjoining work on which Mechanical work is dependent for maximum 

efficiency, and shall report any work which must be corrected. No waiver of 

responsibility for defective work shall be claimed or allowed due to failure to report 

unfavorable work conditions affecting Mechanical work. 

1.34 SAFETY GUARDS 

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install safety guards required in order to 

obtain certificates of inspection from all authorities having jurisdiction. All belt 

driven equipment, projecting shafts, and other rotating parts shall be enclosed or 

adequately guarded. Provide coupling guards on all rotating shafts. 


A. All work, equipment, and materials shall be protected at all times to prevent 

obstruction, damage, or breakage. All pipe openings shall be closed with caps or 

plugs during installation. All equipment shall be covered and protected against dirt, 

water, chemical, or mechanical injury. At the completion of the work, all equipment 

shall be thoroughly cleaned and the entire system shall be delivered in a perfect, 

unblemished condition. 

1.36 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION 

A. All equipment shall be delivered to the job with suitable factory finish. Should the 

finish be marred in transit or during installation, it shall be finished to present a neat, 

workmanlike appearance. 

B. Except as elsewhere hereinafter specifically required, any painting of equipment, 

piping, ductwork, grilles, insulation, etc., furnished and installed under this Section of 

the Specifications will be done by the Painting Contractor. However, the Mechanical 

Contractor shall leave his equipment clean and free from any grease, dirt, rust, etc., 

and in suitable condition for painting. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

C. No nameplates on equipment shall be painted, and suitable protection shall be 

afforded to the plates to prevent their being rendered illegible during the painting 

operation. 

D. The piping shall be painted the basic color as indicated in other sections of these 

specifications and shall be marked every 10 feet on centers with Brady pipe markers. 

Arrows, approximately 6 inch in length and spaced about 10 feet on centers shall 

indicate the direction of the flow pipe. Locate additional labels as required in 

Mechanical Rooms. Staple in place, brush with clear lacquer. Markers shall state 

pipe size, flow direction, and pipe usage (such as "cold water," etc.). 

1.37 RECORD DRAWINGS 

A. The Contractor shall, during the execution of the work, maintain a complete set of 

drawings upon which all dimensional locations of equipment piping and all 

deviations and/or changes in the work shall be recorded. 

Water, storm, and drainage mains shall be delivered to the Architect/Engineer in good 

condition upon the completion and acceptance of the work and before final payment 

is made. 

1.38 SUPPLIER RESPONSIBILITY 

A. Each supplier, whether furnishing equipment as specified or as a substitution shall be 

responsible for certifying that the equipment is properly installed and that the 

warranty is valid. Submit written reports on the installation and the equipment 

performance when requested to do so by the Architect/Engineer (or his 

representative). Each supplier shall be responsible for furnishing qualified personnel 

at the job site at anytime requested by the Architect/Engineer (or his representative) 

during the construction or warranty periods. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 15043 

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 



A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and 

the General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 


A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment required to test and balance the 

mechanical systems identified on the contract drawings and these specifications, 

including but not limited to: 

1. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic, steam, and refrigerating systems. 

2. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 

3. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions. 

4. Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions. 

5. Adjustment of the mechanical systems shall include but not limited to impellers 

trimmed, new sheeves and belts to match cfm required, etc. as required to match 

equipment specified. 

6. Operating Test 

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS 

A. Section 15010 – General Mechanical Requirements. 

B. Section 15046 – Demonstration and Training. 

C. Section 15800 – Ductwork. 

D. Section 15902 – Electrical Controls and Interlocks. 


A. The publications listed below form a part of these specifications to the extent 

referenced. Each publication shall be the latest edition of each except as noted. 

1. AABC - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating and 

Air Conditioning System. 

2. ADC - Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers. 

3. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of 

Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. 

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 


4. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of 

Environmental Systems. 

5. NFPA – NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating System. 

6. SMACNA - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. 

A. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, 

adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. 

B. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, 

balancing, and equipment data required. 

C. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide 

final copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance 

manuals. 

D. Provide reports in letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and 

indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced 

drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, 

and indicating thermostat locations. 

E. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and copy of AABC 

National Project Performance Guaranty prior to commencing system balance. 

F. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance 

forms. 

G. When test and balancing has been completed, the balancing agency shall prepare a 

complete report including design and test conditions compared. The report shall be 

as outlined below. 

H. Seven copies of the complete and compiled test data shall be submitted to the 

Contractor for forwarding to the Architect/Engineer for evaluation and approval. 

1. The Report shall be on standard 8-1/2” x 11” good quality paper and bound 

together to form a complete report. All forms shall be typewritten. Field data 

may be handwritten on appropriate printed or typewritten forms. Copies of 

handwritten field notes shall be legible. 

2. Each sheet shall have the Building number, name of the Testing Firm, 

instruments used to perform the tests, name of personnel performing the test, and 

date test was performed. Date and firm performing the calibration on 

photometry equipment shall also be included. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

3. Outside weather conditions shall be noted during the times the tests were made; 

cloud cover, temperature, wind speed and direction, precipitation, etc. 

I. The Report shall have a T & B Summary section including: 

1. Identification of any system or equipment item the Contractor had difficulty 

balancing to specification or could not be balanced to specification. 

2. Identification of any piece of equipment or system whose balance should be 

rechecked and/or reset during weather conditions different from those present 

during system balancing. 

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 

A. Record actual locations of flow measuring stations balancing valves and rough 

setting. Show locations on Test and Balance report reduced size plan drawings. 


A. Perform total system balance in accordance with NEBB Procedural Standards for 

Testing, Balancing, and Adjusting of Environmental Systems. 

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS 

A. The balancing shall be performed by Energy Balance, Inc. or Kirk Air. Qualified 

personnel are limited to registered mechanical Engineers and agencies regularly 

engaged in testing and balancing work. The Contractor shall submit, prior to the start 

of the balancing work, the qualifications and experience record of the balancing 

personnel for approval by the Architect/Engineer. 

B. Perform Work under supervision of registered Professional Engineer experienced in 

performance of this Work and licensed in the state where the Project is located. 

C. The balancing agency shall not be associated with or the same contractor furnishing 

the controls or instrumentation. 

1.9 PRE-BALANCING CONFERENCE 

A. Convene pre-balancing conference one week prior to commencing work of this 

section in coordination with Architect/Engineer/General Contractor and his 

Subcontractors. 

1.10 SEQUENCING 

A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of 

work before Substantial Completion of Project. See section 3.1 for pre-balancing 

inspection. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

PART 2 PRODUCT 

2.1 INSTRUMENTS 

A. Instruments in general shall be direct reading. Pressures between 2" W.G. and 12" 

W.G. shall be measured with manometers. Duct velocities above 600 fpm shall be 

measured with a pitot tube. Averaging hoods with tight seal shall be used for airflow 

measurement at diffusers, registers and grilles. RPM shall be measured with a 

revolution counter and stopwatch. Mercury thermometers are preferred; bi-metallic 

thermometers may be used if calibration is checked daily. Test report shall list all 

instruments used and include accuracy and date calibrated. The Contractor shall 

provide all instruments to make the tests herein specified and required for complete 

system balancing. 

2.2 AIR HANDLERS 

A. After the air system is balanced and an optimum fan speed is selected, the adjustable 

sheaf or sheaves furnished shall be replaced by the Mechanical Contractor with new 

non-adjustable sheaves for permanent operation. 

2.3 PUMPS 

A. After the water system is balanced and an optimum pump operating point is selected, 

the pump impeller shall be trimmed to supply the required capacity for pumps over 2 

HP, without throttling the flow. 

PART 3 EXECUTION 


A. The test and balance agency shall review the plans and specifications prior to 

installation of the system and submit a report to the Architect/Engineer of any 

deficiencies in the system which could preclude proper adjusting, balancing and 

testing of the system. 

B. The test and balance agency shall inspect the system prior to adjusting, balancing, 

and testing work to insure that all specified components which will affect proper 

execution of such work are installed and are operating properly. A report shall be 

submitted to the Architect/Engineer indicating the results of the inspection within 

three days of the inspection. The following is a partial list of items to be inspected 

and report provided to the Architect/Engineer. 

1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 

2. Temperature control systems and control systems are installed complete and 

operable. 

3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in 

addition to final filters. 

5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 

6. Fans are rotating correctly. 

7. Fire/smoke and volume dampers are in place and open. The smoke detectors and 

power to them is installed and the dampers are operational. Air coil fins are 

cleaned and combed. 

8. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 

9. Air outlets are installed and connected. 

10. Duct system leakage is minimized. 

11. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented. 

12. Pumps are rotating correctly. 

13. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 

14. Service and balance valves are open. 

C. Submit field reports in a timely manner within one week of pre-balancing conference. 

Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services which prevent 

system balance. 

D. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions of the installed system 

and equipment on the project. 


A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make 

instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing. 

B. Provide additional balancing devices as required. 

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES 

A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply 

systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. 

B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of 

design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent 

of design. 

C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. 

3.4 ADJUSTING 

A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. 

B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing 

settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that 

such disruption has been rectified. 

D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, 

closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified 

settings. 

E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck 

points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner. 

3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE 

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, 

return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude. 

B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross 

sectional area of duct. 

C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. 

D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from 

objectionable drafts and noise. 

E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments 

do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct 

internal devices such as dampers and splitters. 

F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes 

required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. 

G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each 

outlet or inlet. 

H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil 

pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent 

loading of filters. 

I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for 

design conditions. 

J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to 

check leakage. 

K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme 

conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, 

and at minimum air flow rate, full heating. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to 

provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches 

positive static pressure near the building entries. 

M. For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to air flow setting 

indicated. Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation for 

automatic variable air volume temperature control. 

N. On fan powered VAV boxes, adjust airflow switches for proper operation. 

3.6 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE 

A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities. 

B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gages to 

determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow-metering devices are not 

installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer 

elements in the system. 

C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer 

elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature 

differential in conjunction with air balancing. 

D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer 

elements. 

E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, 

and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for 

balance point. 

F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual 

system parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow 

to other parts. 

3.7 SCHEDULES 

A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 

1. Electric Water Coolers 

2. Plumbing Pumps 

3. HVAC Pumps 

4. Forced Air Furnaces 

5. Direct Fired Furnaces 

6. Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers 

7. Packaged Roof Top Heating/Cooling Units 

8. Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units 

9. Unit Air Conditioners 

10. Computer Room Air Conditioning Units 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

11. Air Coils 

12. Evaporative Humidifier 

13. Radiant Heating Systems 

14. Terminal Heat Transfer Units 

15. Induction Units 

16. Air Handling Units 

17. Fans 

18. Air Filters 

19. Air Terminal Units 

20. Air Inlets and Outlets 

B. Report Forms 

1. Title Page 

a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency 

b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency 

c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency 

d. Project name 

e. Project location 

f. Project Architect 

g. Project Engineer 

h. Project Contractor 

i. Project altitude 

j. Report date 

2. Summary Comments 

a. Design versus final performance 

b. Notable characteristics of system 

c. Description of systems operation sequence 

d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building 

pressurization 

e. Nomenclature used throughout report 

f. Test conditions, including weather conditions 

3. Instrument List: 

a. Instrument 

b. Manufacturer 

c. Model number 

d. Serial number 

e. Range 

f. Calibration date 

4. Electric Motors: 

a. Manufacturer 

b. Model/Frame 

c. HP/BHP 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load 

e. RPM 

f. Service factor 

g. Starter size, rating, heater elements 

h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 

5. V-Belt Drive: 

a. Identification/location 

b. Required driven RPM 

c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM 

d. Belt, size and quantity 

e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM 

f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual 

6. Pump Data: 

a. Identification/number 


c. Size/model 

d. Impeller 

e. Service 

f. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP 

g. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP 

h. Discharge pressure 

i. Suction pressure 

j. Total operating head pressure 

k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures 

l. Shut off, total head pressure 

7. Combustion Test: 

a. Boiler manufacturer 

b. Model number 

c. Serial number 

d. Firing rate 

e. Overfire draft 

f. Gas meter timing dial size 

g. Gas meter time per revolution 

h. Gas pressure at meter outlet 

i. Gas flow rate 

j. Heat input 

k. Burner manifold gas pressure 

l. Percent carbon monoxide (CO) 

m. Percent carbon dioxide (CO2) 

n. Percent oxygen (O2) 

o. Percent excess air 

p. Flue gas temperature at outlet 

q. Ambient temperature 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

r. Net stack temperature 

s. Percent stack loss 

t. Percent combustion efficiency 

u. Heat output 

8. Gas Fired Equipment 


b. Model number 

c. Serial number 

d. Firing rate 

e. Overfire draft 

f. BTUH at sea level 

g. BTUH at altitude 

h. Gas pressure at meter outlet 

i. Gas flow rate in cfh 

j. Heat input 

k. Burner manifold gas pressure 

l. Orifice size 

m. Air temperature rise for gas fired equipment 

n. Check all limit devices for proper operation, setting and calibration 

o. Make up water pressure setting 

p. Working pressure 

q. Ambient temperature 

r. Relief valve setting 

s. Static pressure 

t. Fan hydronic system and fan cfm 

u. Heat output 

9. Air Cooled Condenser: 


b. Location 

c. Manufacturer 

d. Model number 

e. Serial number 

f. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual 

g. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual 

h. Number of compressors 

10. Chillers: 



c. Capacity 


e. Serial number 

f. Evaporator entering water temperature, design and actual 

g. Evaporator leaving water temperature, design and actual 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

h. Evaporator pressure drop, design and actual 

i. Evaporator water flow rate, design and actual 

j. Condenser entering water temperature, design and actual 

k. Condenser pressure drop, design and actual 

l. Condenser water flow rate, design and actual 

11. Cooling Tower: 

a. Tower identification/number 




e. Rated capacity 

f. Entering air WB temperature, specified and actual 

g. Leaving air WB temperature, specified and actual 

h. Ambient air DB temperature 

i. Condenser water entering temperature 

j. Condenser water leaving temperature 

k. Condenser water flow rate 

l. Fan RPM 

12. Heat Exchanger: 


b. Location 

c. Service 

d. Manufacturer 

e. Model number 

f. Serial number 

g. Steam pressure, design and actual 

h. Primary water entering temperature, design and actual 

i. Primary water leaving temperature, design and actual 

j. Primary water flow, design and actual 

k. Primary water pressure drop, design and actual 

l. Secondary water leaving temperature, design and actual 

m. Secondary water leaving temperature, design and actual 

n. Secondary water flow, design and actual 

o. Secondary water pressure drop, design and actual 

13. Cooling Coil Data: 


b. Location 

c. Service 


e. Air flow, design and actual 

f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual 

g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual 

h. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual 

j. Water flow, design and actual 

k. Water pressure drop, design and actual 

l. Entering water temperature, design and actual 

m. Leaving water temperature, design and actual 

n. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual 

o. Air pressure drop, design and actual 

14. Heating Coil Data: 


b. Location 

c. Service 


e. Air flow, design and actual 

f. Water flow, design and actual 

g. Water pressure drop, design and actual 

h. Entering water temperature, design and actual 

i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual 

j. Entering air temperature, design and actual 

k. Leaving air temperature, design and actual 

l. Air pressure drop, design and actual 

15. Electric Duct Heater: 


b. Identification/number 

c. Location 


e. Design kW 

f. Number of stages 

g. Phase, voltage, amperage 

h. Test voltage (each phase) 

i. Test amperage (each phase) 

j. Air flow, specified and actual 

k. Temperature rise, specified and actual 

16. Induction Unit Data: 


b. Identification/number 

c. Location 


e. Size 

f. Design air flow 

g. Design nozzle pressure drop 

h. Final nozzle pressure drop 

i. Final air flow 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

17. Air Moving Equipment 

a. Location 




e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge 

f. Air flow, specified and actual 

g. Return air flow, specified and actual 

h. Outside air flow, specified and actual 

i. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 

j. Inlet pressure 

k. Discharge pressure 

l. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 

m. Number of Belts/Make/Size 

n. Fan RPM 

18. Return Air/Outside Air Data: 


b. Design air flow 

c. Actual air flow 

d. Design return air flow 

e. Actual return air flow 

f. Design outside air flow 

g. Actual outside air flow 

h. Return air temperature 

i. Outside air temperature 

j. Required mixed air temperature 

k. Actual mixed air temperature 

l. Design outside/return air ratio 

m. Actual outside/return air ratio 

19. Exhaust Fan Data: 

a. Location 




e. Air flow, specified and actual 

f. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 

g. Inlet pressure 

h. Discharge pressure 

i. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 

j. Number of Belts/Make/Size 

k. Fan RPM 

20. Duct Traverse: 

a. System zone/branch 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

b. Duct size 

c. Area 

d. Design velocity 

e. Design air flow 

f. Test velocity 

g. Test air flow 

h. Duct static pressure 

i. Air temperature 

j. Air correction factor 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

21. Duct Leak Test: 

a. Description of ductwork under test 

b. Duct design operating pressure 

c. Duct design test static pressure 

d. Duct capacity, air flow 

e. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor 

f. Test apparatus 

I. Blower 

II. Orifice, tube size 

III. Orifice size 

IV. Calibrated 

g. Test static pressure 

h. Test orifice differential pressure 

i. Leakage 

22. Air Monitoring Station Data: 


b. System 

c. Size 

d. Area 

e. Design velocity 

f. Design air flow 

g. Test velocity 

h. Test air flow 

23. Flow Measuring Station: 


b. Location 

c. Size 



f. Serial number 

g. Design Flow rate 

h. Design pressure drop 

i. Actual/final pressure drop 

j. Actual/final flow rate 

k. Station calibrated setting 

24. Terminal Unit Data: 


b. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct 

c. Identification/number 

d. Location 


f. Size 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

g. Minimum static pressure 

h. Minimum design air flow 

i. Maximum design air flow 

j. Maximum actual air flow 

k. Inlet static pressure 

25. Air Distribution Test Sheet: 

a. Air terminal number 

b. Room number/location 

c. Terminal type 

d. Terminal size 

e. Area factor 

f. Design velocity 

g. Design air flow 

h. Test (final) velocity 

i. Test (final) air flow 

j. Percent of design air flow 

26. Sound Level Report: 

a. Location 

b. Octave bands - equipment off 

c. Octave bands - equipment on 

27. Vibration Test: 

a. Location of points: 

I.Fan bearing, drive end 

II.Fan bearing, opposite end 

III.Motor bearing, center (if applicable) 

IV.Motor bearing, drive end 

V.Motor bearing, opposite end 

VI.Casing (bottom or top) 

VII.Duct after flexible connection (discharge) 

VIII.Duct after flexible connection (suction) 

3.8 CALCULATIONS 

b. Test readings: 

I. Horizontal, velocity and displacement 

II. Vertical, velocity and displacement 

III. Axial, velocity and displacement 

c. Normally acceptable readings, velocity and acceleration 

d. Unusual conditions at time of test 

e. Vibration source (if non-complying) 

A. The following calculations shall be made and become part of the reported data. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1. The CFM at each heating, cooing, and fan coil, the heating and/or cooling 

capacity of each and the air temperature change of each. 

2. The water flow at each heating, cooling, and fan coil, the heating and/or cooling 

capacity of each and the water temperature change of each. 

3. The fuel flow to each gas fired unit and the BTUH input. 

4. The capacity of each refrigeration unit in BTUH or tons at full capacity and at 

each unloaded step. 

5. The saturation efficiency of each dry cooler and air washer. 

3.9 OPERATING TEST 

A. The test and balance agency shall coordinate and set up an operating test when Test 

& Balance is completed to ensure complete operation of the system in all modes. The 

controls contractor, sheet metal trade and the general contractor shall certify in 

writing test completion and all units are operating as designed. Attach copy of 

operating test to Test & Balance report. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 15060 

PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 





1.2 SCOPE 

A. This section of the specifications encompasses the basic materials and methods of the 

various piping systems covered in Division 15. 

B. Standards: The latest edition of each standard referenced shall be used to determine 

compliance. 

1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS 

15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 

15080 - PIPING SPECIALTIES 

15100 - VALVES 

15160 - VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION 

15180 - PIPING INSULATION 

15402 - DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS 

15403 - ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 

15404 - SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEMS 

1.4 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING 

A. All accessible piping shall be labeled at not more than 10 ft. intervals with labels 

indicating the service and direction of flow. Pipe labels shall be self-adhesive labels, 

all-temperature Perma-Code pipe markers No. B-500, manufactured by the W.H. 

Brady Company. The background color code for all markers shall conform to the 

American National Standard A13.1 - 1975 "Scheme for the Identification of Piping 

Systems." 

B. The color red shall be for the exclusive use on fire protection service piping and 

sprinkler piping per OSHA regulations (CFR 1910.144). 

PART 2 PRODUCTS 

2.1 PIPING SYSTEMS 

A. Domestic water system 

PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15060-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1. Above grade: 

a. Copper: Shall be Type K soft drawn, or Type L hard drawn, seamless 

copper tubing conforming to ASTM B88, with wrought copper and bronze 

solder joint pressure fittings conforming to ANSI B16.22. 

b. Piping and fittings shall be equal to Zurn “PEX”. Refer to plans and notes 

for suggested piping schematics. 

2. Underground: 

a. Copper: Type K hard, seamless copper tubing conforming to ASTM B-88 

with silver brazed joints (ASTM B-260 Class BAg-1) with wrought copper 

fittings per ANSI B16.22. 

B. Soil and waste system 

1. Above ground: 

a. Cast iron: Shall be cast iron hub and spigot soil pipe or hubless cast iron 

pipe and fittings, conforming to ASTM A74 and Cast Iron Institute CS-188. 

The hub and spigot pipe may utilize either hot poured or compression gasket 

joints per ASTM C-644XH. 

b. PVC: Piping shall be polyvinylchloride (schedule 40 for size 4" and smaller, 

SDR-35 for sizes 6" and larger), exterior sewer pipe (PVC) ASTM D3034 

with gaskets per ASTM D1869. Allowed only where Owner agrees. 

2. Underground inside building: 

a. Cast iron: Shall be cast iron hub and spigot soil pipe and fittings, 

conforming to ASTM A74 and Cast Iron Institute CS-188. The hub and 

spigot may utilize either hot poured or compression gasket joints per ASTM 

C-644XH. 

b. PVC: Piping shall be polyvinylchloride (schedule 40 for size 4" and 

smaller, SDR-35 for sizes 6" and larger), exterior sewer pipe (PVC) ASTM 

D3034 with gaskets per ASTM D1869. Allowed only where Owner agrees 

3. Underground outside buildings: 

a. Under traffic areas and parking lots: Shall be cast iron hub and spigot soil 

pipe or hubless cast iron pipe and fittings, conforming to ASTM A74 and 

Cast Iron Institute CS-188. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

b. PVC: Piping shall be polyvinylchloride (schedule 40 for size 4" and 

smaller, SDR-35 for sizes 6" and larger), exterior sewer pipe (PVC) ASTM 

D3034 with gaskets per ASTM D1869. Allowed only where Owner agrees. 

c. Risers and base fittings for grade cleanouts shall be extra heavy cast iron 

pipe and fittings with hot poured joints per USA Standard A40.8. 

4. Manholes: 

a. Manholes shall be of either precast or brick construction. Precast shall be 

48" diameter, Class II, Type V reinforced concrete per ASTM C-478. Top 

section shall be built to grade with brick or concrete grade rings. Brick 

manholes shall be constructed to the standard and with approval of local 

jurisdiction authorities. 

b. Frame and covers shall consist of grey iron, ASTM Class 45 with lid indexed 

"Sanitary Sewer" or "Storm Sewer" as applicable. Frame and cover shall be 

Neenah Foundry Company model R-1370 with Type C lid or equal. 

C. Sanitary vent system 

1. Vent piping 2" and smaller in diameter may be schedule 40 galvanized steel 

pipe conforming to ASTM A-53 with 150 pound galvanized malleable iron 

screwed fittings conforming with ANSI B16.3. Vent piping larger than 2" shall 

be cast iron as specified for interior soil and waste. 

2. PVC: Piping shall be polyvinylchloride (schedule 40 for size 4" and smaller, 

SDR-35 for sizes 6" and larger), exterior sewer pipe (PVC) ASTM D3034 with 

gaskets per ASTM D1869. Allowed only where Owner agrees. 

D. Refrigeration piping system 

1. COPPER: Shall be "ACR" Type L hard drawn, seamless copper tubing 

conforming to ASTM B280, with wrought copper and bronze solder joint 

pressure fittings conforming to ANSI B16.22. 

E. Roof drain system 

1. The roof drain system shall be the same as the soil and waste system except that 

for drains 2" and smaller in diameter, Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe 

conforming to ASTM A-53 with 150 pound galvanized malleable iron screwed 

fittings conforming with ANSI B16.3, may be used. 

F. Natural gas piping system 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2.2 JOINTS 

1. Black steel: Above grade piping shall be Schedule 40, black steel pipe 

conforming to ASTM A-53, with 150 pound malleable iron screwed fittings 

conforming with ANSI B16.3. or seamless carbon steel weld fittings conform to 

ASTM A-234. 

2. Underground piping shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe conforming to ASTM 

A-53 machine wrapped with Scotchwrap PVC tape using 50% overlap. Fittings 

and joints shall be double wrapped to a minimum 6 inches beyond the fitting. 

Pipe shall be primed prior to wrapping per manufacturer's recommendations. 

PVC or similar plastic piping materials may be used underground with written 

approval of the code authority and serving utility company. 

A. Copper: 

1. Silver brazed joints shall use brazing material containing approximately 45% 

silver, 15% zinc, 25% cadmium and 15% copper. Joints shall conform to ASTM 

B-260 Class BAg-1. Approved materials include Mueller #122, Handy and 

Harmon "Easy Flo45" and United Wire and Supply "Sil-Bond 45". 

2. Solder joints shall use solder material containing no more than 0.2% lead for 

potable water systems and no more than 5% lead for other systems with a noncorrosive 

flux in accordance with ASTM B32. 

B. Cast Iron: 

1. Neoprene Rubber gaskets for hub and spigot piping per ASTM C564. 

2. No hub joints shall consist of neoprene gaskets and series 300 stainless steel 

clamps and shields similar to Alabama Pipe Company "NO HUB" system 

conforming to CISPI Std. 301-64T. 

C. Ductile Iron: Joints shall be of the stuffing box type per ANSI 21.11 as modified by 

ANSI 21.51 or push-on type per ANSI 21.51. Rubber gaskets and lubricant shall be 

per ANSI 21.11. 

D. Black Steel: 

1. Screwed joints shall be made with no more than three threads showing using 

teflon tape or teflon joint sealing compound. 

2. Welded joints shall be fusion welded to full metal depth with width at least 2 1/2 

times the depth of the metal being joined. 

E. Galvanized Steel: 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1. Screwed joints shall be made with no more than three threads showing using 

teflon tape or teflon joint sealing compound. 

F. Polyethylene: 

1. Joints shall be threaded clamp type or other method approved by the pipe 

manufacturer. 

G. Bell and spigot joints shall conform to AWWA C200 with rubber gaskets. 

H. Bonded joints shall have metallic bond including joints made with flexible couplings, 

caulking or rubber gaskets. Metallic bond shall be of ferrous material to effect 

continuous conductivity. Bond wire shall be type RHW-USE, size 1/0 neoprene 

gasketed copper conductor. Bond shall be thermal weld type. 

I. Insulating joints shall be installed between nonthreaded ferrous and nonferrous 

metallic pipe. Insulating joints shall consist of a sandwich type flange insulating 

gasket of the dielectric type, insulating washers and insulating sleeves for flange 

bolts. Gaskets shall be full faced. Bolt insulating sleeves shall be full length. Units 

shall be of a construction to prevent metal to metal contact of dissimilar piping 

materials. 

2.3 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES 

A. Where exposed pipes pass through finished floors, finished walls or finished ceilings, 

they shall be fitted with chromium plated spun brass flanges or flanges to match the 

type of pipe or pipe finish used. Plates shall be large enough to completely close the 

hole around the pipe and shall be not less than 1-1/2" or more than 2-1/2" larger than 

the diameter of the pipes. All plates shall be securely held in place. 

2.4 UNIONS 

A. Piping 2-1/2" and larger to have bolted flange unions with gaskets of material suitable 

for the specified service. Ground joint unions with brass to iron seats shall be used in 

piping 2" and smaller. Unions shall be installed at all valves and equipment 

connections. 

B. Insulating Unions: See Specification Section 15080. 

2.5 HANGERS AND ANCHORS 

A. All piping shall be rigidly supported from the building structure by means of 

adjustable ring type hangers. Where pipes run side by side, support on rod and angle 

trapeze hangers. Hangers shall be spaced not greater than 5 feet on centers for cast 

iron piping, 6 feet on centers for copper piping and 10 feet on centers for steel piping. 

Plastic pipe shall be supported on not more than 3 feet centers. Round rods 

supporting the pipe hangers shall be of the following dimensions: 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1. 1/2 inch to 2 inch pipe 3/8 inch rod 

2. 2-1/2" inch to 3 inch pipe 1/2 inch rod 

3. 4 inch to 5 inch pipe 5/8 inch rod 

4. 6 inch pipe 3/4 inch rod 

5. 8 inch pipe 7/8 inch rod 

B. Rods for trapeze hangers shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch and shall have the 

equivalent cross section listed above per pipe supported. The use of pipe hoods, 

chains, or perforated iron for pipe supports will not be permitted. Insulated piping 

shall have hangers outside of insulation with 18 ga. protection sleeves 12" long. 

Anchors and guides shall be as detailed on the drawings. The Contractor shall 

provide inserts in the building construction at the time the concrete is poured, and the 

hangers shall be attached to these inserts. Where inserts cannot be used expansion 

shields may be used provided the hanger is not attached rigidly to the bolt but is 

supported from an angle held in place by the expansion bolt. The use of expansion 

shields must be approved by the Architect/Engineer. See drawings and details for 

support of tunnel piping. 

2.6 THRUST BLOCKS 

A. All underground water line tees, crosses, bends and valves shall be provided with 

concrete blocking. Concrete blocking shall be used for cast-iron or vitrified clay tile 

fittings where a change of flow direction occurs. All fittings at bends in the pipe line 

shall be firmly wedged against the vertical face of the trench by means of concrete 

thrust blocks bearing on undisturbed earth, to prevent the fittings from being blown 

off the line when under pressure. Fittings at vertical bends downward shall be 

anchored with concrete anchors as required. Thrusts blocks shall be determined 

using an allowable soil bearing pressure of 1,500 PSF at 200 psi test pressure in water 

line. No blocking will be covered or backfilled until inspected and approved by the 


2.7 VALVE BOXES 

A. Valve boxes shall be of cast iron extension type with flared base and shall be M & H 

Valve and Fittings Company, two-piece, 5 1/4" shaft, screw type to fit depth of bury. 

The minimum thickness of metal shall 3/16" and the nominal diameter of the box 

shall be at least four inches. The cover shall have the name of the utility service cast 

in the metal. Boxes shall be installed over each outside gate valve unless otherwise 

shown on the drawings. The boxes shall be of such length as will provide without 

extension a cover of not less than three feet over all water pipes. Valve boxes shall 

have concrete collars. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Provide and erect in a workmanlike manner according to the best practices of the 

trade all piping shown on drawings and required for the complete installation of the 

systems. The piping shown on the drawings shall be considered as diagrammatic for 

clarity in indicating the general run and connections, and may or may not in all parts 

be shown in its true position. The piping may have to be offset, lowered or raised as 

required or as directed at the site. This does not relieve the Contractor from 

responsibility for the proper erection of systems or piping in every respect suitable for 

the work intended as described in the specifications and approved by the 


B. In the erection of all piping, it shall be properly supported and proper provisions shall 

be made for expansion, contraction and anchoring of piping. All piping shall be cut 

accurately for fabrication to measurements established at the construction site. Pipe 

shall be worked into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing equipment 

and all windows, door, and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of the 

building structure to facilitate installation will not be permitted. All pipes shall have 

burrs and/or cutting slag removed by reaming or other cleaning methods. All changes 

in direction shall be made with fittings. 

C. All open ends of pipes and equipment shall be properly capped or plugged with plugs 

manufactured for this purpose to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of the 

system. Plugs of rags, wool, cotton waste or similar materials may not be used in 

plugging. 

D. All piping shall be arranged avoiding interference with removal and maintenance of 

equipment, filters or devices; and not blocking access to manholes, access openings, 

etc. Flanges or unions as applicable for the type of piping specified shall be provided 

at the piping connections to all items of equipment. 

E. Valves and specialties shall be placed to permit easy operation and access, and valves 

shall be regulated, packed and adjusted at the completion of the work before final 

acceptance. 

F. All piping shall be erected to insure proper draining. Steam mains shall be pitched 

down in the direction of flow, a minimum of one inch per 40 feet or appropriately 

trapped. Where steam and condensate flow in opposite directions within the same 

pipe, the pipe shall be 2 sizes larger than shown unless specifically shown on the 

drawings that counterflow of condensate was intended by the design. Condensate 

return mains shall be pitched down in the direction of flow, one inch per 20 feet. 

Domestic water piping may be run level but shall be free from traps. 

G. Soil and waste piping and other gravity drains shall be sloped down in direction of 

flow minimum one inch in 20 feet. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

3.2 ACCESS DOORS 

A. Furnish all access doors required for access to valves, controls, or other items for 

which access is required for either operation or servicing. All costs incurred through 

failure to perform this function as the proper sequence of the work dictates shall be 

borne by this Mechanical Contractor. 

B. The type of access door shall be as required by the room finish schedule. Acoustical 

tile access doors shall be equal to Krueger Style B, Style A for acoustical plaster, or 

Style C-CF for sidewall drywall or plaster construction. 

3.3 JOINTS 

A. Caulked joints in hub and spigot piping shall be packed firmly with oakum or hemp 

and caulked with pure molten lead not less than one inch deep. Resilient molded 

gaskets may be used on hub and spigot piping in lieu of lead and oakum packing. For 

cast iron soil pipe not located under buildings, the Contractor may also use the Nohub 

sanitary system for pipe 6" and below with neoprene sealing gaskets, stainless 

steel retaining sleeves and two draw bands. An adequate torque wrench shall be used 

for system installation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 

B. Screwed Joints: Screwed joints shall be American Standard taper pipe threads. Ream 

pipe ends and remove burrs after threading. Make up joints using an approved 

compound or teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 

C. Brazed and Soldered Joints: Tubing shall be cut square and burrs removed. Both 

inside of fittings and outside of tubing shall be well cleaned with steel wool before 

sweating. Care shall be taken to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing 

when making connections. 

D. Welded Joints: On black steel piping 2 inches and above in size, the joints shall be 

welded. Welding shall be done using either gas or electric welding equipment. 

Certified welders shall be used. All pipe surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before 

welding. Each joint shall be beveled before being welded. Piping shall be securely 

aligned and spaced and the width of circumferential welds shall form a gradual 

increase in thickness from the outside surface to the center of the weld. The 

Contractor shall use appropriate materials to protect the structure and provide 

adequate fire protection at all locations where welding is done. All elbows shall be 

long radius unless otherwise specified. Wherever tee connections are made to piping 

systems on the main run, welding sockets may be installed for the branch connections 

up to one half the size of the main run. On connections larger than one half the size 

of the main run, welding tees shall be used. The use of fittings formed from welded 

pipe sections will not be permitted. 

E. Flanged Joints: 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1. Cast iron flanges shall conform to the American Standard for cast iron pipe 

flanged fittings, Class 125 (B.16.1). Gaskets shall be suitable for the service on 

which used. 

2. Steel flanges shall be 150 lb. raised face type. 

F. Solvent Welded Joints: 

1. Pipe shall be cut square with pipe cutters designed specifically for plastic pipe. 

Pipe shall be protected from serrated holding devices and abrasion. Remove 

burrs from inside and outside of pipe. Clean the joining surfaces using an 

approved ABS Cleaning compound. Following the instructions on the can, apply 

the ABS cement and assemble the joint as quickly as possible before the cement 

dries. 

3.4 PUMP AND EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS 

A. All piping connecting to pumps or other equipment shall be installed with isolation 

valves and flexible connections to prevent strain at the connection to equipment. The 

Contractor shall be required as directed to disconnect piping to demonstrate that 

piping has been so connected. Provide a suction diffuser at each end suction pump 

where the inlet piping has a straight run of less than 15 pipe diameters in length. 

Suction diffusers shall consist of angle type body with inlet vanes and combination 

diffuser-strainer-orifice cylinder with 3/16 inch diameter openings for pump 

protection. Strainer free area shall be five times the section area of the pump 

connection. Provide an adjustable support foot for diffusers installed on end suction 

pumps. 

3.5 PIPE SLEEVES 

A. Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set by the Contractor and he shall be responsible 

for their proper and permanent location. Piping will not be permitted to pass through 

footings, beams or ribs unless so noted on the drawings or with the consent of the 

Architect/Engineer. Pipe sleeves shall be installed and properly secured in place at 

all points where pipes pass through concrete or masonry construction. Pipe sleeves, 

except sleeves in footings and beams shall be of sufficient diameter to provide 

approximately 1/4 inch clearance around the pipe, and in cases of insulated pipes, 

approximately 1/4 inch around the insulation. Pipe sleeves in footings and beams 

shall be of steel pipe. Sleeves in footings shall be not less than one inch or more than 

two inches larger in diameter than the pipe to be installed. Pipe sleeves in floors shall 

be cut flush with finished floor. Openings between piping and sleeves shall be made 

watertight with plastic cement to a minimum depth of two inches. Openings between 

piping and sleeves in all masonry or concrete interior walls and partitions shall be 

similarly caulked for acoustical reasons. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

3.6 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION 

A. The Contractor shall make all necessary provisions for expansion and contraction of 

piping with offsets or loops and anchors to prevent undue strain. 

3.7 PROTECTIVE COATINGS 

A. All underground pipe except exterior cast iron water distribution pipe shall be 

wrapped with "Scotchwrap" No. 50 tape to give not less than two complete layers on 

the entire underground piping system, or piping shall have X-TRU Coat factory 

applied plastic protective covering. 

B. All buried exterior cast iron water distribution piping shall be tar coated. 

3.8 TESTING 

A. Before any insulation is installed or before piping is covered or enclosed all piping 

systems shall be tested and proved tight at not less than 1 1/2 times the maximum 

service pressure which the piping systems will be required to handle, unless 

otherwise specified. 

B. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Architect/Engineer and the building 

Owner or his representative. Any systems failing to meet the specified test 

requirements shall be corrected and retested until the test requirements are met. 

3.9 FLUSHING, DRAINING AND CLEANING PIPE SYSTEMS 

A. The Contractor shall flush water piping systems with water before placing them in 

operation. After systems are in operation and during the test period all strainer 

screens shall be removed and thoroughly cleaned. The Contractor shall notify the 

Architect/Engineer in writing when this requirement is to be accomplished. 

B. All domestic water lines shall be sterilized as described in Section 15402 - 

DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM of these specifications. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 15080 

PIPING SPECIALTIES 






A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all piping specialties necessary for 

satisfactory operation of the systems. 

B. Manual air vents shall be installed at all high points in heating and cooling water 

piping systems and as shown on the contract drawings. 

C. Valves shall be installed in all primary and secondary plumbing loops and branch 

lines feeding groups of fixtures in order to isolate such loops and branches without 

disrupting the service as a whole. 

D. Unions shall be installed where necessary to facilitate maintenance of pumps, valves, 

regulators and other specialties. 

E. Dielectric unions shall be installed wherever dissimilar metals are joined, except 

valves in closed loop piping systems. 



15060 - PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 








2.1 STRAINERS 

A. Mueller Steam Specialty model 352M cast bronze, threaded ends, y-strainer, 20 mesh 

stainless steel screens for water service and .033” dia. opening screens for steam 

service. Provide blow-off valves full size of strainer tapping with drain lines to 

nearest drain. 

PIPING SPECIALTIES 15080-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

B. Mueller Steam Specialty model 752, 250 SWP, flanged for size 2-1/2” and larger 

with 1/16” dia openings screen for water and 3/64” dia openings stainless steel screen 

for steam. Provide blow-off valves full size of strainer tapping with drain lines to 

nearest drain. 

2.2 PRESSURE GAUGES 

A. Marshalltown “Permagage”, Ashcroft “Duragage”, “Trerice No. 500X, or approved 

equal. Dials shall be 4-1/2” unless otherwise noted. Proved needle valve for each 

gauge, and syphon for each steam gauge. Pressure gauges shall be range noted on 

plans or at mid range of service (as shown on drawings). 

2.3 THERMOMETERS 

A. Where indicated on the drawings and the piping diagrams, thermometers shall be 

installed as manufactured by the H.O. Trerice Co., Mueller, Albert Weiss, or 

approved equal. Thermometers shall be provided with expansion heads so that 

thermometer will not break under extremes of temperature. Each thermometer shall 

be provided with a separable socket well which shall be place in the piping system. 

The well shall be the length required for accurate reading of the thermometer. 

2.4 AIR VENTS 

A. Manual air vents shall be 1/2” brass ball valves, Nibco No. T-585-70 or approved 

equal. 

2.5 THERMOMETER WELLS 

A. Machined brass test wells with screwed caps and chains. H.O. Trerice No. 5573 or 

5574 as required, or approved equal. 

B. Temperature and Pressure Test Plugs: Furnish pressure and temperature test plugs at 

all locations as shown on the drawings. These test plugs shall be furnished with a 

Nordel valve core and 1/2” NPT brass body complete with gasket cap. 

C. Furnish 4 each thermometers and pressure gauges for use by the Owner for checking 

temperatures and pressures. 

2.6 INSULATING UNIONS 

A. Insulating unions having a plastic insert for electrical isolation shall be similar to 

EPCO Sales Company. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 



A. All specialties shall be installed in accordance with the best standard practices and as 


B. Where thermometers or test fittings occur in insulated piping systems or on insulated 

equipment, extension necks shall be provided to extend beyond the insulation. 

C. Dielectric union shall be installed wherever piping of dissimilar metallic material is 

connected. Insulating unions are not required between bronze valve bodies and 

connecting steel pipe in closed loop systems such as heating and chilled water 

systems. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 15100 

VALVES 






A. All valves except lubricated plug valves and butterfly valves shall be manufactured 

by Nibco, Hammond, Lunkenheimer, Kennedy, Stockham, Walworth, Powell or 

Milwaukee. 

B. Lubricated plug valves shall be as manufactured by Rockwell, Milwaukee or 

Walworth. 

C. Butterfly valves shall be as manufactured by W.C. Norris, Centerline, Nibco, Demco, 

Grinell, Milwaukee or Keystone. 









1.4 IDENTIFICATION OF VALVES 

A. Each valve shall be provided with a stamped metal tag secured to the valve with 

metal chain. Tag shall indicate both the service and function of each valve. The 

Contractor shall furnish two prints of drawings showing floor plan for each floor with 

all valves accurately located and labeled. These drawings shall be neat and easily 

read. 


2.1 VALVES 

A. Domestic Water: 

VALVES 15100-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1. Gate Valves 2" and Under: Nibco No. T134, rising stem, ductile iron hand 

wheel, union bonnet, solid wedge disc, bronze body, Class 150 psi working 

pressure. 

2. Gate Valves 2-1/2" and Larger: Nibco No. F617-0, bronze trimmed, solid wedge 

disc, iron body, O.S. & Y., 125 psi working pressure. 

3. Swing Check 2" and Under: Nibco No. T433, swing type, Y-pattern, all bronze, 

renewable seat & disc, regrinding, 200 psi working pressure. 

4. Swing Check, 2-1/2" and Larger: Nibco No. F938-31, iron body, bolted bonnet, 

Class 150, bronze trimmed, check valves installed at discharge of pumps shall be 

non-slam type. 

5. Globe Valves 2" and under: Nibco No. T235, union bonnet, integral seat, Class 

150 bronze body with renewable disc. 

6. Globe Valves, 2-1/2" and Larger: Nibco No. 718-B, bolted bonnet, cast iron 

body, 125 psi working pressure 0.S. & Y., pattern bronze trimmed. 

7. Gate Valves 3” and Under for Copper Pipe: Nibco No. S134, union bonnet, 

Class 150 bronze rising stem wedge disc. 

8. Globe Valves 2” Under for Copper Pipe: Nibco S-235, Class 150, bronze union 

bonnet, integral seat, renewable seat and disc. 

9. Angle Valves 2” and Under Copper Pipe: Nibco T335, Class 150, Union Bonnet, 

integral seat, renewable seat & disc. 

10. Angle Valves 2 1/2” and Larger: Nibco F8180-B, Class 125, bolted bonnet cast 

iron, renewable seat & disc., bronze trim. 

11. Check Valve for 3” and under for Copper Pipe: Nibco S-433, Y-pattern, swing 

type, all bronze, renewable seat & disc. 

12. Manual Balancing Valves: 

a. 2” and Under: Nibco T-585-70 ball valve or Milwaukee Butterball butterfly 

valve with calibrated flow set handle. 

b. 2-1/2” and Larger: W.C. Norris butterfly valves with lever with infinite 

throttling position as specified below. 

13. Circuit Balancing Valves: Balance Valves shall be “Circuit Setter” balance 

valves as manufactured by Bell & Gossett. 

14. Automatic Balancing Valves: Shall be spring loaded, variable orifice type 

capable of maintaining present flow within 5% over an operating pressure 

VALVES 15100-2

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

differential of at least 14 times the minimum valve pressure requirement. 

Maximum controlled pressure differential shall be at least 75% of the system 

pump head. Valve shall be Griswold Automatic Flow Control Valve or 

approved equal. At Contractor’s option, automatic flow control valves may be 

used in 2” size and above in lieu of manual balancing valves. 

15. Butterfly Valves: Lug type butterfly valves, ductile iron or cast iron body, 

bronze blade, stainless steel shaft and with EPT liner for tight shutoff up to 150 

psi, bonded seat. Valves to be suitable for mounting between flanges, with lugs 

drilled and tapped so that pipe line can be disconnected with the valve still 

holding pressure. Valves 3” and smaller to have lever operators with infinite 

throttling positions. Valves 4” and larger to have worm gear and hand wheel 

manual operators. Butterfly valves may be used in lieu of gate valves for water 

service 2” and larger. Liner shall be suitable for -30 F to + 275 F. 

16. Ball Valves: 

a. 1/2” to 2”: Nibco No. T-585-70, two piece body, bronze, screwed ends, 

Teflon seats, straight through flow design. 

17. Lubricated Plug Valves: Rockwell Mfg. Co. “Permaturn” lubricated plug valves 

Fig. No. 143. Provide valve handle for each valve. Valves shall have tapered 

plugs with thermally bonded lubricated film. 

18. Water Pressure Relief Valves for makeup to heating and cooling systems, and 

relief for heating and cooling system, Bell & Gossett No. 480-75 unless 

otherwise noted. 

19. Relief Valves for hot water generators and heating converters. ASME labled 

temperature and pressure relief valves shall be installed on the hot water 

generator. Pressure relief valve shall be installed on the converter set for 30 psi. 

Valves shall be sized for the full heating capacity. Discharge from valves shall 

be piped to the nearest floor drain. 

20. Drain Valves: Nibco No. T134, 3” and smaller. 



A. All valves shall be installed in locations which will allow easy operation and facilitate 

maintenance. 

B. Gate and globe valves shall be installed with stems up. 

C. System balancing valves shall be installed where shown or required to balance 

waterflows to all system components. In general balancing valves shall be provided 

at the following locations: 

VALVES 15100-3

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1. Each pump discharge, lubricated plug valve. 

2. Each main branch circuit, circuit balancing valve. 

3. At each water coil, circuit balance valve. 


VALVES 15100-4

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 15160 


VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION 





A. Vibration Isolation: All vibration isolation equipment including flexible pipe and 

duct connections hangers and bases shall be under the direct supervision of the 

vibration isolation manufacturer's representative. This specification provides the 

necessary design criteria to avoid excessive noise or vibration due to the operation of 

machinery, connecting piping, ductwork or conduit. 


15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS 




1.4 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY 

A. The Contractor shall provide a submittal to the Architect/Engineer for approval prior 

to any installation of his equipment containing the following information: 

1. Catalog cuts and data sheets on specific vibration isolators to be utilized showing 

compliance with this specification and the recommendation of the isolator 

manufacturer as to suitability for the specific service. 

2. An itemized list showing the items of equipment, piping and ductwork to be 

isolated, the isolator type and model number selected, isolator loading and 

deflection, and reference to specific drawings showing equipment frame 

construction where applicable. 

3. Drawings showing equipment frame construction for each machine, including 

dimensions, structural member sizes, support point locations, etc. 

4. Written approval of the frame design to be used, obtained from the equipment 

manufacturer. 

VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION 15160-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

5. Drawings showing methods of suspension, support, guides, etc., for piping and 

ductwork. 

6. Drawings showing methods for isolation of piping and ductwork piercing walls, 

slabs, beams, etc. 

7. The Contractor shall bring to the Architect/Engineer's attention prior to 

installation any conflict with other trades which will result in unavoidable 

contact to the equipment, piping, etc., described herein, due to inadequate space. 

Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the 

responsible contractor's expense. 

8. The Contractor shall bring to the Architect/Engineer’s attention any 

discrepancies between the specifications and field conditions, changes required 

due to specific equipment selection, etc., prior to installation. Corrective work 

necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the expense of the 

Contractor. 

9. The Contractor shall obtain inspection and approval from the Architect/Engineer 

of any installation to be covered or enclosed prior to such closure. 

10. The Contractor shall obtain written and/or oral instructions from the vibration 

isolation manufacturer as to the proper installation and adjustment of vibration 

isolation devices; alternatively the equipment may be installed by the vibration 

isolation manufacturer. 

11. The Contractor shall correct, at no additional cost, all installations which are 

deemed defective in workmanship or materials by the Architect/Engineer. 


2.1 MANUFACTURERS: Vibration isolation equipment shall be as manufactured by 

Flexonics, Kinetics, Mason Industries, Vibration Eliminator, Co., or approved equal. 

2.2 ISOLATOR TYPES 

A. SPRING TYPE 

1. All spring isolators shall have either known undeflected heights or other 

markings so that, after adjustment, when carrying their load the deflection under 

load can be verified, thus determining that the load is within the proper range of 

the device and that the correct degree of vibration isolation is being provided 

according to the design. 

2. All spring isolators shall operate in the linear portion of their load versus 

deflection curve. Load versus deflection curves shall be furnished by the 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

manufacturer and must be linear over a deflection range 50% above the design 

deflection. 

3. The ratio of lateral to vertical stiffness shall not be less than 1.0 or greater than 

1.6. 

4. The vertical natural frequency for each support point, based upon the load per 

isolator, and isolator stiffness, shall not differ by more than plus or minus 10%. 

5. Type MS shall be bare spring type (without housings or snubbers) equipped with 

leveling bolts and with two layers of ribbed or waffled neoprene pad separated 

by a 1/16 " galvanized steel plate under the base plate. 

6. Type HS shall be suspension hanger having a steel frame and spring element in 

series with a neoprene pad or washer. The isolator shall be designed so hanger 

rod may be misaligned 15 relative to the vertical without touching hanger box 

frame. 

B. NEOPRENE PAD TYPE 

1. Type MN shall be a neoprene isolator unit having a minimum static deflection of 

1/4" and show hardness of 40 to 65 after minimum aging. 

C. Flexible pipe connectors shall consist of a minimum 12 inch length of metal 

reinforced or corrugated flexible metal hose of appropriate pressure and temperature 

rating with end connections suitably for the adjacent piping system. Connectors shall 

be Flexonics type MMT FLG or Vibrasorber or approved equal. 

D. Flexible duct connectors shall be neoprene coated glass fabric, ventglass or equal. 

See Section 15800 AIR DISTRIBUTION. 

2.3 EQUIPMENT FRAMES AND BASES 

A. GENERAL: 

1. Equipment frames and base shall be furnished and installed where specifically 

shown on the drawings and at other locations recommended by the isolator 

manufacturer. In general rigid steel frames will be required for base mounted 

pumps, 30 HP and smaller, air handling units, some fans 30 HP and smaller, 

water chillers, cooling towers. Concrete inertia bases shall be furnished and 

installed for base mounted pumps 40 HP and larger and fans 40 HP and larger. 

B. RIGID STEEL FRAMES 

1. Mounting frame and/or brackets shall be provided to carry the load of the 

equipment without causing mechanical distortion or stress to the equipment. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2. The mounting frames shall consist of welded wide flange of channel structural 

steel with welded brackets to accept the isolators. The section depth of the frame 

member shall be greater than 1/10 the length of the longest frame member. 


3.1 GENERAL 

A. Location: Vibration isolation equipment shall be installed at the following locations 

and at other locations recommended by the isolator manufacturer or required to 

reduce transmitted vibrations to a level acceptable to the Contracting Officer and 

Owner. 

1. All reciprocating or rotating equipment such as fans, AHU's, forced draft boilers, 

chiller, cooling towers, furnaces, pumps and compressors except as follows: 

a. Equipment installed on slab on grade construction. 

b. AHU's having factory installed internal spring isolation at fans. 

c. Inline pumps having motors 1/2 HP or smaller. 

2. At all connections between rotating equipment and piping or ductwork. 

3. All piping and ductwork within mechanical equipment rooms or within 10 feet of 

connections to rotating or reciprocating equipment. 

B. The Contractor shall install equipment and piping avoiding rigid contact with the 

building structure. 

C. The Contractor shall coordinate his work with other trades to assure rigid contact 

between the building structure and mechanical equipment and piping is minimized. 


A. LARGE EQUIPMENT 

1. Objective: Installation of vibration isolators shall not result in any change of 

position of equipment or piping which would result in stresses in piping 

connections or misalignment of shafts or bearings. In order to meet this 

objective, equipment and piping shall be maintained in a rigid position during 

installation. Equipment shall be shimmed into final, loaded position prior to 

making piping connections. Equipment load shall not be transferred to the 

isolator until the installation is complete and the equipment is under full 

operational load. This is particularly important where equipment installation 

weight is substantially different from operating weight such as cooling towers, 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

chillers, boilers, air washers and evaporative coolers which operate with 

substantial water content. 

2. The machine to be isolated shall be supported by a structural steel frame or 

concrete inertia base. 

3. Brackets shall be provided to accommodate the isolator and provide a 

mechanical stop. The vertical position and size of the bracket shall be specified 

by the isolator manufacturer. 

4. The operating clearance at steel frames between the bracket and the pad or floor 

shall be 3/8 inch, plus or minus 1/16 inch. The minimum operating clearance 

between the frame and the housekeeping pad or floor shall be one inch. 

5. The frame shall be placed in position and the brackets supported temporarily by 

3/8 inch shims prior to the installation of the machine or isolators. 

6. The isolators shall be installed without raising the machine and frame assembly. 

7. After the entire system installation is completed and under full operational load, 

the isolator shall be adjusted so that the load is transferred from the shims to the 

isolator. When all isolators are properly adjusted the shims will be barely free 

and shall be removed. Thereafter, the shims will be used as a gauge to check 

that the 3/8 inch clearance is maintained so that the system will remain free of 

stress. 

B. PIPE AND DUCT HANGERS 

1. General: Vertical rise and horizontally supported piping connected to 

reciprocating or rotating equipment are included herein. Domestic water and fire 

standpipe systems are excluded from this section of the specifications. 

2. Pipe and duct hangers shall be suspended from spring isolators within 

mechanical equipment rooms and within 10 feet of connections to rotating or 

reciprocating equipment. 

3. The isolators shall be installed with the isolator hanger box as close as possible 

to the structure. 

4. The isolators shall be suspended from substantial structural members, not from 

slab diaphragms unless specifically approved. 

5. Hanger rods shall be aligned to clear the hanger box. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

6. Horizontal suspended pipe 2" and smaller shall be suspended by HS isolator type 

with a minimum 1.0 inch static deflection. Pipes larger than 2" shall be the same 

except with a minimum of 1-1/2" static deflection. 

7. Horizontal pipe floor supported at slab shall be supported via Type MS with a 

minimum static deflection of 1.0 inches. 

8. Vertical riser pipe supports shall utilize Type MS mounts selected for a 

minimum static deflection of 1.5 inches. 

9. Vertical riser guides, if required, shall utilize Type MN mounts to avoid direct 

contact of piping with building. 

10. Pipe sway braces where required shall utilize two neoprene elements (Type MN) 

to accommodate tension and compression forces. 

C. PIPE CLAMPS: 

1. All piping whether or not spring isolated hangers are used, shall be supported 

with a resilient wrapping or clamp system employing a resilient element of wool 

felt, neoprene or other suitable material. 

D. Flexible pipe connectors shall be installed between each piece of rotating or 

reciprocating piece of equipment and the distribution piping system. 

E. Flexible duct connectors shall be installed between each unit containing a fan and the 

distribution ductwork. Allow at least 1" slack in fabric connectors. Fabric may be 

attached to ductwork by folding into the sheet metal or attaching with metal flanges. 

F. Flexible duct connectors for kitchen hood exhaust systems shall be slip joint type 

with high temperature resilient packing material. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 15180 

PIPING INSULATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Furnish and Install: 

1. Piping insulation. 

2. Jackets and accessories. 

B. Related Documents: 

1. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Special 

Conditions and the General Requirements apply to the work specified in this 

section. 

2. Section 15010- General Mechanical Requirements. 

C. Insulation furnished under this specification shall comply with all requirements of the 

State Energy Code and the recommendations of the latest edition of ASHRAE Std. 90 

and these specifications. The more stringent of these shall be the standard for the 

work provided under these specifications. 

D. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, 

accessories, equipment and materials necessary for installation of all piping, and 

mechanical equipment insulation systems. This includes but is not limited to: 


1. Thermal Insulation 

a. Domestic hot water piping 

b. Refrigerant piping 

c. Heat exchangers 

2. Condensation Prevention Insulation 

a. Domestic cold water piping 

b. Roof drain and overflow piping and roof drains 

c. Cooling coil condensate piping 

A. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 

PIPING INSULATION 15180-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

B. ASTM C177 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission 

Properties by Means of Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus. 

C. ASTM C195 - Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement. 

D. ASTM C335 - Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation. 

E. ASTM C449 - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing 

Cement. 

F. ASTM C518 - Test Methods for Steady-State Heat Flux, Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 

G. ASTM C533 - Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. 

H. ASTM C534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet 

and Tubular Form. 

I. ASTM C547 - Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. 

J. ASTM C585 - Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal 

Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System). 

K. ASTM C921 - Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 

L. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 


A. Exposed Location: Exposed in mechanical rooms, rooms with finished walls or 

ceilings, and pipe chase between toilet rooms and equipment rooms. 

B. Concealed Location: Located in furred spaces, attics, crawl spaces, above suspended 

ceilings in finished or unfinished rooms, or all other locations not exposed to view. 

C. Cold Piping: Shall include domestic water and other piping with surface 

temperatures less than 60F. 

D. Hot Piping: Domestic hot water, supply and return and other piping with surface 

temperatures greater than 105F. 

E. Exterior Locations: All locations exposed, unexposed above grade or below grade 

beyond the building floor, wall or roof line of the structure or building 

F. Location and Insulation Requirements: 

1. Cold Water, including Non-potable Water (NPW): Insulate as follows: 

a. All piping above ceilings and in walls. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 


b. Entire system except for stubouts to fixtures. 

2. Domestic Hot: Insulate as follows: 

a. Entire system except for stubouts to fixtures. 

1) Chilled Water Supply and Return and Heating Water Supply and Return: 

a) All piping above ceilings, drops in wall and in mechanical rooms. 

2) Roof drains and over flows: 

a) All piping in building, ceilings, walls 

3) K Factors: All K Factors shown in this Specification are Expressed in 

BTU-in/hr.-ft 2 -F. 

A. Comply with Section 15010. 

B. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each 

service and location. 

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensures 

acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 


A. Qualifications of Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application 

with five years minimum experience. 

B. Regulatory Requirements Fire Hazard Classification: Insulation shall have a 

composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive to secure jacket or facing) fire 

hazard rating as tested by ASTM E-84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 not to exceed 25 flame 

spread, 50 fuel contribution, and 50 smoke developed. Materials shall be labeled 

accordingly. 


A. Compliance: Comply with Section 15010. Deliver materials to job site in original 

non-broken factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's density and thickness. 

Store in a warm, dry location. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS 

A. Storage Environment: Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by 

manufacturers of adhesive and insulation while in storage. 

B. Environmental Requirements: Perform work at ambient and equipment temperatures 

as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 

C. Protection: Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage 

before, during and after installation. Repair or replace any such insulation or 

covering damaged prior to final acceptance of work. 

D. Application Surfaces: Surface shall be dry, free of dust, oil, construction residues or 

other foreign materials before insulation is applied. Piping joints shall be dry, leak 

free and tested before application of insulation occurs. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 

1. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation. 

2. Knauf. 

3. Certainteed. 

4. Pittsburgh-Corning. 

5. Manville. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Glass Fiber: 

1. Insulation: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible. 

a. 'k' value: ASTM C335, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 

1) K values shall conform to the following @ 75F 

a) Heating water to 250F: .28 

b) Water 40F to 55F: .24 

c) Domestic water 105F or greater: .24 

b. Minimum Service Temperature: -20F. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2.3 JACKETS 

c. Maximum Service Temperature: +450F. 

d. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. 

e. Insulation shall be constructed 3.5 lb. minimum density. 

2. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 

a. White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized 

film. 

b. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm inches. 

c. Secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. 

A. A.PVC Plastic 

1. Jacket: ASTM C921, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, 

off white color. 

a. Minimum Service Temperature: -40F. 

b. Maximum Service Temperature: +150F. 

c. Moisture Vapor Transmission : ASTM E96; 0.002 percent by volume. 

d. Maximum Flame Spread: ASTM E84: 25. 

e. Maximum Smoke Developed: ASTM E84; 50. 

f. Thickness: 20 mil. 

g. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. 

2. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation. 

B. Canvas Jacket; UL listed. 

1. Fabric: ASTM C921, 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire 

retardant lagging adhesive. 

2. Lagging Adhesive: Compatible with insulation. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

3. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209. 

a. Thickness: 20 mil inch sheet. 

b. Finish: Smooth. 

c. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints with 2 inch laps. 

d. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped covers with factory attached protective 

liners. 

e. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum. 

C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 

1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet. 

2. Finish: Smooth. 

3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50mm) laps. 

4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached 

protective liner. 

5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch (0.38mm) thick aluminum. 

D. Stainless Steel Jacket: Type 304 stainless steel. 

1. Thickness: 0.016 inch (0.40mm) 

2. Finish: Smooth. 

3. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10mm) wide; 0.016 inch (0.40mm) thick stainless 

steel. 



A. Inspect work in conformance with Section 15010. 


A. Pipe Testing: Testing of piping shall be completed and leaks repaired prior to 

application of insulation. Surfaces shall be clean and dry before proceeding. 

B. Installation: Install materials after piping has been tested and approved. See Section 

15010. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

C. Surface Cleaning: Clean surfaces for adhesives. 


A. Pipe Insulation: 

1. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install materials according to manufacturer's 

instructions. 

2. Finished Surface Temperature: Insulation thickness shall conform to those 

recommended ASHRAE 90A, latest edition, unless otherwise specified. 

Thickness of insulation shall be sufficient to keep surface temperatures below 

115 F. 

3. Continuity: Apply insulation tightly over clean, dry surfaces with sections or 

edges firmly butted together. Make insulation continuous through sleeves or 

openings in walls and floors. 

4. Name Plates: Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal 

insulation around such. 

5. Supports: Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions. 

Locate insulation or cover seams in least visible locations. 

6. Inserts: Provide an insert, not less than 6-inches long, of same thickness and 

contour as adjoining insulation, between support shield and piping, but under the 

finish jacket, on piping 2-inches diameter or larger, to prevent insulation from 

compressing at support points. Inserts shall be cork, hardwood or other heavy 

density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory 

fabricated inserts may be used with field fabricated insulation value equal to 

insulation approved by the Project Engineer. 

7. Enclosures: Do not insulate hot water heating pipe within radiation enclosures. 

8. Flanges: On insulated piping without vapor barrier and piping conveying fluids 

140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel 

and seal ends of insulation at such locations. 

9. Equipment Fittings and Valve Coverings: Insulate all equipment, fittings and 

valves. Terminate insulation neatly with insulating and finishing cement 

troweled on bevel. 

10. Preformed Fittings Locations: All fittings and valves shall be insulated with 

preformed fiberglass for fittings, mitered sections of pipe insulation or fiberglass 

blanket insulation of equal thickness to the adjacent pipe insulation. Cover the 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

fittings, valves and insulation with preformed PVC jacket. Close jacket with 

stainless steel tacks and compatible adhesive. 

11. Radiation Barrier: When insulating hot pipe fittings, a layer of kitchen-type 

aluminum foil shall be applied over the first fiber glass insert applied, making 

sure the aluminum foil is extended over the adjacent pipe insulation. A second 

fiber glass insert shall then be applied over the foil with a vapor seal at all the 

aluminum foil edges. Insulation thickness shall be such that the surface 

temperature shall not exceed 115F. 

12. Expansion Devices: On insulated piping with vapor barrier; insulate all 

equipment, fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and 

expansion joints. 

13. Fasteners: Avoid the use of staples on vapor barrier jackets. Seal vapor barrier 

penetrations with white vapor barrier finish and adhesive. 

14. Adhesive Limitations: Apply adhesives to not exceed the coverage recommended 

by the manufacturer. 

15. Wall, Floor and Ceiling Penetrations: Continue insulation with vapor barrier 

through penetrations including walls, floors and ceilings. 

16. Enclosure: All insulation ends shall be firmly butted and secured with minimum 

3 inch wide butt strips. Exposed end of pipe insulation shall be sealed with 

vapor barrier mastic. 

17. Repairs: Repair separation of joints or cracking of insulation due to thermal 

movement or poor workmanship. 

18. Service Access: When equipment with insulation requires periodical opening 

for maintenance, repair, or cleaning, install insulation in such a manner that it 

can be easily removed and replaced without damage. 

19. Unless preinsulated pipe is used, all insulation below grade shall be polyurethane 

spray foam covering suitable for use in wet environments without degradation. 

Piping shall be supported by a rigid styrofoam board 4" thick which exceeds the 

width of the pipes laid in the trench parallel to the pipe. All pipes shall be 

wrapped with two wraps of 1 1/2" thick fiberglass blanket before spraying. 

Spray foam shall be applied to assure a 2" MINIMUM coverage. Insulation shall 

be coated with Deer-O Foam Cap W-256 applied at the rate of one gallon per 

100 square ft. or vapor barrier protection with a perm rating of 0.0019. 

20. A complete moisture and vapor seal shall be provided on cold surfaces where 

vapor barrier jackets or coatings are required. Anchors, hangers and other 

projections shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. For heat 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

traced piping, insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material, 

thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and 

heat tracer. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of 

horizontal piping. 

21. Insulation shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by workmen regularly 

engaged in this type of work. Insulation shall not be applied until all surfaces are 

clean and dry and until inspection and release for insulation application. 

B. Jackets: 

1. Indoor, Concealed Applications: Insulated pipes conveying fluids above 

ambient temperature shall have standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, 

factory-applied or field-applied. Finish fittings, joints, and valves with 

premolded PVC jackets secured with stainless steel tacks. The precut insulation 

shall be held in place by copper wire or hemp twine, and be removable without 

damage to the insulation or jacket. Leave surfaces clean and ready for painting. 

2. Indoor, Concealed Applications: Insulated dual-temperature pipes or pipes 

conveying fluids below ambient temperature shall have vapor barrier jackets, 

factory-applied or field-applied. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded 

insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe, and finish with 

premolded PVC jackets. 

3. Indoor, Exposed Applications: Mechanical Equipment Rooms, all insulated 

piping to be finished with aluminum jacket secured with metal jacket bands. 

4. Indoor, Exposed Applications: Same as Indoor, Concealed Applications except 

that in addition the insulation shall be covered with an aluminum jacket secured 

with metal jacket bands. 

5. Exterior Applications: Same as Indoor, Exposed Applications plus connect with 

a modified S lock equal to Premetco “Loc-Jack” Z-Crimp, Factory or Field 

installed. All seams shall be sealed with silocone caulking and have seams 

oriented So that the jacketing will shed water & not tend to trap and enter rain 

water. 


A. Fittings and Valves Insulation: 

1. Premolded Fittings: All insulated pipe fittings shall be insulated with 20 mil 

PVC Zeston one piece premolded insulated fittings wherever possible. If Zeston 

fittings are not available for the use required, comply with the following 

paragraph #2. Insulate fittings with fiberglass tightly wrapped with copper wire 

or heavy hemp twine to within 1/4" of thickness of adjoining copper wire or 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

insulation, finished with 1/4" of insulating cement troweled flush with pipe 

insulation. A tack coat of mastic vapor barrier Foster 60-25 or 26 to 1/16 inch 

thickness or equal shall be applied to fittings and valves. Apply 6 oz. fiberglass 

canvas jacket to build-up (not PVC) fitting band valve insulation. Cement laps 

thoroughly with Foster 81-42 or 30-36 adhesive. 

B. Perm Rating Vapor Barrier Mastic Coatings: 

1. Perm rating not more than 0.25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E-96, 

Procedure A Fire Retardant. 

C. Adhesives, Sealers, Facings, and Vapor Barrier Coatings: 

3.5 SCHEDULE 

1. Compatible with materials to which applied, and shall not corrode, soften, or 

otherwise attach the pipe or insulation materials in either the wet or dry state. 

Use only adhesives, sealers, facings, and vapor barrier coatings recommended by 

the approved manufacturers of insulation materials. 

Service Pipe Size Thickness 

HW, HWC 1/2" to 1 ¼ " 1 inch 

HW, HWC 1-1/2" and Larger 1-1/2 inch 

NPW & Cooling All sizes 

1 inch 

Condensate 

CW All sizes 1 inch 

RD & OF 

Steam & Condensate 

All sizes 


1 inch 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 15190 

DUCTWORK INSULATION 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Furnish and Install 

1. Ductwork insulation. 

2. Duct liner. 

3. Insulation jackets. 

B. Related Documents 

1. General Provisions. 

a. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special 

Conditions and the General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this 

section 

2. Section 09900 - Painting: Painting insulation jackets. 

3. Section 15010 - General Mechanical Requirements. 

4. Section 15800 - Air Distribution. 

C. Description of Work 

1. Work Included: The work included by this specification consists of furnishing 

all labor, accessories, equipment and materials necessary for the installation of 

all insulation for ductwork and mechanical equipment in accordance with the 

specification and applicable drawings. This includes but is not limited to: 

a. All supply ductwork 

b. Return ductwork not within the conditioned space 

c. All ductwork in the mechanical room 

d. Outside air inlet ductwork that is within the conditioned space. 

e. Mechanical equipment not factory insulated. 

DUCTWORK INSULATION 15190-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2. Do not internally insulate ductwork from evaporative coolers unless specifically 

indicated on the drawings. 

3. Exterior duct wrap insulation with vapor barrier shall be used on all outdoor air 

ductwork within conditioned spaces. 

4. Supply and return air ductwork shall be insulated with duct liner except in air 

handling systems having air washers or humidifiers. Where air washers or 

humidifiers are used, exterior duct insulation shall be used. Where duct liner is 

used, dimensions shown on the drawings shall be clear inside duct liner. 

D. Testing: 


1. All ductwork and mechanical equipment shall be tested for leakage and approved 

by the Architect/Engineer before any insulation is applied. The insulation 

contractor shall have this verified in writing before beginning work. 

A. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 

B. ASTM C518 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission 

Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 

C. ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation. 

D. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 

E. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 

F. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 

G. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 

H. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards 1985 Ed. - Metal and Flexible. 

I. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 


A. Exposed Location: Exposed in mechanical rooms or rooms with finished walls or 

ceilings. 

B. Concealed Location: Located in pipe chase, furred spaces, attics, crawl spaces, above 

suspended ceilings in finished and unfinished rooms, or all other locations not 

exposed to view. 

C. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

D. K Factors: All K Factors shown in the following specifications are expressed in 

BTU-in/hr-sq.ft-F. 



B. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each 

service, and locations. 

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable 

workmanship and installation standards will be achieved. 


A. Regulatory Requirements Fire Hazard Classification: Insulation shall have a 

composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive to secure jacket or facing) fire 

hazard rating as tested by ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 not to exceed 25 flame 

spread, 50 fuel contribution, and 50 smoke development. Materials shall be labeled 

accordingly. 

B. Certifications of Insulation and Covering Materials: UL listed; flame spread/fuel 

contributed/smoke development rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, 

NFPA 255, and UL 723. 

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS 

A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with 

minimum five years of documented experience. 


A. General Requirements: Comply with Section 15010. Deliver materials to job site in 

original non-broken factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's density and 

thickness. Store in a warm, dry location and protect against dirt, water, chemical, and 

mechanical damage. 


A. Manufacturer's Requirements: Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions 

required by manufacturers of adhesive and insulation while in storage. 

B. Environmental Requirements: Perform work at ambient and equipment temperatures 

as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 

C. Protection: Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage 

before, during and after installation. Repair or replace any such insulation or 

covering damaged prior to final acceptance of work. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1.9 WARRANTY 

A. General: Satisfy requirements of Section 15010. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 

1. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation. 

2. Knauf. 

3. Certainteed. 

4. Manville. 

2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS 

A. Glass Fiber, Flexible: 

1. Insulation: ASTM C-553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 

a. 'K' value: ASTM C518, of 0.29 at 75 degrees F. 

b. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F. 

c. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume. 

d. Density: 0.75 lb/cu ft. 

2. Vapor Barrier Tape: 

a. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminum film. 

3. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage. 

B. Glass Fiber, Rigid: 

1. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket. 



c. Maximum moisture abortion: 0.20 percent by volume. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

d. Density: 0.75 lb/cu ft. 

2. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 

a. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminum film. 

b. Moisture vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.04 perm. 

c. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. 

3. Vapor Barrier Tape: 

a. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminum film, 

with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. 

C. Glass Fiber Duct Liner, Flexible 

1. Insulation: ASTM C-553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 



c. Density: 2.0 lb/cu ft. 

d. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 4000 ft/min. 

2. Adhesive 

a. Waterproof, fire-retardant type. 

3. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head. 

D. Glass Fiber Duct Liner, Rigid: 

1. Insulation: ASTM C-612; flexible, noncombustible. 



c. Density: 2.0 lb/cu ft. 

d. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 4000 ft/min. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2.3 JACKETS 

2. Adhesive: 

a. Waterproof, fire-retardant, type. 

3. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head. 

A. Canvas Jackets: UL listed. 

1. Fabric: 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant lagging 

adhesive. 

2. Lagging Adhesive: Compatible with insulation. 

B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209. 

1. Thickness: 0.025-inch sheet. 

2. Finish: Smooth or Corrugated. 

3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2-inch laps. 

4. Fittings: 0.016-inch thick die shaped fittings covers with factory attached 

protective liner. 

5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8-inch wide, 0.016-inch thick aluminum. 

6. Flexible glass fiber with fire resistant coating facing air stream; ASTM 

E-84/ASTM C518-70; 'k' value of 0.25 maximum at 75 F, 2 lb. density, one-inch 

thickness. 

C. Type C: Neoprene faced, rigid glass fiberboard, 2 lb. density, ASTM E- 84/ASTM 

C-518; 'k' value of 0.23 at 75 F; one-inch thickness. 

D. Jackets: 

1. Interior Applications 

a. Vapor Barrier Jackets: Kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier with self-sealing 

adhesive joints. 

2. Exterior Applications 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 


a. Sheet metal enclosure of corrugated aluminum, 0.02 in. thick, with metal 

jacket bands: 3/8 inch wide, 0.016 thick aluminum; or stick clips with 

smooth finish. 

A. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage, self-adhesive pad and press on washer 

head. 

B. Joint Tape: Glass fiber cloth, open mesh. 

C. Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistive to ASTM E-84 or NFPA 255 or UL 723. 



A. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials. 

B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. 


A. General 

1. Applications: Apply insulation tightly over clean, dry surfaces with sections or 

edges firmly butted together or lapped. Make insulation continuous through 

sleeves or openings in walls or floors. 

2. Vapor Barriers: Seal vapor barriers and run continuous throughout for heated 

and cooled supply air ductwork. 

3. Finishes: Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions. 

Locate insulation or cover seams in least visible locations. 

4. Installation Repairs: Repair separation of joints or cracking of insulation due to 

thermal movement or poor workmanship. 

5. Exterior Locations: Re-cover with corrugated aluminum jacket attached with 

suitable aluminum rivets. 

6. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's 

instructions. 

7. Thermal Units: Provide insulation with vapor barrier on ductwork downstream 

of fan coil terminal units. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

8. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate factory insulated equipment. 

9. Attachment: Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving, 

scoring, and bevelling insulation, if necessary. Secure insulation to equipment 

with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands. 

10. Cement and Fillers: Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding 

compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor barrier 

cement. 

11. Placards: Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal 

insulation around such nameplate or any operable device. 

12. Service Access: When equipment with insulation requires periodical opening for 

maintenance, repair, or cleaning, install insulation in such a manner that it can be 

easily removed and replaced without damage. 

13. Insulation shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by workmen regularly 

engaged in this type of work. Insulation shall not be applied until all surfaces are 

clean and dry and until inspection and release for insulation application. 

14. A complete moisture and vapor seal shall be provided on cold surfaces where 

vapor barrier jackets or coatings are required. Anchors, hangers and other 

projections shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. 

15. Duct insulation shall be continuous through walls and floor openings except 

where walls or floors are required to be fire stopped or required to have a fire 

resistance ratings. 

B. Locations for Insulation: 

1. External: Outside of ducts not internally lined, located interior of building, in 

mechanical room. 

a. Rectangular: 1-1/2-inch thick glass fiber insulation. Fasten to duct with 

weld pins or stock clips spaced 12 inches to 18 inches o.c. with minimum of 

two rows per side of duct. Secure with washers firmly embedded in 

insulation. Seal joints, breaks and punctures in cold air ductwork wire 

fire-retardant vapor adhesive reinforced with a three-inch wide strip similar 

to that of facing. 

b. Round: Two-inches thick glass fiber blanket duct wrap. Adhere insulation 

to duct with fire retardant adhesive applied in bands around the duct. Butt 

tight with facing overlapping all joints at least two inches. Seal cold air 

ductwork with fire retardant vapor barrier adhesive. Seal breaks and 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

punctures in the facing of cold air ductwork with vapor barrier tape sealed 

with fire retardant adhesive. 

2. For exterior applications, provide insulation with vapor barrier jacket w/2” thick 

rigid insulation w/minimum R-value of 8.9. Cover with caulked aluminum 

jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal duct section. 

3. Insulation below grade shall be polyurethane spray foam, suitable for use in wet 

environments without degradation and having the following properties. 

C. Duct Liner 

a. All duct shall be supported on 2” thick rigid polystyrene board exceeding the 

width of the duct. Spray foam shall be applied to assure a 2” MINIMUM 

coverage. Insulation shall be coated with Deer-O Foam Cap W-256 applied 

at the rate of one gallon per 100 square ft. for vapor barrier protection with a 

perm rating of 0.00019. 

1. Duct liner shall be installed in accordance with Figures 6-1 through 607 of the 

SMACNA High Velocity Duct Manual and the Manufacturer’s 




G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 15402 

DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS 






A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the Domestic Water System as shown on the 

drawings including specialties shown or called out in the fixture and/or equipment list 

and as necessary for satisfactory operation of the system. 







1.4 STERILIZATION 

A. All domestic water piping shall be sterilized as described in Part 3 of this section. 


2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 

A. Pipe and pipe fittings shall be as described in Section 15060 - PIPE AND PIPE 

FITTINGS. 

B. All piping in any utilities tunnel shall have welded or silver brazed joints. 

2.2 SHOCK ABSORBERS 

A. Shock absorbers and/or air cushions shall be installed where shown on the drawings. 

Shock absorbers shall be equal to Zurn Z-1700, Diatrol Series 500 or approved equal 

sized for the system being protected. 

DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS 15402-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 



A. The installation shall conform to the requirements of Section 15010 - GENERAL 

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, and Section 15060 - PIPE AND PIPE 

FITTINGS. 

B. Insulating couplings shall be furnished and installed at all connections between 

copper and steel pipe to prevent electrolysis. 

C. Each water service main, branch main, riser and branch to a group of fixtures shall be 

valved. Stop valves shall be provided at each fixture. 

3.2 STERILIZATION 

A. Domestic Water lines shall be sterilized as follows: Chlorine shall be applied to 

provide a solution of not less than 250 PPM. The chlorinating material shall be 

introduced into the waterline in a manner approved by the Architect/Engineer. The 

solution shall be circulated if provided with pumps and all valves in the line shall be 

operated several times during the contact period. After a contact period of no less 

than eight (8) hours the system shall be flushed with clean water until the residual 

chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 PPM. 

B. The sterilization procedure shall be witnessed by the Architect/Engineer and Owner. 

3.3 TESTS 

A. General: All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Architect/Engineer or his 

representative. Any systems failing to meet the specified test requirements shall be 

corrected and retested until the test requirements are met. 

B. Water Systems: The complete water systems shall be hydrostatically tested at a 

pressure of 150 psi and shall show no loss in pressure for a period of one hour. 


DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS 15402-2

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 15403 

ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 






A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the roof drainage system as shown on the 

drawings and/or listed in the fixture schedule and as necessary for satisfactory roof 

drainage. 







A. Pipe and pipe fittings shall be as described in Section 15060 - PIPE AND PIPE 

FITTINGS. 

2.2 SPLASH BLOCKS 

A. Splash blocks shall be provided where required to prevent erosion of the soil and 

shall be sized to cover the splash area. 

2.3 OVERFLOW DRAINS 

A. Where roof drains are required, overflow drains having the same size as the roof 

drains shall be installed with the inlet flow line located 2" above the low point of the 

roof unless overflow scuppers are provided. 

B. Overflow Drains shall be piped separated from the roof drains to discharge or 

underground storm sewer connection. 

ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 15403-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 



A. Installation shall conform to the requirements of Section 15010 - GENERAL 

PROVISIONS, and Section 15060 - PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS. 

B. All roof drainage piping shall be carefully coordinated with ductwork and piping 

shown on the mechanical plans and routed so that no conflict occurs. 

C. All roof drainage piping shall be carefully coordinated with the structural work and 

any conflicts shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer. 

3.2 TESTS 

A. Roof drainage piping shall be tested by filling the system to the highest level with no 

drop in water level for a period of 15 minutes. 


ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 15403-2

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 15404 

SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEMS 






A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the soil and waste piping system as shown on 

the drawings including specialties shown or called out in the equipment list and as 

necessary for satisfactory operation of the system. 




1.4 REQUIREMENTS 

A. See Sections 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS and 15060 - PIPE AND PIPE 

FITTINGS for general requirements. 

B. Furnish and install all concrete, grout and other required materials to fill all blockouts 

and/or sleeves left open for this Subcontractor's convenience or for the installation of 

this work. 



A. The pipe and pipe fittings shall be as described in Section 15060 - PIPE AND PIPE 

FITTINGS. 

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS 

A. Drains shall be Zurn, Josam or Smith and shall be equal to those specified on the 

drawings. 

2.3 FLOOR SINKS 

A. Drains shall be Zurn, Josam or Smith and shall be equal to those specified on the 

drawings. 

SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEMS 15404-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2.4 CLEANOUTS 

A. Cleanouts shall be as manufactured by Zurn, Josam or Smith and shall be of the same 

size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than four inches will not be required. 

Cleanouts installed in connection with cast iron soil pipe shall consist of a long 

sweep, quarterbend or one or two eighth bends extended to an easily accessible place, 

or as indicated on the drawings. 

B. Cleanouts in finish floors shall be of the type made to match the floor and/or 

covering. All exposed metal shall be polished or chrome plated brass. 



A. Installation shall conform to Section 15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL 

REQUIRMENTS, and Section 15060 - PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS. 

B. Flashings: Vent pipes shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with sheet lead 

flashing. Flashing shall weigh at least four pounds per square foot, shall be 24 inches 

square and shall be turned up around the pipe and into the top of the pipe. Vent pipes 

shall extend at least 12 inches above roof. 

C. Traps: Each fixture and piece of equipment connecting to the drainage system shall 

be equipped with a trap. Each trap shall be placed as near to the fixture as possible 

and no fixture shall be double trapped. 

D. Floor Drains: All floor drains shall be installed with grates square with the building 

lines. 

3.2 TESTS 

A. The entire sanitary system shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of the 

State Plumbing Code, all local codes and ordinances, and the Uniform Plumbing 

Code. 


SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEMS 15404-2

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 15450 

PLUMBING FIXTURES 


1.1 SCOPE 

A. Plumbing fixtures shall be supplied, set and connected as shown on plans. Fixtures 

shall be protected from damage during construction and shall be thoroughly cleaned 

of all tape, paint and adhesive prior to final acceptance. 


2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES 

A. Plumbing fixtures shall be as manufactured by KOHLER, AMERICAN 

STANDARD, ELJER or CRANE and shall be as scheduled on the drawings. 

B. Flush valves shall be as manufactured by Zurn, Delany or Sloan. 

2.2 FITTINGS AND PIPES 

A. Fittings and piping shall be brass and whenever exposed, shall be polished chromeplated. 

Provide tight fitting wall and/or floor escutcheons of chrome-plated brass 

whenever pipes pass through floors, wall or ceilings. 

B. All porcelain or vitreous china shall be clean, smooth and bright. All shall be 

warranted not to craze, discolor or scale. 

C. This contractor shall furnish and install all required water, waste, soil and vent 

connections to all plumbing fixtures together with all fittings, supports, fastening 

devices, cocks, valves, traps, etc., leaving all in complete working order. 

D. All automatic or self-closing valves for faucets shall be adjusted in accordance with 

manufacturer's instructions and supervised as necessary by equipment supplier's 

representative at the request of the Architect or Engineer. 

E. Owner furnished equipment shall be connected with drains, traps, hot water, cold 

water and other services required for optimum operation. This contractor shall obtain 

information from the Owner or his approved representative for services required or 

field verify specific requirements. 


PLUMBING FIXTURES 15450-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 15501 

AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 


1.1 WORK INCLUDED 

A. This specification, in conjunction with the contract drawings and all other 

specifications indicate materials and operations required for the installation of 

automatic sprinkler systems, including design, shop drawings, equipment, 

underground supply system, pipe and fittings above ground, fire department 

connections, sprinkler systems, guard rail, operating instructions, identification, tests, 

and sterilization of piping and system. 

B. Any variation of the specification’s intent or apparent conflict from this specification 

shall be submitted to the ARCHITECT/ENGINEER for written response. The 

response shall be incorporated into the drawings and shall be the final word on the 

item. The Contractor shall incorporate any change at no charge to the Owner. 


A. This specification section is not limited to the following specification: 

1. 15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 

B. The current editions of the following standards are a part of this specification. 

1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards. 

a. 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 

b. 13R Standard for the insulation of Residential Sprinkler System 

c. 14 Standard for the Installation of Standpipes and Hose Systems. 

d. 24 Private Fire Service Mains. 

e. 70 National Electrical Code. 

f. 72 National Fire Alarm Code. 

g. 25 Standard for Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water Based Fire 

Protection Systems. 

2. American Water Works Association Standard Specifications. 

AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

a. C600 Standard for the Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and 

Their Appurtenances. 

b. C151 Ductile-Iron Pipe 

c. C11O Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Fittings. 

d. C111 Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray IronPressure Pipe 

and Fittings. 

e. C104 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Pipe and 

Fittings. 

f. C500 Metal Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 

g. C601 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains. 

C. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Publication: Fire Protection Equipment List. 

D. Factory Mutual System Publication: Approval Guide. 

E. American Insurance Association Publication: Internal cleaning of sprinkler piping 

(GP-4). 

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. Design 

1. The designer of the fire protection systems shall meet one of the requirements 

below. 

a. A registered Professional Fire Protection Engineer in the State of New 

Mexico. 

b. Minimum National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies 

(NICET) Level III for wet-pipe or dry-pipe, Ordinary Hazard, Group II 

Sprinkler Systems, regardless of size. 

c. Minimum NICET Level IV for all other types of systems, including special 

hazard protection. 

d. Where NICET design is used, copies of the designer’s certificates from 

NICET shall be submitted along with the drawings for approval. The 

registered Professional Engineer shall stamp all other plans. 

2. The contractor is responsible for the design and installation of the fire protection 

system in accordance with these specifications and the contract drawings. The 

Contractor shall coordinate with architectural, civil, mechanical, and electrical, 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

design and construction documents, to ascertain the required information, to 

effect a properly designed fire protection system for the building construction 

and occupancy classification. 

a. The contractor is responsible to design the automatic sprinkler system in 

accordance with these specifications and the contract drawings. The 

contractor shall refer to all architectural, mechanical, and electrical drawings, 

to ascertain the required information, to effect a properly designed sprinkler 

system for the building construction and occupancy classification. 

3. The design of fire protection systems shall be complete with all necessary 

accessories for proper operation and shall include seismic support details. 

4. The fire protection water supply lines, controlling devices, protective devices, 

alarm systems, supervisory devices, and related equipment shall be compatible 

so that all equipment will function together as specified. 

5. The design shall comply with all mandatory, advisory interpretations, and 

recommended applicable rules of the latest editions of the referenced codes and 

standards in Section 1.3, “References,” except where otherwise noted on the 

drawings or specified herein. 

6. The Contractor shall produce design drawings that indicate the extent and 

arrangement of the fire protection system. 

7. The contract drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the 

automatic sprinkler systems. 

B. Spacing and Pipe Sizing 

1. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, the sprinkler system shall 

be a wet pipe system, utilizing a Light Hazard hydraulic design. 

2. Hydraulically system shall be designed on the contract drawings having the 

following characteristics: 

a. The design area shall be the hydraulically most demanding "rectangular area" 

having a dimension parallel to the branch lines equal to 1.4 times the square 

root of the area of sprinkler operation. 

b. Where the design area includes a corridor or tunnel protected by a single row 

of sprinklers, the maximum number of sprinklers that need be calculated is 

10, unless openings into the corridor are unprotected by fire rated 

construction. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

c. Maximum waterflow velocity shall not exceed 20 feet per second in any 

sprinkler system piping of hydraulically designed systems. 

d. The hose allowance shall be added to the sprinkler requirement at the 

point(s) where the hose station(s) connect(s) to the sprinkler system. The 

selected hose station(s) shall be within or nearest to the area of sprinkler 

application. 

e. Hydraulic design shall be based upon the water supply data shown on the 

drawings or obtained from the local Municipal Water Department. 

f. Pipe schedule method shall be permitted only for additions or modifications 

(less than 3000 feet 2 to existing Ordinary Hazard Pipe Schedule systems. All 

other designs shall be hydraulically calculated. 

g. Hydraulic calculation methods shall be used as a minimum for Light Hazard, 

wet-pipe systems, unless otherwise specified. The minimum operating area 

allowed shall be either 1500 feet 2 or the entire area for smaller systems. No 

allowances or reductions shall be permitted without written approval from 

the ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. 

h. Extend all (regardless of job size, and including modifications, new 

installations, retrofits, recalculations, etc.) hydraulic calculations back to the 

effective point of connection (ring-main) of the sprinkler lead-in to the fire 

water main supplying the building, unless indicated on the contract drawings. 

i. The distance between sprinklers either on branch lines or between branch 

lines shall not be less than 6 feet distance apart. 

C. Seismic Protection 

1. Seismic protection for automatic sprinkler systems if required for all new 

systems. Modifications to existing systems shall require seismic protection when 

indicated on the contract drawings. 

a. For modifications to existing systems, seismic protection will be required for 

only that portion of the system being modified, the feedmain supplying the 

modification area, and the riser for that area. 

b. Seismic separation joints are required in areas separating the modified area of 

the sprinkler system and that area which is not to be upgraded for seismic 

protection. 

c. The installation guidelines for seismic protection in NFPA 13 shall be used. 

Where an alternative method (other than NFPA 13) of providing seismic 

protection of a sprinkler system is to be used, only UL Listed or FM 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

D. Standpipes 

Approved material shall be permitted. The alternative method shall have a 

design based on a dynamic seismic analysis certified by a registered 

Professional Engineer in the State of New Mexico and the registered PE shall 

stamp all drawings. 

1. Standpipes, where shown on the drawings, shall be installed as Class I system 

per NFPA 14. Hydraulic calculations are required for all wet standpipes serving 

two or more hose stations. 

E. Protection of Areas Subject to Freezing 

1. All anti-freeze systems require the installation of a reduced pressure backflow 

prevention (RPBFP) device. If a RPBFP is installed on the entire sprinkler 

system, then no additional RPBFP is required for the anti-freeze system. 

2. Gridded or looped dry pipe or preaction systems are not allowed. The design for 

these systems shall be of the conventional tree design. 

3. All dry-pipe systems, regardless of the volume, are required to deliver sustained 

waterflow to the inspector’s test connection within 60 seconds of the opening of 

the inspector’s test valve. All dry pipe systems in excess of 500 gallons shall be 

provided with a UL listed or FM approved quick opening device, exceptions to 

NFPA 13 in this instance do not apply. 

F. Manifolding of sprinkler risers to one single sprinkler lead-in shall not be permitted. 

G. Fire Department connections shall be as follows: 

1. Install Fire Department connections, where shown on the drawings. 

2. When the sprinkler system hydraulic demand (not including exterior hose 

demand) exceeds 1000 gpm, a 6-inch 3-way Fire Department connection shall be 

provided. 

3. A single fire department connection shall be provided to supply all fire 

protection systems for a building that has greater than 5 sprinkler risers. 

H. Exposure protection design shall be as follows: 

1. A minimum of 3 gpm per linear feet using ½-inch orifice sprinklers spaced a 

maximum of 10 feet apart horizontally apart shall be calculated. Sprinklers shall 

be high-temperature rated. 

2. The vertical distance protected by a single line of sprinklers shall not exceed 15 

feet. A single line of sprinklers may protect a single-story building that has a 20 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

feet maximum height. All heights exceeding this will require more than one row 

of sprinklers vertically. 

3. Hydraulic calculations shall include all of the sprinklers facing the exposure, on 

every row. 

I. Elevator Shafts and Machine Rooms 


1. Sprinklers are required at the tops of all elevator shafts and in the elevator 

equipment rooms. Sprinklers shall be protected from freezing. 

2. Provide an OS&Y gate valve to shut off all sprinkler water flow into the elevator 

shaft and into the elevator machine room. Where possible, piping should be 

arranged such that a single valve can shut off water to both locations. 

3. The valve(s) shall be at a readily accessible location, no more than 7’0” above 

finished floor, inside a clearly marked wall cabinet. 

A. Shop Drawing Submittals 

1. Provide as required by Specification Section 01300, Descriptive Submittals, to 

the ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. 

2. As soon as practicable after award of contract and prior to fabrication, contractor 

shall submit to the ARCHITECT/ENGINEER for approval, complete shop 

drawings, manufacturers' catalog data, system and component operating 

instructions and hydraulic calculations for the sprinkler system and underground 

piping shown on plot plans. 

3. NO INSTALLATION WILL BE PERMITTED prior to the 

ARCHITECT/ENGINEER approval of complete shop drawings. 

B. Presentation: 

1. New Sprinkler Systems 

a. New drawings shall be identical in size, scale, orientation, and title as the 

original building construction contract drawings unless otherwise noted. 

C. Drawing Details 

1. Unless otherwise specified or shown on drawings, new floor plans and full 

height cross sections shall be drawn at a scale of 1/4" = 1'-0" and arranged such 

that the north arrow points to the top or to the left of the sheet. Other details 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

shall be drawn to a larger scale, as required. Riser elevation details shall be 

drawn to a scale of 1/2" = 1'-0" 

2. No more than one building or one floor shall be shown on a sheet. 

3. Drawings shall show all details required and recommended by NFPA 13, for 

"Working Plans" in addition to the following: 

D. Plot Plans 

a. A name or room number shall appear in each room; and a scaled key plan, 

oriented the same as the floor plan, shall appear on each partial plan sheet. 

b. All obstructions to the sprinkler layout shall be shown, including but not 

limited to, HVAC ducts, lighting, electrical buss ducts. 

c. Building column lines shall be labeled. 

d. Existing work and new construction shall be clearly differentiated on the 

drawings (where applicable). 

e. All lines and details shall be drawn; "opposite hand" or mirror image IS NOT 

acceptable -- separate drawings shall be made. 

f. All pipe lengths shall be shown, center to center of fittings. 

g. Where more than one type of pipe is used, each piece of pipe shall be 

identified as to type on the drawings. 

h. The drawings shall be kept neat and well arranged, with legible notes and 

figures to permit photographic reduction to one half size or smaller. 

i. No lettering shall be smaller than 1/8 inch. 

1. Plot plans shall be drawn to 1" = 20'-0" unless otherwise shown on the contract 

drawings. 

2. Previous references to orientation, legibility, and lettering shall apply. 

3. Plot plans shall show all details required by NFPA 13 and 24. 

E. As-Built Drawings 

1. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall revise all drawings to agree 

with the construction as actually accomplished. The notation "As-Built" shall be 

entered in the revision block, dated and initialed. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2. The As-Built drawings shall show the entire sprinkler system as it existed at the 

completion of the contract work. 

3. The original As-Built drawings shall be delivered as directed by the 

ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. 

1.5 ALTERNATES/ALTERNATIVES 

A. Where specific manufacturers or model numbers are mentioned in these 

specifications, proposed substitutions shall be included in the submittal package 

furnished to the ARCHITECT/ENGINEER for approval after contract award. 

B. If UL-listed or FM-approved equipment is commercially available, none other will be 

approved. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. All sprinkler system components furnished under this contract shall be guaranteed 

against defective design, materials, and workmanship for the full warranty time, 

which is standard with the manufacturer and/or supplier, but in no case less than one 

year from the date of system acceptance. 



A. Materials and equipment used in the installation of the sprinkler system shall be new 

and listed by the UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory or the FM Approval Guide, 

latest edition. The standard products and the latest design of the manufacturer shall 

be used, and installed per their listing, approval, or manufacturer recommendations. 

All products listed or approved by prior editions of the UL Director of FM Approval 

Guide will not be acceptable, if not listed or approved in the most recent edition of 

the directory or approval guide. 

B. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units 

shall be products of the same manufacturer (e.g., couplings shall be from one 

manufacturer.) All materials shall be installed per their listing or approval and per 

the manufacturer’s recommendations and specifications. 

C. New dry-pipe, preaction and deluge sprinkler systems shall be provided with the 

following devices: 

1. A FM approved or UL listed air dryer for the sprinkler control air supply for drypipe 

and preaction systems. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2. A FM approved or UL listed air dryer for the air supply to any pneumatic tubing 

used for heat detection (if used). 

3. Where air compressors are used, the air compressor will come equipped with a 

minimum 10-gallon tank. Nitrogen bottles are permitted to supply nitrogen 

pressure to systems smaller than 125 gallons in size. Where the system capacity 

is larger than 125 gallons, air compressors shall be used. 

D. Tape for screwed joints shall be minimum ½-inch wide. 

E. Corrosion protection tape shall be Scotchwrap 51, manufactured by 3M Company or 

approved equivalent. 

2.2 SPRINKLERS 

A. Types 

1. Unless otherwise specified, allowed per other section of this document, or shown 

on the drawings, sprinklers shall be nominal, ½-inch orifice, automatic, closedhead 

sprinklers rated at 155ºF (68ºC) Quick Response, frangible bulb type 

fusible element. 

2. Higher temperature rated sprinklers shall be installed where heads are exposed to 

high ambient temperature, exposed to the direct rays of the sun, beneath 

skylights or windows and installed in the vicinity of heating equipment, or in 

attics. The sprinkler temperature chosen shall be a minimum of 50ºF above the 

maximum ambient temperature, and no greater than 100ºF above the ambient 

conditions, unless specifically directed by NFPA 13. 

3. Rooms containing electrical equipment shall be protected with sprinklers having 

the following minimum temperature ratings, but no less than 50ºF above normal 

ambient room temperature: 

a. Transformer and switchgear rooms; 212ºF (100ºC) 

Elevator machine rooms 

b. Computer rooms 155ºF (68ºC)QR 

c. Telephone equipment rooms 155ºF (68ºC)QR 

d. Top of elevator shafts 212ºF (100ºC) 

4. On-Off sprinklers are not allowed. FM approved or UL listed on-off sprinkler 

systems, like the Viking FireCycle (or approved equal), are allowed. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

5. Quick Response (QR) sprinklers, where specified on the drawings, shall have a 

Response Time Index (RTI) of 50 or less in English units and 28 or less in metric 

units. 

6. Sidewall sprinklers shall be Underwriters’ Laboratories listed or Factory Mutual 

approved for Ordinary Hazard Occupancy. 

7. Extended coverage sprinklers are not allowed. 

8. Only sprinklers with a “Belleville” type seal shall be used. No O-Ring sealed 

sprinklers shall be allowed either in “crush” seals or “radial” seal styles. 

Sprinklers shall be of all brass frame construction with a coated metal to metal 

seating mechanism. 

9. Only sprinklers with integral shields listed by UL as “intermediate level” 

sprinklers or by FM as “racked storage” sprinklers are acceptable indoor where 

shield are required over ordinary sprinklers. Shop-made water shields are not 

allowed, nor are after market attachments designed as water shields. “Heat 

collection devices” for use with sprinklers shall not be allowed. 

10. Sprinklers installed in storage racks shall be equipped with a listed sprinkler 

head guard with an integral water shield to protect the in-rack sprinklers fusible 

element from water spray by a sprinkler above it. Roof sprinklers subject to 

mechanical damage shall be equipped with a listed sprinkler head guard. 

B. Protection Against Freezing 

1. Horizontal dry sidewall sprinklers shall be used in lieu of antifreeze loops for 

narrow unheated areas adjacent to heated areas, such as docks, covered loading 

platforms, vehicular air locks, elevator hoistways, and gas bottle or other storage 

sheds. 

2. The depth of the protected space shall not exceed 10 feet. 

3. The dry sprinkler shall extend a minimum of 12 inches into the heated space. 

For refrigerated spaces, the length dry sprinklers shall extend into the heated 

space shall be as specified by the ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. 

C. Position and Finish 

1. Sprinklers installed on exposed piping shall be manufacturer’s standard finish 

pendent sprinklers. Sprinklers and escutcheons installed below dropped ceilings 

shall have a finish matching the color of the ceiling tile. Only factory applied 

finishes shall be acceptable. If the factory has a finish that cannot match the 

ceiling tile color, standard finish sprinklers are allowed. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2. In rooms where sprinkler heads penetrate a suspended ceiling, only quick 

response, semi-recessed or recessed sprinklers are acceptable. Standard pendant 

sprinklers with “cup and skirt” escutcheons, one-piece escutcheons, or flush or 

concealed sprinklers are not allowed. 

3. EXCEPTION: On existing installations only, where sprinkler head relocations 

or small modifications (less than 20 heads) take place, the new sprinklers and 

escutcheons shall match the existing sprinklers. 

4. Escutcheons, head guards, and water shield from the supplied sprinkler 

manufacturer shall be used solely with the installed sprinkler. No after market 

escutcheons, head guards, or water shields are allowed. 

5. Head guards shall be two-piece, universal attachments, bolted in place on the 

sprinkler. “Snap-on” one-piece units are not allowed. 

2.3 PIPE 

A. Pipe for installation above ground shall be metal conforming to the requirements of 

NFPA 13. No plastic pipe is permitted where permitted by NFPA and the Authority 

having jurisdiction. Pipe shall be listed by UL and be FM approved, and installed per 

its listing and approval and meet the following requirements: 

1. Unless otherwise specified, the minimum steel pipe wall thickness shall be 

Schedule 10 for pipe sizes 3 inches or larger. Pipe sizes smaller than 3 inches 

shall be Schedule 40. Threaded or cut groove steel pipe shall be Schedule 40 for 

sizes less than 8 inches and a minimum of Schedule 30 in sizes 8 inches and 

larger for pressures up to 300 psi. 

2. Mechanical rolled groove pipe or welded pipe shall be a minimum of Schedule 

10 for sizes 3 inches up to 5 inches, 0.134-inch wall thickness for 6 inches, and 

0.188-inch wall thickness for 8- and 10-inch pipe for pressures up to 300-psi. 

3. Steel pipe, installed for the water motor alarm line, piping from drain line valves 

and inspector’s test valves, dry pipe and preaction sprinkler system piping, and 

where pipe is exposed to outdoor weather, etc., shall be internally and externally 

galvanized. Galvanized fittings are required where galvanized piping is used. 

Any piping leading to a pressure-operated waterflow indication device shall also 

be galvanized. The starting point is on the alarm connection to the alarm check 

valve. 

2.4 PIPE FITTINGS 

A. Pipe fittings for installation above ground shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 

13 and shall be FM approved or UL listed. 

1. Mechanical groove couplings are required on all 4 inches and larger pipe. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2. Plain-end pipe couplings shall not be used in any new installation. 

3. Galvanized pipe fittings shall be installed where galvanized piping is specified. 

4. Welded branch outlet fittings (weld-o-lets, groove-o-lets, etc) shall be minimum 

Schedule 10 for pipe sizes 3 inches or larger. Pipe sizes smaller than 3 inches 

shall be Schedule 40 standard wall pipe thickness. Welded outlets shall be UL 

listed or FM approved, affixed with the UL or FM identification stamps, and 

pressure rated for 300-PSI maximum. 

5. Adjustable, two-piece drop nipples shall not be used. All drop nipples shall be 

one-piece, non-adjustable units with a minimum 1-inch diameter. 

2.5 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC BRACING 

A. Pipe hangers, and hangar assemblies shall be UL listed of FM approved. 

B. C-clamps and beam clamps shall have lock nuts and retaining straps, or clips, and 

pipe rings shall be of the solid-band adjustable swivel type. 

C. Provide rod ceiling plates at finished ceilings for coach screw rods, expansion shields, 

and toggle hangers. 

D. All seismic bracing devices and flexible couplings shall be specifically UL listed or 

FM approved and installed per their listing or approval. 

E. When fastening hangars to purlins, bolt-through fastening methods shall be used. 

Beam clamps with restraining straps shall not be used in any circumstance. 

F. All seismic brace members shall be continuous. Under no circumstances shall 

members be spliced or off-set. 

G. Tension-only seismic bracing systems shall meet the following. 

1. The tension-only system shall be UL or FM approved for seismic service, and 

installed in accordance with listing limitations and installation instructions. 

2. A means to prevent vertical motion due to seismic forces shall be installed at the 

brace location. 

3. Two tension only braces shall be installed in opposing directions at each brace 

location. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2.6 FIRE PROTECTION CHECK VALVES 

A. Check valves in sprinkler system shall be UL listed or FM approved, have hand hole 

covers to provide adequate access to facilitate inspection and repair, without the 

removal of the valve from the system, and shall be listed for installation in the 

vertical or horizontal position. Wafer check valves are unacceptable. All check 

valves shall have a working water pressure of 250 PSI. 

B. Alarm check valves (wet pipe, dry pipe, deluge, preaction, etc.) shall be provided on 

all sprinkler risers and have the following. 

1. The alarm check valve (ACV) shall be equipped with a removable hand hole 

cover assembly, and shall be listed for installation in the vertical or horizontal 

position. 

2. The ACV shall be equipped with gauge connections on the system side and 

supply side of the valve clapper. 

3. ACV trim piping and fittings shall be internally and externally galvanized. 

4. Ported alarm connections on the ACV shall be to a retard chamber to absorb 

variable pressure surges. 

5. Only “Flange x Flange” ACV devices shall be installed. 

6. Wet-pipe systems shall use a variable-pressure alarm check valve. Plain-type 

check valves are not allowed. Sprinkler alarm valve shall be equipped with an 

external bypass to eliminate false water flow alarms. 

7. Dry-pipe valves shall be a positive latching clapper, differential type dry valve 

and air pressure to water pressure area differential shall be approximately 5 to 1. 

8. Deluge valves shall be externally re-settable by hydraulic means, and shall 

employ a positive vent on the priming line to ensure that the deluge valve will 

not prematurely reset. 

C. Backflow prevention devices shall be installed on all sprinkler systems as follows. 

1. A reduced pressure backflow prevention assembly (RPBFP) shall be installed to 

prevent cross-connection contamination between potable water systems and any 

fire sprinkler system, at the service connection for the fire sprinkler system. 

2.7 FIRE PROTECTION INTERIOR CONTROL VALVES 

A. Each system shall have interior control valves as follows: 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1. A control valve shall be installed for isolation of each floor of multistory 

buildings. 

2. Interstitial spaces, in-rack sprinkler systems, mezzanines, etc., shall have control 

valves for system isolation at the feed-main. 

3. All control valves shall be provided with an electric valve supervision device, 

connected to the Fire Alarm System. 

4. All inside control valves shall be OS&Y. Butterfly valves are not permitted. 

Valves shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA Standard C500, and 

have a clear waterway equal to the full nominal diameter of the valve. Valves 

shall be provided with a handwheel, with arrow cast in metal to indicate 

direction of opening. 

2.8 SUPERVISORY DEVICES 

A. When specified on the contract drawings, supervisory devices shall be compatible 

with the Fire Alarm System. 

B. Provide the equipment listed below. 

1. Electric valve supervision switches shall be installed for all internal (inside) and 

external (outside) fire protection valves 2-1/2 inches or larger. The devices shall 

be electrical; single-pole, double-throw; with normally closed contacts and 

include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position. 

2. For wet pipe sprinkler systems, install vane-type waterflow alarm initiation 

devices with 250 psig pressure rating and designed for horizontal or vertical 

installation. Include two single-pole, double-throw, circuit switches for isolated 

alarm and auxiliary contacts and complete with tamperproof cover that sends 

signal if removed. 

3. All vane type waterflow alarm initiation devices shall be equipped with an 

adjustable delay of audible alarm initiation. Adjustment range shall be from 0 to 

120 seconds. Vane type waterflow switch shall be Potter Model VSR-F or 

approved equal. 

4. Waterflow vane-type alarm initiation devices shall be labeled as to the correct 

orientation of flow when mounted on system piping. When drilling of the 

system riser it is necessary to mount flow switch, the drilled out disc (coupon) 

shall be retrieved and attached to the mounting u-bolt of the flow switch. 

5. Where pressure operated waterflow alarm initiation devices are used, any valve 

installed upstream of the device on the alarm line shall be electrically supervised, 

using the Potter Model BVS or approved equal. Pressure operated alarm 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

initiation devices shall be an electrical-supervision type, waterflow switch with 

retard feature. The device shall include single-pole, double-throw, normally 

closed contacts and design that operate on rising pressure and signals waterflow. 

EXCEPTION: Where the waterflow alarm initiation device is used only for the 

purpose of an outside electric bell in lieu of the water motor gong device. 

6. Low-pressure supervision shall be installed on all dry pipe or preaction systems 

and be connected into the Fire Alarm System. 

7. Any device that is to be installed in a hazardous location defined by NFPA 70 

shall be rated for occupancy. 

2.9 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS 

A. Fire Department connections shall have a minimum of two 2-1/2 inch inlets with 

National Standard Hose (NWSH) threads, internal double clapper check valve, brass 

plugs, and attached chains. 

B. Fire Department connections shall be installed at each new alarm check valve, dry 

pipe valve, deluge and preaction valve and standpipe, unless the sprinkler system is 

supplied by a Fire Department connection in the yard main, or as otherwise noted in 

NFPA 13 

C. The completed installations shall include a metal sign or escutcheon plate, with raised 

lettering, marked “FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION STANDPIPE-AUTO 

S0KR,” ‘AUTOMATIC SPKR,” or “STANDPIPE,” as appropriate. Additional signs 

for systems such as foam water sprinkler systems or other alternative designed 

systems, as required by other NFPA Standards, shall also be provided by the 

Contractor where required. 



A. Responsibilities 

1. The Contractor is responsible for the installation of the automatic sprinkler 

system in accordance with these specifications and the contract drawings. The 

Contractor shall coordinate with architectural, mechanical, and electrical, design 

and construction documents, to ascertain the required information, to effect a 

properly designed and installed sprinkler system for the building construction 

and occupancy classification. 

2. The installation of the automatic sprinkler system shall be complete with all 

necessary accessories for proper operation and shall be accomplished by a 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

licensed sprinkler contractor or licensed company regularly engaged in this type 

of work, and in accordance with requirements of the National Fire Protection 

Association Standards (NFPA). 

3. An individual with a minimum NICET Level II shall supervise the installation. 

4. The fire protection system installation shall be coordinated with the other trades 

(mechanical, electrical and structural, etc.) 

5. The installation shall comply with all mandatory, advisory interpretations, and 

recommended applicable rules of the latest editions of the standards listed in 

Section 1.3 of this document, except where otherwise noted on the drawings or 

specified herein. 

B. Contamination and Obstruction Prevention 

1. Pipe interiors shall be kept free of debris. 

C. Pipe and Fittings Aboveground 

1. Pipe, fittings, and hangers shall be installed where shown on the drawings and in 

accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13R. 

2. Overhead sprinkler piping, drain and test piping, fire department connection 

piping, etc. installed through exterior walls shall be galvanized. All sprinkler 

piping shall be substantially supported from building structure and only UL 

listed or FM approved type hangers shall be used. Sprinkler lines under ducts 

shall not be supported from ductwork but shall be supported from building 

structure (with trapeze hangers where necessary). 

3. Flanged Fittings or Mechanical Groove Couplings 

a. Flanged fittings or mechanical groove couplings shall be used at the base of 

risers, in the risers of multiple-story sprinkler systems at each floor-system 

connection, and in feed main. Flanged fitting shall be used for alarm valve 

assemblies. 

b. A flanged tapered reducer shall be installed at the flange and spigot piece 

when riser is smaller than the underground supply line. 

c. Pipe shall be installed straight and true with no greater deflection at 

mechanical groove pipe couplings than is recommended by the manufacturer. 

d. Pipe end couplings are not acceptable. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

e. Only rigid-type mechanical couplings shall be used, unless specifically 

directed by NFPA 13 such as for specific seismic locations. Only in those 

areas identified by NFPA 13 where flexible type mechanical couplings are 

specified will the use of flexible couplings be permitted. All other parts of 

the system shall use rigid-type mechanical groove couplings. 

4. Pipe Hangers and Anchors 

a. Offsets in hanger rods will not be permitted. 

b. Concrete anchors shall be installed by drilling and installing a UL listed or 

FM approved anchor. Explosive driven fasteners as a method of installing 

anchors or hangers shall not be permitted. 

c. Supports, hangers, braces, etc., shall be attached to the building primary 

structural members only. 

d. When fastening hangers or braces to bar joists, the fastener shall be located 

within 4 inches of the panel point on the bar joist. 

e. All piping larger than 4 inches in diameter shall be supported from a 

minimum of two-bar joists when run parallel to a bar joist. 

5. Welded Joints 

a. Welded joints are acceptable when shop fabricated in conformance to 

provisions of NFPA 13. 

6. Screwed Joints 

a. Teflon paste and tape shall be used as pipe-joint compound at screwed joints. 

7. Bushings 

a. Bushings shall not be permitted. 

8. Control Valves 

a. Control valves shall be provided with identification signs describing the 

areas protected. Where the valve location is concealed above the ceiling, a 

sign below the ceiling shall indicate the valve location, and identify the 

protected area. 

9. Wall, Ceiling, and Floor Penetrations 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

a. Pipe sleeves shall be installed and properly secured in place at all points 

where sprinkler piping passes through concrete or masonry construction. 

Sleeves through all walls and floors shall provide adequate clearance for 

slight movement of the piping. The guidance in NFPA 13 guidance for 

seismic areas shall be followed. 

b. Sleeves for pipes passing through floors of concrete or waterproof 

construction shall project 3 to 6 inches above floors to prevent leakage. 

Sleeves through walls shall be cut flush with each surface unless otherwise 

specified. Sleeves shall be caulked to make penetration watertight. 

c. Unless otherwise specified, sleeves shall be of Schedule 40 steel and a 

minimum of two pipe sizes larger in diameter than the passing pipe. 

d. Holes through walls, floors, and ceilings of other than concrete or masonry 

construction shall be large enough to accommodate pipe expansion. Holes 

through existing concrete floors and walls shall be core drilled to provide 

clean, neat holes. Spaces between pipe and sleeve or pipe and opening for 

floors and exterior walls shall be filled with a non-hardening sealant material 

and made watertight. 

e. Where fire rated barriers are penetrated, a UL listed fire barrier system shall 

be installed to retain the fire resistance rating of the barrier. 

f. Escutcheons shall be provided at wall, ceiling and floor penetrations of 

piping in occupied areas. 

10. The cutting of structural members for the passage of sprinkler piping or for pipehanger 

fastenings is not permitted. 

11. Joints 

a. Joints shall be made in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13. 

b. Joints shall be left exposed until final inspection and testing have been 

witnessed. 

c. Swing joints are preferred for connecting pendent sprinklers to branch lines. 

12. Dielectric unions shall be used to connect dissimilar metals (such as steel to 

copper) to prevent electrolytic action. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

3.2 SPRINKLER SYSTEM ALARM CHECK VALVES 

A. Alarm Check Valves (ACV) shall be provided with internally and externally 

galvanized trim piping and fittings, pressure gages, a retarding chamber, water motor 

gong, alarm switch, testing bypass, and all necessary pipe, fittings and accessories. 

B. The retarding chamber drain line shall be piped independently of the main drain line. 

C. The drain line from the water motor gong shall be piped to discharge through the wall 

as close to the grade line as possible. 

D. Piping between the ACV and a pressure actuated alarm initiating device shall be 

galvanized piping not less than 3/8 inch nominal pipe size. 

E. Piping supplying the retard chamber, water motor gong, and water motor gong drain 

shall be galvanized. Galvanized fittings are to be used where galvanized piping is 

required. 

3.3 SPRINKLERS 

A. Pendent sprinklers below ceiling shall be aligned, and parallel to ceiling features, 

walls, etc. In areas without a suspended ceiling, install sprinkler piping as high as 

possible, using necessary fittings and auxiliary drains to maintain maximum clear 

headroom. 

B. Where two sprinkler systems abut the pendent sprinklers shall be aligned in different 

directions to distinguish the boundaries of each sprinkler system. 

C. Sprinklers under open grating shall be intermediate levels. 

D. Sprinklers shall not be installed closer than 6 feet apart. 

E. Dry pendant and horizontal dry sidewall sprinklers shall only be installed in screwed 

tee fittings. 

F. Ceiling Areas: Where suspended ceilings are installed, the sprinkler contractor shall 

install pendent sprinklers as shown on the reflected ceiling plans. Where these plans 

do not specify the location of the pendent sprinklers, the Contractor shall obtain the 

reflected ceiling plans and design sprinkler locations at least six inches from ceiling 

tile edges, 2 feet 6 inches from HVAC supply and return louvers, dimension the 

locations, follow a repetitive pattern, and locate sprinklers along straight lines to the 

extent possible. Swing joints shall feed pendant sprinklers from 1-inch outlet tees in 

branch lines. 

G. Stairs: Sprinklers shall be installed throughout stairways, and at every landing. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

3.4 ELEVATOR SHAFTS AND MACHINE ROOMS 

A. Sprinklers at the tops of all elevator shafts and in the elevator equipment rooms shall 

be protected from freezing. 

B. Provide an OS&Y gate valve to shut off all sprinkler water flow into the elevator 

shaft and into the elevator machine room. Where possible, piping should be arranged 

such that a single valve can shut off water to both locations, and shall be at a readily 

accessible location, no more than 7’0” above finished floor, inside a clearly marked 

wall cabinet. 

3.5 DRAINS 

A. Two-inch drains shall be installed on all main risers and downstream of any interior 

sectional valves, and shall be piped to drain. 

B. A pressure gage cock and approved gage shall be installed downstream of interior 

sectional valves of 4-inch size and larger. 3/4-inch valve auxiliary drains with 

standard hose threads and caps shall be installed at all low points in the system, where 

more than five sprinklers are trapped. Where the capacity of trapped piping exceeds 

20 gallons, the overflow shall be piped to drain. 

C. Inspector's test connections shall be installed on each sprinkler system as near the 

most hydraulically remote end of the system as possible. The orifice shall be sized to 

discharge a flow equivalent to the smallest orifice sprinkler in the system. The 

inspector's test valve shall be located not more than seven feet above the floor in a 

visible, easily accessible location. For antifreeze systems, the orifice shall be 

replaced by a plugged outlet. 

D. In multi-story buildings where waterflow alarm devices are provided for each floor or 

where more than one alarm device is provided in a single sprinkler system, a separate 

inspector's test connection shall be provided for each alarm device. For convenience, 

in multi-level buildings where more than one inspector's test connection is required, 

all the valves shall be manifolded together at a single location on the grade floor, with 

a sight glass and a common drain line discharging outdoors. 

E. Drains shall be piped to discharge to drain, and the discharge shall be visible either 

by open-end or sight drain fitting. 

F. Drains and inspector's test connections through outside walls shall be run through the 

walls as close to the floor or grade line as possible, terminating with a 45-degree 

galvanized elbow turned down to splash blocks. 

G. Concrete splash blocks, 18” x 18” x 4” minimum in size, shall be installed under each 

drain or test outlet. The top of the block shall be 1 inch above grade, with a slope of 

1/2 inch per foot away from the building wall. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

3.6 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS 

A. The check valve and normally open automatic ball drip (ABD) shall be located at 

points where they will not be subject to freezing temperatures, and the discharge from 

the ball drip shall be piped to drain. The ball drip shall close when the flow of water 

through the valve is in the range of 4 through 10 gpm. All ball drips shall be rated at 

175 psi. Use valve- drains in place of automatic ball drip drains when the static head 

of water above the ABD will exceed 11'6". Check valves shall be UL or FM 

approved and shall have bodies with the UL or FM stamp. 

B. The Fire Department connection shall be installed between 18 inches and 36 inches 

above grade. 

3.7 FIRE HOSE STATIONS 

A. Where hose stations are called for on the contract drawings, they shall be 2-1/2-inch 

hose valves, with 2-1/2” x 1-1/2” National Standard Hose thread adapters, connected 

to the sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA 13, or as shown on the contract 

drawings. 

B. The centerline of the hose valve shall be installed between 4' and 5' above finished 

floor. 

C. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, no hose is required. 

D. Where hose cabinets are required, they shall be of the horizontal fold, hump type, 

with full tempered glass doors. 

3.8 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Control, drain, test, and alarm valves and zone waterflow switches shall be provided 

with identification signs of the standard design adopted by the automatic-sprinkler 

industry, or their equivalent. 

B. A hydraulic data information nameplate shall be secured to the riser with durable 

wire, chain, or equivalent, directly above the controlling alarm check valve and shall 

include the following design data. 

1. Building designation 

2. Location of remote area 

3. Design density 

4. Area of application 

5. System demand (gpm and psi at base of riser) 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

6. Data shall be permanently engraved on the nameplate as follows: 

a. Material shall be durable plastic or aluminum., Minimum height of lettering 

is 1/8”. 

C. The Contractor shall furnish and place in a plastic envelope attached to each sprinkler 

alarm check valve riser, one complete set of typed or printed maintenance and 

operating instructions, a set of prints of the as-built working drawings and hydraulic 

calculations of the sprinkler system. 

D. Contractor shall supply each riser with a cabinet containing maintenance and repair 

equipment (spare heads, wrench, etc.) 

E. Each Contractor shall affix an identification tag on each system riser indicating 

3.9 FLUSHING 

Name of the Contractor 

Business Address of the Installing Contractor 

Phone Number 

24-hour emergency contact phone number 

A. Before connecting sprinkler systems to the main supply, each sprinkler supply line 

shall be flushed out thoroughly by the Sprinkler Contractor through an unrestricted 

opening not less than 4 inches in diameter. Minimum flowing quantities are specified 

in NFPA 13. 

B. Failure to comply with this requirement shall necessitate flushing of the entire 

sprinkler system by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 

C. A 4-inch temporary pipe or two 2-1/2" fire hoses shall be provided by the Contractor 

to discharge water to a suitable location, as designated by the 

ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. 

3.10 TESTING 

A. Aboveground Tests: 

1. Prior to acceptance of the installation, the Contractor shall subject the system to 

the tests required by NFPA 13 for the completion of the Contractor’s Material 

and Test Certificate. In addition, complete operating test of dry pipe, preaction, 

deluge, water-spray and foam water systems shall be performed. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2. Hydrostatic testing shall be performed before any ceiling is installed below the 

sprinkler piping. Each water control valve shall be fully opened and closed 

under water pressure to ensure proper operation. 

3. Where sprinkler locations are roughed-in, using plugged drop nipples projecting 

below the level of the finished ceiling, the hydrostatic testing shall be performed 

two times. 

a. First, after the system is completed using the plugged drops, and before the 

ceiling panels are installed. 

b. Second, after the plugged drop nipples are cut to length for the finished 

ceiling, or replaced with other drop nipples of the correct length, and the 

sprinklers installed. 

4. The addition of sodium silicate (also known as water-glass) and related 

substances before hydrostatic testing, to stop water leakage, is not permitted. 

5. Pipe interiors shall be kept free of debris. 

B. Alarm Testing 

1. Contractor shall be responsible for testing new alarms and modified alarms 

installed under this contract. Defective alarms shall be replaced immediately. 

3.11 PROTECTION AGAINST FREEZING 

A. Sprinkler piping passing through any unheated spaces in, under, or outside buildings 

exposed to freezing, shall be protected as shown on the plans or in accordance with 

the methods specified in NFPA 13. Exposed to freezing is defined as any location 

where the temperature may drop below (40F) 5C at any time during the year. 

B. Heating shall be provided for sprinkler protected spaces in lieu of providing antifreeze 

systems except where otherwise noted on the drawings or specified herein. 

3.12 PROTECTION FOR BACKFLOW PREVENTION 

A. A reduced pressure backflow prevention assembly (RPBFP) shall be installed on all 

new systems and where shown on the drawings for modifications to systems to 

prevent cross-connection contamination between potable water systems and any fire 

sprinkler system. Install the RPBFP at the service connection for the fire sprinkler 

system or as noted on the contract drawings. 

B. RPBFP assemblies shall be either FM approved or UL listed and be approved by the 

Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research, University of 

Southern California (USC-FCCHR) and the International Association of Plumbing 

and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO). 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

C. Backflow prevention assemblies used or installed under this contract shall be tested 

by a “Certified Backflow Control Assembly Tester” who possesses a current (within 

three (3) years from date of issuance) certificate that confirms successful completion 

of an approved training course. 

D. RDBFP assemblies shall be installed in accordance with AWWA Manual M14 

requirements, or as directed by the SDR. 

E. If RDBFP devices will be installed outside the building they must be in heated 

enclosures and with adequate space for inspection, tests and maintenance. 

F. Adequate drainage shall be provided for RDBFP and meet the following: 

1. Discharge shall be piped full size (of the relief valve) and extended to a drain. 

2. Discharge piping shall be sloped 1/8” per foot and be Schedule 40, galvanized. 

3. French Drains are not allowed. 

G. The Contractor shall perform an operational test on any new backflow prevention 

assemblies used or installed under this contract. 

3.13 PAINTING AND LABELING 

A. Contractor shall paint those portions of fire protection as required by Painting 

Specification 09900. Labeling shall be as follows: 

1. Sprinkler system (e.g., inspectors tests, drain valves) shall be labeled with all 

information required by NFPA Standard 13. 

2. Labeling shall be accomplished with the use of permanently marked 

weatherproof metal or rigid plastic identification signs. The signs shall be 

secured with corrosion-resistant wire, chain, or other approved means. These 

signs shall be provided by the manufacturer, manufacturer’s representative, or 

installer of the sprinkler system. 

3. Sprinkler riser shall be labeled with building and sprinkler system riser numbers. 

Labeling shall be accomplished with the use of “Brady” or approved equal selfsticking 

labels. The color and size shall contrast the surface that it is applied to. 

3.14 DISINFECTION 

A. Piping installed under this contract shall be disinfected per AWWA C651 before it is 

placed in operation, by using one of the following methods. 

B. Continuous Feed Method 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1. Place calcium hypochlorite in pipe sections when installing pipe or inject liquid 

chlorine into the system via the injection port. Pipe is filled with water and 

chlorine concentration shall remain at 10 mg/l for a minimum of 24 hours. 

During this time, all valves in new section will be cycled open and closed to 

allow for adequate disinfection. Valves connecting the new or repaired line with 

mains in active service shall remain closed to prevent chlorine pollution. 

2. Samples shall be drawn at 1-, 4-, 8-, 12-, 16-, 20-, and 24-hour marks to 

determine the chlorine concentration. Acceptable tests are the N-diethyl-pphenylenediamine 

(DPD) drop dilution method (AWWA C651, Appendix A) or 

the High Range Test Kit. The tests shall be done by the Contractor. 

C. Slug Method 

1. Similar to the continuous feed method. Follow AWWA C651. Chlorine 

concentration to be 100 mg/l for a minimum of 3 hours. During this time, all 

valves shall be cycled open and closed to allow for adequate disinfection. 

Valves connecting new or repaired lines with mains in active service shall 

remain closed to prevent chlorine pollution. 

2. Samples shall be drawn every 15 minutes to determine concentration. 

Acceptable tests are the DPD drop dilution method or the High Range Test Kit. 

The tests shall be conducted by the Contractor. 

D. Repairing or Cutting into Existing Mains 

1. New interior piping surfaces shall be swabbed with a one-percent hypochlorite 

solution. The section being modified shall be subjected to a high chlorine 

disinfection process per AWWA C651. The concentration shall be a minimum 

of 300 mg/l for 15 minutes. 

2. Samples shall be drawn before the chlorine is injected and every 5 minutes 

thereafter. Chlorine concentration shall be tested by the Contractor using the 

High Range Test Kit. 

E. Flushing 

1. After the lines have been chlorinated using one of the above methods, it becomes 

necessary to flush the lines with water until test sample indicates that the water is 

suitable for drinking. The residual chlorine concentration in the water is to be 

between 0.2 and 2.0 mg/l, as measured using a Low Range Test Kit. 

F. Bacteriological Testing 

1. All new and modified water lines require testing for coliform organisms per 

AWWA C651. The testing shall occur after successful chlorination and flushing 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

of the lines. Samples shall be taken from the new line in sodium thiosulfate 

treated sterile bottles and analyzed as specified by APHA’s Standard Methods 

for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 

2. Results shall be recorded with the original documentation of results attached. 

These will be used for auditing purposes. 

3. Fire protection lines will not be accepted until a negative bacteriological test is 

performed. Lines will be chlorinated and flushed repeatedly, until such a 

negative test is accomplished. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 15651 

REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 





1.2 SCOPE 

A. Materials and operations required for the installation of refrigeration systems, 

including piping, fittings, equipment, refrigerant accessories, refrigerant and 

lubricating oil, joints, testing, evacuation and charging, and vibration isolators. 


A. Brazing: Certify brazing procedures and brazers in accordance with ANSI B31.5 

paragraph 527.5 for shop and job site brazing of piping. 

B. Soldering: Shall conform to ANSI/ASME B31, Pressure Piping. 







2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 

A. The firms mentioned in the following Materials Section are acceptable type, quality 

and performance. 

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS 

A. Piping materials shall be as follows unless otherwise indicated on the applicable 

contract drawings. 

1. Pipe: Shall be "ACR" Type L hard drawn straight lengths copper tubing, ASTM 

B280, "Specification for seamless copper tube for air conditioning and 

refrigeration field service." 

REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 15651-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2.3 EQUIPMENT 

2. Fittings: Shall be wrought copper long radius, wrought copper and bronze solder 

joint, ANSI B16.22. 

A. All major items of equipment shall be as specified in the equipment schedules on the 

drawings and shall be furnished complete with all accessories normally supplied with 

the catalog item listed and all other accessories necessary for a complete and 

satisfactory operating system. 

2.4 CONNECTION MATERIAL 

A. Brazing Rods: 

1. AWS Classification BCuP-4 Copper Phosphorus (6% Silver) 

2. AWS Classification BCuP-5 Copper Phosphorus (15% Silver) 

3. AWS Classification BAg-5 Silver (45% Silver) 

B. No rods containing cadmium shall be used. 

C. Flux: 

1. "Stay-Silv White Brazing Flux" by J.T. Harris Co. or approved equal. 

2.5 REFRIGERANT ACCESSORIES 

A. Shutoff Valves: 

1. Shall be of the diaphragm type for lines sized 1" OD or smaller. 

2. Shall be Wing cap packed bronze valves with bolted bonnets back seating type, 

repackable under pressure, for lines 1-1/8" OD or larger. 

3. Shall be Mueller (Linemaster, Globemaster) or Henry ("Golden Bantam", type 

203) or equal Superior, Virginia, or approved equal. 

B. Expansion Valves: 

1. Shall be of the thermostatic types as manufactured by Alco, Henry, Mueuer, 

Singer, Sporlan or approved equal, and shall be gas charged with capillary type 

external superheat adjustment and external equalizing connection. 

2. Each type shall be designed to meter liquid equally to all distribution tubes, and 

shall be properly sized for the refrigerant used and the capacity required. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

C. Liquid Line Strainers: 

1. Each expansion valve shall be protected by a strainer in the refrigerant liquid 

line. 

2. The strainer shall be as manufactured by the Henry Valve Co. ("800 Series"), or 

approved equal, not less than line size and installed with isolation valves. 

D. Solenoid Valves: 

1. Solenoid valves shall be suitable for the system in which they are used and 

designed specifically for use with the respective refrigerant. 

2. Valves shall be Alco or Skinner. 

E. Filter Drier: 

1. When shown on the drawings, install a Sporlan (Catch-All), Henry (V8000 "Dry- 

Cor"), Mueller ("Drymaster Micro-Guard") or approved equal, silica gel filter 

and drier in each liquid line. 

2. Filter drier shall be the replaceable cartridge type sized for compressor capacity 

and shall be installed with a three valve bypass. 

F. Liquid Indicators: Install a Henry (MI-31 series), Alco ( AMI-1), or Mueller 

(Sightmaster or Vuemaster) liquid indicator with double ports and seal caps in each 

liquid line or approved equal. 

G. Pressure Relief Valves: 

1. Shall conform to Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration, ANSI/ASHRAE 15, 

and Section VIII, Division I of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code. The valve shall 

be factory set to maintain an operating or standby pressure not to exceed the 

receiver maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP). 

2. Relief valves shall be Mueller (Safteymaster) or Henry (Series 500 or 5000) or 


H. Charging and Purging Valves: 

1. Shall be the diaphragm packless type forged brass with positive back seating. 

Flare connection shall have seal cap with copper gasket chained to valve body. 

2. Valves shall be Henry (6000 series) or approved equal. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 



A. General 

1. Installation shall conform with the American National Standard Code, ANSI 

V31.5, Refrigeration Piping. 

2. Installed piping shall not interfere with the operation or accessibility of door or 

windows; shall not encroach on aisles, passageways, and equipment; and shall 

not interfere with the servicing or maintenance of equipment. 

3. Pipe shall be cut to measurements established at the construction site and shall 

be worked into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing all openings 

and equipment. 

4. Cutting or weakening of structural members to facilitate piping installation is not 

permitted. 

5. Pipes shall have burrs removed by reaming and shall be so installed as to permit 

free expansion and contraction without damage to joints or hangers. 

6. Piping shall be installed in a straight manner, with appropriate pitch free from 

traps, and shall be provided with capped or plugged ends, as it is erected, to 

prevent contaminating the system. 

7. The piping system shall be provided with isolating hangers to prevent 

compressor vibration being carried to the building structure. 

8. The piping system shall be provided with appropriate ranged continuous duty 

temperature and pressure gauges. The suction connection from each coil shall be 

provided with a test thermometer well in the pipe for adjustment of the 

thermostatic expansion valves. 

B. Cleanliness: 

1. All refrigerant lines and fittings shall be absolutely clean to avoid system 

operating difficulties and contamination. Use a good cleaning agent such as 

Refrigerant 113 or Virginia Number 10 Degreasing Solvent. Cleaning chemicals 

must be disposed of as directed by State and Local Codes. 

C. Solder Joints: 

1. Tubing shall be cut square and burrs removed. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2. Both inside of fittings and outside of tubing shall be well cleaned with wire 

brush or fine emery cloth before sweating. Steel wool is not permitted. 

3. An inert gas (such as oil pumped dry nitrogen) shall be continuously passed 

through the copper piping when sweating joints to prevent formation of copper 

oxide. 

4. Care shall be taken to prevent annealing of fittings and tubing when making 

connections. 

5. Joints shall be made with silver solder containing a minimum of 45% silver. 

3.2 LEAK TESTING REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM 

A. The completed refrigeration piping system shall be tested by the halide electronic 

leak detector method at normal working pressures. 

B. The testing media shall be a small charge of the working refrigerant plus the inert 

pressurizing agent, oil pumped dry nitrogen. The leak test shall be performed by the 

contractor before insulating, evacuating and charging in the presence of the 

Architect/Engineer. The leak test media, apparatus and tester shall be furnished by the 

contractor. 

C. Isolate the compressor from the leak test by firmly closing the suction and discharge 

valves. 

D. Do not attempt to repair any leak while the system is pressurized. Each repair must be 

retested. 

3.3 EVACUATION AND CHARGING 

A. After completion of the piping pressure test, the refrigeration system shall be 

evacuated and dehydrated using a vacuum pump capable of producing at least 1mm 

Hg absolute. Do not use cooling compressor to evacuate system nor operate it while 

system is under high pressure. The following procedure shall be followed unless 

otherwise noted: 

1. Connect an accurate high vacuum gage, such as Stokes or Zimmerli gage, to the 

system. 

2. Connect the vacuum pump to both the high and low side of the system. Leave the 

compressor suction and discharge service valves closed. Start the pump. 

3. Keep ambient air temperatures above 60`F during the evacuation process. 

4. Operate the vacuum pump until the system is evacuated to 2.5 mm Hg absolute. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

5. Break the system vacuum with oil pumped dry nitrogen. Open the compressor 

suction and discharge service valves and reevacuate the system to 2.5 mm Hg 

absolute. 

6. After the system has been double evacuated to 2.5 mm Hg absolute, close the 

vacuum pump suction valve and stop the pump. Allow the system to stand under 

a vacuum a minimum of 12 hours. If no noticeable rise in pressure has taken 

place after 12 hours, the system may be charged. This test shall be made in the 

presence of the Architect/Engineer. 

7. The contractor shall furnish and install all of the refrigerant required to develop 

the system to its full rating, and in addition to the initial charge, he shall provide, 

without cost, all necessary refrigerant for the proper operation of the 

refrigeration apparatus during the first year's operation. 

8. The contractor shall be required to provide the initial charge of lubricating oil for 

all refrigeration equipment and related apparatus. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 15800 

AIR DISTRIBUTION 






A. Furnish and install fans, filters, sheet metal work, grilles, louvers, diffusers, registers, 

sound traps, special fan bases, fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers and 

sleeves, accessories and natural gas fired appliance flue vents. 

B. All automatically controlled dampers furnished under Section 15900 - CONTROLS 

AND INSTRUMENTATION will be installed under this section. After dampers are 

set they shall be balanced for free and easy operation. 

C. Where ductwork has an interior lining, dimensions shown on drawings shall be clear 

dimensions inside the liner. 

D. Prior to system test and balance, supply and install new, clean air filters throughout 

the air handling systems except for any high efficiency filters which have pressure 

drop within normal operating limits. 

1.3 REQUIREMENTS AND RELATED WORK 


15043 - BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 

15190 - DUCT INSULATION 

15900 - CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 


A. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel. 

B. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. 

C. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, 

and Strip. 

D. ASTM A 366 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality. 

E. ASTM A 480 - General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting 

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 

AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

F. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by 

the Hot-Dip Process. 

G. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock 

Forming Quality. 

H. ASTM A 568 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and 

Cold-Rolled. 

I. ASTM A 569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, 

Commercial Quality. 

J. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 

K. AWS D9.1 - Welding of Sheet Metal. 

L. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems - Latest 

Edition. 

M. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems - Latest 

Edition. 

N. NFPA 91 - Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock and 

Vapor Removal or Conveying - Latest Edition. 

O. NFPA 96 - Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and 

Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment - Latest Edition. 

P. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 

Q. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible - 1985. 

R. UL STANDARD 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors. 

S. UL STANDARD 555 – Standard for Safety Fire Dampers 

T. UL STANDARD 555S – Leakage Rated Dampers for use in Smoke Control Systems 


2.1 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES 

A. All major items of equipment are specified in the equipment schedule on the 

drawings and shall be furnished complete with all accessories normally supplied with 

the catalog item listed and all other accessories necessary for a complete and 

satisfactory operating system. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

B. All registers, grilles and diffusers shall be as listed in the schedule on the drawings. 

Frame style shall be coordinated by the Contractor to match the ceiling type shown 

on the reflected ceiling plans of the Contract Documents. 

2.2 DUCTWORK 

A. SHEETMETAL 

1. Materials and Gauges: Construct all ducts, casings, plenums, etc., of galvanized 

steel sheets, of the gauges specified below, unless otherwise shown. Sheets shall 

be free from blisters, slivers, pits and imperfectly galvanized spots. 

2. All ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with "HVAC DUCT 

CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS - METAL AND FLEXIBLE". First Edition, 

1985 as published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National 

Association, Inc. Pressure class for all ductwork shall be 2” or unless otherwise 

noted on plans. 

3. Construct low velocity ducts using Pittsburgh or "Snap-Lock" corner seams. All 

seams shall be made airtight. Using United Mc Grill “UNI-FLEX” duct sealer or 


4. Connections of high pressure and/or velocity ducts, fittings and high pressure 

boxes shall be made airtight by tack welding on 8" centers and coating joints 

with United Mc Grill “United duct Sealer”. 

5. Round ducts and fittings for high velocity systems shall be spiral lockseam 

conduit as manufactured by United Mc Grill Co., Inc.,or approved equal. All 90 

elbows shall be at least 5-piece construction. Standard manufactured ducts of 

other than spiral construction will be acceptable if constructed of the following 

gauges with welded seams. Sizes thru 12 inch diameter shall be 22 gauge, 23 

inch thru 36 inch diameter shall be 20 gauge, 37 inches and over shall be 18 

gauge. Basic high velocity fittings are detailed on the drawings. Spun or tapered 

takeoffs shall be used from all vertical high velocity risers. 

B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of 

duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, 

provide air foil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning 

vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. 

C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever 

possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees 

convergence downstream. 

D. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than 

duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch 

cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

E. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 

degree conical tee connections may be used. 

F. FLEXIBLE 

1. Flexible ducts for connections between rigid ductwork and variable volume 

boxes shall be Factory Insulated flexible conduit capable of holding 5 inches 

W.C. without development leaks and shall not exceed a flame spread of 25 or a 

smoke development of 50. Thermoflex Type N-KH or approved equal. 

2. Flexible connections between the diffusers and the runout ducts shall be factory 

insulated, sound absorbing low velocity flexible conduit conforming to the 

following duct fabrication shall not exceed a flame spread of 25 or a smoke 

development of 50. 

a) Two ply vinyl film supported by helically wound spring steel wire: 

fiberglass insulation: polyethylene vapor barrier film. 

b) Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG (2.50 kPa) positive and 1.0 inches WG (250 

Pa) negative. 

c) Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/sec). 

d) Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F (-23 degrees C to 71 

degrees C). 

2.3 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS 

A. Furnish and install at locations shown on plans, or as required by code combination 

fire/smoke dampers meeting the following specifications. Frame shall be galvanized 

steel formed into a structural hat channel shape with tabbed corners for 

reinforcement. 

B. Each combination fire smoke damper shall be 1-1/2 hour fire rated under UL 

Standard 555 or greater where noted on architectural plans, and bear a UL label 

attesting to same. Damper manufacturer shall have tested, and qualified with UL, a 

complete range of damper sizes covering all dampers required by this specification. 

The leakage rating under UL555S shall be Leakage Class II (10 cfm/ft. at 1” w.g.) 

C. In addition to the leakage ratings already specified herein, the dampers and their 

actuators shall be qualified under UL555S to an elevated temperature of 250º F, 

350ºF, or 450ºF depending upon the actuator. Appropriate electric “Firestat” operator 

shall be installed by the damper manufacturer at time of damper fabrication. Damper 

and actuator shall be supplied as a single entity which meets all applicable UL555 

and UL555S qualifications for both dampers and actuators. Manufacturer shall 

provide factory assembled sleeve of 16” minimum length (contractor to verify 

requirement). Factory supplied caulked sleeve shall be 16 gage for dampers up to 36” 

wide by 24” tall and 14 gage above 36” wide X 24” tall. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1. Combination Fire/Smoke dampers shall be Ruskin FSD6O rectangular dampers 

and Ruskin FSDR25 for round dampers or approved equal with correct mounting 

frames and sleeves for actual installation. 

2. Combination Fire/Smoke dampers for corridors ceiling shall be Ruskin FSD36 

with internally mounted actuator. 

D. Each combination fire and smoke damper shall include an integral factory furnished 

and installed duct smoke detector compatible with the building fire alarm system. 

Assembly by Ruskin DSDN or approved equal. 

E. Size of access doors in ductwork shall be 2 inches less than the width of the duct by 

12 inches, up to a maximum size of 24 inches by 24 inches. 

2.4 FIRE DAMPERS 

A. Furnish and install at locations shown on the drawings or as required by code fire 

dampers meeting the following requirements. Provide access doors at all fire damper 

locations of sufficient size to allow easy resetting of fire damper linkage. Fire 

damper links shall be of the test strength recommended to prevent nuisance closing. 

All fire dampers shall conform to the requirements of NFPA Pamphlet 90A and shall 

meet the required UL Standard 555. 

B. High Velocity Round or Oval Fire Dampers: High velocity fire dampers shall be of 

the folding blade type designed for minimum static pressure drop. Fusible links shall 

be accessible from either side of the damper. Each damper shall be furnished 

complete with a galvanized welded steel sleeve (round or oval) and closure 

compartment to house the folded blades. Fire dampers shall be Ruskin FD35 with 

165F fusible link or approved equal. 

C. Rectangular Fire Dampers: Fire dampers for rectangular ductwork shall be of the 

folding blade type with the hinged blades completely out of the air stream of the 

single hinged blade type. Fusible links shall be accessible from either side of the 

damper. Each damper shall have a galvanized welded steel sleeve (rectangular or 

square) and closure compartment to house the folded blades. Rectangular fire 

dampers mounted in the horizontal plane are to be spring loaded. Fire dampers shall 

be Ruskin DIBD with 165F fusible link or approved equal. 

D. Provide access doors at all fire damper locations of sufficient size to allow easy 

resetting of fire damper linkage. Size of access doors in ductwork shall be 2 inches 

less than the width of the duct by 12 inches, up to a maximum size of 24 inches by 24 

inches. 

E. Each fire damper shall be provided with spare fusible link(s) secured to the damper. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2.5 ACCESS DOORS 

A. Wall and Ceiling Access Doors: Furnish as required in Section 15010, paragraph 3.6. 

B. Duct Access Doors: Duct access doors at fire dampers and other locations which 

require access to mechanical devices inside of ductwork shall be Controlair 16 gauge 

access door with continuous hinge, neoprene gasket, thumb screw locks and baked 

enamel finish. Doors shall be sized for easy access to mechanical device. 

C. Walk Thru Plenum Access Doors: Doors shall be provided with a flat iron or angle 

iron stiffening frame and so constructed that they can be operated without twisting or 

distortion. Doors on insulated ductwork shall be of double panel construction 

provided with an approved type insulated filler, not less than one inch thick. The 

duct opening at each door shall be provided with a continuous reinforcing galvanized 

bar or angle against which the door will close, this being provided with a sponge 

rubber gasket to make the door airtight. 

D. Door frames on insulated ductwork shall be placed on an extended metal collar flush 

with the face of the finished insulation. 

E. Latches shall be operable from either side of door and shall be "Ventlok" No. 310. 

2.6 BURIED UNDERGROUND DUCTS 

A. Buried ducts may be concrete encased sheet metal PVC jacketed sheet metal as 

indicated. 

B. Fabricate metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct 

Construction Standards, except as indicated. Fabricate using two gages heavier 

material than indicated for 2 inch WG pressure class. 

2.7 FILTERS 

A. Filters shall be as listed in the schedule on the drawings. 

B. Filter gauge for each bank of filters in the mechanical rooms and roof top equipment 

will be supplied and installed by the Controls Contractor as specified in Section 

15900 - CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION. 

2.8 COILS 

A. In no case shall specified air or water pressure drops be exceeded more than 10%. 

Piping connections shall be as shown on the drawings. Coils shall be as specified in 

the equipment schedule on the drawings. In no case shall rows or fin spacing be less 

than the minimum surface scheduled. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2.9 TURNING VANES 

A. Turning vanes shall be installed in all square elbows. Turning Vanes shall be air foil 

blade type, shop or factory fabricated. 

2.10 FLUE GAS VENTS 

A. Gas fired equipment shall be vented in accordance with the Uniform Mechanical 

Code, Uniform Plumbing Code and local codes and ordinances. Natural draft 

appliances shall have Type “B” vents. Forced draft appliances shall have per 

Manufacturer’s requirements vents. 

2.11 FAN PLENUMS 

A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards 

- Metal and Flexible and construct for operating pressures indicated. 

B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch 100 high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet 

panels on 8 inch centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide 

liner of 18 gage galvanized expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned 

up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal shields. 

C. Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum 

supporting angles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access 

to equipment for cleaning and inspection. [Provide clear wire glass observation ports, 

minimum 6 X 6 inch size.] 

D. Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Provide 16 gage back 

facing and 22 gage perforated front facing with 3/32 inch diameter holes on 5/32 inch 

centers. Construct panels 3 inches thick packed with 4.5 lb/cu ft minimum glass fiber 

media, on inverted channels of 16 gage. 

E. Plenum Access Doors: As indicated on the drawings, provide and install sheet metal 

access doors of the size as noted or as required for proper access to the equipment. 

These doors shall be constructed as integral parts of the plenum walls. Fasteners: 

Walk-thru type doors at plenum chambers shall be provided with two fastening 

devices equal to Ventlok #301, that can be operated on either side of the door. These 

devices are to be readily operated and moving parts to have bronze pins. 


3.1 INSTALLATION OF SHEET METAL WORK 

A. All necessary allowance and provisions shall be made in the installation of sheet 

metal ducts for the structural conditions of the building, and ducts shall be 

transformed or divided as may be required. Whenever this is necessary the required 

area shall be maintained. All of these changes, however, must be approved and 

installed as directed at the project. During the installation, the open ends of ducts 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

shall be protected to prevent debris and dirt from entering. Whenever exposed ducts 

pass through walls, floors or ceilings, a flanged sheet metal collar fitting close around 

ducts shall be slipped along duct until flange is tight against finished surface covering 

edges of openings and presenting a neat appearance. Collar shall be locked to duct. 

B. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and 

maintenance activities. 

C. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. 

D. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 5 feet (1.5 m) 

maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp. 

E. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static 

pressure holds door in closed position. 

F. Encase buried metal ductwork in 3 inch minimum of concrete. Provide adequate 

tie-down points to prevent ducts from floating during concrete placement. Introduce 

no heat into ducts for 20 days following placement of concrete. 

G. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on 

open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. 

H. All ducts, coils, housings, registers, grilles, fans, etc., shall be clean when installed 

and shall be kept clean until the system is completed. As the various parts of the 

system are installed they shall be wiped or blown clean and openings taped dust-tight 

with heavy paper or cardboard until the system is completed and ready for testing. At 

that time all covers and protective wrappings shall be removed. Where one has been 

torn or previously removed, the duct, coil, register, etc., shall be carefully cleaned of 

any dirt or dust that has entered the opening. 

3.2 DUCTS AT MASONRY 

A. Where ducts are shown connecting to masonry openings and along edges of all 

plenums at floors and walls, provide a continuous 2" x 2" x 1/8" galvanized angle 

iron which shall be bolted to the construction and made airtight to the same by 

applying caulking compound. Sheet metal in these locations shall be bolted to the 

angle iron. 

3.3 HAND AND SPLITTER DAMPERS 

A. Install hand operated volume and splitter dampers at all locations of branches of main 

ducts, from equipment, supply ducts, return ducts and at all locations where air flow 

splits or is balanced, whether shown or not. Volume dampers shall be controlled by 

heavy duty locking quadrants mounted on the outside of the duct. Where ducts are 

insulated the damper rod shall be extended and the operator shall be mounted on the 

outside of the insulation. Where volume dampers are installed in ducts over 12" 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

deep, the dampers shall be made in two sections and each independently operated. 

Splitter dampers shall be at least 1 1/2 times as long as the narrowest adjacent split. 

All damper fittings must be heavy commercial items and must be approved by the 

Architect/Engineer before installation. 

3.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS 

A. Provide glass fabric, neoprene coated flexible connections, not less than 6" wide at 

the inlet and outlet connection of each fan unit, securely fastened to the unit and to 

the ductwork. Materical shall comply with Underwriter's Laboratories Standard 214. 

B. Indoor applications shall have Metaledge Ventglas with heavy glass fabric, double 

coated with Dupont's Neoprene. 

C. Outdoor applications shall have Metaledge Ventlon with heavy glass fabric, double 

coated with Dupont's Hypalon. 

3.5 CROSS BREAKING 

A. Rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be cross-broken on the four sides of each 4-foot 

panel. All vertical and horizontal sheet metal barriers, duct offsets, elbows, as well as 

4-foot panels of straight sections of ducts shall be cross-broken. Cross breaking shall 

be applied to the sheet metal between the standing seams or reinforcing angles. The 

center of the cross break shall be of the required height to assure surfaces being rigid. 

High velocity plenum panels and ductwork shall not be cross-broken. 

3.6 TEST HOLES IN DUCTWORK 

A. Furnish test holes in ducts at locations required by the testing and balancing team for 

testing of air quantities in ducts. Ventlok No. 699, closures shall be provided and 

installed for each test hole, with sufficient neck length to penetrate the insulation. 

3.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. Hangers for ducts up to 18 inches in width or diameter shall be placed not more than 

ten foot centers. Ducts 19 inches and over in width or diameter shall be supported on 

not more than five foot centers. Hangers shall be placed plumb and present for a neat 

appearance. Construct hangers for high velocity boxes and for ductwork form 

galvanized iron 1" x 1" x 1/16" for ducts up to 36 inches in width or diameter. For 

ducts over 36 inches in width or diameter, support ducts every 4'-0" with 1 1/4" x 1 

1/2" x 1/8" angles. The use of perforated band iron for duct support is prohibited. 

Hangers shall extend down the sides of the ducts using not less than three rivets or 

parker screws of appropriate sizes. It is essential that all ducts be rigidly supported. 

Where vertical ducts pass thru floors or roofs heavy supporting angles shall be 

attached to ducts and to the structure. Angles shall be of sufficient size to support 

ductwork rigidly. Place supporting angles on at least two sides of the duct. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 


A. All duct work shall be fabricated with the mill markings on the outside. 

3.9 TESTS 

A. Testing and balancing of the air tempering systems will be as specified in Section 

15043 - BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. 

B. If specified conditions cannot be obtained due to deficiencies in equipment 

performance or improper installation or workmanship, the Mechanical Contractor 

shall make any changes necessary to provide the specified conditions. 

C. Cleaning ducts and testing for tightness: Before the ceiling is installed and final 

connections are made to air outlet devices, operate the fans at full capacity to blow 

out dirt and debris from the ducts. If it is not practical to use the main supply blower 

for cleaning, the ducts may be blown out in sections by a portable fan. After the 

ducts have been cleaned, an air tightness test shall be made on all ductwork. A 

minimum pressure equal to fan static pressure at less than 10% of design flow or 2 

1/2 times design external static pressure, whichever is less shall be maintained during 

the test. A soap test shall be applied to all sheet metal connections and joints to 

locate air leaks. Air leaks which are in excess of that required to bubble the soap suds 

(that is, actually blow the suds away), shall be sealed by additional taping and 

caulking to reduce the leakage to a rate not to exceed slow bubbles forming. In lieu 

of the above tightness tests, the Contractor may test the ducts by attaching a fan with 

a capacity of not over 300 cfm at 2 1/2" static pressure to the ductwork and with 

outlets blocked air tight, build up the pressure in the ducts to 2" water gauge. If this 

pressure cannot be obtained the Contractor shall locate and repair the leaks as 

specified above. The Architect/Engineer and Owner's Representative shall witness 

the test and the Contractor shall notify the Insulation Contractor in writing when the 

test has been satisfactorily completed. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 15900 

CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 



A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions 

and the General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 


A. Furnish and install a control system, complete in all respects to provide the 

Sequence of Control shown on the drawings. 

B. The mechanical trade is entirely responsible for furnishing, installing, wiring, 

connecting and placing the control systems in operation. Electrical work required 

will be the final responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor either by his own 

electricians or by his subcontract with an Electrical Contractor. 


DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 


15043 - BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 

15046 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 

15902 - ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND INTERLOCKS 

1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. The control system shall be furnished complete for the heating and air 

conditioning systems by the suppliers HVAC equipment Manufacturer or 

approved by the Manufacturer. A complete stock of all repair and replacement 

parts for all items furnished under this contract shall be carried in stock at the 

local office at all times. 

B. Submittals: Shall include plan size drawings, with individual literature on each 

item, showing control sequences, complete electrical ladder diagrams and all 

control components and their wiring requirements. The Contractor shall be 

responsible to see that all systems are properly coordinated. 

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: As soon as possible after Award of 

Contract, the Contractor shall prepare an Operation and Maintenance (O & M) 

Manual and submit it to the Engineer for review and approval. The control 

system testing and training specified hereafter shall not be conducted until the O 

& M Manual has been approved. The Manual shall contain, as a minimum: 

CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 15900-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1. Approved control diagrams. 

2. Equipment and device catalog cuts identifying each control device with a 

unique number or symbol coordinated with the control diagram symbols. 

3. A Sequence of Control for each system's control diagram identifying the 

function and physical location of each adjustable control device, written in 

language understandable to personnel not specifically trained in HVAC 

control systems. 

4. A Troubleshooting section for each control system indicating what tests 

and/or adjustments can be made to identify and/or correct common 

problems with control systems of the type installed. This description 

should address procedures to determine the cause of high or low space 

temperature and/or humidity in a typical room served by each air handling 

system. The description should be adequate to lead untrained persons to 

conclude, at minimum, whether the unit is receiving adequate primary 

cooling or heating, whether mixed air and supply air temperatures are 

reasonable and whether field adjustments or technical service is required 

to solve the problem. This troubleshooting section shall be bound in a 

separate section of O & M Manual and shall clearly refer to control device 

symbols shown on the Control Diagram drawings. 

1.5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. No compression fittings shall be used in concealed places. 

B. The controls trade shall check and adjust his control system completely, twice 

during the guarantee period. The second check to be made during the final thirty 

days of the guarantee period. 

C. The controls trade will furnish the Owner with an accurate, up-to-date wiring 

diagram of all electrical and electronic equipment installed under this contract. 

D. The Contractor shall furnish a complete set of parts lists, operating instructions 

and maintenance literature, in duplicate, for proper maintenance of all control 

equipment. 

E. Clear plastic lockable covers shall be provided for all space thermostats where 

shown on the drawings or where the space thermostat could be damaged. 


2.1 AUTOMATIC DAMPERS 

A. All automatic dampers shall be furnished by the controls trade and shall be 

constructed of galvanized sheet steel with bushings made of oil impregnated 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

sintered bronze to give constant lubrication. Each damper section shall have 

positive closing neoprene blade and edge seals. Outside air, return air and relief 

dampers shall have blades designed so that the blades are interconnected to give 

parallel movement. Each modulating damper shall provide a near linear 

relationship between damper opening and air flow. All volume dampers shall 

have opposed blades which will produce equal pressure drop flow characteristics. 

Blade width shall not exceed 6 inches. Dampers shall be equal to Pacific Air 

Products. 

2.2 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES 

A. The controls trade shall provide all automatic control valves and shall be made by 

the control manufacturer. All electric control valves 2" and smaller in size shall 

be brass body and trim, 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body with brass or stainless 

steel trim. Valves shall be provided with renewable type seats and adjustable 

springs. Valves shall be designed to pass the quantity of water and with a 

maximum pressure loss not to exceed 10 ft. Valves shall be provided with "V" 

port or throttling type seat. Valves 2" or smaller shall be screwed. Valves 2-1/2" 

and larger shall be flanged. All sequencing valves shall have positive positioners. 

2.3 DAMPER MOTORS - ELECTRIC 

A. The damper motor shall be electro-hydraulic type capable of providing full 

proportional control of dampers. The actuator shall be compatible with any low 

voltage controller or auxiliary device. One motor shall be provided per damper 

section. 

2.4 SMOKE AND FIRE DETECTORS 

A. Smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed in each air handling unit or 

system 2000 CFM and larger. The contractor shall coordinate smoke detectors 

with the mechanical equipment schedule. Some detectors may be furnished by 

Mechanical Contractor with factory packaged equipment, see equipment schedule 

otherwise it is the contractors responsibility to provide and install smoke 

detectors. 

B. Smoke detector units shall be self-contained ionization type units. These units 

shall be designed for detection of products of combustion in compliance with the 

National Fire Protection Association, Recommended Practices Pamphlet No. 90A. 

The assembly shall consist of a casting to accommodate sampling tubes which 

extend across the duct of the ventilation system. 

C. The unit shall provide the following functions: 

1. Neon alarm and trouble indicators. 

2. One set of single pole, double throw alarm operated relay contacts. 

3. One set of single pole double throw trouble operated relay contacts. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

4. Alarm reset switch. 

2.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 

A. The operation of the control system shall be as indicated on the drawings and 

control diagrams. The sequence shall be rewritten and shown on the control 

submittal drawing diagramming that system. The sequence on the submittal 

drawing shall identify control devices by number and physical location 

coordinated with the submittal drawing device numbers. 



A. No control work shall be performed until the control diagram shop drawings have 

been approved by the Engineer and returned to the contractor. 

3.2 CONTROL WIRING 

A. All control wiring shall be furnished and installed by the temperature control 

subcontractor. 

B. Terminal strips shall be used in all boxes and cabinets where more than six 

control wires are terminated, spliced or both. 

C. All control wiring shall be color coded and marked in each box, at each 

termination with Brady wrap around labels or suitable tags approved by the 

Architect. The schematic control diagrams shown on the contract drawings are 

for the convenience of the contractor and may not be complete in all details of 

control wiring for the equipment purchased for installation. 

3.3 SYSTEM TESTING 

A. The integrity and accuracy of each function and control point shall be 

demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer during the test period. 

At the termination of the testing period the Contractor shall spend one working 

day instructing the Owner or his designated personnel in the control system 

operation. A complete operating booklet shall be provided and used during the 

training period. 

B. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor or his authorized 

representative, shall be sent to the installation to certify that all necessary 

electrical tests and control adjustments have been completed. He shall then file a 

letter of Certification indicating that the system functions and conforms to the 

intent of these specifications. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 15902 


ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND INTERLOCKS 

1.1 Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions 

and General Requirements. 


A. General Provisions; Raceways, Boxes and Fittings; Conductors; Wiring Devices and 

Plates; Grounding; Motor Starters. 


A. All disconnect means, motor controllers, electrical controls, protective, and signal 

devices for equipment furnished under Division 15 of these specifications will be 

installed and connected as scheduled herein or as otherwise noted on the drawings. 

B. Electrical items not shown on the electrical drawings, but which are required for 

equipment furnished under Division 15 of this specification shall be furnished under 

this section of the specifications and shall be installed and electrically connected in 

conformance with Division 16 Specifications. 


A. Submittal data for each individual electrically controlled item of equipment or device 

furnished under this Division of these specifications shall include complete electrical 

wiring diagrams, and elementary control diagrams (ladder form) showing all internal 

and external wiring connections and services. The submittal data shall itemize all 

electrical characteristics that are of a special nature or critical to the electrical 

installation or control system. Such equipment and devices will not be considered for 

approval until these requirements are met. These submittals shall form a part Section 

15900 requirements and shall be properly coordinated by the Contractor. 

B. As soon as possible after contract notice to proceed, one print of the ladder diagrams 

shall be submitted by the contractor showing all necessary wiring for the mechanical 

equipment and devices proposed for installation. This print shall be reviewed and 

approved by the contractor, and then submitted to the Architect/Engineer for 

approval. The print shall indicate all components which shall be wired to the 

control/power circuits by the contractor, with all terminals for external connections of 

the components identified and labeled to correspond to the manufacturer's 

designations. Internal or factory installed wiring of package-type components need 

not be shown. Control diagrams shall show all internal and external wiring 

connection and shall clearly indicate field wiring furnished and installed under 

ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AN INTERLOCKS 15902-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

Division 15, differentiated from field wiring furnished and installed under Division 

16. 

C. Revised Drawings: After the Architect/Engineer has approved the marked copy of 

the control diagrams submitted in accordance with Paragraph B above, the Contractor 

shall issue prints to all involved parties. The control diagrams shall be certified in 

writing as being acceptable to the contractor. The approved drawings will then be 

included in the control submittal and the Operating and Maintenance Manual. 


A. No control work shall be performed until control submittal has been approved by the 


1.6 CHANGES DURING CONSTRUCTION 

A. The complete responsibility and costs for revisions during construction to the 

approved control diagrams, and the resultant changes to the installation requirements, 

not covered by contract change order, shall be assigned to the contractor requesting 

such revisions. 


2.1 CONTROL AND INTERPOSING RELAYS 

A. Relays other than those on I/O cards shall be general purpose, enclosed plug-in type 

with 8 pin octal plug and protected by a heat and shock resistant dust cover. Relays 

shall be of the Neon or LED indicator type. 

B. Relay contact configuration and ratings shall be for rated load voltage and exceed 

load current rating by no less than fifty percent. Minimum contact rating shall be 10 

amps at 120 volts AC. 

2.2 TERMINAL STRIPS 

A. Terminal strips shall be of the molded nylon or polypropylene barrier type, individual 

plug-in mounted on a mounting channel. Terminal connections shall be rated 300 

volt, 40 amp and shall be of the tubular clamp type for use with bare wire ends, or of 

the strap screw type for use with crimp spade lug prepared wire ends. Terminal strips 

shall provide for removable marking strips or have prepainted matte finish marking 

surfaces. Buchanan 600 series or approved substitute. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 


3.1 RELAYS 

A. All remote field devices shall be controlled through the use of an interposing relay. 

In no case shall a contactor or motor starter be directly controlled from a solid state 

device output or relay contact of a rating less than that stated above. 

3.2 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION 

A. All individual components (relays, timers, terminal strips, etc.) shall be clearly 

marked with the identification nomenclature shown on the manufacturer's shop 

drawings. Identification shall be by the use of press-type tape strip (kroy) covered 

with Scotch 600 clear tape or approved substitute method. 

3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION 

A. The installation and wiring of all electrical equipment installed under this contract 

shall meet all Division 16 specifications. Special attention is called to the following: 

1. All wiring to be in conduit. 

2. All control wiring to be color-coded throughout. Conductor color shall be 

consistent for the entire length of circuit. 

3. All splices shall be made in junction boxes on terminal strips. 

4. All control wiring to terminate on marked terminal strips and shall be marked at 

all terminal points. Both ends of each wire shall be marked with a designation 

shown on the manufacturer's shop drawings, using interlocking chevron shaped 

snap-on plastic markers, hot-marked shrinkable tubing, hot stamping of the wire, 

or clear shrink-on tubing securing adhesive labels. Markers which depend solely 

on adhesive are not acceptable. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16010 

GENERAL PROVISIONS 


1.1 The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary 

General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this 

section. 

1.2 ELECTRICAL DIVISION INDEX 

16010 General Provisions 

16110 Raceways 

16120 Wires and Cables 

16130 Outlet Boxes 

16133 Cabinets 

16140 Wiring Devices 

16150 Motors 

16155 Motor Starters 

16160 Panelboards 

16170 Motor and Circuit Disconnects 

16181 Fuses 

16190 Relays and Contactors 

16450 Grounding 

16470 Distribution Circuits 

16485 Elevator Wiring 

16501 Lamps 

16502 Ballasts and Accessories 

16511 Fluorescent Fixtures 

16612 Generator Systems 

16722 Small Fire Alarm System 

1.3 REQUIREMENTS 

A. Furnish all labor, materials, service, equipment and appliances required to complete 

the installation of the complete Electrical System in accordance with the 

Specifications and Contract Drawings. 

B. Refer to the Table in Division 15, Section 15902, 1.02 A for specific direction on 

items to include or exclude from this work. 

1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES AND STANDARDS 

A. Regulatory Agencies: Installation, materials, equipment and workmanship shall 

conform to the applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC), the 

National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) and the terms and conditions of the 

Electrical Utility and other authorities having lawful jurisdiction pertaining to the 

work required. All modifications required by these codes, rules, regulations and 

authorities shall be made by the Contractor without additional charge. 

GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or Factory Mutual (FM): All materials, appliances, 

equipment or devices shall conform to the applicable standards of Underwriters 

Laboratories, Inc. or Factory Mutual, Inc. The label of, or listing by, UL or FM is 

required. 

C. Standards: Where referenced in these Specifications or on the Drawings, the 

publications and standards of the following organizations shall apply: Joint 

Commission on Accrediation of Healthcare Organizations (JCAHO), American 

Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM), Insulated Power Cable Engineers 

Association (IPCEA), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), American 

National Standards Institute (ANSI), and National Electrical Manufacturers 

Association (NEMA). 

D. Conflicting code requirements shall be brought to the attention of the Architect. 

Where two or more codes apply, the most stringent of the codes shall govern. 

1.5 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 

A. Material List: Within 30 days of Contract Award or Notice to Proceed and before 

material is ordered, the Contractor shall submit for approval a list of all proposed 

material and equipment, indicating manufacturer's name and general description. 

B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval a minimum of six copies of all shop drawings 

no later than 30 days after the material list has been approved and prior to ordering 

any material. Show complete outlines, dimensions, electrical services, control 

diagrams, electrical characteristics of special nature or critical to the installation and 

pertinent data required for installation. Indicate in the transmittal that submittal has 

been reviewed and accepted and all Contract deviations identified. In addition to 

specific references or requests; submit shop drawings for the following applicable 

items: panelboards, lighting fixtures, transformers, primary cable and gear, alarm 

systems and all special equipment. 

C. Substitutions may be requested in accordance with Section 01640, 1.04. 


2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS: The Electrical requirements for equipment specified or 

indicated on the Drawings are based on information available at the time of design. If 

equipment furnished for installation has Electrical requirements other than indicated on 

the Electrical Drawings, the Contractor shall make all adjustments to wire and conduit 

size, controls, overcurrent protection and installation as required to accommodate the 

equipment supplied, without additional charge to the Owner. All adjustments to the 

Drawings reflecting the Electrical System shall be delineated in a submittal to the 

Architect immediately upon knowledge of the required adjustments. The complete 

responsibility and costs for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of 

these Specifications in which the equipment is furnished. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

B. Where no specific material, apparatus or appliance is mentioned, any first-class 

product made by a reputable manufacturer may be used, providing it conforms to the 

Contract requirements and meets the approval of the Architect. 

C. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly 

engaged in the production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's current 

and standard design. 

2.3 ALTITUDE: Equipment affected by altitude shall perform satisfactorily the function 

intended at the altitude of the project site. The altitude of this project is 5250 feet mean 

sea level. 


3.1 GENERAL: Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete Electrical System shall 

be done in a first class workmanlike manner by qualified personnel experienced in such 

work and shall proceed in an orderly manner so as not to hold up the progress of the 

project. The Contractor shall check all areas and surface where Electrical equipment or 

material is to be installed, removed or relocated and report any unsatisfactory conditions 

before starting work. Commencement of work signifies this Contractor's acceptance of the 

prevailing conditions. 

3.2 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING: Furnish and install all temporary Electrical 

facilities required for construction and safety operation. No part of the permanent 

Electrical Systems or the existing Electrical System may be used for temporary service 

unless approved by the Architect. 

3.3 UTILITIES 

A. GENERAL: The Drawings reflect requirements of the serving utilities based on 

information derived from representatives of the utilities. During the project design 

phase, the fact that the Architect may undertake to show the utility(s) requirements, 

does not necessarily indicate that the Architect represents the utilities or their 

requirements; therefore, within 10 working days after Contract Award and/or Notice 

to Proceed has been issued, the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the 

requirements of the utilities for the Power System. The Owner shall be responsible 

for coordinating the requirements for the Telephone and Television Systems. 

B. Any deviations from the documents shall be brought to the attention of the Architect 

no later than 10 working days after Award of Contract and/or Notice to Proceed. 

Failure to notify the Architect within the 10-day time frame signifies the acceptance 

of documents and utility requirements by the Contractor and all associated costs 

therein. 

3.4 EXCAVATION: Comply with Section 02200, Earthwork. 

3.5 PERFORMANCE TESTS 

A. Thoroughly test all fixtures, services and all circuits for proper operating conditions 

and freedom from grounds and short circuits before acceptance is requested. All 

equipment appliances and devices shall be operated under load conditions. 

B. After the interior-wiring system installation is complete and at such time as the 

Architect may direct, conduct operating tests for approval. When requested, test all 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

the wire, cable, devices and equipment after installation to assure that all material 

continues to possess all the original characteristics as required by the governing codes 

and standards as listed in these Specifications. 

C. After occupancy of the building has taken place and nominal building power loads 

have been established, make voltage readings at all panelboards. Based on these 

readings make final adjustments of taps on all transformers in the building as directed 

by the Architect. Submit to Architect correspondence and/or drawing delineating 

readings. 

D. Perform such other tests as required by other sections of these Specifications or as 

requested by the Architect to prove acceptability. 

E. Furnish all instruments and labor for testing. 

3.6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS 

A. Instructions: Without additional charge to the Owner, the Contractor shall provide an 

experienced and competent representative to instruct the Owner or his representative 

fully in the concept, theory, operations, adjustment and maintenance of all equipment 

furnished for the Electrical System. Contractor shall provide at least two (2) weeks 

notice to the Architect in advance of this period. 

B. Manuals: Upon completion of the work, prepare and deliver to the Owner two (2) sets 

of complete operating and maintenance manuals for the systems and major equipment 

installed. Include catalog data, shop drawings, wiring diagrams, performance curves 

and rating data, spare parts lists and manufacturer's operating and maintenance data. 

Operating and maintenance manuals as required herein shall be submitted to the 

Architect for review and distribution to the Owner not less than two (2) weeks prior 

to the scheduled final acceptance of the Project. 

C. Other: The above requirements are in addition to specific instruction and manuals 

specified for individual systems or equipment. 

3.7 DRAWINGS 

A. General: The Electrical Drawings show the general arrangement of all conduit, 

equipment, etc. and shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and 

the work of other trades will permit. The Architectural and Structural Drawings shall 

be considered as a part of the work insofar as these Drawings furnish the Contractor 

with information relating to the design and construction of the building. Architectural 

Drawings shall take precedence over Electrical Drawings. The Contractor shall 

investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work and shall arrange 

his work accordingly, providing such fittings, elbows, pullboxes and accessories as 

may be required to meet such conditions. 

B. Field Measurements: The Contractor shall verify the dimensions governing the 

Electrical work at the building. No extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed on 

account of differences between actual dimensions and those indicated on the 

Drawings. 

3.8 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND OUTLETS 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

A. The approximate locations of cabinets, panelboards, wiring gutters, switches, light 

outlets, power outlets, etc., are indicated on the Drawings; however, the exact 

location shall be determined after thoroughly examining the general building plans 

and by actual measurements during construction to avoid conflicts with any 

Structural, Architectural, or other trades, with all locations subject to the approval of 

the Architect. 

B. Verify with the Architect all locations of conduit, boxes, etc., stubbed in the floor 

prior to installation. 

3.9 IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS 

A. Mark each individual motor controller, disconnect switch, transformer and remote 

control device to identify each item with its respective service using engraved 

nameplates. 

B. Provide nameplates with engraved lettering not less than 3/8" high where specified or 

noted. In general, use white core laminated plastic, attached with screws. Embossed 

plastic adhesive tape is not acceptable. Flush mounted devices may have 

identification engraved in the device plate. 

C. Identify panelboards, transformers and cabinets by engraved nameplates with 

descriptions indicated on the Drawings together with indication of the location of the 

feeder overcurrent protection. Install on inside of hinged doors or panelboards and 

cabinets. 

Example: Panel 2P 

120/208V, 3-phase, 4-wire 

Fed from Panel MDP/cct. #4 

D. Provide warning signs on all equipment or devices operating at 300 volts or more, 

reading "DANGER-480 VOLTS", etc. with white letters on red background of 

standard code size. Signs shall be decals. 

E. All underground utilities indicated on the Drawings shall have a 6" wide plastic 

marker installed continuously in the trench at 12" below grade. The marker shall have 

continuous markings embossed in the tape identifying the system installed, i.e., 

communications, telephone, power, and secured computer. 

F. Identify all exposed conduits, junction and pullboxes at maximum intervals of twenty 

feet and as indicated below. Identify exposed conduits according to the system 

carried by means of Brady #B-350 permacode thin film pipe markers or approved 

equal by the Owner. Identify junction and pullboxes by painted on stencils or 

approved labels. Identification shall be placed at necessary intervals on straight 

conduit runs, close to all terminations, adjacent to all changes in directions and where 

conduits pass through walls or floors. Stencils to be painted on with legible 

contrasting colors without abbreviations. Painting shall be in accordance with 

DIVISION - FINISHES. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1. Approved Electrical Conduit Color Codes: 

120/208 Volt Black 

277/480 Volt Orange 

Fire Alarm Red 

Nurse Call Blue 

Voice Paging Pink 

Television Purple 

Security 

White 

Telephone Gray 

Monitoring Maroon/White 

Grounding Green 

Emergency. Red/Black 

120/208 

Emergency. Red/Orange 

277/480 

Computer/Data Dark Blue/ White 

Medical Gas Yellow 

Alarms 

110 Volt Control Black/White 

G. Identify all receptacle and switch devices with the circuit and overcurrent protection 

device. Identification may be by waterproof, permanent marker on the rear of the 

device cover plate or as approved by the Architect and Owner. 

3.10 WARRANTY: Deliver originals of all guarantees and warranties on this portion of the 

work to the Architect. Warrant all equipment, materials and workmanship for one year in 

accordance with the terms of the Contract. 

3.11 PRODUCT HANDLING: Use all means necessary to protect Electrical materials and 

equipment before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work of other 

trades. 

3.12 RECORD DRAWINGS: As part of this Contract, the Contractor shall provide a complete 

marked-up set of Contract Documents indicating all changes to the documents during the 

project construction phase to the Architect. Changes to the Electrical System shall be 

documented on a set of "Record Drawings" on a daily basis. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16110 

RACEWAYS 


1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 

A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary 

General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in 

this section. 

B. General Provisions: Section 16010. 

C. Grounding: Section 16450. 


2.1 CONDUITS 

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick-wall with zinc-coated on the inside and 

either zinc-coated or coated with an approved corrosion-resistant coating on the 

outside. 

B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick-wall type, approved for the 

application. 

C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid, threaded, lightweight steel, zinc-coated or 

coated on the outside and either zinc-coated or coated with an approved 

corrosion-resistant coating on the inside. 

D. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit: Schedule 40, high impact PVC with 7,000 psi tensile 

strength at 73.4 degrees fahrenheit, 11,000 psi flexural strength, 8,600 psi 

compression strength, approved 90 degree conductors. Carlon, Triangle or approved 

equal. 

E. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Mild steel, zinc-coated on the outside and either 

zinc-coated or coated with an approved corrosion-resistant coating on the inside. 

F. Flexible Conduit: Commercial Greenfield, galvanized steel, with a separate 

grounding bond wire installed in the conduit in addition to other wires. 

G. Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit: Flexible galvanized steel tubing with extruded 

liquid-tight PVC outer jacket and a separate grounding conductor installed in the 

conduit. 

H. Conduit Size: Minimum conduit size 1/2" except where specifically approved for 

equipment connections. Sizes not noted on the Drawings shall be as required by the 

NEC. 

2.2 CONDUIT FITTINGS 

A. Rigid Steel Conduit, IMC and EMT Fittings: Iron, steel, or die-cast only. 

RACEWAYS 16110-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit Fittings: Malleable iron, steel or aluminum alloy. Ferrous 

fittings zinc-coated or cadmium plated. Aluminum alloy fittings shall conform to the 

characteristics defined by UL for rigid aluminum metallic conduit and shall not 

contain more than 0.04 percent copper. 

C. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit Fittings: Approved for the purpose and as recommended 

by the manufacturer. 

D. Flexible Conduit Fittings (Commercial Greenfield): Either die-cast, steel, or 

malleable iron only with insulated throats and shall be of one of the following types: 

1. Squeeze or clamp type with bearing surface contoured to wrap around the conduit 

and clamped by one or more screws. 

2. Steel, multiple point type, for threading into internal wall of the conduit 

convolutions. 

3. Wedge and screw type with angular in-edge fitting between the convolutions of 

the conduit. 

E. Liquid-tight Flexible Conduit Fittings: With threaded grounding cone, a steel, nylon, 

or equal plastic compression ring and a gland for tightening. Either steel or malleable 

iron only with insulated throats and male thread and locknut or male bushing with or 

without "O" ring seal. 

F. Connectors and Couplings: Compression type threadless fittings for rigid steel 

conduit or IMC not permitted. Set-screw type fittings for rigid aluminum conduit not 

permitted. EMT couplings and connectors either die-cast, steel, or malleable iron 

only, "Concrete-tight" or "Raintight", and either the gland and ring compression type 

or the stainless steel multiple point locking type. Connectors to have insulated 

throats. EMT fittings using set-screws or indentations as a means of attachment are 

not permitted. 

G. Bushings: Insulated type, designed to prevent abrasion of the wires without impairing 

the continuity of the conduit grounding system, for rigid steel conduit, IMC, and rigid 

aluminum conduit. 

H. Expansion Fittings: Each conduit that is buried in or rigidly secured to the building 

construction on opposite sides of a building expansion joint and each run of 100 feet 

of exposed conduit shall be provided with an expansion fitting. Expansion fittings 

shall be hot dipped galvanized malleable iron with factory-installed packing and a 

grounding ring. 

I. Sealing Fittings: Threaded, zinc or cadmium coated, cast or malleable iron type for 

steel conduits and threaded cast aluminum type for aluminum conduits. Fittings used 

to prevent passage of water vapor shall be of the continuous drain type. 

2.3 WIREWAYS: Square D Company square duct lay in type without knockouts with lengths 

and fittings hinged to provide an unobstructed wireway to "lay-in" conductors, use 

standard lengths. Field cuts permitted where absolutely necessary. Rust-inhibiting 

phosphatizing coating on sheet metal parts. Blue-gray baked enamel finish. Hardware 

plated to prevent cross fittings, transposition section, gussett brackets, nipples, pull boxes, 

RACEWAYS 16110-2

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

reducer fittings, wall flanges, panels or cabinet flanges, elbows, ceiling and wall support 

brackets and supporting hardware, etc. 

2.4 FIRE AND SMOKING PROOFING COMPOUNDS: Comply with Section 13900. No 

substitutions accepted. 


3.1 CONDUIT INSTALLATION 

A. Conduit Systems: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, rigid non-metallic conduit or EMT unless 

otherwise specified. 

B. Aluminum Conduit: Aluminum conduit may be used only in dry locations above 

ground in sizes two inch or larger for Power and Communications Systems. 

C. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit: Install in accordance with manufacturer's 

recommendations. Joints shall be solvent welded. Field bends shall utilize approved 

bending equipment. Provide rigid steel elbows and rigid steel conduit risers on 

underground runs or runs in concrete. Provide a suitable bond wire in each run except 

low voltage communications runs. Underground runs under concrete slabs may be 

direct buried without concrete encasement if of approved type. Rigid non-metallic 

conduit may be installed outside the perimeter of the building only when encased in 

concrete. Concrete total encasement shall be a minimum of four inches around 

outside of conduit. Rigid non-metallic conduit is not permitted to be surface mounted 

in ducts, plenums or other air handling spaces. All 90 degree bends shall be rigid steel 

conduit. For encased conduits carrying 600 volts or more, the concrete shall be 

colored red using a permanent dye. 

D. EMT: Not permitted underground or embedded in concrete. 

E. Flexible Conduits: Use flexible conduit only for motor or equipment connections and 

then only to the extent of minimum lengths required for connections. Length shall not 

exceed 5 feet without approval from the Architect and Owner. Install flexible conduit 

connections at all resilient-mounted equipment. Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit 

in exterior, wet or damp locations and for connections to wet pipe mechanical 

systems. 

F. Conduit in Concrete: Rigid steel conduit or rigid non-metallic conduit may not be 

embedded in concrete that is in direct contact with the earth. When embedded, the 

outside diameter shall not exceed one-third the thickness of the concrete slab, wall or 

beam, shall be located entirely within the center third of the member, and the lateral 

spacing of conduits shall not be less than three diameter unless otherwise prohibited 

by Architect. 

G. Steel Conduit in Ground: Rigid steel conduit that is not completely encased in 

concrete but is in contact with ground or on a vapor barrier shall be wrapped with 

Scotchwrap 51 half-lapped, or shall have an additional outside factory coating of 

polyvinyl chloride with a minimum coat thickness of 20 mils. Other PVC or 

Phenolic-resin epoxy coating material which is equally flexible and chemically 

resistant may be used providing approval by the Architect is obtained prior to the 

installation. 

RACEWAYS 16110-3

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

H. Exposed Conduits: Install exposed conduit systems parallel to or at right angles to the 

lines of the building. Right angle bends in exposed runs shall be made with standard 

elbows, screw jointed conduit fittings or conduit bent to radii not less than those of 

standard elbows. 

I. Concealed Conduits: Install conduit systems concealed unless otherwise noted. 

Conduit systems may be exposed in unfinished utility areas, ceiling cavities, and 

where specifically approved by the Architect. Install concealed conduit systems in as 

direct lines as possible. 

J. Conduit Openings: Protect all vertical runs of conduits or EMT terminating in the 

bottoms of boxes or cabinets, etc., from the entrance of foreign material prior to 

installation of conductors. 

K. Sealing Fittings: Install where required by the NEC, where conduits pass from warm 

to cold locations and where otherwise indicated. 

L. Sleeves for Conduit: Install sleeves for conduit where shown or as required. Conduit 

sleeves not used shall be plugged with recessed type plugs. Sleeve all conduit passing 

through walls. Sleeves that are used shall be sealed tight with rated fire and 

smokeproofing compounds as specified in Section 13900. 

3.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS 

A. Supports: Provide supports for horizontal steel conduits and EMT not more than eight 

feet apart with one support near each elbow or bend and one support within one foot 

of each coupling, including runs above suspended ceilings. 

B. Straps: Install one-hole pipe straps on conduits 1-1/2" or smaller. Install individual 

pipe hangers for conduits larger than 1-1/2". Spring steel fasteners with hanger rods 

may be used in dry locations in lieu of pipe straps. 

C. Trapezes: Install multiple (trapeze) pipe hangers, Uni-Strut or approved equal, where 

two or more horizontal conduits or EMT run parallel and at the same elevation. 

Secure each conduit or EMT to the horizontal hanger member by specifically 

designed and approved fasteners for the system used. 

D. Hanger Rods: Install 1/4" diameter or larger steel rods for trapezes, spring steel 

fasteners, clips and clamps. Wire or perforated strapping shall not be used for the 

support of any conduit or EMT. 

E. Fastening: Fasten pipe straps and hanger rods to concrete by means of inserts or 

expansion bolts, to brickwork by means of expansion bolts, and to hollow masonry by 

means of toggle bolts. Wooden plugs and shields shall not be used. Power-driven 

fasteners may be used to attach pipe straps and hanger rods to concrete where 

approved by the Architect. All conduits not embedded in concrete shall be firmly 

secured by means of pipe clamps, hangers, etc., equal to Caddy Fasteners of ERICO 

Products, Inc., or approved equal. Wire wrapped around conduits and supporting 

members will not be accepted. Conduit fastened to the wall above the ceiling is not 

acceptable. 

3.3 IDENTIFICATION: Identify per Section 16010, Paragraph 3.09F. 

RACEWAYS 16110-4

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

3.4 CLOSING OF OPENINGS: Wherever slots, sleeves or other openings are provided in 

floors or walls for the passage of conduits or other forms of raceway, including bus ducts, 

such openings, if unused, or the spaces left in such openings, shall be closed in a manner 

approved by the Architect and per Section 13900. All closure material along with 

installation methods shall retain the fire rating integrity of the surface being penetrated. 

All openings in walls or floors remaining after removal of existing conduits, raceways, or 

bus ducts shall be closed in a like, approved manner. 


RACEWAYS 16110-5

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16120 

WIRES AND CABLES 




General. 

B. Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this 

section. 

C. General Provisions: Section 16010. 

D. Grounding: Section 16450. 


2.1 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLTS) 

A. Type: 

1. Conform to the applicable UL and IPCEA Standards for the use intended. Copper 

conductors with 600 volt insulation unless otherwise specified or noted on the 

Drawings. Stranded conductors for No. 6 and larger and where elsewhere 

specified or noted on the Drawings. 

2. All conductors shall be copper. Equivalent Aluminum conductors rated for the 

same ampacities and maximum 3% voltage drop may be utilized. 

3. The use of Romex cable is acceptable. 

B. Insulations: Type THWN insulation unless otherwise specified or noted on the 

Drawings. Type THWN minimum or type XHHW filled cross-linked polyethylene 90 

degree C. thermosetting insulation for conductors larger than No. 6 and elsewhere as 

required by NEC. 90 degrees C. minimum insulation within fixture wireways of 

fluorescent fixtures. 

C. Size: No. 12 minimum unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings. Not less 

than NEC requirements for the system to be installed. 

D. Color Coding: Phase, neutral and ground conductors color-coded in accordance with 

NEC. Connect all conductors of the same color to the same phase conductors. 

Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral 

120/240V/1 Phase Black Red ----- White 

208Y/120V/3 Phase Black Red Blue White 

WIRES AND CABLES 16120-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

277/480V/3 Phase Brown Orange Yellow Gray 

Ground shall be Green for all systems. 

E. Conductors No. 12 and 10 shall be solid color compounded for the entire length and 

each like color shall be connected only to the particular phase throughout the project. 

Conductor sizes larger than No. 10 may be color-coded at each termination and in 

each box or enclosure with six inches of half-lapped 3/4" pressure sensitive, plastic 

tape of respective colors in lieu of solid color compound. 

2.2 CONTROL CONDUCTORS: Copper, minimum size No. 14 with 19/35 stranding, colorcoded 

filled cross linked polyethylene 90 degree C. 600 volt insulation and neoprene or 

equal outer jacket, equal to General Electric SI-58109 or SI-58742. Multi-conductor 

control cables shall be provided where more than three control conductors are installed in 

the same conduit between common terminations. Provide two spare conductors minimum 

in each control cable. 

2.3 COMMUNICATION AND ELECTRONIC CABLE: As required or specified in the 

section of these Specifications specifying the equipment. Splices shall be crimped or 

soldered or shall use an approved connector. 

2.4 VERTICAL CABLE SUPPORTS: Split wedge type supports which clamp each individual 

conductor and tightens due to weight of the cable shall be used without metallic sheath. 

2.5 CONNECTORS AND LUGS 

A. For copper conductors No. 6 and smaller: 3M Scotch-Lok or T & B Sta-Kin, or equal 

compression or indent type connectors with integral or separate insulating caps. 

B. For copper conductors larger than No. 6: Solderless, indent, hex screw, or bolt-type 

pressure connectors, properly taped or insulated. 

2.6 TAPE: Plastic tape, 8.5 mils minimum thickness, 1,000,000 megohms minimum 

insulation resistance, oil resistant vinyl backing, oil resistant acrylic adhesive, incapable of 

supporting combustion per ASTM D-1000. Equal to 3-M Super 88 Tape. 

2.7 FEEDER CIRCUITS: Single conductor feeder cables shall be of the size and type as 

indicated on the Drawings. Sizes shown are for copper conductors unless otherwise noted 

on Drawings. 

2.8 BRANCH CIRCUITS 

A. Branch circuits shall be No. 12 AWG copper minimum and shall be larger AWG size 

where indicated on Drawings. Where branch circuits exceed 100 ft. in length, the 

AWG size shall be increased to accommodate voltage drop. 

B. Branch circuits to all equipment, fixtures and outlets shall include a white neutral and 

green wire equipment ground. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

3.1 WIRE AND CABLE TESTS (600 VOLTS): Measure the insulating resistance of service 

entrance conductors, feeder circuit conductors and service ground. Measurements shall be 

taken between conductors and between conductors and ground. Resistance shall be 

1,000,000 ohms or more when tested at 500 volts by megger without branch circuit loads. 

Tests and procedures shall meet the approval of the Architect, and shall be in accordance 

with the applicable IPCEA standards for the wires and cables to be installed. Furnish all 

instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing, and conduct tests in the 

presence of the Architect. Submit written reports of the tests and results when requested 

by the Architect. 

3.2 SPLICES (480 VOLTS AND UNDER): Permitted only at outlets or accessible enclosures. 

Conductor lengths shall be continuous from termination to termination without splices 

unless approved by the Architect. 

3.3 PULL WIRES: In each empty conduit, except underground conduits, install a plastic line 

having tensile strength of not less than 200 pounds. In each empty underground conduit, 

install a No. 10 AWG bare, hard-drawn copper pull wire or a plastic line having a tensile 

strength of not less than 200 pounds. 

3.4 RACEWAYS: Install in rigid conduit, EMT, or flexible metallic conduit, unless otherwise 

specified or noted on the Drawings. 

3.5 CABLE BENDS: Radius or bends not less than ten times the outer diameter of the cable. 

3.6 CONDUCTOR PULL: Conductors shall not be pulled into conduits until after all 

plastering or concrete work is completed and all conduits in which moisture collected 

have been swabbed out. 

3.7 FEEDER IDENTIFICATION: Tag feeder circuits in each enclosure with wrap-around 

circuit designation labels. 

3.8 CONNECTORS AND LUGS: Install with manufacturer's recommended tools and with 

the type and quantity of deformations recommended by manufacturer. 

3.9 BUNDLING: Conductors No. 10 and smaller shall be neatly and securely bundled and 

conductors larger than No. 10 shall be neatly and securely cabled in individual circuits, 

utilizing marlin twine, two-ply lacing or nylon straps. 

3.10 WIRING FOR LOW-VOLTAGE SPECIAL SYSTEMS 

A. General: For the purpose of this Specification, the word "cable" refers to both 

protected and unprotected cable installations. Special Systems refers to telephone, 

television, overhead paging, nurse call, building automation, security, data, and fire 

alarm systems. 

B. Products: Approved cabling shall be used per Section 16120, 2.03. 

C. Protection Requirements: All special systems cable runs inside walls and floors shall 

be in rigid conduit or BX cable per Section 16110. Cables placed in existing walls 

may be run in flex if approved by the Architect in advance. Runs exterior to walls and 

floors shall be as shown in the table below: 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

System Requirement Reference Section 

Telephone Approved cable without additional 16740, 16117 

protection 

Television Approved cable without additional none 

protection 

Overhead Approved cable without additional 16770 

Paging protection 

Building Approved cable without additional Division 17 

Automation protection 

Fire Alarm Approved cable in rigid conduit 16721 

Security Approved BX cable or cable in rigid 16727 

conduit 

D. Routing: All cable runs shall be routed to avoid passing near sources of electrical 

noise such as florescent fixtures, power converters, etc. Cable runs shall be routed to 

avoid paralleling high voltage or high amperage electrical wiring. Cable runs 

paralleling telephone cables shall have a minimum of twelve inch separation. The 

Architect will authorize waivers (in writing) for specific cases where the twelve inch 

separation cannot be maintained. 

E. Horizontal Installation: Horizontal cable runs shall be installed per Section 16110, 

3.01 using appropriate stringers, J-hooks, cable trays, and any other devices necessary 

so no cables above the ceiling shall lay on the ceiling, electrical conduit, ceiling 

suspension system, piping, ductwork or on any other systems installed in the area. 

The cable shall not be supported by any of the above mentioned systems. All cable 

shall be installed in a neat and orderly manner, above or well clear of existing 

systems. Cable shall not be installed below existing systems or attached to existing 

systems except on specific written wavier by the Architect. 

F. Vertical Installation: All vertical cable runs shall be installed with appropriate strain 

reliefs. 

a. Cable Identification: Identify all cable per Section 16010, 3.09 F. Wiring color code 

shall be approved in advance by the Architect and maintained throughout the scope of 

the work. 

G. Record Drawings: Per Section 16010, 3.12, the Contractor shall keep accurate records 

of the cable installation and at the end of the Contract shall turn over to the Architect 

documentation showing the routing and labeling of all cabling. The format of this 

documentation shall be approved by the Architect prior to beginning work. 

H. Hazardous Materials: The Contractor shall not disturb any spray-on fire-proofing 

insulation on roof panels or supporting beams without the approval of the Architect 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

and Owner. Some of this material contains asbestos and proper abatement procedures 

must be followed. Damage occurring to existing asbestos during the course of the 

work shall be repaired at the expense of the Contractor. 

I. Wall and Floor Penetrations: All penetrations of smoke and fire walls and floors shall 

be the responsibility of the Contractor. Conduits and cables penetrating these walls 

and floors shall be sleeved according Section to 16110, 3.01L, and sealed per Section 

16110, 3.04, both inside and out, with approved fire rated materials to prevent the 

passage of smoke. Fire and smoke penetrations caused by the removal of existing 

cable shall be properly sealed. The Contractor shall not penetrate any fire wall or 

structural member without specific authorization by the Architect. 

J. Existing Finishes: The Contractor shall be responsible to repair any damage to the 

finishes (paint, wallcoverings, tile, carpet, ceiling tile, etc.) caused by the Contractor 

or his Subs in the areas where he is working. 

K. Ceiling Tile: All ceiling tile removed by the Contractor for ceiling access shall be 

replaced at the end of each working day. Exceptions to this requirement must be 

approved by the Architect and Owner. 

L. Equipment Installation: The Contractor shall not install equipment in any equipment 

room, closet, or in ceiling spaces without authorization from the Architect and 

Owner. All equipment shall be installed in NEMA enclosures. All wiring entering 

these enclosures shall be properly secured and protected. 

M. Underground Installations: When installing or removing underground conduit 

installations, comply with Section 02200: Earthwork. 

N. Cable Tests: All cables shall be tested by the Contractor to insure there are no 

grounds, opens or shorts. The tests shall be done as appropriate to the type cable 

being installed and as agreed between the Owner and Contractor. Any deficiency 

pertaining to these requirements shall be corrected by the Contractor prior to final 

functional and operational tests of the system with no charge to the Owner. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16130 

OUTLET BOXES 





this section. 




2.1 OUTLET BOXES 

A. Construction: Zinc-coated or cadmium plated sheet steel boxes of a class to satisfy 

the conditions at each outlet except where unilet or condulet bodies are required. 

Knockout type with knockouts removed are required. Knockout type with knockouts 

removed only where necessary to accommodate the conduit entering. Square 

cornered, straight sided gang boxes, 4" octagon concrete rings and 4" octagon hung 

ceiling boxes with bars may be folded type; one-piece deep-drawn for all other boxes. 

B. Size: To accommodate the required number and sizes of conduits, wires and splices 

in accordance with NEC requirements, but not smaller than size shown or specified. 

Standard concrete type boxes not to exceed six inches deep except where necessary to 

permit entrance of conduits into sides of boxes without interference with reinforcing 

bars. Special purpose boxes shall be sized for the device or application indicated. 

C. Fixture Studs: 3/8" malleable iron fixture stud in outlet boxes for ceiling lighting 

fixtures and interior bracket lighting fixtures, other than lamp receptacles and drop 

cords. 

D. Exposed: Screw-joint type with gasketed weatherproof covers in locations exposed to 

the weather. 

E. Tile Boxes: Rectangular in shape with square corners and straight sides for 

receptacles and switches mounted in furniture cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete 

block, marble, brick, stone or wood walls. Install without plaster rings. 

F. Wall-Mounted Switch, Receptacle and Signal Boxes: Unless otherwise noted or 

specified not less 4" square by 1-1/2" deep for 2 devices and multi-gang boxes for 

more than 2 devices. Boxes for switches and receptacles on unfinished walls may be 

screw-joint type with covers to fit the devices. 

G. Wall-mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4" square by 2-1/8" deep unless otherwise 

noted in the Drawings. 

OUTLET BOXES 16130-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

H. Light Fixture Boxes: 4" diameter by 1-1/2" deep minimum for ceiling and interior 

bracket fixtures with concealed conduits. Plaster covers for bracket fixtures to have 

3" diameter openings. Screw-joint boxes with canopy seat for ceiling and interior 

bracket fixtures with exposed conduits. 

I. Grounding Terminal: Provide a grounding terminal in each box containing a green 

equipment ground conductor, or serving motors, lighting fixtures or receptacles. 

Grounding terminal shall be green colored washer-in-head machine screw or 

grounding bushing. 

2.2 PULLBOXES: Minimum NEC requirements unless larger box is noted. As specified for 

outlet boxes with blank cover for pullboxes with internal volume not more than 150 cubic 

inches. As specified for cabinets or pullboxes with internal volume over 150 cubic inches, 

except covers to have same thickness as box with corrosion-resistant screw or bolt 

attachment. 

2.3 FLOOR BOXES: Heavy duty, cast, adjustable type, suitable for the device or application 

intended, unless noted. Provide metal carpet flanges in carpeted areas. 


3.1 OUTLET BOXES 

A. Installation: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, outlet boxes shall 

be flush mounted and the front edges of the boxes or plaster covers shall be flush with 

the finished wall or ceiling line or if installed in walls and ceiling of incombustible 

construction, not more than 1/4" back of same. Mount boxes with the long axes of 

devices vertical, unless otherwise specified. Boxes in plastered walls and ceilings 

shall be provided with plaster covers. Box extensions and/or covers will not be 

permitted. Install in a rigid and satisfactory manner with suitable metal bar hanger, 

box cleats, adjustable box hangers, etc. Use wood screws on wood, expansion shields 

on masonry and machine screws on steel work. Boxes shall be secured to metal studs 

with sheet metal screws. Metal stud clips, such as Caddy “MSF”, are not acceptable. 

All boxes shall have far side box supports installed similar to Caddy #766. 

B. Mounting Heights: The mounting height of a wall-mounted outlet box shall be 

construed to mean the height from the finished floor to the horizontal centerline of the 

cover plate. On exposed tile, block or brick construction, mount outlet boxes at the 

nearest bed joint to the mounting height indicated. The height of all outlets shall be at 

the same height when there is a secondary type wall construction along with the 

masonry construction. The height in the masonry construction shall be the governing 

factor. Verify exact height of all boxes with Architect. 

C. Wall mounted switch, receptacle and signal outlets: On columns, pilasters, etc., 

mount so the centers of the columns are clear for future installation of partitions. 

Install outlet boxes near doors or windows close to the trim. Install outlet boxes near 

the doors or the lock sides as shown on Architectural Drawings unless other locations 

are approved by the Architect. 

3.2 PULLBOXES: Provide additional pullboxes wherever necessary to meet requirements for 

maximum lengths of conduit runs and maximum numbers of bends as specified under 

"Conduit and Fittings". 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

3.3 FLOOR BOXES: Install level with top covers adjusted flush with finished floor or floor 

tile. 

3.4 FIXTURE CONNECTIONS: Recessed or surface light fixtures in lay-in or accessible 

ceilings shall be connected with minimum 1/2" flexible metallic conduits, 4 to 6 feet long 

with grounding provisions. 

3.5 IDENTIFICATION: Identify all exposed junction and pullboxes according to the system 

carried by means of painted-on stencils or labels with legible letters and contrasting colors 

without abbreviations. In general, use yellow color. Painting shall be in accordance with 

DIVISION - FINISHES. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16133 

CABINETS 





this section. 




2.1 GENERAL: Sheet steel except those exposed to wet or rain conditions that shall be 

raintight unless otherwise noted. Cabinets without through feeder wiring shall be arranged 

to provide a wiring gutter not less than 4" wide for branch circuit panelboards served by 

feeders up to 4/0. Panelboards served by feeders in excess of 4/0, up to and including 750 

MCM, shall be provided with top, bottom and side gutters 8" wide. Panelboard cabinets in 

all cases shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements of Article 373-6 of the National 

Electrical Code. Cabinets shall be of standard make and shall be equal in all respects to 

those bearing the Underwriters Laboratories label. Cabinets, including boxes shall be 

made of galvanized steel. All outside surfaces of trim and doors shall be given a factory 

finish coat of No. 61 ANSI gray paint, or approved manufacturer's standard. Cabinet for 

telephone and communications systems shall have 5/8" exterior grade, one-face B-grade 

or equal plywood backboard inside with maximum height and width. 

2.2 FEED THROUGH GUTTERS: Where feeders go through panelboard cabinets to serve 

panelboards above or beyond, the wiring gutters in panelboard cabinets shall be a 

minimum of 8" on sides, top and bottom. 

2.3 FRONTS: One piece sheet steel frame and a hinged door with catch and lock for flush 

cabinets. Telephone and signal cabinets for surface mounting shall be equipped with a 

door hinged directly to cabinet. One piece sheet steel with 3/4" flange with all edges 

shaped to cover edge of box. Fronts may be secured to box by means of flathead screws 

with captive nuts or clamps. 

2.4 DOORS: Doors shall close against a rabbet placed all around the inside edge of the frame 

with a close fitting joint between door and frame. The doors shall be fitted with substantial 

flush hinges placed not over 24" apart, nor more than 6" from ends of doors, and fastened 

permanently to the door and frame with flat-headed rivets or spot welds, or with concealed 

flush piano hinges. Fastening screws of fronts shall be set not over 24" apart. Doors over 

48" in height shall be equipped with a vault hinge and a three point catch. 

2.5 DOOR-IN-DOOR: Both surface and flush cabinets shall be door-in-door. The door over 

the interior of the cabinet shall be provided with hinges and combined lock and latch. The 

outside door over the cabinet gutters shall have a hinge on one side, and machine screws 

into threaded holes in the cabinet on the other three sides. In order to insure the rigidity of 

the outside door, surface type cabinets shall have a 1/2" deep lip bent over all around, with 

CABINETS 16133-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

the corners welded and grounded; or in the case of flush cabinets, a steel angle frame, 

equivalent in strength to the bent over lip, shall be welded to the inside of the door. The 

outside door shall be of such size as to allow a minimum of 2-3/4" opening to all four 

sides of the wiring gutter. All locks shall be keyed alike. 

2.6 LOCKS: Furnish each cabinet with a combination catch and flat key lock. The telephone, 

electrical and signal cabinet locks shall be fitted to separate keying for each system. 

Furnish two keys for each cabinet. 

2.7 GROUND BAR: Each cabinet for a panelboard shall be provided with a copper interior 

ground bar suitably braced or bolted to the cabinet wall. The equipment ground bar shall 

be equivalent in current carrying pressure connector terminations for the associated 

feeders, branch circuits, etc. 


3.1 CABINETS: Cables installed in the wiring gutters of cabinets shall be neatly bundled, 

routed and supported. Minimum bending radii as recommended by the cable manufacturer 

shall not be reduced. Lighting and power cabinets shall be installed with tops 6'-6" above 

floor and bottoms not less than 12" above floor. The height above floor of the highest over 

current device handle shall not exceed 6'-6". 


CABINETS 16133-2

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16140 

WIRING DEVICES 





this section. 




2.1 SNAP SWITCHES: Unless otherwise specified each snap switch (flush tumbler-toggle) 

shall be of the AC general use type for mounting in a single-gang spacing, fully rated 20 

amperes, 120-277 volts, conforming to minimum requirements of the latest revision of the 

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., UL 20, Fifth Edition, Standard Snap Switches and further 

requirements herein specified. Specification grade, heavy duty, single pole, three way or 

four way, of the maintained momentary or lock type as indicated on the Drawings. Ivory 

color handles unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Silver or silver alloy contacts, 

AC 120/277 volt general use snap switches shall be capable of withstanding tests as 

outlined in NEMA Publication WDI-1956, and shall be as follows unless otherwise noted: 

20A120- Hubbell Bryant P & S 

277V AC 

1P 1221-I-IV 4901-I-IV 20-AC-1-I-IV 

2P 1222-I-IV 4902-I-IV 20-AC-2-I-IV 

3 way 1223-I-IV 4903-I-IV 20-AC-2-I-IV 

3 way 1224-I-IV 4904-I-IV 20-AC-3-I-IV 

2.2 RECEPTACLE 

A. General: Configuration and requirements for all connector or outlet receptacles shall 

be in accordance with NEMA Publication WDI-1965, Part 3 and Part 10. Single or 

duplex as shown or noted on Drawings. Ivory color unless otherwise noted on the 

drawings. Double grip contacts for each prong. 

B. Grounding Type: All receptacles shall be grounding type with a green colored 

hexagonal equipment ground screw of adequate size to accommodate an insulated 

grounding jumper (based on Table 250-95 of the NEC with minimum size No. 14 

AWG). Grounding terminals of all receptacles shall be internally connected to the 

receptacle mounting yoke. 

WIRING DEVICES 16140-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

C. Unless otherwise noted, receptacles shall be as follows: 

Type Hubbell Bryant P&S 

Hospital Grade Duplex – 20 amp 8300-I 8300-I 9200-HGI 

Spec. Grade Duplex - 15 amp 5262-I 5262-I 5262-I 

Spec. Grade Duplex - 20 amp 5362-I 5362-I 5362-I 

GFCI, Hospital Grade Duplex - 15 amp 

GF-8200- GFR82FT- 1591-FHGI 

I I 

GFCI, Hospital Grade Duplex - 20 amp 

GF-8300- GFR83FT- 2091-FHGI 

I I 

GFCI, Spec. Grade Duplex - 15 amp 

GF-5262- GFR52- 1591-RI 

I FT-I 

GFCI, Spec. Grade Duplex - 20 amp 

GF-5362- GFR53FT- 2091-FI 

I I 

Isolated Gnd., Orange, Spec. Grade Duplex - 15 IG-5261 5261-IG IG5266-SS 

amp 

Isolated Gnd., Orange, Spec. Grade Duplex - 20 IG-5361 5361-IG IG5366-SS 

amp 

Isolated Gnd., Orange, Hospital Grade Duplex - 15 IG-8210 8210-IG IG9201-HG 

amp 

Isolated Gnd., Orange, Hospital Grade Duplex - 20 IG-8310 8310-IG IG9301-HG 

amp 

Safety Receptacle, Duplex SG-62HI SG-62 SG-62 

D. Special: Receptacles for special applications shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 

2.3 PLUG CAPS: Except for duplex receptacles and cleaning combination receptacles one 

matching plug cap shall be provided for each receptacle. No plug caps are required for 

duplex receptacles. 

2.4 DEVICE PLATES 

A. General: Provide device plates for each switch, receptacle, signal and telephone outlet 

and special purpose outlet. Do not use sectional gang plates. Provide multi-gang 

outlet plates for multi-gang boxes. Plates shall be Stainless Steel unless otherwise 

noted. 

1. Exposed: Plates for exposed joint fittings shall match the fittings with edges of 

plates flush with edges of fittings. Heavy cadmium steel plates with gasket. Plates 

for cast type boxes at locations subject to wet or rain conditions shall be of cast, 

vapor tight type. Provide hinged lift covers for devices. 

2. Communication: Plates for telephone and signal outlets shall each have a 3/8" 

bushed opening in the center. Wall plates for push-button and buzzer outlets shall 

have openings to suit the push buttons and buzzers. 

3. Plates for special purpose outlets shall be of a design suitable for the particular 

applications. 

2.5 CLOCK OUTLETS: Flush, single receptacle, regressed in Stainless Steel device plate. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2.6 REMOTELY CONTROLLED SWITCHES OR RELAYS: Electro-magnetically operated, 

mechanically held unless otherwise required. Rugged construction, substantially made, 

conforming to NEMA and IEEE test standards for industrial type power relays and the 

requirements of UL 508, Standards for Safety Lighting Control Equipment. Ratings as 

indicated on the drawings, suitable for the application. Contacts shall be double break, 

renewable, solid wiping type, silver to silver or silver Tungsten alloy, self aligning, quick 

make, quick break, with a minimum inductive load rating of 20 amps. Relays shall as 

manufactured by Allen-Bradley, ASCO, Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Square D, or 

Cutler-Hammer, equal to ASCO mounting and enclosure. 

2.7 MOMENTARY CONTACT SWITCHES: Tumbler type single pole double throw 

momentary contact for 3 wire connection, with OFF position when tumbler handle is in 

the center, similar in appearance to the conventional snap switch. Handle or key complete 

as indicated on the Drawings. 20 ampere at 120-277 volts for control of 30, 60, or 100 

ampere remotely controlled switches or relays rated 101 amperes and above. Provide 

cover plates to match the finish of other conventional snap switch plates in the area. 

Provide nameplate to identify the circuit or equipment controlled. 

2.8 TIME SWITCHES: Automatic, electronic, solid-state, single-throw, single pole, double 

pole or triple pole in a supplied or NEMA-1 general-purpose enclosure as indicated on the 

drawings. Provide 24-hour operation with at least three ON-OFF operations per 24 hours 

period with provisions to eliminate operations on any day or days. 30 amperes heavy-duty 

contact at the voltage indicated on the Drawings. Provide battery backup power supply 

with automatic restoration of the normal power supply. 

2.9 LIGHTING CONTROL CENTER: Photo-time control of a 7 day time switch, with 

electronic, solid-state, time switch preventing energization of the circuit for pre-set 

periods for each day of the week, with provision for omitting selected days. Each control 

circuit shall contain a manual selector to override automatic function. Contractor circuits 

shall be capable of 120 amperes in-rush at 120 volt and 55 amperes at 208/277 volt. 

Control center shall be capable of energizing branch circuits by photo-cell control when 

natural lighting falls below 25 foot candles. 


3.1 DEVICE PLATES: Install with alignment tolerance of 1/16" and all edges in continuous 

contact with wall surfaces. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16150 

MOTORS 





this section. 




2.1 GENERAL: Motors will be furnished with the equipment they are intended to operate and 

therefore generally will be furnished under other sections of these specifications. Furnish 

nameplates indicating manufacturer, horsepower, phase, cycle, voltage, RPM, type of 

motor windings, NEMA design and type of enclosure. 

2.2 SIZE: Adequate for the duty to be performed without exceeding their full rated load or 

safe operating temperature when the driven equipment is operating at specified capacities 

with ambient temperatures and altitude compensation simulating actual job conditions. 

2.3 TYPE: Suitable for the application but not less than Class A insulation and continuous 

duty classification, based on 40 degrees C. ambient temperature with drip proof frames 

and totally enclosed for exterior use. Conform to design, construction and performance 

requirements of NEMA and the Rotating Electrical Machinery Standards of ANSI. 

2.4 VOLTAGE RATING: NEMA Standard to correspond to circuit voltage serving the motor. 

Motors operating on 208 volt systems shall be rated 200 volts or shall be specifically 

wound for the voltage. Rated and covered by the plus or minus 10% rated voltage 

warranty for 208 volts. 


3.1 INSTALLATION: In accordance with related work specified in other sections of these 

Specifications and standard industry practice. 


MOTORS 16150-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16155 

MOTOR STARTERS 





this section. 



D. Controls and Instrumentation: Section 16900. 

1.2 SUBMITTALS: Submit complete shop drawings, control diagrams and descriptive 

literature. Refer to Section 16900 for additional submittal requirements. 


2.1 GENERAL: Starters shall be as specified in this section unless modified by other sections 

of these Specifications or by details or control diagrams on the Drawings. Provide NEMA 

Type I general purpose enclosures, unless otherwise noted or required, with doors 

arranged for padlocking. Equipment starters with contactors to break each ungrounded 

line to the motor. Starters shall be as manufactured by General Electric, ITE, Square D, or 

Cutler-Hammer. 

2.2 RATING: Each starter shall have a horsepower rating not less than the rating of the motor 

it controls. Starters and all their related component parts shall be designed and properly 

coordinated for the rating and characteristics of the motors furnished under the various 

sections of the specifications. Motor starters and overcurrent devices shall be ambient 

temperature compensated. 

2.3 OVERLOADS: Provide ambient temperature compensated thermal overcurrent devices in 

each ungrounded phase. Provide a suitable reset device for resetting over current trip on 

the starter front. Overcurrent device ratings shall not exceed code maximums and shall be 

as recommended by the motor manufacturer for the application. 

2.4 CONTROLS 

A. Control circuit conductors shall be grounded in accordance with the NEC and shall be 

arranged so that an accidental ground will not start the motor. 

B. Energy for control circuits and indicating lights shall be 120 volts. 

C. Provide manual start-stop pushbuttons mounted in starter case unless automatic 

devices are shown elsewhere on Drawings or specified. 

D. Automatic control devices such as thermostats, float or pressure switches may control 

the starting and stopping of motors directly, provided the devices used are designed 

MOTOR STARTERS 16155-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

for the purpose and have an adequate horsepower rating. When the automatic control 

device does not have such a rating, a magnetic starter shall be used, with the 

automatic control device actuating the pilot control circuit. 

E. Starters controlled by automatic devices shall be provided with hand-off-automatic 

selector switch mounted on starter case and connected so motor can be manually 

operated regardless of the position of the automatic control device. Selector switch 

shall not be connected to supersede any safety device or safety interlock. 

F. Provide starters with a sufficient number of auxiliary contact (N.O. and/or N.C.) to 

afford the control and interlocking required. Provide additional relays if required to 

obtain the correct control. 


3.1 GENERAL: Provide each motor with a motor starter of proper design to meet the 

requirements of the motor and drive. 

3.2 INSTALLATION: Install and connect in accordance with related work specified in other 

sections of these Specifications and standard industry practice. 


MOTOR STARTERS 16155-2

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16160 

PANELBOARDS 





this section. 


C. Cabinets: Section 16133. 

D. Motor and Circuit Disconnects: Section 16170. 

E. Fuses: Section 16181. 

F. Grounding: Section 16450. 

1.2 SUBMITTALS: Submit complete shop drawings with outline dimensions, descriptive 

literature and complete description of the frame size, trip setting, class and interrupting 

rating of all overcurrent devices. Identify available space. 


2.1 GENERAL: Dead front, safety type with voltage ratings as scheduled. Panelboards shall 

be of the type required for the short circuit and duty ratings indicated on the drawings. 

Panelboards shall be as manufactured by General Electric, ITE, Square D, or Cutler- 

Hammer and shall be circuit breaker or fusible type as scheduled. 

2.2 CABINETS: Each panelboard shall be enclosed in a single sheet metal cabinet with front 

doors, catches, locks, etc., as specified in Section 16133, Cabinets. 

2.3 DOOR-IN-DOOR: Both surface and flush panels shall be door-in-door. The door over the 

interior of the panel shall be provided with hinge and combined lock and latch. The 

outside door over the panel gutters shall have a hinge on one side and machine screws into 

threaded holes in the panelboard cabinet on the other three sides. In order to insure the 

rigidity of the outside door, surface type panels shall have a 1/2" deep lip bent over all 

around with the corners welded and ground; or, in the case of flush panels a steel angle 

frame, equivalent in strength to the bent over lip shall be welded to the inside of the door. 

The outside door shall be of such size as to allow a minimum of 2-3/4" opening to all four 

sides of the wiring gutter or as required by NEC All locks shall be keyed alike. 

2.4 BREAKERS: Molded-case or combination molded-case and current limited fuses as 

scheduled or required. Provide quick make and quick break toggle mechanism, inverse 

time trip characteristics and trip free operation on overload or short circuit. Automatic 

tripping shall be indicated by a handle position between the manual OFF and ON position. 

Provide a trip element for each pole, a common trip bar for all poles and a single molded 

insulating material handle. Handle ties will not be accepted. Adjustable magnetic trip 

PANELBOARDS 16160-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

devices shall be set at the factory to the low trip setting. Provide breaker frame sizes as 

required for the continuous rating or the interrupting capacity, whichever is larger. 

2.5 BOLTED TYPE: Circuit breaker current-carrying connections to the bus shall be of the 

bolted type, factory assembled. Stab in type not permitted. Provide bus bars for three 

phase panelboards of the sequence phased type connection and arranged for three-phase, 

four wire mains, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 

2.6 FUSIBLE SWITCH UNITS: Quick make, quick break type with external operation handle 

suitable for padlocking in OFF position. Provide interlock to prevent opening cover when 

switch is in ON position unless interlock release is operated. Provide switch frame sizes as 

required for the continuous rating or the interrupting capacity, whichever is larger. Fusible 

panelboards shall be UL rated and listed for service entrance where applicable. 

2.7 SPACE ONLY: Where "Space Only" is noted on the drawings, provide necessary 

connectors, mounting brackets, etc., for the future insertion of an overcurrent device. 

2.8 DIRECTORIES: Provide circuit directories on the inside face of the door of each panel. 

2.9 LABELS: Labels for identifying the breakers shall be engraved laminated plastic strips 

attached by screws or phenolic buttons or small window frame type. Adhesive stick on 

labels alone will not be acceptable unless specifically approved. 

2.10 SKIRTS: Where noted on the Drawings panelboards shall be skirted with complete metal 

enclosures and barriers separating the panel interior. 


3.1 DIRECTORIES: Provide typewritten circuit descriptions referencing permanent room 

numbering assigned in lieu of the room numbering shown on the Drawings inserted in 

plastic holder. Text shall be able to be read entirely without moving the card. 

3.2 CIRCUIT NUMBERING: Circuit numbering shown on the Drawings is based on pole 

position in the panelboard and not consecutive numbering. 

3.3 PHASE ROTATION: Phase A, left bus; phase B, center bus; phase C, right bus (front 

viewing). 


PANELBOARDS 16160-2

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16170 

MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 





this section. 




2.1 DISCONNECTING MEANS 

A. Safety Switches: Fusible or non-fusible Type HD quick break safety switches of the 

sizes and capacities indicated or required. Raintight enclosures at locations exposed 

to the weather. 

B. Separately Enclosed Motor Snap Switches: Motor snap switches may be used for 

motor disconnect means, controller and motor overcurrent protection when 

applicable. These devices shall be horsepower rated and may contain motor running 

overcurrent protection. 

C. Safety Type Disconnecting Switches: Heavy duty, quick make, quick break type, 250 

or 600 volt rating as required for the application. Number of poles and ampacity as 

noted or required by code. Fusible where noted with fuse clips suitable for Buss 

Fusetron Class R Fuses. Short circuit rating of 200,000 RMS Amperes with CV Class 

R rejection feature installed in fuseholders. NEMA 1 enclosures for dry locations. 

NEMA 3 R enclosures for wet locations or at exposed weather locations unless 

otherwise noted. 


A. General Electric, ITE, Square D, or Cutler-Hammer. 


3.1 DISCONNECT MEANS: Install in each location indicated on the Drawings and 

elsewhere as required by NEC. 


MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 16170-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16181 

FUSES 





this section. 


C. Motor and Circuit Disconnect: Section 16170. 


PART 2 PRODUCTS: 

2.1 FUSES 

A. General: Dual element, time delay type, based on heavy service, Buss Fusetron, or 

equal, unless otherwise noted or required for installation. 

B. Current Limiting Fuses: Provide where indicated on the Drawings. For individual 

motor circuit protection, provide fuse sized approximately 125 percent of full load 

current with 100,000 amperes interrupting capacity. For non-motor feeder protection 

in conjunction with fused switches, install NEMA Class L fuses sized 125 percent of 

load current or as required for coordination with air and molded case circuit breakers, 

shall be furnished by the circuit breaker manufacturer. 

C. Above 600 amps; Class L, "Hi-Cap" as manufactured by Bussman or approved 

equivalent by Chase-Shawmut or Federal Pacific. 

D. Below 600 amps, as required by short circuit duty, Class K-1, "Limitron" or class 

K-5, "Low Peak" or Class K-5, "Fusetron" as manufactured by Bussman or approved 

equivalent by Chase-Shawmut or Federal Pacific. 

E. All switches having current limiting fuses installed shall have a Lamicoid nameplate 

with white lettering on red background reading: 

WARNING, REPLACE ONLY WITH CURRENT 

LIMITING FUSES AS ORIGINALLY INSTALLED 

2.2 COORDINATION: Coordinate the low voltage fuses required for the project to provide 

basic selective protection and properly coordinate with the other associated protective 

equipment. 


FUSES 16181-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

3.1 COORDINATION: Coordinate the low voltage fuses required for the project to provide 

basic selection protection and properly coordinate with the other associated protective 

equipment. 

3.2 SPARE FUSES: Furnish one complete spare set of each size of fuses. Deliver to the 

Owner in the original boxes. It shall consist of 100% fuse replacement for all fuses 

required for panelboards and safety switches. 


FUSES 16181-2

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16190 

RELAYS AND CONTACTORS 





this section. 

B. General Requirements: Section 16010. 


D. Controls and Instrumentation: Section 16900. 


2.1 GENERAL: Electromagnetically operated, mechanically held unless otherwise required. 

Rugged construction substantially made conforming to NEMA and IEEE test standards 

for industrial type power relays and the requirements of UL 508, Standards for Safety 

Industrial Control Equipment. Relays and contactors shall be as manufactured by General 

Electric, ITE, Square D, or Cutler-Hammer. 

2.2 RATINGS: As indicated on the Drawings or required, suitable for the application. 

2.3 CONTACTS: Double break, renewable, solid wiping type, silver to silver or silver 

tungsten alloy, self aligning, quick make, quick break, with a minimum inductive load 

rating adequate for the load controlled, but not less than 25 amps. 

2.4 ENCLOSURES: NEMA 1 for surface mounting in dry locations. Flush mounted with 

hinged door and flush latch where indicated. Sound-absorbing enclosures where located in 

or adjacent to occupied areas. 


3.1 INSTALLATION: Install and connect in accordance with related work specified in other 

sections of these Specifications. 


REALYS AND CONTACTORS 16190-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16450 

GROUNDING 





this section. 


C. Raceways: Section 16110. 

D. Outlet Boxes: Section 16130. 

E. Wires and Cables: Section 16120. 

F. Wiring Devices: Section 16140. 

G. Cabinets: Section 16133. 

H. Motor and Circuit Disconnects: Section 16170. 

I. Panelboards: Section 16160. 


2.1 Materials, equipment and devices related to the grounding system are specified under 

other sections of these Specifications. 


3.1 GENERAL: Install two separate grounding systems, a service grounding system and an 

equipment grounding system. The service equipment, conduit systems, supports, cabinets, 

equipment, and neutral conductor shall be grounded in accordance with the minimum code 

requirements and as further indicated on the Drawings or as specified. Connect the two 

grounding systems together only at the main service equipment and at the secondary 

terminals of transformers creating separately derived distribution systems such as dry-type 

transformers. 

3.2 SERVICE GROUNDING SYSTEM 

A. General: The service grounding system is provided for the AC service neutral ground. 

Current return conductors, such as neutrals of the service entrance, feeder circuits and 

branch circuits, shall not be used for equipment grounding. Care must be exercised to 

insure that neutral bars are not bonded to the enclosures of panelboards, etc., which 

are not part of the main service equipment. Except for separately derived systems, the 

neutral conductors shall be grounded only in the main service equipment. 

GROUNDING 16450-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

B. Common Ground Point: Establish one common ground point in the main service 

equipment by interconnecting the insulated neutral bus (or bar), the uninsulated 

equipment ground bus (or bar), and service grounding electrode conductor. 

C. Neutral Disconnecting Means: Install a neutral disconnecting means in the main 

service equipment for disconnecting and isolating the neutral bus from the common 

ground. The disconnecting means may be disconnecting links in the interconnection 

between the insulated neutral and uninsulated equipment ground. 

D. Neutral Bars: Provide an insulated neutral bar, separate from the uninsulated 

equipment ground bar, in all panelboards, transformers, starters, disconnect switches, 

cabinets, etc., which have neutral connections. 

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM 

A. General: Provide a complete equipment grounding system in accordance with the 

minimum code requirements and as further indicated on the Drawings or specified. 

The equipment ground (green conductor) consists of metallic connections to ground 

of non-current-carrying metal parts of the wiring system or apparatus connected to 

the system. The primary purpose of equipment grounding is to provide greater safety 

by limiting the electrical potential between non-current-carrying parts of the system 

and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents. 

B. Common Ground Point: Establish one common ground point as specified elsewhere 

in this section of the specifications for interconnection of the equipment grounding 

system and the service grounding electrode conductor. 

C. Service Equipment Enclosure: Bond the enclosure of the main service equipment to 

the uninsulated equipment ground box (or bar) with a conductor or bar sized for 50% 

of the largest service overcurrent device. 

D. Ground Bar: Provide an uninsulated equipment ground bar, separate from any 

insulated neutral bar, in all panelboards, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc. 

for grounding the enclosure and for connecting other equipment ground conductors. 

The ground bar shall be an integrally mounted and braced bus bar in panelboards or a 

separately mounted bar adequately braced or bolted to the enclosure after thoroughly 

cleaning both surfaces to assure good contact. Provide solderless pressure connectors 

for all conductor terminations. Number and size of pressure connectors on equipment 

grounding bars as required for the termination of equipment grounding conductors. In 

addition to the active circuits, provide pressure connectors for all three-phase spares 

and spaces. 

E. Conduits: Where metallic conduits terminate without mechanical connection to a 

metallic housing of electrical equipment by means of lock nut and bushings, provide 

ground bushing connected with a bare copper conductor to the ground bar in the 

electrical equipment. Metallic conduits containing ground wiring only shall be 

bonded to the ground wire at both conduit entrance and exit. Install grounding 

conductor in each nonmetallic conduit or duct except those used for telephone, sound, 

or low voltage signals and in all flexible conduit that does not have a built-in ground 

conductor. Bond the conductor at both ends to the equipment grounding system. 

F. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Provide a separate green insulated equipment grounding 

conductor for each single or three phase feeder and each branch circuit with a three 

phase protective device. Provide a separate green insulated equipment grounding 

GROUNDING 16450-2

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

conductor for single phase branch circuits where indicated on the Drawings. Install 

the required grounding conductor in the common conduit or raceway with the related 

phase and/or neutral conductors and connect to the box or cabinet grounding 

terminal. Where there are parallel feeders installed in more than one raceway each 

raceway shall have a green insulated equipment ground conductor installed. 

G. Devices: Install a minimum No. 12 green insulated equipment bonding conductor 

from a grounding terminal in the respective outlet or junction box to the green ground 

terminal of all receptacles and through flexible conduit to all light fixture housings 

and other fixed equipment. 

H. Motors: Install a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor from the 

equipment ground bar in the motor control center or separate starter through the 

conduit and flexible conduit to the ground terminal in the connection box mounted on 

the motor. Install the grounding conductor in the common conduit or raceway with 

the related motor circuit conductors. 

3.4 SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS: Transformers creating separately derived 

distribution systems, such as dry type transformers, shall utilize the equipment ground 

bars in the transformer enclosure for both secondary equipment ground and secondary 

neutral ground with separate grounding conductor extended to an approved ground 

electrode. 

3.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES: Two service ground electrodes shall be utilized. One 

shall be the main cold water metallic water piping system and the other shall be a made 

electrode consisting of not less than twenty feet of bare copper conductor encased along 

the bottom of a concrete foundation footing which is in direct contact with the earth (NEC 

250-H). Make the connections to the cold water pipe inside the building at the point of 

entrance. The grounding electrode for separately derived systems shall be approved for the 

application. 

3.6 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: The grounding conductors for both service ground 

electrodes shall be insulated or bare copper, sized in accordance with NEC 250-94, 

including the conductor for the made electrode. The conductors shall be continuous 

without joint or splice and shall be installed in conduit with the conduit bonded to the 

conductor at each end. Install the conductor to permit the shortest and the most direct path 

and terminate in the main service equipment on the common ground point. Equipment 

grounding conductors shall be green insulated conductors equivalent to the insulation on 

the associated phase conductor, but not less than Type TW. The equipment grounding 

conductor or straps shall be sized in accordance with NEC. Where one feeder serves a 

series of panelboards of transformers the equipment grounding conductor shall be 

continuous without splices. Grounding conductors shall not be installed through metal 

sheathed holes. All connections shall be available for inspection and maintenance. 

3.7 GROUND CONNECTIONS: Clean surfaces thoroughly before applying ground lugs or 

clamps. If surface is coated the coating must be removed down to the bare metal. After the 

coating has been removed apply a non-corrosive approved compound to cleaned surface 

and install lugs or clamps. Where galvanizing is removed from metal it shall be painted or 

touched up with "Galvanoz", or equal. 

3.8 TESTS 

GROUNDING 16450-3

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

A. Remove all jumpers between the equipment ground busses and the service (neutral) 

ground busses in the main service panel and all separately derived systems. See 

Section 3.02.C. 

B. For each grounding system, using a megger, measure the resistance between the two 

ground busses at the panel where the jumper was installed. The resistance shall be 

greater than 10 megohms. 

C. Re-connect the equipment and service bus jumpers on all systems. See Section 

3.02.C. 

D. For each grounding system, using a megger, measure the resistance between the two 

ground busses at the panel farthest away (electrically) from the panel where the 

jumper was installed. The resistance shall be less than 5 ohms. 

E. Submit a written report to the Engineer for approval. The service shall not be 

energized if the test shows more than 5 ohms, unless approved by the Architect. 


GROUNDING 16450-4

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16470 

DISTRIBUTION CIRCUITS 





this section. 



D. Wires and Cables: Section 16120. 

E. Boxes: Section 16130. 

F. Grounding: Section 16450. 


A. Submit complete shop drawings with outline dimensions, wiring diagrams, catalog 

cut, and descriptive literature. 

B. Submit three copies of complete operating and maintenance manuals of the 

component devices, assemblies, and complete switchboard. 


2.1 GENERAL: Provide concrete pad-mounted fusible switchboard as indicated on the 

Drawings and further specified herein. Complete unit designed, tested and assembled in 

accordance with the applicable standards on ANSI, IEEE, and NEMA. All equipment 

shall have all necessary accessories required for a complete installation. All equipment 

shall be fully compatible with the system to which it is connected. 

2.2 RATING: Switchboards to be rated as shown on the Drawings. Switchboard to be braced 

for a minimum fault current rating of 100,000 AIC or greater. 

2.3 BUS BARS: Copper of the ampacity indicated on the Drawings. Provide separate neutral 

and ground bus bars and enclosure bond as specified in the Section 16450. 

2.4 INSTRUMENTS: Provide an ammeter and ammeter selector switch with OFF position 

and position for each phase. Provide a voltmeter and voltmeter selector switch with OFF 

position for reading phase-to-neutral voltage of each phase and phase-to-phase voltage of 

each pair of phases. Provide flush meters mounted in the front of the switchboard, 4" size 

with conventional scales. Provide metering instrument transformers as required. 

2.5 MANUFACTURERS: Cutler-Hammer, GE, Square D as specified on the Drawings. 

DISTRIBUTION CIRCUITS 16470-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

2.6 SPACES: Where spaces are specified or otherwise required, the switchboard shall be fully 

configured to receive future overcurrent devices. Spaces shall be sized for 200 amps, 3 

poles, unless otherwise noted. 

2.7 NAMEPLATES: Provide engraved laminated plastic nameplates for all switches, meter, 

spaces, etc. Letters shall be not less than 5/16" high with legend as directed and approved. 


3.1 INSTALLATION: Install in accordance with manufacturer's approved shop drawings. 

3.2 PHASE ROTATION: A-B-C, left to right, when the panel is viewed from the front. 


DISTRIBUTION CIRCUITS 16470-2

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16485 


ELEVATOR WIRING 




this section. 



D. Wires and Cables: Section 16120. 

E. Outlet Boxes: Section 16130. 

F. Cabinets: Section 16133. 

G. Wiring Devices: Section 16140. 

H. Panelboards: Section 16160. 

I. Motor and Circuit Disconnects: Section 16170. 

J. Grounding: Section 16450. 

K. Controls and Instrumentation: Section 16900. 


2.1 MATERIALS: The materials, equipment and devices related to elevator wiring are 

specified under other sections of these specifications. Motors, generators, starters, 

controllers, and signal circuits will be furnished and installed by the elevator contractor. 



A. Coordinate with the elevator manufacturer to determine the extent and arrangement of 

the elevator installation. 

1. Provide feeder and branch circuit overcurrent protection and disconnect means for 

each elevator. 

2. Provide power circuits to each elevator controller. 

3. Deleted 

4. Provide outlets for 120 volt, emergency lighting, telephone and overhead paging 

for elevator cars. These outlets shall be located per the equipment installers 

direction. 

5. Provide duplex, emergency receptacle and incandescent light with wire guard in 

each elevator pit, with light switch at pit access. 


ELEVATOR WIRING 16485-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16501 


LAMPS 




this section. 

B. Grounding: Section 16450. 

C. Lighting Equipment: Section 16500. 

D. Ballast and Accessories: Section 16502. 


2.1 FLUORESCENT LAMPS: Fluorescent lamps shall be GE 3000 degree K/SP30 or 

approved equal, energy saving lamps matched for usage to energy saving ballast. The 

ballast/lamp system shall be capable of providing 6000 initial lumens for two lamps with 

75 watts system input. 

2.2 INCANDESCENT LAMPS: Incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted, medium base, 

extended service, 130 volt unless otherwise noted. PAR or R lamps shall be provided if 

called for on the Drawings. 

2.3 MERCURY VAPOR LAMPS: Mercury vapor lamps shall be Deluxe white phosphor 

coated, mogul base with correlated color temperature of 3900 degree K or as indicated. 

2.4 METALLIC HALIDE LAMPS: Metallic halide lamps shall be phosphor coated, mogul 

base and shall be furnished for proper lamp burning position as determined by fixture 

installed within. Correlated lamp color temperature shall be as follows: 

100 watt 3200 degrees K 





Color temperature may vary 100 degrees K plus or minus. 

2.5 HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM LAMPS: High pressure sodium lamps shall be clear, mogul 

base with an apparent color temperature of 2100 degree K, or as indicated. Lamps shall be 

furnished for proper lamp burning position as determined by fixture installed within. 

2.6 SAFETY: All Mercury Vapor and Metallic Halide Lamps shall be furnished with a means 

of immediately extinguishing the lamp when the outer lamp envelope is either penetrated 

or broken. 

2.7 MANUFACTURERS: General Electric, Sylvania, or Cutler-Hammer are approved. 

Where a specific manufacturer's product is mentioned, then it shall be so furnished. 


3.1 INSTALLATION: The Contractor shall install new lamps in all lighting fixtures. 

Installation of the new lamps shall be made seven (7) days before final inspection, unless 

otherwise approved by the Architect in writing. 


LAMPS 16501-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16502 


BALLASTS AND ACCESSORIES 




this section. 

B. Grounding: Section 16450. 

C. Lighting Equipment: Section 16500. 

D. Lamps: Section 16501. 


2.1 GENERAL: Ballast shall be supplied for the voltage that the fixture is connected to. All 

ballast shall be high power factor and UL listed. 

A. Ballasts: Fluorescent ballasts shall be energy savings type and shall be usable with 

energy savings lamps so that the ballast/lamp system shall be capable of providing 

6000 average initial lumens for two lamps at 75 watts of system input. Ballast 

performance with such lamps shall be certified by ETL or approved equal laboratory 

with a United States Government Registered Certification Mark for fluorescent lamp 

ballast. Performance certification with such lamps shall be according to component 

test method and appear on ballast nameplate; the relative light output shall be 95% 

with a tolerance of +5% to -2-1/2% and input watts shall be 78 watts with a tolerance 

of 5%. The ballast case temperature shall not exceed 90 degree C. Ballast shall be UL 

listed, Class P, Premium. Mercury vapor, metal halide, and high-pressure sodium 

ballasts shall be manufactured with the following features: 

1. .125 minimum thickness extruded aluminum housing with heat dissipating fins. 

2. Die cast aluminum end cap closure. 

3. Thermally isolated capacitor enclosed in a diecast compartment with easy access 

for serviceability. 

4. Constant auto stabilized, high-power factor. 

5. Constant Wattage, auto-stabilized, high power factor. Core and coil encapsulated 

in a thermally conductive Class F (155 degree C.), insulation material which 

isolates sound attenuating vibration. 

6. Stand-By feature with instant incandescent light from energizing or re-energizing 

of current to 70% of rated output of HID lamp. 

2.2 MANUFACTURERS: Advance, General Electric, Jefferson, Universal, Halo, Prescolite, 

or approved equal for function specified. 


3.1 All ballasts shall be installed within specific fixtures in a manner so as to assure a 

completely silent operation with attainment of maximum ballast life as specified by the 

manufacturer. 

BALLASTS AND ACCESSORIES 16502-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 


BALLASTS AND ACCESSORIES 16502-2

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16511 

FLUORESCENT FIXTURES 





this section. 




E. Lighting Equipment: Section 16500. 

F. Lamps: Section 16501. 

G. Ballasts: Section 16502. 

1.2 SUBMITTALS: Submit complete shop drawings indicating construction of fixture 

including lens nominal thickness, photometry’s and housing thickness. 


2.1 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES: All fixtures, ballasts and supports shall be quiet in 

operation. Louvers, shields, reflectors and all sections of the channel structure shall be 

securely held in position. Fixtures shall not be mounted in such a way that ballast hum 

will be amplified or transmitted into work areas. 

2.2 FINISH: Bonderized or equal treatment on all steel parts prior to applying finish. Metal 

parts shall be aluminum, brass, copper, bronze or steel, with baked white enamel finish 

unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 

2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMPHOLDERS: Designed so lamps will be held firmly in place, 

electrically and mechanically permitting easy insertion or removal of lamps. Provide 

corrosion resistant, silver plated lamp pin contacts. 

2.4 LENS: When an acrylic lens or diffuser is specified it shall be molded of 100% Acrylic 

meeting American Society for Testing materials specifications for Methacrylate Molding 

and Extrusion Compounds (ASTM D788-63). Plastic diffusing panels, luminous side 

panels and other luminous plastic members of fixtures shall be made of not less than 

nominal .125" thick prismatic clear acrylic material. Plastic shall be nonflammable or 

shall have a flame spread rate of not more than 3.2 inches per minute for a 1/2" width of 

the material. The plastic shall show no yellowing apparent to the naked eye either when 

subjected to the accelerated weathering test in accordance with ASTM D795-44T (500 

hours exposure, using type S-1 lamp) or after prolonged exposure to a fluorescent lamp 

source under conditions identical with those existing in the fixture in which it is to be 

FLUORESCENT FIXTURES 16511-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

used. The plastic shall be non-electrostatic or the finished parts shall be treated with an 

anti-static wax. 

2.5 HOUSING: Not less than 20 gauge steel with baked white enamel finish applied over 

corrosion resistant primer unless otherwise specifically approved. 


3.1 LAY-IN FIXTURES: All lay in fixtures shall be adequately supported on all four corners 

to the structure and not to the ceiling alone. 

3.2 SURFACE MOUNTED FIXTURES: All surface mounted fixtures shall be furnished with 

top plates whenever applicable. 


FLUORESCENT FIXTURES 16511-2

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16612 

GENERATOR SYSTEM 



A. The stand-by engine driven electric generating set shall be rated at 60 KW (75KVA) 

for continuous stand-by service at 0.8 PF, 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 hz. At 5000 

feet above sea level. The unit shall be package of new and current equipment 

consisting of: 

1. A spark-ignited engine driven electric generating set to provide stand-by power. 

2. An engine start-stop control system mounted on the generating set. 

3. Mounted accessories as specified. 

B. This unit shall be built, tested and shipped by the manufacturer of the alternator so 

there is one source of supply and responsibility. The performance of this generating set 

series shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory as to the set’s full power 

rating, stability and voltage and frequency regulation. 

C. This stand-by electric generating set, furnished by the manufacturer, shall be warranted 

for a period of one year from the date of installation, plus any other warranty provided 

by manufacturer. 

1.2 ENGINE: 

A. The engine shall be Diesel fueled, four-cycle, water cooled, turbo charged aspiration, 

with mounted radiator, fan and water pump. It shall have 6 cylinders and minimum 

displacement of 239 cubic inches, with a minimum rating of 102bhp at its operating 

speed of 1800 rpm. Intake and exhaust valves shall be heat resisting alloy steel, free 

rotating. Exhaust valve seat inserts shall be provided. Full pressure lubrication shall be 

supplied by a positive displacement lube oil pump. The engine shall have coolant and 

oil filters with replaceable elements; lube oil cooler and a fuel transfer pump (if 

required). Engine speed shall be governed by a hydraulic governor to maintain 

alternator frequency within 5 percent from no-load to full-load alternator output. The 

engine shall have a 24 volt battery charging DC alternator with a transistorized voltage 

regulator. Remote, 2 wire starting shall be by a 24 volt solenoid shift, electrical starter. 

1.3 ENGINE INSTRUMENTS: 

A. The generating set shall contain a complete engine start-stop control which starts 

engine on closing contact and stops engine on opening contact. A cranking limiter 

shall be provided to open the starting circuit in approx. 45 to 90 seconds if the engine 

is not started within that time. The engine controls shall also include a 3 position 

selector switch with the following positions: RUN-STOP-REMOTE. High engine 

temperature, low oil pressure, and over-speed shutdown. With signal light and alarm 

terminal shall also be provided. 

1.4 BRUSHLESS ALTERNATOR: 

A. The alternator shall be a 4 pole, revolving field design with temperature compensated 

solid state voltage regulator and brushless rotating rectifier exciter system. No brushes 

shall be allowed. The stator shall be directly connected to the engine fly-wheel 

GENERATOR SYSTEMS 16612-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

housing, and the rotor shall be driven through a semiflexible driving flange to insure 

permanent alignment. The insulation system shall be Class H as defined by NEMA 

MGI-1.65. The three phase, broad range alternator shall be 12 lead, reconnectible. 

1.5 UNIT PERFORMANCE: 

A. Frequency regulation shall not exceed 3 hertz from no load to rated load. Voltage 

regulation shall be within plus or minus 2 percent of rated voltage, from no load to full 

rated load. The instantaneous voltage dip shall be less than 12 percent of rated voltage 

when full, 3 phase, load and rated power factor is applied to the alternator. Recovery to 

stable operation is defined as operation with terminal voltage remaining constant within 

plus or minus 1 percent of rated voltage. A rheostat shall provide a minimum of plus or 

minus 5 percent voltage adjustment from rated value. Temperature rise shall be within 

NEMA MG1-22.40 definition. 

1.6 ALTERNATOR INSTUMENT PANEL: 

A. The alternator instrument panel shall be wired, tested and shock mounted on the 

generating set by the manufacturer of the alternator. It shall contain panel lighting, 

manual reset circuit breaker, frequency meter, running time meter, voltage adjusting 

rheostat, AC voltmeter (dual range, indicates all voltages), AC ammeter (dual range, 

indicates current each phase), meter switch, voltmeter-ammeter phase selector with 

OFF position. 

1.7 GENERATING SET MOUNTING: 

A. The electric generating set shall be equipped with vibration isolators and mounted on a 

welded steel bas which shall provide suitable mounting to any level surface. 

1.8 HOUSING: 

A. The complete generating set shall be enclosed in a weather protective sheet metal 

housing of 16 gauge steel with three doors on each side and one rear door for easy 

access. The doors shall be hinged with fixed open air intake louvers and equipped with 

adjustable plated pad type latches and matched keys. The housing shall contain 120 

volt interior lighting, battery racks and cables, a critical exhaust silencer group, an oil 

and heater drain group and adequate heaters to prevent freeze-up of generator oil and 

water lines. The housing shall be suitable for mounting directly to a concrete pad. 

1.9 ACCESSORIES: 

A. All accessories needed for the proper operation of the generating set shall be furnished. 

These shall include a flexible exhaust connection, starting batteries, battery cables, 

battery rack, fuel tank and lines, and detailed operation and maintenance manuals with 

parts list. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS: 

2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: 

A. Katolight, Onan, Cummins, Caterpillar, Kato and Kohler. 

PART 3 – EXECUTION: 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

3.1 The entire emergency distribution system shall be tested by the contractor in the presence 

of the switchboard and generator set manufactures representative, the Architect, Engineer 

and authorized owner personnel. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

SECTION 16722 

SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 


1.1 DESCRIPTION 

A. This section of the specifications includes the furnishing, installation, and connection 

of the microprocessor controlled, intelligent reporting fire alarm equipment required 

to form a complete coordinated system ready for operation. It shall include, but not be 

limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, control panel, 

auxiliary control devices, annunciators, and wiring as shown on the drawings and 

specified herein. 

B. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard No. 72 for 

protected premises signaling systems except as modified and supplemented by this 

specification. The system shall be electrically supervised and shall monitor the 

integrity of all conductors. 

C. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of Americans with Disabilities 

Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. 

1.2 SCOPE 

A. A new intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system shall be 

installed in accordance with the specifications and drawings. 

B. Basic Performance: 

1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall 

be encoded onto an NFPA Style 7 (Class A) signaling line circuit. 

2. Initiation device circuits shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style D). 

3. Indicating appliance circuits shall be wired Style Z (Class A). 

4. Digitized electronic signals shall employ check digits or multiple polling. 

5. A single ground or open on the system Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause 

system malfunction, loss of operating power or the ability to report an alarm. 

6. Alarm signals arriving at the main FACP shall not be lost following a power failure 

(or outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded. 

C. Basic System Functional Operation: When a fire alarm condition is detected and 

reported by one of the system initiating devices or appliances, the following functions 

shall immediately occur: 

1. The System Alarm LED shall flash. 

2. A local piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound. 

SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16722-1

G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 


3. The 80 character LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the 

Fire Alarm condition, including the type of alarm point and it's location within the 

protected premises. 

4. Printing and history storage equipment shall log the information associated each 

new Fire Alarm Control Panel condition, along with time and date of occurrence. 

5. All system output programs assigned via control by event equations to be 

activated by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated 

System Outputs (alarm indicating appliances and/or relays) shall be activated. 

A. General: 

1. Two copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for 

review. 

2. All references to manufacturer's model numbers and other pertinent information 

herein is intended to establish minimum standards of performance. 

B. Shop Drawings: 

1. Sufficient information, clearing presented, shall be included to determine 

compliance with drawings and specifications. 

2. Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, 

equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams, 

and conduit layouts. 

C. Manuals: 

1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and 

maintenance manual listing the manufacturer's name(s) including technical data 

sheets. 

2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and the 

interconnections between the items of equipment. 

3. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the 

information required to properly operate the equipment and system. 

D. Certifications: Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from 

the major equipment manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of 

installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized 

representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include names and addresses in 

the certification. 

1.4 GUARANTY: All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this 

contract shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of at least one (1) year 

from the date of acceptance. The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to 

correct any defect during this one year period shall be included in the submittal bid. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1.5 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS: The specifications and standards listed below form a 

part of this specification. The system shall fully comply with these standards. 

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA: 

No. 12 CO2 Extinguishing Systems 

No. 12A &B Halon Extinguishing Systems 

No. 15 Water Spray Systems 

No. 16 Foam/Water Deluge and Spray Systems 

No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 

No. 71 Central Station Signaling Systems 

No. 72 Protective Signaling Systems 

No. 72E Automatic Fire Detectors 

No. 72G Notification Appliances for Protective Signaling Systems 

No. 72H Testing Procedures for Signaling Systems 

No. 101 Life Safety Code 

B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA: 

No. 268 

No. 864 

No. 268A 

No. 521 

No. 464 

No. 38 

No. 346 

No. 1076 

Systems 

No. 1971 

Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 

Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 

Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications 

Heat Detectors for Fire Protective 

Audible Signaling Appliances 

Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes 

Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 

Control Units for Burglar Alarm Proprietary Protective Signaling 

Visual Indicating Appliances 

C. Local and State Building Codes: 

D. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 

1.6 APPROVALS 

A. The system shall have proper listing and/or approval from the following nationally 

recognized agencies: 

UL 

FM 

ULC 

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 

Factory Mutual 

Underwriters Laboratories Canada 

B. The system shall be listed by the national agencies as suitable for extinguishing 

release applications. 


2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL 

A. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. 

The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a 

nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protected premises 

protective signaling (fire alarm) system. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with 

manufacturers' recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for 

all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning 

system installation. 

C. All Equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be 

held firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended 

ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load. 

2.2 CONDUIT AND WIRE 

A. Conduit: 

1. Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local 

and state requirements. 

2. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway. Conduit fill shall not exceed 

40% of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained 

within a single conduit. 

3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of Power, or Class I circuits, 

and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these 

conductors, as per NEC Article 760-29. 

4. Conduit shall not enter the Fire Alarm Control Panel, or any other remotely 

mounted Control Panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is 

specified by the FACP manufacturer. 

5. Conduit shall be ½ inch minimum. 

B. Wire: 

1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new. 

2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state, and national codes (e.g., NEC 

Article 760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. 

Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system 

manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for Initiating Device Circuits 

and Signaling Line Circuits, and 14 AWG (1.63 mm) for Indicating Appliance 

Circuits. 

3. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency 

for use with a protective signaling system. 

4. Wiring used for the multiplex communication loop shall be twisted and shielded 

and installed in conduit unless specifically excepted by the fire alarm equipment 

manufacturer. The system shall permit use of IDC and IAC wiring in the same 

conduit with the communication loop. 

5. All field wiring shall be completely supervised. 

C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets: All boxes and cabinets shall be UL 

Listed for their use and purpose. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

D. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke, water 

flow). Mixed category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line 

circuits connected to intelligent reporting devices. 

E. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch 

circuit, maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the Main Power 

Distribution Panel as FIRE ALARM. Fire Alarm Control Panel Primary Power 

wiring shall be 12 AWG. The Control Panel Cabinet shall be grounded securely to 

either a cold water pipe or grounding rod. 

2.3 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL 

A. The FACP shall be a NOTIFIER Model AFP-200, and shall contain a microprocessor 

based Central Processing Unit (CPU). The CPU shall communicate with and control 

the following types of equipment used to make up the system: intelligent detectors, 

addressable modules, printer, annunciators, and other system controlled devices. 

B. System Capacity and General Operation: 

1. The control panel shall provide, or be capable of expansion to 198 

intelligent/addressable devices plus 103 control circuits. 

2. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall include a full featured operator interface 

control and annunciation panel that shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display, 

individual, color coded system status LED’s, and an alphanumeric keypad for the 

Field Programming and Control of the Fire Alarm System. 

3. All programming or editing of the existing program in the system shall be 

achieved without special equipment and without interrupting the alarm 

monitoring functions of the Fire Alarm Control Panel. 

4. The FACP shall provide the following features: 

Drift Compensation to extend detector accuracy over life. 

Sensitivity Test, meeting requirements of NFPA 72E. 

Maintenance Alert to warn of excessive compensation. 

System Status Reports to display or printer. 

Alarm Verification, with verification counters. 

PAS presignal, meeting NFPA 72 requirements. 

Rapid manual station reporting (under 2 seconds). 

Non-Alarm points for general (non-fire) control. 

Periodic Detector Test, conducted automatically by software. 

Pre-alarm for advanced fire warning. 

Counting "cross-zone" options. 

March time and temporal coding options. 

Walk Test, with check for two detectors set to same address. 

Security Monitor Points, meeting requirements of UL 1076. 

Control-By-Time for non-fire operations, with holidays. 

Day/Night automatic adjustment of detector sensitivity. 

Device Blink Control for sleeping areas. 

C. Central Microprocessor: 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1. The Microprocessor Unit shall communicate with, monitor, and control all 

external interfaces with the control panel. It shall include EPROM for system 

program storage; non-volatile memory for building-specific program storage; and 

a "watch dog" timer circuit to detect and report microprocessor failure. 

2. The Microprocessor Unit shall contain and execute all control-by-event programs 

for specific action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the system. 

Such control-by-event programs shall be held in non-volatile programmable 

memory, and shall not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure 

occurs. 

3. The Microprocessor Unit shall also provide a real-time Clock for time annotation 

of system displays, printer, and history file. The Time-Of-Day and date shall not 

be lost if system primary and secondary power supplies fail. The real-time Clock 

may also be used to control non-fire functions at programmed time-of-day, dayof-week, 

and day-of-year. 

D. Display: 

1. The Display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the system 

operator and may also be used to program all system operational parameters. 

2. The Display shall include status information and custom alphanumeric labels for 

all Intelligent Detectors, Addressable Modules, and Software zones. 

3. The Display shall provide an 80-character back-lit alphanumeric Liquid Crystal 

Display (LCD). It shall also provide 5 Light-Emitting-Diodes (LED’s), that will 

indicate the status of the following system parameters: AC POWER, SYSTEM 

ALARM, SYSTEM TROUBLE, SIGNAL SILENCED, SUPERVISORY, and 

PRE-ALARM. 

4. The Display shall provide a 21-key touch key-pad with control capability to 

command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, 

and field programming. Two different password levels shall be provided to 

prevent unauthorized system control or programming. 

5. The Display shall include the following operator functions: SIGNAL SILENCE, 

RESET, DRILL, and ACKNOWLEDGE. 

E. SLC Loop Interface: 

1. The SLC Interface shall provide power to, and communicate with, all of the 

Intelligent/ Addressable Detectors and Addressable Modules over a single pair of 

wires. This SLC Loop shall be capable of operation as NFPA Style 4, Style 6, or 

Style 7. 

2. The Loop Interface Board shall receive analog information from all Intelligent 

Detectors that shall be processed to determine whether normal, alarm, or trouble 

conditions exist for each detector. The software shall automatically maintain the 

detector's desired sensitivity level by adjusting for the effects of environmental 

factors, including the accumulation of dust in each detector. The analog 

information may also be used for automatic detector testing and for the automatic 

determination of detector maintenance requirements. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

3. The detector software shall meet NFPA 72E requirements and be certified by UL 

as a calibrated sensitivity test instrument. 

4. The detector software shall allow manual or automatic sensitivity adjustment. 

F. Serial Interfaces: 

1. An EIA-232 interface between the Fire Alarm Control Panel and UL Listed 

Electronic Data Processing (EDP) peripherals shall be provided. 

2. The EIA-232 interface shall allow the use of printers, CRT monitors, and PC 

compatible computers. 

3. The EIA-485 port for the serial connection of the optional Annunciators and 

remote LCD displays shall be provided. 

4. The EIA-485 interface may be used for network connection to a Proprietary 

Receiving Unit. 

G. Enclosures: 

1. The control panel shall be housed in a UL Listed cabinet suitable for surface or 

semi-flush mounting. Cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rustresistant 

prime coat, and manufacturer's standard finish. 

2. The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent 

opening for viewing of all indicators. 

H. All interfaces and associated equipment are to be protected so that they will not be 

affected by voltage surges or line transients consistent with UL standard 864. 

I. Optional plug-in modules shall be provided for NFPA 72B and NFPA 72C 

transmitters. 

J. Power Supply: 

1. The Power Supply shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz, and shall provide all 

necessary power for the FACP. 

2. It shall provide 5.0 amps of usable indicating appliance power, using a switching 

24 VDC regulator. 

3. It shall provide a battery charger for 24 hours of standby using dual-rate charging 

techniques for fast battery recharge. 

4. It shall provide a very low frequency sweep earth detect circuit, capable of 

detecting earth faults on sensitive addressable modules. 

5. It shall be power-limited using Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) resistors. 

6. It shall provide optional meters to indicate battery voltage and charging current. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

K. Field Wiring Terminal Blocks: For ease of service, all wiring terminal blocks for I/O 

interfaces shall be the plug-in type and have sufficient capacity for 18 to 12 AWG 

wire. Terminal blocks permanently fixed or mounted are not acceptable. 

L. Operators Controls: 

1. Acknowledge Switch: 

a. Activation of the control panel Acknowledge switch in response to new Alarm 

and/or Trouble shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change 

the Alarm and Trouble LED’s from flashing mode to steady-ON mode. If 

multiple Alarm or Trouble conditions exist, depression of this switch shall 

advance the 80-character LCD display to the next Alarm or Trouble condition. 

b. Depression of the Acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote 

annunciator piezo sounders. 

2. Signal Silence Switch: Activation of the Signal Silence Switch shall cause all 

programmed Alarm Indicating Appliances and relays to return to the normal 

condition after an alarm condition. The selection of indicating circuits and relays 

that are silenceable by this switch shall be fully field programmable within the 

confines of all applicable standards. The FACP software shall include silence 

inhibit and auto-silence timers. 

3. System Reset Switch: Activation of the System Reset Switch shall cause all 

electronically-latched initiating devices, appliances or software zones, as well as 

all associated output devices and circuits, to return to their normal condition. 

Holding the RESET switch shall perform a Lamp Test function. 

4. Drill (Evacuate) Switch: Press and hold of the Drill Switch shall activate all 

Indicating Appliance circuits. The Drill function shall latch until press of Signal 

Silence or Reset. 

2.4 SYSTEM COMPONENTS 

A. Electronic Chimes: 

1. Electronic chimes shall operate on 24 VDC nominal. 

2. Electronic chimes shall have field-selectable choice of single-stroke or vibrating 

operation, with sound level adjustable to 83 dBA at 10 feet and chime tone 

adjustable from 800 to 1200 Hz. 

3. Shall be flush or surface mounted as shown on plans. 

4. Shall be placed 80 inches (2,030 mm) above the highest floor level within the 

space, or 6 inches (152 mm) below the ceiling, whichever is lower. 

B. Strobe Lights: 

1. Shall operate on 24 VDC nominal. 

2. Shall meet the requirements of the ADA as defined in UL standard 1971 and shall 

meet the following criteria: 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

a. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, the intensity shall be a minimum 

of 117 candela. 

b. The flash rate shall be a minimum of one flash per second at 24 VDC. 

c. The appliance shall be placed 80 inches (2,030 mm) above the highest floor 

level within the space, or 6 inches (152 mm) below the ceiling, whichever is 

lower. 

d. The strobes shall be for vertical sidewall mounting only with the clear lens 

window at the lower part of the lens lettering properly reading vertically. 

C. Electronic Chime/Strobe Combination Devices: 

1. Shall meet the requirements of individual units listed above. 

D. Addressable Manual Stations: 

1. Addressable Manual Stations shall be provided to connect to the Fire Alarm 

Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) Loops. Up to 99 addressable manual 

stations may be connected to one SLC loop. 

2. The Manual Station shall, on command from the Control Panel, send data to the 

panel representing the state of the manual switch. Manual Fire Alarm Stations 

shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual 

Emergency Operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of 

a key. 

3. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation that 

cannot be reset without the use of a key. 

4. Manual Stations shall be constructed of painted die-cast metal, with clearly 

visible operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear 

on the front of the stations in raised letters. Model RS-IT-KL. 

5. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting, or semi-flush mounting as shown 

on the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches, or more than 48 inches 

above the finished floor. 

6. The Manual Station shall be addressable. 

E. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: 

1. Smoke detectors shall be intelligent and addressable devices, and shall connect 

with two wires to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit 

loops. Up to 99 intelligent detectors may connect to one SLC loop. 

2. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure 

smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the 

panel representing the analog level of smoke density. 

3. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a twist-lock base. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

4. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm 

condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be 

initiated at the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated 

remotely on command from the control panel. 

5. The detector shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using 

decimal switches. Because of the possibility of installation error, systems that use 

binary jumpers on dip-switches to set the detector address are not acceptable. The 

detectors shall also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall 

use to identify the type of detector. 

6. The detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LED’s. Both LED’s shall flash 

under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular 

communication with the control panel. Both LED’s may be placed into steady 

illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been 

detected. If required, the flashing mode operation of the detector LED’s shall be 

controlled through the system field program. An output connection shall also be 

provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED. 

7. The detector sensitivity shall be set through the Fire Alarm Control Panel, and 

shall be adjustable in the field through the field programming of the system. 

Sensitivity may be automatically adjusted by the panel on a time-of-day basis. 

8. using software in the FACP, the detectors shall automatically compensate for dust 

accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their 

performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated 

sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72E. 

9. Install detectors where shown or noted on drawings. 

F. Intelligent Ionization Type Smoke Detectors: 

1. Smoke Detectors shall be Intelligent and Addressable, and shall connect with two 

wires to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuits. Up to 99 

intelligent detectors may connect to one SLC loop. 

2. The detectors shall use the dual-chamber ionization principal to measure products 

of combustion and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the 

panel representing the analog level of products of combustion. 




initiated at the detector itself, by activating a magnetic switch, or may be 

activated remotely on command from the control panel. 

5. The detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using 

decimal switches. Because of the possibility of installation error, systems that use 

binary jumpers or dip-switches to set the address are not acceptable. They shall 

also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify 

the type of detector. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 


under normal conditions. In certain applications, LED’s may be selected to be 

polled without flashing through system programming. Both LED’s may be placed 

into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition 

has been detected. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to 

connect an external remote alarm LED. 

7. The detector sensitivity shall be set through the Fire Alarm Control Panel, and 

shall be adjustable in the field through the field programming of the system. 

Sensitivity may be automatically adjusted to the panel on a time-of-day basis. 

8. using software in the FACP, the detectors shall automatically compensate for dust 

accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their 

performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated 

sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72E. 


G. Intelligent Heat Detectors: 

1. Heat Detectors shall be Intelligent and Addressable devices, and shall connect 

with two wires to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuits. Up 

to 99 intelligent heat detectors may connect to one SLC loop. 

2. The detectors shall use an electronic sensor to measure thermal conditions caused 

by a fire and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel 

representing the analog level of such thermal measurements. 




initiated at the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated 

remotely on command from the control panel. 

5. The detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using a 

decimal switch. Because of the possibility of installation error, systems that use 

binary jumpers or dip-switches to set the address are not acceptable. 


under normal conditions. In certain applications, LED’s may be selected to be 

polled without flashing through system programming. Both LED’s may be placed 

into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition 

has been detected. 

7. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external 

remote alarm LED. 


H. Intelligent In-duct Smoke Detector Housing: 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

1. In-Duct Smoke Detector Housing shall accommodate either an intelligent 

Ionization sensor or a Intelligent Photoelectric Sensor, either of that provides 

continuous analog monitoring and alarm verification from the panel. 

2. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the FACP, and 

appropriate action taken to change over air handling systems to help prevent the 

rapid distribution of isolation of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas 

served by the duct system. 

I. Monitor Module: 

1. Addressable Monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC 

zone of conventional Alarm Initiating Devices (any NO dry contact device) to one 

of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) Loops. 

2. The Monitor Module shall mount in a 4-inch square, 2-1/8" deep electrical box. 

3. The IDC zone may be wired for Style D or Style B operation. The Monitor 

Module shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches and shall also 

store an internal identifying code that the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) shall 

use to identify the type of device. Modules that use binary jumpers or dipswitches 

are subject to installation errors and are not acceptable. A LED shall be 

provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Monitor 

Module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. 

4. For difficult to reach areas, the Monitor Module shall be available in a miniature 

package and shall be no larger than 2-3/4" x 1-¼" x ½". This version need not 

include Type D or a LED. 

J. Control Module: 

1. Addressable Control Modules shall be provided to supervise and control the 

operation of one conventional Indicating Appliance Circuit (IAC) of compatible, 

24 VDC powered, polarized Audio/Visual Indicating Appliances. For fan 

shutdown and other auxiliary control functions, the control module may be set to 

operate as a dry contact relay. 

2. The Control Module shall mount in a standard 4-inch square, 2-1/8" deep 

electrical box, or to a surface mounted backbox, or directly in the Fire Alarm 

Control Panel. 

3. The IAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y IAC (Up to 1 Amp of Inductive 

A/V Signal, or 2 Amps of Resistive A/V Signal) operation, or as a Dry Contact 

(Form C) Relay. the relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring 

connection requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay or IACs 

may be energized at the same time on the same pair of wires. 

4. Audio/Visual Power shall be provided by a separate supervised Power Loop from 

the main Fire Alarm Control Panel or from a supervised, UL listed Remote Power 

Supply. 

5. The Control Module shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches 

and shall also store an internal identifying code that the Control Panel shall use to 

identify the type of device. Modules that use binary jumpers or dip-switches are 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

subject to installation errors and are not acceptable. A LED shall be provided that 

shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Control Module is 

operational and is in regular communication with the Control Panel. 

6. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test the module without opening or 

shortening it's IAC wiring. 

K. Isolator Module: 

1. Isolator Modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short 

circuits on an SLC loop. The isolator Module shall limit the number of modules 

or detectors that may be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC 

Loop. At least one isolator module shall be provided for each floor or protected 

zone of the building. 

2. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the Isolator Module shall automatically opencircuit 

(disconnect) the SLC loop. When the short circuit condition is corrected, 

the Isolator Module shall automatically reconnect the isolated section of the SLC 

loop. 

3. The Isolator Module shall not require any address-setting, and its operations shall 

be totally automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an Isolator 

Module after it's normal operation. 

4. The Isolator Module shall mount in a standard 4-inch deep electrical box, in a 

surface mounted backbox, or in the Fire Alarm Control Panel. It shall provide a 

single LED that shall flash to indicate that the Isolator is operational and shall 

illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected and 

isolated. 

L. Water Flow Switches: 

1. Flow switches shall be integral, mechanical, non-coded, non-accumulative retard 

type. 

2. Flow switches shall have an alarm transmission delay time that is conveniently 

adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds. Initial settings shall be 30-45 seconds. 

3. Flow switches shall be located a minimum of one (1) foot from a fitting that 

changes the direction of the flow and a minimum of three (3) feet from a valve. 

4. Flow switches shall be provided and connected under this section and installed by 

mechanical contractor. 

M. Sprinkler and Standpipe Valve Supervisory Switches: 

1. Each sprinkler system water supply control valve riser or zone control valve, and 

each standpipe system riser control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory 

switch. Standpipe hose valves, and test and drain valves shall not be equipped 

with supervisory switches. 

2. Each Post Indicator Valve (PIV) or main gate valve shall be equipped with a 

supervisory switch. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

3. Mount switch so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve and 

adjust to operate within two revolutions toward the closed position of the valve 

control, or when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth of the distance from 

its normal position. 

4. The mechanism shall be contained in a weatherproof aluminum housing, that 

shall provide a 3/4 inch tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary 

facilities for attachment to the valves. 

5. Switch housing to be finished in red baked enamel. 

6. The entire installed assembly shall be tamper proof and arranged to cause a 

switch operation if the housing cover is removed, or if the unit is removed from 

its mounting. 

7. Valve supervisory switches shall be provided and connected under this section 

and installed by mechanical contractor. 

N. LCD Alphanumeric Display Annunciator: 

2.5 BATTERIES 

1. The Alphanumeric Display Annunciator shall be a supervised, local or remotely 

located back-lit LCD display containing a minimum of eighty (80) characters for 

alarm annunciation in clear English text. 

2. The LCD Annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble conditions in the 

system. 

3. The Annunciator shall connect to an EIA 485 interface. 

4. Up to 4 LCD annunciators may be connected to the interface, each with 

Acknowledge, Silence and Reset controls for the FACP. 

A. Shall be 12 volt, Gel-Cell type (two required). 

B. Battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than 

twenty-four hours plus 5 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure. 

C. The batteries are to be completely maintenance-free. No liquids are required. Fluid 

level checks refilling, spills and leakage shall not be required. 



A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes, as 

shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. 

B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in 

finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be 

installed prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is on-going 

during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from 

contamination and physical damage. 


G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 

C. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators 

shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted 

when located in unfinished areas. 

3.2 TEST: Provide the service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician 

authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and 

participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. 

1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for 

short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation. 

2. Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the 

FACP. 

3. Verify activation of all flow switches. 

4. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 

5. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. 

6. Open and short indicating appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates. 

7. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals. 

8. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices. 

9. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using 

the Walk Test. 

10. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be 

introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the 

signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points. 

11. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual 

should be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to 

address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or 

grounded devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar. 

3.3 FINAL INSPECTION: At the final inspection, a factory trained representative of the 

manufacturer of the major equipment shall demonstrate that the systems function properly 

in every respect. 

3.4 INSTRUCTION 

A. Provide instruction as required for operating the system. "Hands-on" demonstrations 

of the operation of all system components and the entire system including program 

changes and functions shall be provided. 

B. The Contractor and/or the Systems Manufacturer's representatives shall provide a 

typewritten "Sequence of Operation" to the Owner. 



G.A.H.P 

Plaza Feliz 



SECTION 116800 - PLAY FIELD EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES 





1.2 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes freestanding and composite structure playground equipment. 


1. Division 32 Section "Playground Protective Surfacing" for protective surfacing under and 

around playground equipment. 


A. Fall Height: According to ASTM F 1487, "the vertical distance between a designated play 

surface and the protective surfacing beneath it." 

B. HDPE: High-density polyethylene. 

C. IPEMA: International Play Equipment Manufacturers Association. 

D. LLDPE: Linear low-density polyethylene. 

E. MDPE: Medium-density polyethylene. 

F. Use Zone: According to ASTM F 1487, the "area beneath and immediately adjacent to a play 

structure or equipment that is designated for unrestricted circulation around the equipment and 

on whose surface it is predicted that a user would land when falling from or exiting the 

equipment." 



B. Shop Drawings: For playground equipment and structures. Include plans, elevations, sections, 

details, and attachments to other work. 

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of playground equipment and structure indicated. 

1. Manufacturer's color charts. 

PLAY FIELD EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES 116800 - 1


2. Include similar Samples of playground equipment and accessories involving color 

selection. 

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size 


1. Posts and Rails: Not less than 6 inches long. 

2. Platforms: Not less than 6 inches square. 

3. Molded Plastic: Not less than 3 inches square. 


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and 

coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 

1. Extent of surface systems and use zones for equipment. 

2. Critical heights for playground surfaces and fall heights for equipment. 

B. Product Certificates: For each type of playground equipment, from manufacturer. 

C. Material Certificates: For the following items, signed by manufacturers: 

1. Shop finishes. 

2. Wood-Preservative Treatment: Include certification by treating plant that states type of 

preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and 

compliance with applicable standards. 

3. Recycled plastic. 


testing agency, for each type of playground equipment. 


F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 


A. Maintenance Data: For playground equipment and finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm whose playground equipment components have been 

certified by IPEMA's third-party product certification service. 

1. Provide playground equipment and play structure components bearing the IPEMA 

Certification Seal. 

B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers approved by manufacturer. 



C. Safety Standards: Provide playground equipment complying with or exceeding requirements in 

ASTM F 1487. 

1.8 WARRANTY 


replace components of playground equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within 



a. Structural failures. 

b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal 

weathering. 

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.1 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish 

indicated. 

1. Extruded Bars, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 

2. Cast Aluminum: ASTM B 179. 

3. Flat Sheet: ASTM B 209. 

B. Steel: Comply with the following: 

1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 135/A 135M standard-weight. 

3. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 513, cold formed. 

4. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 

5. Perforated Metal: Steel sheet not less than 0.075-inch uncoated thickness; manufacturer's 

standard perforation pattern. 

6. Expanded Metal: Manufacturer's standard carbon-steel sheets complying with 

ASTM F 1267, Type II (expanded and flattened); deburred after expansion. 

7. Woven Wire Mesh: Manufacturer's standard, with wire complying with ASTM A 510. 

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666; Type 304; finished on exposed 

faces with No. 2B finish. 

D. Opaque Plastic: Color impregnated, UV stabilized, and mold resistant. 

1. Polyethylene: Fabricated from virgin plastic resin; rotationally molded HDPE, LLDPE, 

or MDPE with not less than 1/4-inch wall thickness. 



E. Transparent Plastic: Abrasion-resistant, UV-stabilized monolithic polycarbonate sheet; clear, 

colorless; not less than 3/16 inch thick. 

F. Chain and Fittings: ASTM A 467/A 467M, Class CS, 4/0 or 5/0, welded-straight-link coil 

chain; hot-dip galvanized. With commercial-quality, hot-dip galvanized steel connectors and 

swing or ring hangers. 

G. Castings and Hangers: Malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510, hot-dip galvanized. 

H. Post Caps: Cast aluminum or color-impregnated, UV-stabilized, mold-resistant polyethylene or 

polypropylene; color to match posts. 

I. Platform Clamps and Hangers: Cast aluminum or zinc-plated steel, not less than 0.105-inchnominal 

thickness. 

J. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard; commercial-quality; corrosion-resistant; hot-dip 

galvanized steel and iron, stainless steel, or aluminum; of a secure and vandal-resistant design. 

K. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard; corrosion-resistant; hot-dip galvanized or plated steel and 

iron, or stainless steel; permanently capped, and theft resistant. 

2.2 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT FABRICATION 

A. General: Provide sizes, strengths, thicknesses, wall thickness, and weights of components as 

indicated but not less than required to comply with structural performance and other 

requirements in ASTM F 1487. Factory drill components for field assembly. Unnecessary 

holes in components, not required for field assembly, are not permitted. Provide complete play 

structure, including supporting members and connections, means of access and egress, 

designated play surfaces, barriers, guardrails, handrails, handholds, and other components 

indicated or required to comply with referenced standards for equipment indicated. 

1. Composite Play Structure: Provide complete play structure, designed to be modular, 

linked, and expandable, forming one integral unit for more than one play activity. 

B. Metal Frame: Fabricate main-frame upright support posts from metal pipe or tubing with crosssection 

profile and dimensions as indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide each pipe or 

tubing main-frame member with manufacturer's standard drainable bottom plate or support 

flange. Fabricate secondary frame members, bracing, and connections from either steel or 

aluminum. 

C. Composite Frame: Fabricate main-frame upright support posts from metal and plastic with 

profile and dimensions as indicated. Fabricate secondary frame members, bracing, and 

connections from either steel or aluminum. 

D. Play Surfaces: Provide manufacturer's standard elevated drainable decks, platforms, landings, 

walkways, ramps, and similar transitional play surfaces, designed to withstand loads; fabricated 

from perforated or expanded metal made into floor units with slip-resistant foot surfaces. 

Fabricate units in manufacturer's standard modular sizes and shapes to form assembled play 

surfaces indicated. 



1. Elevated Play Surfaces: Provide protective devices, completely surrounding play surface 

except for access openings, if play-surface heights above protective surfacing exceed 

requirements in ASTM F 1487. 

2. Stepped Play Surfaces: Provide protective infill between stepped platforms. 

E. Protective Barriers: Fabricated such that openings within the barrier and between the barrier 

and the play surface preclude passage of the torso probe according to ASTM F 1487. Provide 

barriers designed to minimize the possibility of climbing, free of hand- and footholds, and 

configured to completely surround the protected area except for access openings. Extend 

barriers above the protected elevated surface for use by age group indicated. Fabricate from the 

following: 

1. Welded metal pipe or tubing with vertical bars. 

2. Steel sheet with openings for vision and ventilation. 

3. Metal-pipe or -tubing frame with wire mesh infill panels. 

4. Opaque plastic panels. 

F. Guardrails: Provide guardrails configured to completely surround the protected area except for 

access openings. Fabricate from welded metal pipe or tubing. Extend guardrails to comply 

with requirements for use by age group indicated. 

G. Handrails: Welded metal pipe or tubing, OD between 0.095 to 1.55 inches. 

1. Provide handrails at heights to comply with requirements for use by age group indicated 

according to ASTM F 1487. 

H. Roofs and Canopies: Manufacturer's standard, designed to be positioned overhead and to 

discourage and minimize climbing by users. 

1. Fabricated from metal or opaque plastic. 

I. Signs: Manufacturer's standard sign panels, fabricated from opaque plastic with graphics 

molded in, attached to upright support posts. 

2.3 FREESTANDING PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES 

A. Rocking/Springing Equipment Rocking rider. 




2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Playworld 

System #ZZXX0567 “Bumble Bee” and #ZZXX0565 “Lady Bug” or a comparable 

product by one of the following: 

a. American Swing Products Inc. 

b. BCI Burke Company, LLC. 

c. Big Toys, Inc. 

d. Blue Imp. 

e. Columbia Cascade Company. 



f. GameTime; a PlayCore company. 

g. Henderson Recreation Equipment Ltd. 

h. Kidstuff Playsystems, Inc. 

i. Kompan, Inc. 

j. Krauss Craft, Inc. 

k. Landscape Structures Inc. 

l. L. A. Steelcraft Products, Inc. 

m. Little Tikes Commercial, Inc; Playpower LT Farmington, Inc. 

n. Miracle Recreation Equipment Co.; a division of PlayPower, Inc. 

o. Play & Park Structures; a PlayCore company. 

p. Playland International, LLC; a division of Superior International Industries, Inc. 

q. Playworld Systems, Inc. 

r. PlayTown; a division of SportsPlay Equipment Inc. 

s. Recreation Creations, Inc. 

3. Seat(s): Molded HDPE or other plastic. 

a. Seat Style: Animal. 

b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

4. Frame: Galvanized-steel pipe or tubing and one coil spring(s); two or more steel springs 

with steel base plate. 

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

5. Capacity: Single user(s). 

6. Age Appropriateness: Two through five years. 

2.4 COMPOSITE PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES 

A. Composite Structure: Assembled from manufacturer's standard modular-sized units. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Landscape 

Structures “Playsense” Design 301 and 302. or a comparable product by one of the 

following: 

a. BCI Burke Company, LLC. 

b. Big Toys, Inc. 

c. Blue Imp. 

d. Columbia Cascade Company. 

e. GameTime; a PlayCore company. 

f. Henderson Recreation Equipment Ltd. 

g. Kidstuff Playsystems, Inc. 

h. Kompan, Inc. 

i. Krauss Craft, Inc. 

j. Landscape Structures Inc. 

k. Little Tikes Commercial, Inc; Playpower LT Farmington, Inc. 

l. Miracle Recreation Equipment Co.; a division of PlayPower, Inc. 

m. Play & Park Structures; a PlayCore company. 

n. Playland International, LLC; a division of Superior International Industries, Inc. 

o. Playworld Systems, Inc. 



p. PlayTown; a division of SportsPlay Equipment Inc. 

q. Recreation Creations, Inc. 

2. Frame: Galvanized-steel pipe or tubing frame sections connected with bolts clamps. 

a. Main Frame Posts: Not less than 4-inch OD. 

b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 

3. Platforms: Manufacturer's standard. 


4. Roofs: Manufacturer's standard. 


5. Play Structure Access Component(s): Ladder Stairs. 

a. Handholds: Handrails. 

6. Arrangement: Manufacturer's standard. 

7. Age Appropriateness: 5 through 12 years. 

2.5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 

A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in- 

Place Concrete" to produce normal-weight, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive 

strength of 3000 psi, 3-inch slump, and 1-inch- maximum-size aggregate. 

B. Concrete Materials and Properties: Dry-packaged concrete mix complying with 

ASTM C 387/C 387M and mixed at site with potable water, according to manufacturer's written 

instructions, to produce normal-weight concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength 

of 3000 psi, 3-inch slump, and 1-inch- maximum-size aggregate. 


A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: A minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium 

gloss. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion 

coating, and applying and baking finish. 

B. PVC Finish: Manufacturer's standard, UV-stabilized, mold-resistant, slip-resistant, mattetextured, 

dipped or sprayed-on, PVC-plastisol finish, with flame retardant added, complying 

with coating manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, and minimum dry 

film thickness of 80 mils. 



2.7 IRON AND STEEL FINISHES 

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanized products made from rolled-, pressed-, and forged-steel shapes, 

castings, plates, bars, and strips indicated to be galvanized to comply with 

ASTM A 123/A 123M. 

1. Hot-dip galvanized steel and iron hardware indicated to be galvanized to comply with 

ASTM A 153/A 153M. 

2. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized, complying with 

ASTM A 653/A 653M for not less than G60 coating designation; mill phosphatized. 

B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply 

manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting 

topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to 

achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. 

C. PVC Finish: Manufacturer's standard, UV-stabilized, mold-resistant, slip-resistant, mattetextured, 

dipped or sprayed-on, PVC-plastisol finish, with flame retardant added, complying 

with coating manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, and minimum dry 

film thickness of 80 mils. 

2.8 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES 

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. 

B. Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B. 



A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site 

clearing, earthwork, site surface and subgrade drainage, and other conditions affecting 


1. Do not begin installation before final grading required for placing protective surfacing is 

completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect. 



A. Verify locations of playground perimeter and pathways. Verify that playground layout and 

equipment locations comply with requirements for each type and component of equipment. 




A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent 

requirements are indicated. Anchor playground equipment securely, positioned at locations and 

elevations indicated. 

1. Maximum Equipment Height: Coordinate installed heights of equipment and 

components with finished elevations of protective surfacing. Set equipment so fall 

heights and elevation requirements for age group use and accessibility are within required 

limits. Verify that playground equipment elevations comply with requirements for each 

type and component of equipment. 

B. Post and Footing Excavation: Excavate holes for posts and footings as indicated in firm, 

undisturbed or compacted subgrade soil. 

C. Post Set on Subgrade: Level bearing surfaces with drainage fill to required elevation. 

D. Post Set with Concrete Footing: Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, 

transporting, forming, and placing concrete. 

1. Set equipment posts in concrete footing. Protect portion of posts above footing from 

concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set plumb or at the correct angle, alignment, 

height, and spacing. 

a. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Hold posts in 

position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently 

cured. 

2. Embedded Items: Use setting drawings and manufacturer's written instructions to ensure 

correct installation of anchorages for equipment. 

3. Concrete Footings: Smooth top, and shape to shed water. 


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. 

B. Perform tests and inspections. 

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to 

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and 

to assist in testing. 

C. Tests and Inspections: For playground and playground equipment and components during 

installation and at final completion and to certify compliance with ASTM F 1487. 


E. Notify Architect 48 hours in advance of date and time of final inspection.

Project Manual - Pavilion Construction

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?